n4008515r35411313775-spec

n4008515r35411313775-spec
eProjects WO#: 1313775
eProjects WO#: 1313772
I564 CEP113 and CEP10
DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
And
I564 CEP TANK FIRE SYSTEM RELOCATION
At the
NAVAL STATION NORFOLK
DESIGNED BY:
NAVFAC MID-ATLANTIC; PWD NORFOLK
FACILITIES ENGINEERING & ACQUISITION DIVISION
9742 MARYLAND AVENUE
NORFOLK, VIRGINIA 23511-3095
PROJECT PREPARED BY:
Civil: Zachary Pace, P.E.
Fire Protection: Matt Lauver, P.E.
Electrical: Frances Peppers, P.E.
Date: May 5, 2015
SPECIFICATION APPROVED BY:
Lead Discipline Branch Manager:
Project Mgmt & Engineering Director:
For Commander, NAVFAC MID-ATLANTIC:
Date:
James W Nelms, P.E.
Jerry T. Haste, P.E.
[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK]
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
11
14
20
30
32
33
35
42
45
50
57
57
74
78
78
00
00
00.00
00
16.00
00
26
00
00.10
00
19.00
19.01
19
00
23
20
20
20
20
20
SUMMARY OF WORK
WORK RESTRICTIONS
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
QUALITY CONTROL FOR MINOR CONSTRUCTION
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
SUPPLEMENTAL TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 84 16
HANDLING OF LIGHTING BALLASTS AND LAMPS CONTAINING PCBs
AND MERCURY
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 93 00
SITE FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 21.00 20
FOAM FIRE EXTINGUISHING FOR FUEL TANK PROTECTION
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26
26
26
26
00
08
20
56
00.00 20
00
00
00
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 20 00.00 20
ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS (ESS), COMMERCIAL
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 23 00.00 20
EXCAVATION AND FILL
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32
32
32
32
32
11
12
16
17
31
23
17
13
23.00 20
13.53
AGGREGATE AND/OR GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
HOT MIX BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
HIGH-SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33
33
33
33
33
11
30
40
71
71
00
00
00
01
02
WATER DISTRIBUTION
SANITARY SEWERS
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
-- End of Project Table of Contents --
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
08/11
PART 1
1.1
1.1.1
GENERAL
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Project Description
The work includes demoltion of existing asphalt, curb and gutter, sidewalk,
fencing and gates, lighting, monitoring wells, vegetation, hazardous
material and other site features as indicated on drawings. New work to
include providing driveway access to Buildings CEP-113 and CEP-10 with new
fencing and gates and modifications to the fire suppression system. Other
new work includes pavements, curb and gutter, lighting, striping and
signage, pedestrian access, storm water management, landscaping, and
incidental related work.
1.1.2
Location
The work shall be located at the Naval Station, Norfolk, Virginia,
approximately as indicated. The exact location will be shown by the
Contracting Officer.
1.2
PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL GOALS
Contractor shall distribute copies of the Environmental Goals to each
subcontractor and the Contracting Officer. The overall goal for design,
construction, and operation is to produce a building that meets the
functional program needs and incorporates the principles of
sustainability. Specifically:
a.
Preserve and restore the site ecosystem and biodiversity; avoid site
degradation and erosion. Minimize offsite environmental impact.
b.
Use the minimum amount of energy, water, and materials feasible to meet
the design intent. Select energy and water efficient equipment and
strategies.
c.
Use environmentally preferable products and decrease toxicity level of
materials used.
d.
Use renewable energy and material resources.
e.
Optimize operational performance (through commissioning efforts) in
order to ensure energy efficient equipment operates as intended.
Consider the durability, maintainability, and flexibility of building
systems.
f.
Manage construction site and storage of materials to ensure no negative
impact on the indoor environmental quality of the building.
g.
Reduce construction waste through reuse, recycling, and supplier
take-back.
SECTION 01 11 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.3
1313775
OCCUPANCY OF PREMISES
Building(s) will be occupied during performance of work under this
Contract.
Before work is started, the Contractor shall arrange with the Contracting
Officer a sequence of procedure, means of access, space for storage of
materials and equipment, and use of approaches, corridors, and stairways.
1.4
EXISTING WORK
In addition to "FAR 52.236-9, Protection of Existing Vegetation,
Structures, Equipment, Utilities, and Improvements":
1.5
a.
Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent
injury or damage to any portions of the existing work which remain.
b.
Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been
altered during construction operations to match existing or
adjoining work, as approved by the Contracting Officer. At the
completion of operations, existing work shall be in a condition
equal to or better than that which existed before new work started.
LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
Obtain digging permits prior to start of excavation by contacting the
Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance. Scan the construction
site with electromagnetic or sonic equipment, and mark the surface of the
ground where existing underground utilities are discovered. Verify the
elevations of existing piping, utilities,and any type of underground or
encased obstruction not indicated to be specified or removed but indicated
or discovered during scanning in locations to be traversed by piping,
ducts, and other work to be conducted or installed.
1.5.1
Notification Prior to Excavation
Notify the Contracting Officer at least 15 days prior to starting
excavation work. Contact Miss Utility 48 hours prior to excavating.
Contractor is responsible for marking all utilities not marked by Miss
Utility.
1.6
1.6.1
Navy and Marine Corps (NMCI) Coordination Requirements
NMCI Contractor Access
The NMCI Contractor must be allowed access to the facility towards
the end of construction (finishes 90 percent complete,
rough-in 100 percent complete, Inside Plant (ISP)/Outside
Plant (OSP) infrastructure in place) to provide equipment in
the telecommunications rooms and make final connections.
Coordinate efforts with the NMCI contractor to facilitate
joint use of building spaces during the final phases of
construction. After the Contracting Officer has facilitated
coordination meetings between the two contractors, the
construction contractor must, within one week, incorporate
the effort of additional contractor coordination into
construction schedule to demonstrate plan for maintaining
the contract duration.
SECTION 01 11 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.7
1313775
SALVAGE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
Items designated by the Contracting Officer to be salvaged shall remain the
property of the Government.
The salvaged property shall be segregated, itemized, delivered, and
off-loaded at the Government designated storage area located within Naval
Station Norfolk.
Contractor shall maintain property control records for material or
equipment designated as salvage. Contractor's system of property control
may be used if approved by the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall be
responsible for storage and protection of salvaged materials and equipment
until disposition by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not used.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 11 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 14 00
WORK RESTRICTIONS
11/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
List of Contact Personnel; G
Personnel List; G
Vehicle List; G
Statement of Acknowledgement Form SF 1413; G
1.2
SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS
a.
Have materials, equipment, and personnel required to perform the work
at the site prior to the commencement of the work.
b.
Building CEP-113, CEP-10, and adjacent tanks (CEP-1, 2, 3, 11) will
remain in operation during the entire construction period. The
Contractor must conduct his operations so as to cause the least
possible interference with normal operations of the activity.
c.
Permission to interrupt any Activity roads, railroads, and/or utility
service must be requested in writing a minimum of 15 calendar days
prior to the desired date of interruption.
d.
The work under this contract requires special attention to the
scheduling and conduct of the work in connection with existing
operations. Identify on the construction schedule each factor which
constitutes a potential interruption to operations.
1.3
1.3.1
CONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISES
Activity Regulations
Ensure that Contractor personnel employed on the Activity become familiar
with and obey Activity regulations including safety, fire, traffic and
security regulations. Keep within the limits of the work and avenues of
ingress and egress. Ingress and egress of Contractor vehicles at the
Activity is limited to Gate 5. To minimize traffic congestion, delivery of
materials must be outside of peak traffic hours (6:30 to 8:00 a.m. and 3:30
to 5:00 p.m.) unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer. Wear
hard hats in designated areas. Do not enter any restricted areas unless
required to do so and until cleared for such entry. Mark Contractor
equipment for identification.
SECTION 01 14 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.3.1.1
1313775
Subcontractors and Personnel Contacts
Provide a list of contact personnel of the Contractor and subcontractors
including addresses and telephone numbers for use in the event of an
emergency. As changes occur and additional information becomes available,
correct and change the information contained in previous lists.
1.3.1.2
Identification Badges and Installation Access
Application for and use of badges will be as directed. Obtain access to
the installation by participating in the Navy Commercial Access Control
System (NCACS), or by obtaining passes each day from the Base Pass and
Identification Office. Costs for obtaining passes through the NCACS are
the responsibility of the Contractor. One-day passes, issued through the
Base Pass and Identification Office, will be furnished without charge.
Furnish a completed EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY VERIFICATION (DHS FORM I-9) form
for all personnel requesting badges. This form is available at
http://www.uscis.gov/portal/site/uscis by searching or selecting Employment
Verification (Form I-9) . Immediately report instances of lost or stolen
badges to the Contracting Officer.
a.
NCACS Program: NCACS is a voluntary program in which Contractor
personnel who enroll, and are approved, are subsequently granted access
to the installation for a period up to one year, or the length of the
contract, whichever is less, and are not required to obtain a new pass
from the Base Pass and Identification Office for each visit. The
Government performs background screening and credentialing. Throughout
the year the Contractor employee must continue to meet background
screening standards. Periodic background screenings are conducted to
verify continued NCACS participation and installation access
privileges. Under the NCACS program, no commercial vehicle inspection
is required, other than for Random Anti-Terrorism Measures (RAM) or in
the case of an elevation of Force Protection Conditions (FPCON).
Information on costs and requirements to participate and enroll in
NCACS is available at http://www.rapidgate.com or by calling
1-877-727-4342. Contractors should be aware that the costs incurred to
obtain NCACS credentials, or costs related to any means of access to a
Navy Installation, are not reimbursable. Any time invested, or
price(s) paid, for obtaining NCACS credentials will not be compensated
in any way or approved as a direct cost of any contract with the
Department of the Navy.
Delivery companies submitting NCACS applications must only be granted
access if the prime Contractor has included the company on a
participant’s spreadsheet provided in advance to the Contracting
Officer. This form must be provided by the Government upon request.
b.
One-Day Passes: Participation in the NCACS is not mandatory, and if
the Contractor chooses to not participate, the Contractor's personnel
will have to obtain daily passes, be subject to daily mandatory vehicle
inspection, and will have limited access to the installation. The
Government will not be responsible for any cost or lost time associated
with obtaining daily passes or added vehicle inspections incurred by
non-participants in the NCACS.
1.3.1.3
Personnel Entry Approval
Failure to obtain entry approval will not affect the contract price or time
of completion.
SECTION 01 14 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.3.1.4
1313775
No Smoking Policy
Smoking is prohibited within and outside of all buildings on installations
under the cognizance of NAVFAC except in designated smoking areas. This
applies to existing buildings, buildings under construction and buildings
under renovation. Discarding tobacco materials other than into designated
tobacco receptacles is considered littering and is subject to fines. The
Contracting Officer will identify designated smoking areas.
1.3.2
Working Hours
Regular working hours must consist of an 8 1/2 hour period
Friday, excluding Government holidays.
1.3.3
Monday through
Work Outside Regular Hours
Work outside regular working hours requires Contracting Officer approval.
Make application 15 calendar days prior to such work to allow arrangements
to be made by the Government for inspecting the work in progress, giving
the specific dates, hours, location, type of work to be performed, contract
number and project title. Based on the justification provided, the
Contracting Officer may approve work outside regular hours. During periods
of darkness, the different parts of the work must be lighted in a manner
approved by the Contracting Officer. Make utility cutovers after normal
working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, and Government holidays unless
directed otherwise.
1.3.4
Occupied and Existing Buildings
The Contractor shall be working around existing buildings which are
occupied. Do not enter the buildings without prior approval of the
Contracting Officer.
The existing buildings and their contents must be kept secure at all
times. Provide temporary closures as required to maintain security as
directed by the Contracting Officer.
1.3.5
Utility Cutovers and Interruptions
a.
Make utility cutovers and interruptions after normal working hours or
on Saturdays, Sundays, and Government holidays. Conform to procedures
required in the paragraph "Work Outside Regular Hours."
b.
Ensure that new utility lines are complete, except for the connection,
before interrupting existing service.
c.
Interruption to water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, telephone service,
electric service, air conditioning, heating, fire alarm, compressed
air, and are considered utility cutovers pursuant to the paragraph
entitled "Work Outside Regular Hours."
d.
Operation of Station Utilities: The Contractor must not operate nor
disturb the setting of control devices in the station utilities system,
including water, sewer, electrical, and steam services. The Government
will operate the control devices as required for normal conduct of the
work. The Contractor must notify the Contracting Officer giving
reasonable advance notice when such operation is required.
SECTION 01 14 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.4
1313775
SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1
Naval Base, Norfolk, VA
a.
Contractor registration. Register with the Base Police Truck
Investigation Team, located behind pass and ID Office (Bldg CD-9) on
Hampton Boulevard, Naval Air Station, Norfolk, VA 23511-5000, telephone
number (757) 322-2979.
b.
Storage and office trailer registration. Register storage and office
trailers to be used on base with the truck investigation team.
Trailers must meet State law requirements and must be in good condition.
(1)
(2)
Trailers must be lockable and must be locked when not in use.
Trailers must have a sign in the lower left hand corner of left
door of trailer with the following information: Company name,
address, registration number of trailer or vehicle identification
number, location on base, duration of contract or stay on base,
contract number, local on-base phone number, off-base phone number
of main office, and emergency recall person and phone number.
c.
Equipment markings. Equipment owned or rented by the company must have
the company name painted or stenciled on the equipment in a conspicuous
location. Rented equipment is to be conspicuously marked with a tag
showing who rented the equipment. Register the equipment with the
truck investigation team.
d.
Procedure information. For additional information regarding
registration procedures, contact the Officer in Charge of Construction
at (757) 445-1463 or Base Police at (757) 444-8856.
1.4.2
Passes
Submit request for personnel
Certificate of Insurance for
Statement of Acknowledgement
be normally issued within 21
1.4.2.1
and vehicle passes together. Include the
Contractor and SubContractor(s) and the
Form SF 1413 with the submittal. Passes will
days.
Control
Maintain strict accountability over passes. Immediately report to the
source of issue, passes missing or lost and the circumstances. If the
Contractor has another active contract or one commencing imediately,
employees' names may be transferred from one contract to the other. Final
payment will not be effected until employees are transferred to another
contract or the records are cleared. Furnish a signed letter, countersigned
by the source of the issue, stating that passes have been turned in.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 14 00
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
11/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EP-1110-1-8
1.2
(2009) Construction Equipment Ownership
and Operating Expense Schedule
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Schedule of Prices; G
1.3
1.3.1
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
Data Required
Within 15 calendar days of notice of award, prepare and deliver to the
Contracting Officer a Schedule of Prices (construction contract) as
directed by the Contracting Officer. Provide a detailed breakdown of the
contract price, giving quantities for each of the various kinds of work,
unit prices, and extended prices. Costs shall be summarized and totals
provided for each construction category.
1.3.2
Schedule Instructions
Payments will not be made until the Schedule of Prices has been submitted
to and accepted by the Contracting Officer. Identify the cost for site
work, and include incidental work to the 5 ft line. Identify costs for the
building(s), and include work out to the 5 ft line. Work out to the 5 ft
line shall include construction encompassed within a theoretical line 5 ft
from the face of exterior walls and shall include attendant construction,
such as pad mounted HVAC cooling equipment, cooling towers, and
transformers placed beyond the 5 ft line.
1.4
CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS
In conjunction with the Contract Clause "DFARS 252.236-7000, Modification
Proposals-Price Breakdown," and where actual ownership and operating costs
of construction equipment cannot be determined from Contractor accounting
records, equipment use rates shall be based upon the applicable provisions
of the EP-1110-1-8.
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.5
1.5.1
1313775
CONTRACTOR'S INVOICE AND CONTRACT PERFORMANCE STATEMENT
Content of Invoice
Requests for payment will be processed in accordance with the Contract
Clause FAR 52.232-27, Prompt Payment Construction Contracts
and FAR 52.232-5, Payments Under Fixed-Price Construction Contracts. The
requests for payment shall include the documents listed below.
a. The Contractor's invoice, on NAVFAC Form 7300/30 furnished by the
Government, showing in summary form, the basis for arriving at the
amount of the invoice. Form 7300/30 shall include certification by
Quality Control (QC) Manager as required by the contract.
b. The Estimate for Voucher/ Contract Performance Statement on NAVFAC Form
7300/31 furnished by the Government, showing in detail: the estimated
cost, percentage of completion, and value of completed performance. Use
NAVFAC LANT Form 4-330/110 (New 7/84) on NAVFAC MIDLANT contracts when
a Monthly Estimate for Voucher is required.
c. Updated Project Schedule and reports required by the contract.
d. Contractor Safety Self Evaluation Checklist.
e. Other supporting documents as requested.
f. Updated copy of submittal register.
g. Invoices not completed in accordance with contract requirements will be
returned to the Contractor for correction of the deficiencies.
h. Contractor's Monthly Estimate for Voucher (NAVFAC LANT Form 4-330/110
(New 7/84)) with Subcontractor and supplier payment certification.
i. Affidavit to accompany invoice (NAVFAC LANT NORVA Form 4-4235/4
(Rev.5/81)).
j. Materials on Site.
1.5.2
Submission of Invoices
If NFAS Clause 5252.232-9301 is included in the contract, the documents
listed in paragraph "CONTENT OF INVOICE" shall be provided in their
entirety as attachments in Wide Area Work Flow (WAWF) for each invoice
submitted. The maximum size of each WAWF attachment is two megabytes, but
there are no limits on the number of attachments. If a document cannot be
attached in WAWF due to system or size restriction it shall be provided as
instructed by the Contracting Officer.
Monthly invoices and supporting forms for work performed through the
anniversary award date of the contract shall be submitted to the
Contracting Officer within 5 calendar days of the date of invoice. For
example, contract award date is the 7th of the month, the date of each
monthly invoice shall be the 7th and the invoice shall be submitted by the
12th of the month.1.5.3
Final Invoice
a. A final invoice shall be accompanied by the certification required by
DFARS 252.247.7023 TRANSPORTATION OF SUPPLIES BY SEA, and the
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Contractor's Final Release. If the Contractor is incorporated, the
Final Release shall contain the corporate seal. An officer of the
corporation shall sign and the corporate secretary shall certify the
Final Release.
b. For final invoices being submitted via WAWF, the original Contractor's
Final Release Form and required certification of Transportation of
Supplies by Sea must be provided directly to the respective Contracting
Officer prior to submission of the final invoice. Once receipt of the
original Final Release Form and required certification of
Transportation of Supplies by Sea has been confirmed by the Contracting
Officer, the Contractor shall then submit final invoice and attach a
copy of the Final Release Form and required certification of
Transportation of Supplies by Sea in WAWF.
c. Final invoices not accompanied by the Contractor's Final Release and
required certification of Transportation of Supplies by Sea will be
considered incomplete and will be returned to the Contractor.
1.6
PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR
Payments will be made on submission of itemized requests by the Contractor
which comply with the requirements of this section, and will be subject to
reduction for overpayments or increase for underpayments made on previous
payments to the Contractor.
1.6.1
Obligation of Government Payments
The obligation of the Government to make
provisions of this contract will, at the
Officer, be subject to reductions and/or
FAR and agency regulations including the
32.503-6:
payments required under the
discretion of the Contracting
suspensions permitted under the
following in accordance with "FAR
a.
Reasonable deductions due to defects in material or workmanship;
b.
Claims which the Government may have against the Contractor under or in
connection with this contract;
c.
Unless otherwise adjusted, repayment to the Government upon demand for
overpayments made to the Contractor; and
d.
Failure to provide up to date record drawings not current as stated in
Contract Clause "FAC 5252.236-9310, Record Drawings."
1.6.2
Payment for Onsite and Offsite Materials
Progress payments may be made to the contractor for materials delivered on
the site, for materials stored off construction sites, or materials that
are in transit to the construction sites under the following conditions:
a. FAR 52.232-5(b) Payments Under Fixed Price Construction Contracts.
b. Materials delivered on the site but not installed, including completed
preparatory work, and off-site materials to be considered for progress
payment shall be major high cost, long lead, special order, or
specialty items, not susceptible to deterioration or physical damage in
storage or in transit to the construction site. Examples of materials
acceptable for payment consideration include, but are not limited to,
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
structural steel, non-magnetic steel, non-magnetic aggregate,
equipment, machinery, large pipe and fittings,precast/prestressed
concrete products, plastic lumber (e.g., fender piles/curbs), and
high-voltage electrical cable. Materials not acceptable for payment
include consumable materials such as nails, fasteners, conduits, gypsum
board, glass, insulation, and wall coverings.
c. Materials to be considered for progress payment prior to installation
shall be specifically and separately identified in the Contractor's
estimates of work submitted for the Contracting Officer's approval in
accordance with Schedule of Prices requirement of this contract.
Requests for progress payment consideration for such items shall be
supported by documents establishing their value and that the title
requirements of the clause at FAR 52.232-5 have been met.
d. Materials are adequately insured and protected from theft and exposure.
e. Provide a written consent from the surety company with each payment
request for offsite materials.
f. Materials to be considered for progress payments prior to installation
shall be stored either in Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico, or the Continental
United States. Other locations are subject to written approval by the
Contracting Officer.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 30 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
11/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
View location map; G
Progress and completion pictures; G
1.2
VIEW LOCATION MAP
Submit to the Contracting Officer, prior to or with the first digital
photograph submittals, a sketch or drawing indicating the required
photographic locations. Update as required if the locations are moved.
1.3
PROGRESS AND COMPLETION PICTURES
Photographically document site conditions prior to start of construction
operations. Provide monthly, and within one month of the completion of
work,digital photographs, 1600x1200x24 bit true color inJPEG file format
showing the sequence and progress of work. Take a minimum of 5 digital
photographs each week throughout the entire project from a minimum of ten
views from points located by the Contracting Officer. Submit a view
location sketch indicating points of view. Submit with the monthly invoice
two sets of digital photographs each set on a separate CD-R, cumulative of
all photos to date. Indicate photographs demonstrating environmental
procedures. Photographs for each month shall be in a separate monthly
directory and each file shall be named to indicate its location on the view
location sketch. The view location sketch shall also be provided on the CD
as digital file. All file names shall include a date designator. Cross
reference submittals in the appropriate daily report. Photographs shall be
provided for unrestricted use by the Government.
1.4
MINIMUM INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
Procure and maintain during the entire period of performance under this
contract the following minimum insurance coverage:
a.
Comprehensive general liability:
$500,000 per occurrence
b.
Automobile liability: $200,000 per person, $500,000 per occurrence for
bodily injury, $20,000 per occurrence for property damage
c.
Workmen's compensation as required by Federal and State workers'
compensation and occupational disease laws.
d.
Employer's liability coverage of $100,000, except in States where
SECTION 01 30 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
workers compensation may not be written by private carriers,
e.
1.5
Others as required by State.
SUPERVISION
Have at least one qualified supervisor capable of reading, writing, and
conversing fluently in the English language on the job site during working
hours. In addition, if a Quality Control (QC) representative is required
on the contract, then that individual shall also have fluent English
communication skills.
1.6
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
After award of the contract but prior to commencement of any work at the
site, meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss and develop a mutual
understanding relative to the administration of the value engineering and
safety program, preparation of the schedule of prices or earned value
report, shop drawings, and other submittals, scheduling programming,
prosecution of the work, and clear expectations of the "Interim DD Form
1354" Submittal. Major subcontractors who will engage in the work shall
also attend.
1.7
PARTNERING
To most effectively accomplish this contract, the Government requires the
formation of a cohesive partnership within the Project Team whose members
are from the Government, the Contractor and their Subcontractors. Key
personnel from the Supported Command, the End User (who will occupy the
facility), NAVFAC (Echelon III and IV), the Navy Region/Installation, the
Contractor and Subcontractors, and the Designer of Record will be invited
to participate in the Partnering process. The Partnership will draw on the
strength of each organization in an effort to achieve a project that is
without any safety mishaps, conforms to the Contract, and stays within
budget and on schedule.
The Contracting Officer will provide Information on the Partnering Process
and a list of key and optional personnel who should attend the Partnering
meeting.
1.7.1
Informal Partnering
The Contracting Officer will organize the Partnering Sessions with key
personnel of the project team, including Contractor personnel and
Government personnel.
The Initial Partnering session should be a part of the Pre-Construction
Meeting. Partnering sessions will be held at a location agreed to by the
Contracting Officer and the Contractor (typically a conference room
provided by the PWD FEAD/ROICC office or the Contractor).
The Initial Informal Partnering Session will be conducted and facilitated
using electronic media (a video and accompanying forms) provided by the
Contracting Officer.
The Partners will determine the frequency of the follow-on sessions.
SECTION 01 30 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.8
1313775
AVAILABILITY OF CADD DRAWING FILES
After award and upon request, the electronic "Computer-Aided Drafting and
Design (CADD)" drawing files will only be made available to the Contractor
for use in preparation of construction data related to the referenced
contract subject to the following terms and conditions. Request specific
drawing numbers of files required; the entire set of drawing files will not
be provided.
Data contained on these electronic files shall not be used for any purpose
other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction data for the
referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at the sole risk of
the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the Government.
The Contractor shall make no claim and waives to the fullest extent
permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against the
Government, its agents or sub consultants that may arise out of or in
connection with the use of these electronic files. The Contractor shall,
to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Government
harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable
attorney's fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from the use
of these electronic files.
These electronic CADD drawing files are not construction documents.
Differences may exist between the CADD files and the corresponding
construction documents. The Government makes no representation regarding
the accuracy or completeness of the electronic CADD files, nor does it make
representation to the compatibility of these files with the Contractors
hardware or software. In the event that a conflict arises between the
signed and sealed construction documents prepared by the Government and the
furnished CADD files, the signed and sealed construction documents shall
govern. The Contractor is responsible for determining if any conflict
exists. Use of these CADD files does not relieve the Contractor of duty to
fully comply with the contract documents, including and without limitation,
the need to check, confirm and coordinate the work of all contractors for
the project.
If the Contractor uses, duplicates and/or modifies these electronic CADD
files for use in producing construction drawings and data related to this
contract, all previous indicia of ownership (seals, logos, signatures,
initials and dates) shall be removed.
1.9
ELECTRONIC MAIL (E-MAIL) ADDRESS
The Contractor shall establish and maintain electronic mail (e-mail)
capability along with the capability to open various electronic attachments
in Microsoft, Adobe Acrobat, and other similar formats. Within 10 days
after contract award, the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer
a single (only one) e-mail address for electronic communications from the
Contracting Officer related to this contract including, but not limited to
contract documents, invoice information, request for proposals, and other
correspondence. The Contracting Officer may also use email to notify the
Contractor of base access conditions when emergency conditions warrant,
such as hurricanes, terrorist threats, etc. Multiple email address will
not allowed.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to make timely distribution of all
Contracting Officer initiated e-mail with its own organization including
field office(s). The Contractor shall promptly notify the Contracting
Officer, in writing, of any changes to this email address.
SECTION 01 30 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 30 00
Page 4
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 32 16.00 20
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
11/09
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Construction schedule; G
1.2
ACCEPTANCE
Prior to the start of work, prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer
for acceptance a construction schedule in the form of a Bar Chart in
accordance with the terms in Contract Clause "FAR 52.236-15, Schedules for
Construction Contracts," except as modified in this contract. Acceptance
of an error free Baseline Schedule and updates is a condition precedent to
processing the Contractor's pay request.
1.3
1.3.1
SCHEDULE FORMAT
Bar Chart Schedule
The Bar Chart shall show submittals, government review periods,
material/equipment delivery, utility outages, on-site construction,
inspection, testing, and closeout activities. The Bar Chart shall be time
scaled and generated using an electronic spreadsheet program.
1.4
UPDATED SCHEDULES
Update the Construction schedule at monthly intervals or when the schedule
has been revised. The updated schedule shall be kept current, reflecting
actual activity progress and plan for completing the remaining work. Submit
copies of purchase orders and confirmation of delivery dates as directed.
1.5
3-WEEK LOOK AHEAD SCHEDULE
The Contractor shall prepare and issue a 3-Week Look Ahead schedule to
provide a more detailed day-to-day plan of upcoming work identified on the
Construction Schedule. The work plans shall be keyed to activity numbers
when a NAS is required and updated each week to show the planned work for
the current and following two-week period. Additionally, include upcoming
outages, closures, preparatory meetings, and initial meetings. Identify
critical path activities on the Three-Week Look Ahead Schedule. The detail
work plans are to be bar chart type schedules, maintained separately from
the Construction Schedule on an electronic spreadsheet program and printed
on 8 ½ by 11 sheets as directed by the Contracting Officer. Activities
shall not exceed 5 working days in duration and have sufficient level of
detail to assign crews, tools and equipment required to complete the work.
Three hard copies and one electronic file of the 3-Week Look Ahead Schedule
SECTION 01 32 16.00 20
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer no later than 8 a.m. each
Monday and reviewed during the weekly CQC Coordination Meeting.
1.6
CORRESPONDENCE AND TEST REPORTS:
All correspondence (e.g., letters, Requests for Information (RFIs),
e-mails, meeting minute items, Production and QC Daily Reports, material
delivery tickets, photographs, etc.) shall reference Schedule activities
that are being addressed. All test reports (e.g., concrete, soil
compaction, weld, pressure, etc.) shall reference schedule activities that
are being addressed.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not used.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 32 16.00 20
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
05/11
PART 1
1.1
1.1.1
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
Submittal Descriptions (SD)
Submittals requirements are specified in the technical sections.
Submittals are identified by Submittal Description (SD) numbers and titles
as follows:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submittals which are required prior to or commencing work on site.
Certificates of insurance
Surety bonds
List of proposed Subcontractors
List of proposed products
Construction progress schedule
Network Analysis Schedule (NAS)
Submittal register
Schedule of prices
Health and safety plan
Work plan
Quality Control(QC) plan
Environmental protection plan
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate
some portion of the work.
Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in
producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for integrating the
product or system into the project.
Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple systems
and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.
SD-03 Product Data
Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts,
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and
other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some
portion of the work.
Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended
product warranties.
SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to
a part of work.
SD-06 Test Reports
Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a
material, product or system identical to the material, product or
system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified
requirements. (Testing must have been within three years of date of
contract award for the project.)
Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by
the Contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared
for the project before shipment to job site.
Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on
sample taken from the job site, on portion of work during or after
installation.
Investigation reports.
Daily logs and checklists.
Final acceptance test and operational test procedure.
SD-07 Certificates
Statements printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by
responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material
attesting that product, system or material meets specification
requirements. Must be dated after award of project contract and
clearly name the project.
Document required of Contractor, or of a manufacturer, supplier,
installer or Subcontractor through Contractor, the purpose of which is
to further quality of orderly progression of a portion of the work by
documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel
qualifications.
Confined space entry permits.
Text of posted operating instructions.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or
material, including special notices and (MSDS)concerning impedances,
hazards and safety precautions.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Data that is furnished by the manufacturer, or the system provider, to
the equipment operating and maintenance personnel, including
manufacturer's help and product line documentation necessary to
maintain and install equipment. This data is needed by operating and
maintenance personnel for the safe and efficient operation, maintenance
and repair of the item.
This data is intended to be incorporated in an operations and
maintenance manual or control system.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative
requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism.
Special requirements necessary to properly close out a construction
contract. For example, Record Drawings and as-built drawings. Also,
submittal requirements necessary to properly close out a major phase of
construction on a multi-phase contract.
Interim "DD Form 1354" with cost breakout for all assets 30 days prior
to facility turnover.
1.1.2
Approving Authority
Office or designated person authorized to approve submittal.
1.1.3
Work
As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract
documents, including labor necessary to produce submittals, construction,
materials, products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be
incorporated in such construction.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor QC approval.
Submit the following in accordance with this section.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submittal Register; G
1.3
SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION
Submittals are classified as follows:
1.4
1.4.1
FORWARDING SUBMITTALS REQUIRING GOVERNMENT APPROVAL
Submittals Required from the Contractor
As soon as practicable after award of contract, and before procurement of
fabrication, forward to the Public Works Department Norfolk, Facilities
Engineering and Acquisition Division, Building E-26, 1721 Piersy Street,
Norfolk, Virginia, 23511 Architect-Engineer: submittals required in the
technical sections of this specification, including shop drawings, product
data and samples. One copy of the transmittal form for all submittals
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
shall be forwarded to the Resident Officer in Charge of Construction.
The Architect-Engineer for this project will review and approve for the
Contracting Officer those submittals reserved for Contracting Officer
approval to verify submittals comply with the contract requirements.
1.5
1.5.1
PREPARATION
Transmittal Form
Transmit each submittal, except sample installations and sample panels to
office of approving authority. Transmit submittals with transmittal form
prescribed by Contracting Officer and standard for project. On the
transmittal form identify Contractor, indicate date of submittal, and
include information prescribed by transmittal form and required in
paragraph entitled, "Identifying Submittals," of this section. Process
transmittal forms to record actions regarding samples.
1.5.2
Identifying Submittals
When submittals are provided by a Subcontractor, the Prime Contractor is to
prepare, review and stamp with Contractor's approval all specified
submittals prior to submitting for Government approval.
Identify submittals, except sample installations and sample panels, with
the following information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate
component of each submittal and noted on transmittal form. Mark each copy
of each submittal identically, with the following:
a.
Project title and location.
b.
Construction contract number.
c.
Date of the drawings and revisions.
d.
Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor, supplier,
manufacturer and any other subcontractor associated with the submittal.
e.
Section number of the specification section by which submittal is
required.
f.
Submittal description (SD) number of each component of submittal.
g.
When a resubmission, add alphabetic suffix on submittal description,
for example, submittal 18 would become 18A, to indicate resubmission.
h.
Product identification and location in project.
1.5.3
Format for SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings are not to be less than 8 1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 30
by 42 inches, except for full size patterns or templates. Prepare drawings
to accurate size, with scale indicated, unless other form is required.
Drawings are to be suitable for reproduction and be of a quality to produce
clear, distinct lines and letters with dark lines on a white background.
Present 8 1/2 by 11 inches sized shop drawings as part of the bound volume
for submittals required by section. Present larger drawings in sets.
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision
numbers and dates, in addition to information required in paragraph
entitled, "Identifying Submittals," of this section.
Number drawings in a logical sequence. Each drawing is to bear the number
of the submittal in a uniform location adjacent to the title block. Place
the Government contract number in the margin, immediately below the title
block, for each drawing.
Reserve a blank space, no smaller than 3 inches on the right hand side of
each sheet for the Government disposition stamp.
Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings; prepare
drawings demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Use the same
unit of measure for shop drawings as indicated on the contract drawings.
Identify materials and products for work shown.
Include the nameplate data, size and capacity on drawings. Also include
applicable federal, military, industry and technical society publication
references.
1.5.4
Format of SD-03 Product Data and SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Present product data submittals for each section as a complete, bound
volume. Include table of contents, listing page and catalog item numbers
for product data.
Indicate, by prominent notation, each product which is being submitted;
indicate specification section number and paragraph number to which it
pertains.
Supplement product data with material prepared for project to satisfy
submittal requirements for which product data does not exist. Identify
this material as developed specifically for project, with information and
format as required for submission of SD-07 Certificates.
Include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, and
catalog model or number on product data. Also include applicable federal,
military, industry and technical society publication references. Should
manufacturer's data require supplemental information for clarification,
submit as specified for SD-07 Certificates.
Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and
technical society reference standards of the organizations such as American
National Standards Institute (ANSI), ASTM International (ASTM), National
Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), Underwriters Laboratories
(UL), and Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC), submit proof
of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization
will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or
listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization,
competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer.
State on the certificate that the item has been tested in accordance with
the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with
the specified organization's reference standard.
Collect required data submittals for each specific material, product, unit
of work, or system into a single submittal and marked for choices, options,
and portions applicable to the submittal. Mark each copy of the product
data identically. Partial submittals will not be accepted for expedition
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
of construction effort.
Submit manufacturer's instructions prior to installation.
1.5.5
Format of SD-04 Samples
Furnish samples in sizes below, unless otherwise specified or unless the
manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately same size as
specified:
a.
Sample of Equipment or Device:
Full size.
b.
Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches:
inches.
c.
Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 1/2 by 11 inches: Cut down to 8 1/2 by
11 inches and adequate to indicate color, texture, and material
variations.
d.
Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 10 inch length or length to be
supplied, if less than 10 inches. Examples of linear devices or
materials are conduit and handrails.
e.
Sample of Non-Solid Materials:
are sand and paint.
f.
Color Selection Samples: 2 by 4 inches. Where samples are specified
for selection of color, finish, pattern, or texture, submit the full
set of available choices for the material or product specified. Sizes
and quantities of samples are to represent their respective standard
unit.
g.
Sample Panel:
h.
Sample Installation:
Pint.
Built up to 8 1/2 by 11
Examples of non-solid materials
4 by 4 feet.
100 square feet.
Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations in color, finish,
pattern, or texture are unavoidable due to nature of the materials, submit
sets of samples of not less than three units showing extremes and middle of
range. Mark each unit to describe its relation to the range of the
variation.
Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into work only if so
specified or indicated. Incorporated samples are to be in undamaged
condition at time of use.
Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the notation of area
constituting sample installation but remove notation at final clean up of
project.
When color, texture or pattern is specified by naming a particular
manufacturer and style, include one sample of that manufacturer and style,
for comparison.
1.5.6
Format of SD-05 Design Data and SD-07 Certificates
Provide design data and certificates on 8 1/2 by 11 inches paper.
a bound volume for submittals containing numerous pages.
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 6
Provide
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.5.7
1313775
Format of SD-06 Test Reports and SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Provide reports on 8 1/2 by 11 inches paper in a complete bound volume.
Indicate by prominent notation, each report in the submittal. Indicate
specification number and paragraph number to which it pertains.
1.5.8
Format of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals and SD-11 Closeout
Submittals
When submittal includes a document which is to be used in project or become
part of project record, other than as a submittal, do not apply
Contractor's approval stamp to document, but to a separate sheet
accompanying document.
1.6
1.6.1
QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS
Number of Copies of SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit six copies of submittals of shop drawings requiring review and
approval only by QC organization and seven copies of shop drawings
requiring review and approval by Contracting Officer. Electronic PDF
samples will also be accepted.
1.6.2
Number of Copies of SD-03 Product Data and SD-08 Manufacturer's
Instructions
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings.
1.6.3
Number of Samples SD-04 Samples
a.
Submit two samples, or two sets of samples showing range of variation,
of each required item. One approved sample or set of samples will be
retained by approving authority and one will be returned to Contractor.
b.
Submit one sample panel or provide one sample installation where
directed. Include components listed in technical section or as
directed.
c.
Submit one sample installation, where directed.
d.
Submit one sample of non-solid materials.
1.6.4
Number of Copies SD-05 Design Data and SD-07 Certificates
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings.
1.6.5
Number of Copies SD-06 Test Reports and SD-09 Manufacturer's Field
Reports
Submit in compliance with quantity and quality requirements specified for
shop drawings other than field test results that will be submitted with QC
reports.
1.6.6
Number of Copies of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit Five copies of O&M Data to the Contracting Officer for review and
approval.
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
1.6.7
Number of Copies of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals and SD-11
Closeout Submittals
Unless otherwise specified, submit two sets of administrative submittals.
1.7
VARIATIONS
Variations from contract requirements require both Designer of Record (DOR)
and Government approval pursuant to contract Clause FAR 52.236-21 and will
be considered where advantageous to Government.
1.7.1
Considering Variations
Discussion with Contracting Officer prior to submission, after consulting
with the DOR, will help ensure functional and quality requirements are met
and minimize rejections and re-submittals. When contemplating a variation
which results in lower cost, consider submission of the variation as a
Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP).
Specifically point out variations from contract requirements in transmittal
letters. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government
requiring rejection and removal of such work at no additional cost to the
Government.
1.7.2
Proposing Variations
When proposing variation, deliver written request to the Contracting
Officer, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and
why the variation is desirable and beneficial to Government, including the
DOR's written analysis and approval. If lower cost is a benefit, also
include an estimate of the cost savings. In addition to documentation
required for variation, include the submittals required for the item.
Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.
1.7.3
Warranting That Variations Are Compatible
When delivering a variation for approval, Contractor, including its
Designer(s) of Record, warrants that this contract has been reviewed to
establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with
other elements of work.
1.7.4
Review Schedule Is Modified
In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days
will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with
variations.
1.8
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses. Do not
change data which is output in columns (c), (d), (e), and (f) as delivered
by Government; retain data which is output in columns (a), (g), (h), and
(i) as approved. A submittal register showing items of equipment and
materials for which submittals are required by the specifications is
provided as an attachment. This list may not be all inclusive and
additional submittals may be required.
Column (c):
required.
Lists specification section in which submittal is
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Column (d): Lists each submittal description (SD No. and type,
e.g. SD-02 Shop Drawings) required in each specification section.
Column (e): Lists one principal paragraph in specification
section where a material or product is specified. This listing is
only to facilitate locating submitted requirements. Do not
consider entries in column (e) as limiting project requirements.
Column (f):
Indicate approving authority for each submittal.
Thereafter, the Contractor is to track all submittals by maintaining a
complete list, including completion of all data columns, including dates on
which submittals are received and returned by the Government.
1.8.1
Use of Submittal Register
Submit submittal register. Submit with QC plan and project schedule.
Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and add missing
submittals. Coordinate and complete the following fields on the register
submitted with the QC plan and the project schedule:
Column (a) Activity Number:
schedule.
Activity number from the project
Column (g) Contractor Submit Date:
authority to receive submittals.
Scheduled date for approving
Column (h) Contractor Approval Date:
approval of submittal.
Date Contractor needs
Column (i) Contractor Material: Date that Contractor needs
material delivered to Contractor control.
1.8.2
Contractor Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields in the Government-furnished submittal register
program or equivalent fields in program utilized by Contractor with each
submittal throughout contract.
Column (b) Transmittal Number:
consecutive numbers.
Contractor assigned list of
Column (j) Action Code (k): Date of action used to record
Contractor's review when forwarding submittals to QC.
Column (l) List date of submittal transmission.
Column (q) List date approval received.
1.8.3
Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields in the Government-furnished submittal register
program or equivalent fields in program utilized by Contractor.
Column (b) Transmittal Number:
consecutive numbers.
Contractor assigned list of
Column (l) List date of submittal receipt.
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Column (m) through (p) List Date related to review actions.
Column (q) List date returned to Contractor.
1.8.4
Action Codes
Entries for columns (j) and (o), are to be used are as follows (others may
be prescribed by Transmittal Form):
1.8.5
Copies Delivered to the Government
Deliver one copy of submittal register updated by Contractor to Government
with each invoice request.
1.9
SCHEDULING
Partial submittals and non-collated copies will be promptly rejected by the
Government. All submittal requirements must be present with each initial
submission.
Schedule and submit concurrently submittals covering component items
forming a system or items that are interrelated. Include certifications to
be submitted with the pertinent drawings at the same time. No delay
damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late
submittals.
a.
Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of
submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by
submittal processing. Allow for potential resubmittal of requirements.
b.
Submittals called for by the contract documents will be listed on the
register. If a submittal is called for but does not pertain to the
contract work, the Contractor is to include the submittal in the
register and annotate it "N/A" with a brief explanation. Approval by
the Contracting Officer does not relieve the Contractor of supplying
submittals required by the contract documents but which have been
omitted from the register or marked "N/A."
c.
Re-submit register and annotate monthly by the Contractor with actual
submission and approval dates. When all items on the register have
been fully approved, no further re-submittal is required.
d.
Carefully control procurement operations to ensure that each individual
submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled submittal date
shown on the approved "Submittal Register."
e.
Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, beginning with
receipt by approving authority, that includes at least 15 working days
for submittals for QC Manager approval and 20 working days for
submittals for Contracting Officer approval. Period of review for
submittals with Contracting Officer approval begins when Government
receives submittal from QC organization.
f.
For submittals requiring review by fire protection engineer, allow
review period, beginning when Government receives submittal from QC
organization, of 30 working days for return of submittal to the
Contractor.
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
g.
1.9.1
1313775
Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial
submittal.
Reviewing, Certifying, Approving Authority
The QC organization is responsible for reviewing and certifying that
submittals are in compliance with contract requirements. Approving
authority on submittals is QC Manager unless otherwise specified for
specific submittal. At each "Submittal" paragraph in individual
specification sections, a notation "G," following a submittal item,
indicates Contracting Officer is approving authority for that submittal
item.
1.9.2
Constraints
Conform to provisions of this section, unless explicitly stated otherwise
for submittals listed or specified in this contract.
Submit complete submittals for each definable feature of work.
1.9.3
QC Organization Responsibilities
a.
Note date on which submittal was received from Contractor on each
submittal.
b.
Review each submittal; and check and coordinate each submittal with
requirements of work and contract documents.
c.
Review submittals for conformance with project design concepts and
compliance with contract documents.
d.
Act on submittals, determining appropriate action based on QC
organization's review of submittal.
(1)
When QC Manager is approving authority, take appropriate action
on submittal from the possible actions defined in paragraph
entitled, "Approved/Accepted Submittals," of the section."
(2)
When Contracting Officer is approving authority or when variation
has been proposed, forward submittal to Government with certifying
statement or return submittal marked "not reviewed" or "revise and
resubmit" as appropriate. The QC organization's review of
submittal determines appropriate action.
e.
Ensure that material is clearly legible.
f.
Stamp each sheet of each submittal with QC certifying statement or
approving statement, except that data submitted in bound volume or on
one sheet printed on two sides may be stamped on the front of the first
sheet only.
(1)
When approving authority is Contracting Officer, QC organization
will certify submittals forwarded to Contracting Officer with the
following certifying statement:
"I hereby certify that the (equipment) (material) (article) shown and
marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated with
contract Number _____, is in compliance with the contract drawings and
specification, can be installed in the allocated spaces, and is
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 11
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
submitted for Government approval.
Certified by Submittal Reviewer _____________________, Date _______
(Signature when applicable)
Certified by QC Manager _____________________________, Date ______"
(Signature)
(2)
When approving authority is QC Manager, QC Manager will use the
following approval statement when returning submittals to
Contractor as "Approved" or "Approved as Noted."
"I hereby certify that the (material) (equipment) (article) shown and
marked in this submittal and proposed to be incorporated with contract
Number _____, is in compliance with the contract drawings and
specification, can be installed in the allocated spaces, and is
approved for use.
Certified by Submittal Reviewer ______________________, Date ______
(Signature when applicable)
Approved by QC Manager _______________________________, Date _____"
(Signature)
g.
Sign certifying statement or approval statement. The QC organization
member designated in the approved QC plan is the person signing
certifying statements. The use of original ink for signatures is
required. Stamped signatures are not acceptable.
h.
Update submittal register database as submittal actions occur and
maintain the submittal register at project site until final acceptance
of all work by Contracting Officer.
i.
Retain a copy of approved submittals at project site, including
Contractor's copy of approved samples.
1.10
GOVERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITY
When approving authority is Contracting Officer, the Government will:
a.
Note date on which submittal was received from QC Manager.
b.
Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and
only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with
contract documents.
c.
Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in
paragraph entitled, "Review Notations," of this section and with
markings appropriate for action indicated.
Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval,
stamp and date approved submittals. One copy of the approved submittal
will be retained by the Contracting Officer and 5 copies of the submittal
will be returned to the Contractor.
1.10.1
Review Notations
Contracting Officer review will be completed within 15 calendar days after
date of submission. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor with the
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 12
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
following notations:
a.
Submittals marked "approved" or "accepted" authorize the Contractor to
proceed with the work covered.
b.
Submittals marked "approved as noted" "or approved except as noted,
resubmittal not required," authorize the Contractor to proceed with the
work covered provided he takes no exception to the corrections.
c.
Submittals marked "not approved" or "disapproved," or "revise and
resubmit," indicate noncompliance with the contract requirements or
design concept, or that submittal is incomplete. Resubmit with
appropriate changes. No work shall proceed for this item until
resubmittal is approved.
d.
Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate submittal has been
previously reviewed and approved, is not required, does not have
evidence of being reviewed and approved by Contractor, or is not
complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" will be returned with an
explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit submittals
returned for lack of review by Contractor or for being incomplete, with
appropriate action, coordination, or change.
1.11
DISAPPROVED OR REJECTED SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If
the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned
submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or
specifications; notice as required under the clause entitled, "Changes," is
to be given to the Contracting Officer. Contractor is responsible for the
dimensions and design of connection details and construction of work.
Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring
rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.
If changes are necessary to submittals, the Contractor shall make such
revisions and submission of the submittals in accordance with the
procedures above. No item of work requiring a submittal change is to be
accomplished until the changed submittals are approved.
1.12
APPROVED/ACCEPTED SUBMITTALS
The Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not to be
construed as a complete check, and indicates only that
Approval or acceptance will not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under the
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this contract is
responsible for dimensions, the design of adequate connections and details,
and the satisfactory construction of all work.
After submittals have been approved or accepted by the Contracting Officer,
no resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment will
be considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is
necessary.
1.13
APPROVED SAMPLES
Approval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such
approval and is not be construed to change or modify any contract
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 13
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
requirements. Before submitting samples, the Contractor to assure that the
materials or equipment will be available in quantities required in the
project. No change or substitution will be permitted after a sample has
been approved.
Match the approved samples for materials and equipment
work. If requested, approved samples, including those
in testing, will be returned to the Contractor, at his
completion of the contract. Samples not approved will
the Contractor at its expense, if so requested.
incorporated in the
which may be damaged
expense, upon
also be returned to
Failure of any materials to pass the specified tests will be sufficient
cause for refusal to consider, under this contract, any further samples of
the same brand or make of that material. Government reserves the right to
disapprove any material or equipment which previously has proved
unsatisfactory in service.
Samples of various materials or equipment delivered on the site or in place
may be taken by the Contracting Officer for testing. Samples failing to
meet contract requirements will automatically void previous approvals.
Contractor to replace such materials or equipment to meet contract
requirements.
Approval of the Contractor's samples by the Contracting Officer does not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the contract.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 33 00
Page 14
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
List of Contact Personnel
Personnel List
Vehicle List
Statement of Acknowledgement
Form SF 1413
01 20 00.00 20 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Schedule of Prices
01 30 00
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
View location map
Progress and completion pictures
01 32 16.00 20 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Construction schedule
01 33 00
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submittal Register
01 35 26
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Accident Prevention Plan (APP)
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)
Crane Critical Lift Plan
Crane Operators
SD-06 Test Reports
Notifications and Reports
Accident Reports
Crane Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Confined Space Entry Permit
01 14 00
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
1.3
1.2
1.3
1.2
1.8
1.7
1.8
1.7.1
1.6.1.3
1.12
1.12.2
1.12.3
1.9
G
G
G
G
1.3.1.1
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
A
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 1 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
Hot work permit
License Certificates
Contractor Safety Self-Evaluation
Checklist
Certificate of Compliance
01 45 00.10 20 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
QC Plan
01 50 00
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Construction site plan
Traffic control plan
SD-06 Test Reports
Backflow Preventer Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Backflow Tester
Backflow Preventers
01 57 19.00 20 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Preconstruction Survey
Solid Waste Management Plan
and Permit
Regulatory Notifications
Environmental Management Plan
Storm Water Pollution Prevention
Plan
01 35 26
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
1.4
3.3.1
2.2.5
1.5.1
1.5
1.5.1
3.4
1.5.2
3.1
3.2.2.1
G
1.6
1.12.4
1.9
1.14
1.4
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
A
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 2 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
01 57 19.00 20 Storm Water Notice of Intent (for 3.2.2.1
NPDES coverage under the
general permit for construction
activities)
Dirt and Dust Control Plan
3.14.1
Contractor Hazardous Material
3.6
Inventory Log
SD-06 Test Reports
Laboratory Analysis
3.13.2.2
Erosion and Sediment Control
3.2.2
Inspection Reports
Storm Water Inspection Reports 3.2.2
for General Permit
Contractor 40 CFR employee
1.5.5
training records
Solid Waste Management Report 3.4.1
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Storm Water Pollution Prevention 3.2.2.2
Plan compliance notebook
Waste Determination
3.5
Documentation
Disposal Documentation for
3.6.1
Hazardous and Regulated Waste
Contractor 40 CFR Employee
1.5.5
Training Records
Solid Waste Management Permit 3.4
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
G
G
G
G
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 3 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
01 57 19.00 20 Solid Waste Management Report
Contractor Hazardous Material
Inventory Log
Hazardous Waste/Debris
Management
Regulatory Notifications
01 74 19
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Waste Management Plan
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Records
01 78 00
SD-03 Product Data
Warranty Management Plan
Final Cleaning
Instructions
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance
Data
Operation and Maintenance
Manuals
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-Built Drawings
Interim Form DD1354
Checklist for Form DD1354
02 84 16
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of CIH
Training Certification
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
G
G
G
G
1.8.1
1.8.1
G
G
1.3.1
1.7
1.7
1.5
1.4.1
1.6
1.4.1
1.7
1.6
1.5.2
3.13.2
3.4.1
3.6
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 4 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
PCB and Lamp Removal Work
Plan
PCB and Lamp Disposal Plan
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Transporter certification
Certification of Decontamination
Certificate of Disposal and/or
recycling
07 84 00
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Firestopping Materials
SD-06 Test Reports
Inspection
SD-07 Certificates
Inspector Qualifications
Firestopping Materials
Installer Qualifications
12 93 00
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shelters
Assembly Instruction Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Shelters
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
21 13 21.00 20 SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fire extinguishing system
SD-03 Product Data
02 84 16
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
G
G
G
G
3.5.2
3.2.4
3.5.2.1
2.1
3.3
1.4.2
2.1
1.4.1
1.2.1.1
3.2
2.1
G
G
1.8.3
2.1
1.3.2
G
1.8.2
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 5 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
21 13 21.00 20 Pipe, fittings, and mechanical
couplings
Valves
Pipe hangers and supports
Fire department inlet connections
SD-05 Design Data
Hydraulic calculations
Pressure discharge graphs or
tables
SD-06 Test Reports
Preliminary tests
Acceptance tests
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of installer
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance
Data
fire extinguishing system
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-built drawings for the fire
extinguishing system
26 08 00
SD-06 Test Reports
Acceptance tests and inspections
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications
Acceptance test and inspections
procedure
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
2.2.1
2.2.4
2.2.3
2.2.8
1.2.1.2
1.2.1.2
3.5.1
3.5.2
1.4.1
1.2.1.1
1.2.1.3
3.1
1.4.1
1.4.3
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 6 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
26 56 00
26 20 00
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Marking strips
SD-03 Product Data
Receptacles
Circuit breakers
Motor controllers
SD-06 Test Reports
600-volt wiring test
Grounding system test
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Photometric Plan
LED Luminaire Warranty
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Luminaire drawings
Poles
SD-03 Product Data
LED Luminaires
Luminaire Light Sources
Luminaire Power Supply Units
(Drivers)
Photocell
Aluminum poles
Brackets
SD-05 Design Data
Design Data for luminaires
SD-06 Test Reports
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
1.5.1.1
1.5.1.2
2.2
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.3.1
2.4.1
2.5
1.5.3
G
G
3.4.2
3.4.3
G
G
G
G
G
2.8
2.9.1
2.11
1.5.2
1.7.1
G
3.1.5.1
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 7 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test
Report
LED Light Source - IES LM-80
Test Report
Operating test
SD-07 Certificates
Luminaire Useful Life Certificate
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance
Data
Operational Service
28 20 00.00 20 SD-02 Shop Drawings
ESS components
Overall system schematic
SD-03 Product Data
Card reader
cable
Communications interface
devices
CCTV camera
CCTV lenses
Auxiliary CCTV camera
equipment
Video, Digital Video Recorder
(DVR)
Printer
Four quadrant multiplexer
26 56 00
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
G
G
2.4.16.3 G
2.4.15.6 G
2.4.15.6 G
2.4.15.1 G
2.4.15.1 G
2.4.15.1 G
2.4.13.4 G
2.4.14.2 G
2.4.14
G
1.6.1.1
1.6.1.2
1.8
1.7.1
G
G
1.5.5
3.2
G
1.5.4
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 8 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
28 20 00.00 20 SD-06 Test Reports
ESS operational test plan
SD-07 Certificates
ESS operational test plan
Installer's qualifications
Instructor's qualifications
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance
Data
ESS components
ESS software
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-Built drawings
31 23 00.00 20 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Shoring and Sheeting Plan
Dewatering work plan
SD-06 Test Reports
Borrow Site Testing
Fill and backfill
Select material
Density tests
32 11 23
SD-07 Certificates
Aggregate Material Certification
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Density Tests
32 12 17
SD-05 Design Data
MIX DESIGN
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
G
G
G
G
G
G
1.6.4
1.6.2.1
1.6.2.2
1.6.1.1
1.6.5
3.3.1
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
1.5
3.14.2.1
3.14.2.2
3.14.2.3
2.1.1
1.5.1.2
1.3.2
1.6.1
1.6.2
G
1.6.4
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 9 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
MIX DESIGN
SD-03 Product Data
Concrete
SD-05 Design Data
Concrete Design Mix
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control
32 17 23.00 20 SD-03 Product Data
Paints for roads and streets
Thermoplastic compound
Thermoplastic compound
Equipment
Qualifications
SD-07 Certificates
Paints for roads and streets
Thermoplastic compound
Thermoplastic compound
SD-08 Manufacturer’s Instructions
Paints for roads and streets
Thermoplastic compound
Thermoplastic compound
32 31 13.53
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fence Installation
Fence Installation
Installation Drawings
32 12 17
32 16 13
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
G
G
2.1
2.1
1.3.2
3.1
1.3.2
G
G
G
G
G
G
2.1.1
2.1.2
3.2.2.2
2.1.1
2.1.2
3.2.2.2
G
G
G
G
G
2.1.1
2.1.2
3.2.2.2
1.5
1.7
3.8
G
2.1
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 10 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
32 31 13.53
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
Location of gate, corner, end, and
pull posts
Gate Assembly
Gate Assembly
Gate Assembly
Gate Hardware and Accessories
Gate Hardware and Accessories
SD-03 Product Data
Fence Installation
Fence Installation
Gate Assembly
Gate Assembly
Gate Assembly
Gate Hardware and Accessories
Gate Hardware and Accessories
SD-07 Certificates
Chain Link Fence
reports
reports
Zinc Coating
Fabric
Barbed Wire
Stretcher Bars
Gate Hardware and Accessories
Gate Hardware and Accessories
Concrete
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
1.3.2
2.6.1
2.6.1
1.3.2
2.6.3
1.3.2
3.1
1.3.2
2.6.1
2.6.1
1.3.2
2.6.3
2.2.1
1.3.1
1.3.1
1.3.1
2.1.1
2.4.2
2.1.1
1.3.2
2.6.3
2.5
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
1.3.2
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 11 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
33 11 00
32 31 13.53
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
GATE OPERATOR
SD-08 Manufacturer’s Instructions
Fence Installation
Fence Installation
Gate Assembly
Gate Assembly
Gate Assembly
Hardware Assembly
Accessories
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance
Data
Electro-Mechanical Locks
Gate Operator
operating and maintenance
instructions
SD-03 Product Data
Piping Materials
Water distribution main
Hydrants
Indicator posts
Valve boxes
SD-07 Certificates
Water distribution main
Water service line
Lining
hydrants
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
G
2.1
2.2
2.1.1.1
2.1.2.2
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
2.1.1
2.1
2.1.2.2
2.1.2.3
2.1.2.4
2.8
2.7
3.6
1.3.2
3.1
1.3.2
2.6.1
2.6.1
3.6
1.3.1
2.7
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 12 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
33 71 02
33 71 01
33 40 00
33 30 00
33 11 00
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
SD-08 Manufacturer’s Instructions
Delivery, storage, and handling
Installation
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Precast concrete manhole
Metal items
Frames, covers, and gratings
SD-03 Product Data
Pipeline materials
SD-03 Product Data
Placing Pipe
Pipe for Culverts and Storm
Drains
Frame and Cover for Gratings
SD-07 Certificates
Determination of Density
SD-03 Product Data
Insulators
Cutouts
Surge arresters
Guy strand
Anchors
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control
Ground resistance test reports
SD-02 Shop Drawings
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
G
G
G
G
G
3.4
1.5.3
G
G
2.3
2.10
2.9
2.5
2.7
3.6.4
2.3.5
3.3
2.1
2.1
2.3.1
2.3.3
2.3.3.1
1.3
3.1.1
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 13 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
N
O
(b)
A
C
T
I
V
I
T
Y
N
O
(a)
33 71 02
(c)
S
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
A
L
Precast underground structures
SD-03 Product Data
Medium voltage cable
Medium voltage cable joints
Medium voltage cable
terminations
Precast concrete structures
Sealing Material
Pulling-In Irons
Manhole frames and covers
Handhole frames and covers
Composite/fiberglass handholes
Cable supports
SD-06 Test Reports
Medium voltage cable
qualification and production tests
Field Acceptance Checks and
Tests
Arc-proofing test
Cable Installation Plan and
Procedure
SD-07 Certificates
Cable splicer/terminator
Cable Installer Qualifications
(d)
ITEM SUBMITTED
DESCRIPTION
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
1.4.1
2.5
2.7
2.6
2.12.2.1
2.12.2.4
3.4.3
2.12.3
2.12.4
2.12.6
2.13
2.15.2
3.17.1
2.15.1
3.3
1.4.2
1.4.3
(e)
P
A
R
A
G#
R
A
P
H
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
(f)
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
TITLE AND LOCATION
R
E
V
W
R
A
/
E
O
R
G
O
V
T
(g)
SUBMIT
(h)
(i)
APPROVAL MATERIAL
NEEDED
NEEDED
BY
BY
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
(j)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(k)
DATE
OF
ACTION
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
(l)
(m)
(n)
DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD
FROM
TO OTHER FROM OTH
CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER
DATE FWD
TO APPR
AUTH/
(o)
C
O
D
E
A
C
T
I
O
N
(p)
DATE
OF
ACTION
APPROVING AUTHORITY
CONTRACT NO.
(q)
(r)
REMARKS
PAGE 14 OF 14 PAGES
DATE RCD
FRM APPR
AUTH
MAILED
TO
CONTR/
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 35 26
GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
02/12
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
ASSE/SAFE A10.32
(2012) Fall Protection
ASSE/SAFE A10.34
(2001; R 2012) Protection of the Public on
or Adjacent to Construction Sites
ASSE/SAFE Z359.1
(2007) Safety Requirements for Personal
Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and
Components
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B30.22
(2010) Articulating Boom Cranes
ASME B30.3
(2012) Tower Cranes
ASME B30.5
(2011) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes
ASME B30.8
(2010) Floating Cranes and Floating
Derricks
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 10
(2013) Standard for Portable Fire
Extinguishers
NFPA 241
(2013) Standard for Safeguarding
Construction,Alteration, and Demolition
Operations
NFPA 51B
(2014) Standard for Fire Prevention During
Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work
NFPA 70
(2014) National Electrical Code
NFPA 70E
(2012; Errata 2012) Standard for
Electrical Safety in the Workplace
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1
(2008; Errata 1-2010; Changes 1-3 2010;
Changes 4-6 2011; Change 7 2012) Safety
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
and Health Requirements Manual
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
10 CFR 20
Standards for Protection Against Radiation
29 CFR 1910
Occupational Safety and Health Standards
29 CFR 1910.146
Permit-required Confined Spaces
29 CFR 1915
Confined and Enclosed Spaces and Other
Dangerous Atmospheres in Shipyard
Employment
29 CFR 1926
Safety and Health Regulations for
Construction
29 CFR 1926.1400
Cranes & Derricks in Construction
29 CFR 1926.16
Rules of Construction
29 CFR 1926.500
Fall Protection
CPL 2.100
(1995) Application of the Permit-Required
Confined Spaces (PRCS) Standards, 29 CFR
1910.146
U.S. NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND (NAVFAC)
NAVFAC P-307
1.2
(2009; Change 1 Mar 2011; Change 2 Aug
2011)Management of Weight Handling
Equipment
DEFINITIONS
a.
Competent Person for Fall Protection. A person who is capable of
identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in the personal fall
arrest system or any component thereof, as well as their application
and use with related equipment, and has the authority to take prompt
corrective measures to eliminate the hazards of falling.
b.
High Visibility Accident.
high visibility.
c.
Medical Treatment. Treatment administered by a physician or by
registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a
physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even
through provided by a physician or registered personnel.
d.
Operating Envelope. The area surrounding any crane. Inside this
"envelope" is the crane, the operator, riggers and crane walkers,
rigging gear between the hook and the load, the load and the crane's
supporting structure (ground, rail, etc.).
e.
Recordable Injuries or Illnesses.
that results in:
Any mishap which may generate publicity or
Any work-related injury or illness
(1) Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the
length of the illness;
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
(2) Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness
onset);
(3) Restricted work;
(4) Transfer to another job;
(5) Medical treatment beyond first aid;
(6) Loss of consciousness; or
(7) A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other
licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in
(1) through (6) above.
f.
"USACE" property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 should be
interpreted as Government property and equipment.
g.
Weight Handling Equipment (WHE) Accident. A WHE accident occurs when
any one or more of the eight elements in the operating envelope fails
to perform correctly during operation, including operation during
maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death; material
or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-blocking; overload;
or collision, including unplanned contact between the load, crane, or
other objects. A dropped load, derailment, two-blocking, overload and
collision are considered accidents even though no material damage or
injury occurs. A component failure (e.g., motor burnout, gear tooth
failure, bearing failure) is not considered an accident solely due to
material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in
damage to other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped load, roll
over, etc.) Any mishap meeting the criteria described above shall be
documented in both the Contractor Significant Incident Report (CSIR)
and using the NAVFAC prescribed Navy Crane Center (NCC) form submitted
within five days both as provided by the Contracting Officer. Comply
with additional requirements and procedures for accidents in accordance
with NAVFAC P-307, Section 12.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Government acceptance, as defined in EM-385-1-1, is required for submittals
with a "G,A" designation.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA); G
Crane Critical Lift Plan; G
Proof of qualification for Crane Operators; G, A
SD-06 Test Reports
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Notifications and Reports
Submit reports as their incidence occurs, in accordance with the
requirements of the paragraph, "Notifications and Reports."
Accident Reports; G
Crane Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Confined Space Entry Permit
Hot work permit
License Certificates
Contractor Safety Self-Evaluation Checklist; G, A
Certificate of Compliance (Crane)
Submit one copy of each permit/certificate attached to each
Daily Production Report.
1.4
CONTRACTOR SAFETY SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST
Contracting Officer will provide a "Contractor Safety Self-Evaluation
checklist" to the Contractor at the pre-construction conference. Complete
the checklist monthly and submit with each request for payment voucher. An
acceptable score of 90 or greater is required. Failure to submit the
completed safety self-evaluation checklist or achieve a score of at least
90 may result in retention of up to 10 percent of the voucher.
Additionally, provide a Monthly Exposure Report and attach to the monthly
billing request. This report is a compilation of employee-hours worked
each month for all site workers, both prime and subcontractor. Failure to
submit the report may result in retention of up to 10 percent of the
voucher. The Contracting Officer will submit a copy of the Contractor
Safety Self-Evaluation and Monthly Exposure Report to the local safety and
occupational health office.
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this
contract, comply with the most recent edition of USACE EM 385-1-1, and the
following federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and
regulations . Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the
appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work.
Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria,
ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent
requirements govern.
1.6
SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES AND MEETINGS
1.6.1
1.6.1.1
Personnel Qualifications
Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
The SSHO must meet the requirements of EM 385-1-1 section 1 and ensure that
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.16 are met for the project. Provide a
Safety oversight team that includes a minimum of one (1) person at each
project site to function as the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The
SSHO or an equally-qualified Designated Representative/alternate shall be
at the work site at all times to implement and administer the Contractor's
safety program and government-accepted Accident Prevention Plan. The
SSHO's training, experience, and qualifications shall be as required by
EM 385-1-1 paragraph 01.A.17, entitled SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH OFFICER
(SSHO), and all associated sub-paragraphs.
A Competent Person shall be provided for all of the hazards identified in
the Contractor's Safety and Health Program in accordance with the accepted
Accident Prevention Plan, and shall be on-site at all times when the work
that presents the hazards associated with their professional expertise is
being performed. Provide the credentials of the Competent Persons(s) to
the the Contracting Officer for acceptance in consultation with the Safety
Office.
1.6.1.1.1
Contractor Quality Control (QC) Person:
The Contractor Quality Control Person can be the SSHO on this project.
1.6.1.2
Competent Person for Confined Space Entry
Provide a "Competent Person" to supervise the entry into each confined
space. That individual must meet the requirements and definition of
Competent Person as contained in EM 385-1-1.
1.6.1.3
Crane Operators
Meet the crane operators requirements in USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 16 and
Appendix I. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacitates of 50,000 pounds or greater, designate
crane operators as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators
(i.e., union, a government agency, or an organization that tests and
qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of current qualification. In
addition, the Contractor shall comply with Contractor Operated Crane
Requirements included in the latest revision of document NAVFAC P-307
Section 1.7.2 "Contractor Operated Cranes," and Appendix P, Figure P-1 and
with 29 CFR 1926, Subpart CC.
1.6.2
Personnel Duties
1.6.2.1
Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
The SSHO shall:
a.
Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log
which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified
hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of
corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the Contractors' daily
quality control report.
b.
Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports.
the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and
sub-contractors.
c.
Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 5
Maintain
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
d.
Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including
preparatory inspection meeting, and periodic in-progress meetings.
e.
Implement and enforce accepted APPS and AHAs.
f.
Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors
outstanding deficiencies until resolution. Post a list of unresolved
safety and health deficiencies on the safety bulletin board.
g.
Ensure sub-contractor compliance with safety and health requirements.
h.
Maintain a list of hazardous chemicals on site and their material
safety data sheets.
Failure to perform the above duties will result in dismissal of the
superintendent, QC Manager, and/or SSHO, and a project work stoppage.
The project work stoppage will remain in effect pending approval of a
suitable replacement.
1.6.3
Meetings
1.6.3.1
Preconstruction Conference
a.
Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant
role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the
preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent,
site safety and health officer, quality control supervisor, or any
other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the
development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs)
and special plans, program and procedures associated with it).
b.
Discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans,
programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be
developed and implemented during the performance of the contract. This
list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an
agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting
Officer's representative as to which phases will require an analysis.
In addition, establish a schedule for the preparation, submittal,
review, and acceptance of AHAs to preclude project delays.
c.
Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought to the attention of
the Contractor at the preconstruction conference, and the Contractor
shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re-submit it for
acceptance. Do not begin work until there is an accepted APP.
1.6.3.2
Safety Meetings
Conduct and document meetings as required by EM 385-1-1. Attach minutes
showing contract title, signatures of attendees and a list of topics
discussed to the Contractors' daily production report.
1.7
ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)
Use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare
the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1
and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements
in USACE EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, "Minimum Basic Outline for Accident
Prevention Plan". Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are
described below. The APP shall be job-specific and address any unusual or
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP
shall interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program.
Include any portions of the Contractor's overall safety and health program
referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element and made site-specific.
The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling
authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors.
Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the
safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for
noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering
with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and
inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention
responsibilities are being carried out. The APP shall be signed by the
person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP, the Contractor, the
on-site superintendent, the designated site safety and health officer, the
Contractor Quality control Manager, and any designated CSP or CIH.
Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the
date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed
without an accepted APP.
Once accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be
enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this
contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work, at the
discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified.
Once work begins, changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the
knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project
superintendent, SSHO and quality control manager. Should any severe hazard
exposure, i.e. imminent danger, become evident, stop work in the area,
secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the exposure and control the
hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery.
Eliminate/remove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary action to
restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite
personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ASSE/SAFE A10.34,) and the
environment.
Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the Contracting Officer's
office and at the job site. Continuously review and ammend the APP, as
necessary, throughout the life of the contract. Incorporate unusual or
high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP as they are
discovered.
1.7.1
EM 385-1-1 Contents
In addition to the requirements outlined in Appendix A of USACE EM 385-1-1,
the following is required:
a.
Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training,
experience and certifications) of all site safety and health personnel
designated to perform work on this project to include the designated
site safety and health officer and other competent and qualified
personnel to be used such as CSPs, CIHs, STSs, CHSTs. Specify the
duties of each position.
b.
Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum,
designate and submit qualifications of competent persons for each of
the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection;
hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition, evaluation
and control of chemical, physical and biological agents; personal
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use and
maintenance.
c.
Confined Space Entry Plan. Develop a confined and/or enclosed space
entry plan in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, applicable OSHA
standards 29 CFR 1910, 29 CFR 1915, and 29 CFR 1926, OSHA Directive
CPL 2.100, and any other federal, state and local regulatory
requirements identified in this contract. Identify the qualified
person's name and qualifications, training, and experience. Delineate
the qualified person's authority to direct work stoppage in the event
of hazardous conditions. Include procedure for rescue by contractor
personnel and the coordination with emergency responders. (If there is
no confined space work, include a statement that no confined space work
exists and none will be created.)
d.
Crane Critical Lift Plan.
Prepare and sign weight handling critical lift plans for lifts over 75
percent of the capacity of the crane or hoist (or lifts over 50 percent of
the capacity of a barge mounted mobile crane's hoists) at any radius of
lift; lifts involving more than one crane or hoist; lifts of personnel; and
lifts involving non-routine rigging or operation, sensitive equipment, or
unusual safety risks. Submit 15 calendar days prior to on-site work and
include the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1, paragraph 16.H. and the
following:
(1) For lifts of personnel, demonstrate compliance with the requirements of
29 CFR 1926.1400.
e.
Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Program Documentation. The
program documentation shall be site specific and address all fall
hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction.
Address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels
when they are exposed to fall hazards above 6 feet. A qualified person
for fall protection shall prepare and sign the program documentation.
Include fall protection and prevention systems, equipment and methods
employed for every phase of work, responsibilities, assisted rescue,
self-rescue and evacuation procedures, training requirements, and
monitoring methods. Revise the Fall Protection and Prevention Program
documentation every six months for lengthy projects, reflecting any
changes during the course of construction due to changes in personnel,
equipment, systems or work habits. Keep and maintain the accepted Fall
Protection and Prevention Program documentation at the job site for the
duration of the project. Include the Fall Protection and Prevention
Program documentation in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).
The FP&P Plan shall include a Rescue and Evacuation Plan in accordance
with USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 21.M. The plan shall include a detailed
discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue;
equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the
rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and
transportation routes to a medical facility. Include the Rescue and
Evacuation Plan in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and
as part of the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).
f.
Site Demolition Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in
accordance with referenced sources. Include engineering survey as
applicable.
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
g.
1.8
1313775
Excavation Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance
with Section31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.
ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)
The Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) format shall be in accordance with USACE
EM 385-1-1, Section 1. Submit the AHA for review at least 15 calendar days
prior to the start of each phase. Format subsequent AHAs as amendments to
the APP. The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the
implementation and effectiveness of the activity's safety and health
controls.
The AHA list will be reviewed periodically (at least monthly) at the
Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when
procedures, scheduling, or hazards change.
Develop the activity hazard analyses using the project schedule as the
basis for the activities performed. Any activities listed on the project
schedule will require an AHA. The AHAs will be developed by the
contractor, supplier or subcontractor and provided to the prime contractor
for submittal to the Contracting Officer.
1.9
DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION
Within one calendar day(s) after commencement of work, erect a safety
bulletin board at the job site. Where size, duration, or logistics of
project do not facilitate a bulletin board, an alternative method,
acceptable to the Contracting Officer, that is accessible and includes all
mandatory information for employee and visitor review, shall be deemed as
meeting the requirement for a bulletin board. Include and maintain
information on safety bulletin board as required by EM 385-1-1, section
01.A.06. Additional items required to be posted include:
a.
Confined space entry permit.
b.
Hot work permit.
1.10
SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS
Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including
those listed in the article "References." Maintain applicable equipment
manufacturer's manuals.
1.11
EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT
Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment.
Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.
1.12
1.12.1
NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS
Accident Notification
Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but no more than four
hours after any accident meeting the definition of Recordable Injuries or
Illnesses or High Visibility Accidents, property damage equal to or greater
than $2,000, or any weight handling equipment accident. Within
notification include contractor name; contract title; type of contract;
name of activity, installation or location where accident occurred; date
and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of property
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description of
accident (to include type of construction equipment used, PPE used, etc.).
Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the
Government investigation team arrives on-site and Government investigation
is conducted.
1.12.2
Accident Reports
a.
Conduct an accident investigation for recordable injuries and
illnesses, for Medical Treatment defined in paragraph DEFINITIONS,
property damage accidents resulting in at least $20,000 in damages, and
near misses as defined in EM 385-1-1, to establish the root cause(s) of
the accident. Complete the applicable NAVFAC Contractor Incident
Reporting System (CIRS), and electronically submit via the NAVFAC
Enterprise Safety Applications Management System (ESAMS. The
Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required or special
forms.
b.
Near Misses: Complete the applicable documentation in NAVFAC
Contractor Incident Reporting System (CIRS), and electronically submit
via the NAVFAC Enterprise Safety Applications Management System (ESAMS).
c.
Conduct an accident investigation for any weight handling equipment
accident (including rigging gear accidents) to establish the root
cause(s) of the accident, complete the WHE Accident Report (Crane and
Rigging Gear) form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer
within 30 calendar days of the accident. Do not proceed with crane
operations until cause is determined and corrective actions have been
implemented to the satisfaction of the contracting officer. The
Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report
form.
1.12.3
Crane Reports
Submit crane inspection reports required in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1,
Appendix I and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections.
1.12.4
Certificate of Compliance
Provide a Certificate of Compliance for each crane entering an activity
under this contract (see Contracting Officer for a blank certificate).
State within the certificate that the crane and rigging gear meet
applicable OSHA regulations (with the Contractor citing which OSHA
regulations are applicable, e.g., cranes used in construction, demolition,
or maintenance comply with 29 CFR 1926 and USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 16 and
Appendix I. Certify on the Certificate of Compliance that the crane
operator(s) is qualified and trained in the operation of the crane to be
used. Also certify that all of its crane operators working on the DOD
activity have been trained in the proper use of all safety devices (e.g.,
anti-two block devices). Post certifications on the crane.
1.13
HOT WORK
Submit and obtain a written permit prior to performing "Hot Work" (welding,
cutting, etc.) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing devices,
from the Fire Division. A permit is required from the Explosives Safety
Office for work in and around where explosives are processed, stored, or
handled. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
ISSUED. Provide at least two (2) twenty (20) pound 4A:20 BC rated
extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". All extinguishers shall be current
inspection tagged, approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal. It is
also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at
this activity. The Fire Watch shall be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B
and remain on-site for a minimum of 30 minutes after completion of the task
or as specified on the hot work permit.
When starting work in the facility, require personnel to familiarize
themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in
memory the emergency Fire Division phone number. ANY FIRE, NO MATTER HOW
SMALL, SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE RESPONSIBLE FIRE DIVISION IMMEDIATELY.
1.14
RADIATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
License Certificates for radiation materials and equipment shall be
submitted to the Contracting Officer and Radiation Safety Office (RSO), and
Contracting Oversight Technician (COT) for all specialized and licensed
material and equipment that could cause fatal harm to construction
personnel or to the construction project.
Workers shall be protected from radiation exposure in accordance with
10 CFR 20. Standards for Protection Against Radiation
Loss of radioactive material shall be reported immediately to the
Contracting Officer.
Actual exposure of the radiographic film or unshielding the source shall
not be initiated until after 5 p.m. on weekdays.
In instances where radiography is scheduled near or adjacent to buildings
or areas having limited access or one-way doors, no assumptions shall be
made as to building occupancy. Where necessary, the Contracting Officer
will direct the Contractor to conduct an actual building entry, search, and
alert. Where removal of personnel from such a building cannot be
accomplished and it is otherwise safe to proceed with the radiography, a
fully instructed employee shall be positioned inside such building or area
to prevent exiting while external radiographic operations are in process.
Transportation of Regulated Amounts of Radioactive Material will comply
with 49 CFR, Subchapter C, Hazardous Material Regulations. Local Fire
authorities and the site Radiation Safety officer (RSO) shall be notified
of any Radioactive Material use.
Transmitter Requirements: The base policy concerning the use of
transmitters such as radios, cell phones, etc., must be adhered to by all
contractor personnel. They must also obey Emissions control (EMCON)
restrictions.
1.15
FACILITY OCCUPANCY CLOSURE
Streets, walks, and other facilities occupied and used by the Government
shall not be closed or obstructed without written permission from the
Contracting Officer.
1.16
SEVERE STORM PLAN
In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:
a.
Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that could
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 11
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
be damaged in protected areas.
b.
Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material, equipment,
debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against existing
facilities.
c.
Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.
1.17
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS.
Contractors entering and working in confined spaces while performing
general industry work are required to follow the requirements of OSHA
29 CFR 1926 and comply with the requirements in Section 34 of EM 385-1-1,
OSHA 29 CFR 1910, and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
CONFINED SPACE SIGNAGE
Provide permanent signs integral to or securely attached to access covers
for new permit-required confined spaces. Signs wording:
"DANGER--PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE - DO NOT ENTER -" in bold letters a
minimum of one inch in height and constructed to be clearly legible with
all paint removed. The signal word "DANGER" shall be red and readable from
5 feet.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK
Comply with USACE EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 241, the APP, the
AHA, Federal and State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and
activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard prevails.
PPE is governed
performing. Use
noise hazardous
glasses must be
in all areas by the nature of the work the employee is
personal hearing protection at all times in designated
areas or when performing noise hazardous tasks. Safety
carried/available on each person.
Mandatory PPE includes:
a.
Hard Hat
b.
Appropriate Safety Shoes
c.
Reflective Vests
3.1.1
Hazardous Material Use
Each hazardous material must receive approval from the Contracting Office
or their designated representative prior to being brought onto the job site
or prior to any other use in connection with this contract. Allow a
minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a
hazardous material.
3.1.2
Hazardous Material Exclusions
Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract,
radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 12
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material
and devices used in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear
density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with
radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury
or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocynates, lead-based paint are
prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the
Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded
materials. Low mercury lamps used within fluorescent lighting fixtures are
allowed as an exception without further Contracting Officer approval.
Notify the Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) prior to excepted items of
radioactive material and devices being brought on base.
3.1.3
Unforeseen Hazardous Material
The design should have identified materials such as PCB, lead paint, and
friable and non-friable asbestos and other OSHA regulated chemicals (i.e.
29 CFR Part 1910.1000). If additional material, not indicated, that may be
hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations
is encountered, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting
Officer immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine
if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no
danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without
change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary
to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant
to "FAR 52.243-4, Changes" and "FAR 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions."
3.2
PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING
Apply for utility outages at least 15 days in advance. As a minimum, the
request should include the location of the outage, utilities being
affected, duration of outage and any necessary sketches. Special
requirements for electrical outage requests are contained elsewhere in this
specification section. Once approved, and prior to beginning work on the
utility system requiring shut down, attend a pre-outage coordination
meeting with the Contracting Officer to review the scope of work and the
lock-out/tag-out procedures for worker protection. No work will be
performed on energized electrical circuits unless proof is provided that no
other means exist.
3.3
CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)
Ensure that each employee is familiar with and complies with these
procedures and USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 12, Control of Hazardous Energy.
3.4
FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION PROGRAM
Establish a fall protection and prevention program, for the protection of
all employees exposed to fall hazards. Within the program include company
policy, identify responsibilities, education and training requirements,
fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection,
storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and
evacuation procedures in accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.1.
3.4.1
Training
Institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Hazard
Protection and Prevention Program, provide training for each employee who
might be exposed to fall hazards. Provide training by a competent person
for fall protection in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 21.B.
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 13
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.4.2
1313775
Fall Protection Equipment and Systems
Enforce use of the fall protection equipment and systems designated for
each specific work activity in the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan
and/or AHA at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard.
Protect employees from fall hazards as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section
21. In addition to the required fall protection systems, safety skiff,
personal floatation devices, life rings etc., are required when working
above or next to water in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, Paragraphs 21.N
through 21.N.04. Personal fall arrest systems are required when working
from an articulating or extendible boom, swing stages, or suspended
platform. In addition, personal fall arrest systems are required when
operating other equipment such as scissor lifts if the work platform is
capable of being positioned outside the wheelbase. The need for tying-off
in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment
during raising, lowering, or travel. Fall protection must comply with
29 CFR 1926.500, Subpart M, USACE EM 385-1-1 and ASSE/SAFE A10.32.
3.4.2.1
Personal Fall Arrest Equipment
Personal fall arrest equipment, systems, subsystems, and components shall
meet ASSE/SAFE Z359.1. Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing
lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest
body support device. Body belts may only be used as a positioning device
system (for uses such as steel reinforcing assembly and in addition to an
approved fall arrest system). Harnesses shall have a fall arrest
attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and
specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Only
locking snap hooks and carabiners shall be used. Webbing, straps, and ropes
shall be made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance when using
fall arrest equipment shall not exceed 6 feet. The total fall distance and
any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion) that can occur during a
fall shall always be taken into consideration when attaching a person to a
fall arrest system.
3.4.3
Fall Protection for Roofing Work
Implement fall protection controls based on the type of roof being
constructed and work being performed. Evaluate the roof area to be
accessed for its structural integrity including weight-bearing capabilities
for the projected loading.
a.
Low Sloped Roofs:
(1) For work within 6 feet of an edge, on low-slope roofs, protect
personnel from falling by use of personal fall arrest systems,
guardrails, or safety nets. A safety monitoring system is not
adequate fall protection and is not authorized.
(2) For work greater than 6 feet from an edge, erect and install
warning lines in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.500 and USACE
EM 385-1-1.
b.
Steep-Sloped Roofs: Work on steep-sloped roofs requires a personal
fall arrest system, guardrails with toe-boards, or safety nets. This
requirement also includes residential or housing type construction.
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 14
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.4.4
1313775
Horizontal Lifelines
Design, install, certify and use under the supervision of a qualified
person horizontal lifelines for fall protection as part of a complete fall
arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 (29 CFR 1926.500).
3.4.5
Guardrails and Safety Nets
Design, install and use guardrails and safety nets in accordance with
EM 385-1-1 and 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M.
3.4.6
Rescue and Evacuation Procedures
When personal fall arrest systems are used, ensure that the mishap victim
can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur. Prepare a
Rescue and Evacuation Plan and include a detailed discussion of the
following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue; equipment used;
training requirement; specialized training for the rescuers; procedures for
requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to a
medical facility. Include the Rescue and Evacuation Plan within the
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work, in the Fall
Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident Prevention Plan
(APP).
3.5
SCAFFOLDING
Provide employees with a safe means of access to the work area on the
scaffold. Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically
designed for access is prohibited. Access scaffold platforms greater than
20 feet maximum in height by use of a scaffold stair system. Do not use
vertical ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers for
accessing scaffold platforms greater than 20 feet maximum in height. The
use of an adequate gate is required. Ensure that employees are qualified
to perform scaffold erection and dismantling. Do not use scaffold without
the capability of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load
or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall
protection and prevention plan. Stationary scaffolds must be attached to
structural building components to safeguard against tipping forward or
backward. Give special care to ensure scaffold systems are not
overloaded. Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on
self-supported scaffold systems for the storage of material is prohibited.
The first tie-in shall be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the
smallest dimension of the scaffold base. Place work platforms on mud
sills. Scaffold or work platform erectors shall have fall protection
during the erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that
are more than six feet. Delineate fall protection requirements when
working above six feet or above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection
and Prevention (FP&P) Plan and Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase
of work.
3.6
3.6.1
a.
EQUIPMENT
Material Handling Equipment
Material handling equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified
with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless
specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating
instructions.
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 15
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
b.
The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Additionally,
when material handling equipment is used as a crane it must meet
NAVFAC P-307 requirements in Sections 1.7.2, "Contractor Operated
Cranes," and 12, "Investigation and Reporting of Crane and Rigging Gear
Accidents."
c.
Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks shall be licensed in
accordance with OSHA.
3.6.2
Weight Handling Equipment
a.
Equip cranes and derricks as specified in EM 385-1-1, section 16.
b.
Notify the Contracting Officer 15 days in advance of any cranes
entering the activity so that necessary quality assurance spot checks
can be coordinated.Contractor's operator shall remain with the crane
during the spot check.
c.
Comply with the crane manufacturer's specifications and limitations for
erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the
work. Perform erection under the supervision of a designated person
(as defined in ASME B30.5). Perform all testing in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
d.
Comply with ASME B30.5 for mobile and locomotive cranes, ASME B30.22
for articulating boom cranes, ASME B30.3 for construction tower cranes,
and ASME B30.8 for floating cranes and floating derricks.
e.
Under no circumstance shall a Contractor make a lift at or above 90
percent of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration.
f.
When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines,
operators and riggers shall be alert to this special hazard and follow
the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 11, NAVFAC P-307 Figure
10-3 and ASME B30.5 or ASME B30.22 as applicable.
g.
Do not crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) unless the
Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location
would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Do not
lift personnel with a line hoist or friction crane.
h.
Inspect, maintain, and recharge portable fire extinguishers as
specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
i.
All employees must keep clear of loads about to be lifted and of
suspended loads.
j.
Use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers.
k.
The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load.
loading of the crane is prohibited.
l.
A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel from
entering the counterweight swing (tail swing) area of the crane.
m.
Certification records which include the date of inspection, signature
of the person performing the inspection, and the serial number or other
identifier of the crane that was inspected shall always be available
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 16
Side
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
for review by Contracting Officer personnel.
n.
Written reports listing the load test procedures used along with any
repairs or alterations performed on the crane shall be available for
review by Contracting Officer personnel.
o.
Certify that all crane operators have been trained in proper use of all
safety devices (e.g. anti-two block devices).
p.
Take steps to ensure that wind speed does not contribute to loss of
control of the load during lifting operations. Prior to conducting
lifting operations set a maximum wind speed at which a crane can be
safely operated based on the equipment being used, the load being
lifted, experience of operators and riggers, and hazards on the work
site. This maximum wind speed determination shall be included as part
of the activity hazard analysis plan for that operation.
3.6.3
Equipment and Mechanized Equipment
a.
Proof of qualifications for operator shall be kept on the project site
for review.
b.
Manufacture specifications or owner's manual for the equipment shall be
on-site and reviewed for additional safety precautions or requirements
that are sometimes not identified by OSHA or USACE EM 385-1-1.
Incorporate such additional safety precautions or requirements into the
AHAs.
3.6.4
USE OF EXPLOSIVES
Explosives shall not be used or brought to the project site.
3.7
EXCAVATIONS
Soil classification must be performed by a competent person in accordance
with 29 CFR 1926 and EM 385-1-1.
3.7.1
Utility Locations
All underground utilities in the work area must be positively identified by
a third party, independent, private utility locating company in addition to
any station locating service and coordinated with the station utility
department.
3.7.2
Utility Location Verification
Physically verify underground utility locations, including utility depth,
by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent
construction work is expected to come within three feet of the underground
system.
3.7.3
Utilities Within and Under Concrete, Bituminous Asphalt, and Other
Impervious Surfaces
Utilities located within and under concrete slabs or pier structures,
bridges, parking areas, and the like, are extremely difficult to identify.
Whenever contract work involves chipping, saw cutting, or core drilling
through concrete, bituminous asphalt or other impervious surfaces, the
existing utility location must be coordinated with station utility
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 17
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
departments in addition to location and depth verification by a third
party, independent, private locating company. The third party,
independent, private locating company shall locate utility depth by use of
Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR), X-ray, bore scope, or ultrasound prior to
the start of demolition and construction. Outages to isolate utility
systems must be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be
positively identified. The use of historical drawings does not alleviate
the contractor from meeting this requirement.
3.8
ELECTRICAL
3.9.1
Portable Extension Cords
Size portable extension cords in accordance with manufacturer ratings for
the tool to be powered and protected from damage. Immediately removed from
service all damaged extension cords. Portable extension cords shall meet
the requirements of EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70E, and OSHA electrical standards.
3.9
WORK IN CONFINED SPACES
Comply
29 CFR
29 CFR
permit
with the requirements in Section 34 of USACE EM 385-1-1, OSHA
1910, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146, OSHA Directive CPL 2.100 and OSHA
1926. Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a
system to be used.
a.
Entry Procedures. Prohibit entry into a confined space by personnel
for any purpose, including hot work, until the qualified person has
conducted appropriate tests to ensure the confined or enclosed space is
safe for the work intended and that all potential hazards are
controlled or eliminated and documented. (See Section 34 of USACE
EM 385-1-1 for entry procedures.) All hazards pertaining to the space
shall be reviewed with each employee during review of the AHA.
b.
Forced air ventilation is required for all confined space entry
operations and the minimum air exchange requirements must be maintained
to ensure exposure to any hazardous atmosphere is kept below its'
action level.
c.
Sewer wet wells require continuous atmosphere monitoring with audible
alarm for toxic gas detection.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 35 26
Page 18
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 42 00
SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
08/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications
to establish requirements for the work. These references are identified in
each section by document number, date and title. The document number used
in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing
organization (e.g.
ASTM B564 Standard Specification for Nickel Alloy
Forgings). However, when the standards producing organization has not
assigned a number to a document, an identifying number has been assigned
for reference purposes.
1.2
ORDERING INFORMATION
The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are
referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below, and
if the source of the publications is different from the address of the
sponsoring organization, that information is also provided. Documents
listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the
standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title
rather than by number.
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)
38800 Country Club Drive
Farmington Hills, MI 48331
Ph:
248-848-3700
Fax: 248-848-3701
E-mail: bkstore@concrete.org
Internet: http://www.concrete.org
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
(AASHTO)
444 North Capital Street, NW, Suite 249
Washington, DC 20001
Ph:
202-624-5800
Fax: 202-624-5806
E-Mail: info@aashto.org
Internet: http://www.aashto.org
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700
Chicago, IL 60601-1802
Ph:
312-670-2400
Fax: 312-670-5403
Publications: 800-644-2400
E-mail: pubs@aisc.org
Internet: http://www.aisc.org
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
1819 L Street, NW,11th Floor
Washington, DC 20036
SECTION 01 42 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Ph:
202-293-8020
Fax: 202-293-9287
E-mail: info@ansi.org
Internet: http://www.ansi.org/
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329
Ph:
800-527-4723 or 404-636-8400
Fax: 404-321-5478
E-mail: ashrae@ashrae.org
Internet: http://www.ashrae.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
1800 East Oakton Street
Des Plaines, IL 60018-2187
Ph: 847-699-2929
Fax: 847-768-3434
E-mail: customerservice@asse.org
Internet: http://www.asse.org
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
6666 West Quincy Avenue
Denver, CO 80235
Ph: 800-926-7337
Fax: 303-347-0804
E-mail: smorrison@awwa.org
Internet: http://www.awwa.org
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
Three Park Avenue, M/S 10E
New York, NY 10016-5990
Ph:
800-854-7179 or 800-843-2763
Fax: 212-591-7674
E-mail: infocentral@asme.org
Internet: http://www.asme.org
ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)
600 North 18th Street
P.O. Box 2641
Birmingham, AL 35291
Ph:
205-257-2530
Fax: 205-257-2540
E-Mail: aeicdir@bellsouth.net
Internet: http://www.aeic.org
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Ph:
610-832-9585
Fax: 610-832-9555
E-mail: service@astm.org
Internet: http://www.astm.org
FM GLOBAL (FM)
270 Central Avenue
P.O. Box 7500
Johnston, RI 02919
SECTION 01 42 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Ph:
401-275-3000 ext. 1945
Fax: 401-275-3029
E-mail: servicedesk.myrisk@fmglobal.com
Internet: http://www.fmglobal.com
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH
(FCCCHR)
University of South California
Kaprielian Hall 200
Los Angeles, CA 90089-2531
Ph:
213-740-2032 or 866-545-6340
Fax: 213-740-8399
E-mail: fccchr@usc.edu
Internet: http://www.usc.edu/dept/fccchr
GREEN SEAL (GS)
1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Suite 827
Washington, DC 20036-5525
Ph:
202-872-6400
Fax: 202-872-4324
E-mail: greenseal@greenseal.org
Internet: http://www.greenseal.org
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IES)
120 Wall Street, 17th Floor
New York, NY 10005
Ph:
212-248-5000
Fax: 212-248-5018
E-mail: IES@IES.org
Internet: http://www.IES.org
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
445 Hoes Lane or 2001 L Street, NW. Suite 700
Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331 or Washington, DC 20036-4910 USA
Ph:
732-981-0060 or 800-701-4333
Fax: 732-562-6380
E-mail: onlinesupport@ieee.org or ieeeusa@ieee.org
Internet: http://www.ieee.org
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
5360 Workman Mill Road
Whittier, CA 90601
Ph:
562-699-0541
Fax: 562-699-8031
E-mail: webmaster@iccsafe.org
Internet: www.iccsafe.org
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)
3050 Old Centre Ave. Suite 102
Portage, MI 49024
Ph: 269-488-6382
Fax: 269-488-6383
E-mail: neta@netaworld.org
Internet: http://www.netaworld.org
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752
Rosslyn, VA 22209
SECTION 01 42 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
Ph:
703-841-3200
Fax: 703-841-5900
Internet: http://www.nema.org/
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02169-7471
Ph:
617-770-3000 or 800-344-3555
Fax: 617-770-0700
E-mail: webmaster@nfpa.org
Internet: http://www.nfpa.org
THE SOCIETY OF CABLE TELECOMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERS (SCTE)
140 Philips Road
Exton, PA 19341-1318
Ph:
800-542-5040 or 610-363-6888
Fax: 610-363-5898
E-Mail: scte@scte.org
http://www.scte.org
SOCIETY OF MOTION PICTURE AND TELEVISION ENGINEERS (SMPTE)
3 Baker Avenue, 5th Floor
White Plains, New York 10601
Ph: 914-761-1100
Fax: 914-761-3115
E-mail: smpte@smpte.org
Internet: http://www.smpte.org
STATE OF VIRGINIA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (VAC)
Virginia Code Commission
General Assembly Building, 2nd Floor
910 Capitol Street
Richmond, Virginia 23219
Ph:
804-786-3591
Fax:
804-692-0625
E-mail: tlong@dls.virginia.gov (Tina Long)
Internet:
http://register.dls.virginia.gov
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
40 24th Street, 6th Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4656
Ph: 412-281-2331
Fax: 412-281-9992
E-mail: info@sspc.org
Internet: http://www.sspc.org
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)
1320 . Courthouse Rd., Suite 200
Arlington, VA 22201
Ph: 703-907-7700
Fax: 703-907-7727
Internet: http://www.tiaonline.org
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
2600 N.W. Lake Road
Camas, WA 98607-8542
Ph: 877-854-3577
Fax: 360-817-6278
E-mail: CEC.us@us.ul.com
SECTION 01 42 00
Page 4
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Internet: http://www.ul.com/
UL Directories available through IHS at http://www.ihs.com
UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA)
2711 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 1000
Dallas, TX 75234
Ph:
972-243-3902
Fax: 972-243-3907
E-mail: info@uni-bell.org
Internet: http://www.uni-bell.org
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
Order CRD-C DOCUMENTS from:
U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station
ATTN: Technical Report Distribution Section, Services
Branch, TIC
3909 Halls Ferry Road
Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199
E-mail: MTC-INFO@erdc.usace.army.mil
Internet:
http://gsl.erdc.usace.army.mil/SL/MTC/handbook/handbook.htm
Order Other Documents from:
USACE Publications Depot
Attn: CEHEC-IM-PD
2803 52nd Avenue
Hyattsville, MD 20781-1102
Ph: 301-394-0081
Fax: 301-394-0084
E-mail: pubs-army@usace.army.mil
Internet: http://www.usace.army.mil/publications
or
http://www.hnc.usace.army.mil/Missions/Engineering/TECHINFO.aspx
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)
Order AMS Publications from:
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE (AMS)
Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch
801 Summit Crossing Place, Suite C
Gastonia, NC 28054-2193
Ph:
704-810-8871
Fax: 704-852-4189
E-mail: seed.ams@usda.gov
Internet: http://www.ams.usda.gov/lsg/seed.htm
Order Other Publications from:
U.S. Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Service
14th and Independence Avenue, SW, Room 4028-S
Washington, DC 20250
Ph:
202-720-2791
Fax: 202-720-2166
Internet: http://www.usda.gov/rus
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
Order DOD Documents from:
Room 3A750-The Pentagon
1400 Defense Pentagon
Washington, DC 20301-1400
Ph: 703-571-3343
FAX: 215-697-1462
E-mail: pia@hq.afis.asd.mil
SECTION 01 42 00
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Internet: http://www.dod.gov
Obtain Military Specifications, Standards and Related Publications
from:
Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System
(ASSIST)
Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)
Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)
Building 4/D
700 Robbins Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
Ph:
215-697-6396 - for account/password issues
Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account
registration required
Obtain Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) from:
Whole Building Design Guide (WBDG)
National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS)
1090 Vermont Avenue NW, Suite 700
Washington, CD 20005
Ph: 202-289-7800
Fax: 202-289-1092
Internet: http://www.wbdg.org/references/docs_refs.php
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Ariel Rios Building
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20004
Ph:
202-272-0167
for Fax and E-mail see below
Internet: http://www.epa.gov
--- Some EPA documents are available only from:
National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
5301 Shawnee Road
Alexandria, VA 22312
Ph: 703-605-6050 or 1-688-584-8332
Fax: 703-605-6900
E-mail: info@ntis.gov
Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
Order for sale documents from:
Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
732 North Capitol Street, NW
Washington, DC 20401
Ph:
202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
Order free documents from:
Federal Aviation Administration
Department of Transportation
800 Independence Avenue, SW
Washington, DC 20591
Ph: 1-866-835-5322
Internet: http://www.faa.gov
U.S. FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)
FHWA, Office of Safety
1200 New Jersey Ave., SE
SECTION 01 42 00
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Washington, DC 20590Ph:
202-366-0411
Fax: 202-366-2249
E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.safety.fhwa.dot.gov
Order from:
Superintendent of Documents
U. S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
732 North Capitol Street, NW
Washington, DC 20401
Ph:
202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
General Services Administration
1800 F Street, NW
Washington, DC 20405
Ph: 202-501-0800
Internet: www.GSA.gov
Obtain documents from:
Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System
(ASSIST)
Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)
Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)
Building 4/D
700 Robbins Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
Ph:
215-697-6396 - for account/password issues
Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account
registration required
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
8601 Adelphi Road
College Park, MD 20740-6001
Ph: 866-272-6272
Fax: 301-837-0483
E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.archives.gov
Order documents from:
Superintendent of Documents
U.S.Government Printing Office (GPO)
732 North Capitol Street, NW
Washington, DC 20401
Ph:
202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
U.S. NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND (NAVFAC)
1322 Patterson Ave. SE, Suite 1000
Washington Navy Yard, DC 20374
Ph:
757-322-4200
Fax: 757-322-4416
Internet: http://www.navfac.navy.mil
SECTION 01 42 00
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 42 00
Page 8
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20
QUALITY CONTROL FOR MINOR CONSTRUCTION
02/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1
1.2
(2008; Errata 1-2010; Changes 1-3 2010;
Changes 4-6 2011) Safety and Health
Requirements Manual
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
QC Plan; G
Submit a QC plan within 15 calendar days after receipt of Notice
of Award.
1.3
INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER (KO)
Prior to commencing work on construction, the Contractor can obtain a
single copy set of the current report forms from the KO. The report forms
will consist of the Contractor Production Report, Contractor Production
Report (Continuation Sheet), Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Report, CQC
Report (Continuation Sheet), Preparatory Phase Checklist, Initial Phase
Checklist, Rework Items List, and Testing Plan and Log.
Deliver the following to the KO:
a.
CQC Report: Original and one copy, by 10:00 AM the next
working day after each day that work is performed;
b.
Contractor Production Report: Original and one copy by 10:00
AM the next working day after each day that work is performed;
c.
Preparatory Phase Checklist: Original attached to the
original CQC Report and one copy attached to each copy;
d.
Initial Phase Checklist: Original attached to the original
CQC Report and one copy attached to each copy;
e. Field Test Reports: One copy, within two working days after
the test is performed, attached to the CQC Report;
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
f. QC Meeting Minutes:
the meeting; and
g. QC Certifications:
Certifications."
1.4
1313775
One copy, within two working days after
As required by the paragraph entitled "QC
QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
Establish and maintain a QC program as described in this section. The QC
program consists of a QC Manager, a QC plan, a Coordination and Mutual
Understanding Meeting, QC meetings, three phases of control, submittal
review and approval, testing, and QC certifications and documentation
necessary to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication,
construction and operations which comply with the requirements of this
contract. The QC program shall cover on-site and off-site work and shall
be keyed to the work sequence. No work or testing may be performed unless
the QC Manager is on the work site.
1.4.1
Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Acceptance
The only work that is authorized to proceed prior to the acceptance of the
QC plan is mobilization of storage and office trailers, temporary
utilities, and surveying.
1.4.2
Acceptance
Acceptance of the QC plan is required prior to the start of construction.
The KO reserves the right to require changes in the QC plan and operations
as necessary, including removal of personnel, to ensure the specified
quality of work. The KO reserves the right to interview any member of the
QC organization at any time in order to verify the submitted qualifications.
1.4.3
Notification of Changes
Notify the KO, in writing, of any proposed change, including changes in the
QC organization personnel, a minimum of seven calendar days prior to a
proposed change. Proposed changes shall be subject to the acceptance by
the KO.
1.5
QC ORGANIZATION
1.5.1
1.5.1.1
QC Manager
Duties
Provide a QC Manager at the work site to implement and manage the QC
program. In addition to implementing and managing the QC program, the QC
Manager may perform the duties of project superintendent. The QC Manager
is required to attend the Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting,
conduct the QC meetings, perform the three phases of control, perform
submittal review and approval, ensure testing is performed and provide QC
certifications and documentation required in this contract. The QC Manager
is responsible for managing and coordinating the three phases of control
and documentation performed by others.
1.5.1.2
Qualifications
An individual with a minimum of 10 years combined experience as a
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
superintendent, inspector, QC Manager, project manager, or construction
manager on similar size and type construction contracts which included the
major trades that are part of this contract. The individual must be
familiar with the requirements of the EM 385-1-1 and have experience in the
areas of hazard identification and safety compliance.
1.5.1.3
Construction Quality Management Training
In addition to the above experience and education requirements, the QC
Manager shall have completed the course Construction Quality Management for
Contractors and will have a current certificate.
1.5.2
Alternate QC Manager Duties and Qualifications
Designate an alternate for the QC Manager to serve in the event of the
designated QC Manager's absence. The period of absence may not exceed two
weeks at one time, and not more than 30 workdays during a calendar year.
The qualification requirements for the Alternate QC Manager shall be the
same as for the QC Manager.
1.6
1.6.1
QC PLAN
Requirements
Provide, for acceptance by the KO, a QC plan submitted in a three-ring
binder that covers both on-site and off-site work and includes the
following with a table of contents listing the major sections identified
with tabs.
I.
QC ORGANIZATION: A chart showing the QC organizational structure
and its relationship to the production side of the organization.
II.
NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS: In resume format, for each person in
the QC organization. Include the CQM for Contractors course
certification required by the paragraph entitled "Construction
Quality Management Training".
III.
DUTIES, RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF QC PERSONAL:
person in the QC organization.
IV.
OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS: A listing of outside organizations such
as architectural and consulting engineering firms that will be
employed by the Contractor and a description of the services these
firms will provide.
V.
APPOINTMENT LETTERS: Letters signed by an officer of the firm
appointing the QC Manager and Alternate QC Manager and stating
that they are responsible for managing and implementing the QC
program as described in this contract. Include in this letter the
QC Manager's authority to direct the removal and replacement of
non-conforming work.
VI.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER: Procedures
for reviewing, approving and managing submittals. Provide the
name(s) of the person(s) in the QC organization authorized to
review and certify submittals prior to approval.
VII.
TESTING LABORATORY INFORMATION: Testing laboratory information
required by the paragraphs "Accredited Laboratories" or "Testing
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20
Page 3
Of each
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Laboratory Requirements", as applicable.
VIII.
TESTING PLAN AND LOG: A Testing Plan and Log that includes
the tests required, referenced by the specification paragraph
number requiring the test, the frequency, and the person
responsible for each test.
IX.
PROCEDURES TO COMPLETE REWORK ITEMS: Procedures to identify,
record, track and complete rework items.
X.
DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES:
XI.
LIST OF DEFINABLE FEATURES: A Definable Feature of Work (DFOW)
is a task, which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has
the same control requirements and work crews. The list shall be
cross-referenced to the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the
specification sections. For projects requiring a Progress Chart,
the list of definable features of work shall include but not be
limited to all items of work on the schedule. For projects
requiring a Network Analysis Schedule, the list of definable
features of work shall include but not be limited to all critical
path activities.
XII.
PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THREE PHASES OF CONTROL: For each
DFOW provide Preparatory and Initial Phase Checklists. Each list
shall include a breakdown of quality checks that will be used when
performing the quality control functions, inspections, and tests
required by the contract documents. The preparatory and initial
phases shall be conducted with a view towards obtaining quality
construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems.
XIII.
1.7
Use Government formats.
PERSONNEL MATRIX:
Not Applicable.
XIV.
PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION INSPECTION:
entitled "COMPLETION INSPECTIONS".
XV.
TRAINING PROCEDURES AND TRAINING LOG:
See the paragraph
Not Applicable.
COORDINATION AND MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING MEETING
During the Pre-Construction conference and prior to the start of
construction, discuss the QC program required by this contract. The
purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC
details, including documentation, administration for on-site and off-site
work, and the coordination of the Contractor's management, production and
the QC personnel. At the meeting, the Contractor will be required to
explain how three phases of control will be implemented for each DFOW.
Contractor's personnel required to attend shall include the QC Manager,
project manager, and superintendent. Minutes of the meeting will be
prepared by the QC Manager and signed by both the Contractor and the KO.
The Contractor shall provide a copy of the signed minutes to all
attendees. Repeat the coordination and mutual understanding meeting when a
new QC Manager is appointed.
1.8
QC MEETINGS
After the start of construction, the QC Manager shall conduct QC meetings
once every two weeks at the work site with the superintendent and the
foreman responsible for the ongoing and upcoming work. The QC Manager
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
shall prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the KO
within two working days after the meeting. As a minimum, the following
shall be accomplished at each meeting:
1.9
a.
Review the minutes of the previous meeting;
b.
Review the schedule and the status of work and rework;
c.
Review the status of submittals;
d.
Review the work to be accomplished in the next two weeks and
documentation required;
e.
Resolve QC and production problems (RFIs, etc.);
f.
Address items that may require revising the QC plan; and
g.
Review Accident Prevention Plan (APP).
THREE PHASES OF CONTROL
The three phases of control shall adequately cover both on-site and
off-site work and shall include the following for each DFOW.
1.9.1
Preparatory Phase
Notify the KO at least two work days in advance of each preparatory phase.
Conduct the preparatory phase with the superintendent and the foreman
responsible for the definable feature of work. Document the results of the
preparatory phase actions in the daily CQC Report and in the QC checklist.
Perform the following prior to beginning work on each definable feature of
work:
a.
Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections;
b.
Review the contract drawings;
c.
Verify that appropriate shop drawings and submittals for materials
and equipment have been submitted and approved. Verify receipt of
approved factory test results, when required;
d.
Review the testing plan and ensure that provisions have been made
to provide the required QC testing;
e.
Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work
has been completed;
f.
Examine the required materials, equipment and sample work to
ensure that they are on hand and conform to the approved shop
drawings and submitted data;
g.
Review the APP and appropriate Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) to
ensure that applicable safety requirements are met, and that
required Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are submitted; and
h.
Discuss specific controls used and the construction methods and
the approach that will be used to provide quality construction by
planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each DFOW.
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.9.2
1313775
Initial Phase
Notify the KO at least two work days in advance of each initial phase.
When construction crews are ready to start work on a DFOW, conduct the
Initial Phase with the foreman responsible for that DFOW. Observe the
initial segment of the work to ensure that it complies with contract
requirements. Document the results of the Initial Phase in the daily CQC
Report and in the QC checklist. Perform the following for each DFOW:
1.9.3
a.
Establish the quality of workmanship required;
b.
Resolve conflicts;
c.
Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory; and
d.
Check work procedures for compliance with the APP and the
appropriate AHA to ensure that applicable safety requirements are
met.
Follow-Up Phase
Perform the following for on-going work daily, or more frequently as
necessary, until the completion of each DFOW and document in the daily CQC
Report and in the QC checklist:
1.9.4
a.
Ensure the work is in compliance with contract requirements;
b.
Maintain the quality of workmanship required;
c.
Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory;
d.
Ensure that rework items are being corrected; and
e.
Assure manufacturers representatives have performed necessary
inspections, if required.
Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases
Additional preparatory and initial phases shall be conducted on the same
DFOW if the quality of on-going work is unacceptable, if there are changes
in the applicable QC organization, if there are changes in the on-site
production supervision or work crew, if work on a DFOW is resumed after
substantial period of inactivity, or if other problems develop.
1.9.5
Notification of Three Phases of Control for Off-Site Work
Notify the KO at least two weeks prior to the start of the preparatory and
initial phases.
1.10
SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL
Procedures for submission, review, and approval of submittals are described
in the submittal section of the specification.
1.11
TESTING
Except as stated otherwise in the specification sections, perform sampling
and testing required under this contract.
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.11.1
1313775
Accreditation Requirements
Construction materials testing laboratories must be accredited by a
laboratory accreditation authority and will be required to submit a copy of
the Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The
laboratory's scope of accreditation must include the appropriate ASTM
standards (i.e.; E 329, C 1077, D 3666, D 3740, A 880, E 543) listed in the
technical sections of the specifications. Laboratories engaged in
Hazardous Materials Testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA.
The policy applies to the specific laboratory performing the actual
testing, not just the "Corporate Office."
1.11.2
Laboratory Accreditation Authorities
Laboratory Accreditation Authorities include the National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) administered by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology, the American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), International Accreditation
Services, Inc. (IAS), U. S. Army Corps of Engineers Materials Testing
Center (MTC), the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA),
the Washington Association of Building Officials (WABO) (Approval
authority for WABO is limited to projects within Washington State), and the
Washington Area Council of Engineering Laboratories (WACEL) (Approval
authority by WACEL is limited to projects within the NAVFAC WASH and Public
Works Center Washington geographical area).
1.11.3
Capability Check
The KO retains the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed
laboratory and the laboratory technician's testing procedures, techniques,
and other items pertinent to testing, for compliance with the standards set
forth in this contract.
1.11.4
Test Results
Cite applicable Contract requirements, tests or analytical procedures
used. Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested
or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements. If the
item fails to conform, notify the KO immediately. Conspicuously stamp the
cover sheet for each report in large red letters "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT
CONFORM" to the specification requirements, whichever is applicable. Test
results shall be signed by a testing laboratory representative authorized
to sign certified test reports. Furnish the signed reports,
certifications, and other documentation to the KO.
1.12
1.12.1
QC CERTIFICATIONS
Contractor Quality Control Report Certification
Each CQC Report shall contain the following statement: "On behalf of the
Contractor, I certify that this report is complete and correct and
equipment and material used and work performed during this reporting period
is in compliance with the contract drawings and specifications to the best
of my knowledge except as noted in this report."
1.12.2
Invoice Certification
Furnish a certificate to the KO with each payment request, signed by the QC
Manager, attesting that as-built drawings are current and attesting that
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
the work for which payment is requested, including stored material, is in
compliance with contract requirements.
1.12.3
Completion Certification
Upon completion of work under this contract, the QC Manager shall furnish a
certificate to the KO attesting that "the work has been completed,
inspected, tested and is in compliance with the contract."
1.13
1.13.1
COMPLETION INSPECTIONS
Punch-Out Inspection
Near the completion of all work or any increment thereof established by a
completion time stated in the Contract clause "Commencement, Prosecution,
and Completion of Work," or stated elsewhere in the specifications, the QC
Manager shall conduct an inspection of the work and develop a punch list of
items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications.
Include in the punch list any remaining items of the "Rework Items List",
which were not corrected prior to the Punch-Out inspection. The punch list
shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be
corrected. A copy of the punch list shall be provided to the KO. The QC
Manager or staff shall make follow-on inspections to ascertain that all
deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished, the
Contractor shall notify the Government that the facility is ready for the
Government "Pre-Final Inspection".
1.13.2
Pre-Final Inspection
The Government and QC manager will perform this inspection to verify that
the facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government pre-final
punch list may be developed as a result of this inspection. The QC Manager
shall ensure that all items on this list are corrected prior to notifying
the Government that a "Final" inspection with the customer can be
scheduled. Any items noted on the "Pre-Final" inspection shall be
corrected in a timely manner and shall be accomplished before the contract
completion date for the work or any particular increment thereof if the
project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.
1.13.3
Final Acceptance Inspection
The QC Manager, the superintendent, or other Contractor management
personnel and the KO will be in attendance at this inspection. Additional
Government personnel may be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection
will be formally scheduled by the KO based upon results of the "Pre-Final
Inspection". Notice shall be given to the KO at least 14 days prior to the
final inspection. The notice shall state that all specific items
previously identified to the Contractor as being unacceptable will be
complete by the date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection.
Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete for
this inspection will be cause for the KO to bill the Contractor for the
Government's additional inspection cost in accordance with the contract
clause "Inspection of Construction".
1.14
DOCUMENTATION
Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC program
operations and activities. The forms identified under the paragraph
"INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER (KO)" shall be used. Reports are
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
required for each day work is performed. Account for each calendar day
throughout the life of the contract. Every space on the forms must be
filled in. Use N/A if nothing can be reported in one of the spaces. The
superintendent and the QC Manager must prepare and sign the Contractor
Production and CQC Reports, respectively. The reporting of work shall be
identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. In
the "remarks" section in this report which will contain pertinent
information including directions received, problems encountered during
construction, work progress and delays, conflicts or errors in the drawings
or specifications, field changes, safety hazards encountered, instructions
given and corrective actions taken, delays encountered and a record of
visitors to the work site. For each remark given, identify the Schedule
Activity No. that is associated with the remark.
1.14.1
Quality Control Validation
Establish and maintain the following in a series of three ring binders.
Binders shall be divided and tabbed as shown below. These binders shall be
readily available to the Government's Quality Assurance Team during all
business hours.
1.14.2
a.
All completed Preparatory and Initial Phase Checklists, arranged
by specification section.
b.
All milestone inspections, arranged by Activity/Event Number.
c.
A current up-to-date copy of the Testing and Plan Log with
supporting field test reports, arranged by specification section.
d.
Copies of all contract modifications, arranged in numerical
order. Also include documentation that modified work was
accomplished.
e.
A current up-to-date copy of the Rework Items List.
f.
Maintain up-to-date copies of all punch lists issued by the QC
Staff on the Contractor and Sub-Contractors and all punch lists
issued by the Government.
As-Built Drawings
The QC Manager is required to review the as-built drawings, required by
Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, are kept current on a daily basis and
marked to show deviations, which have been made from the Contract
drawings. Ensure each deviation has been identified with the appropriate
modifying documentation, e.g. PC number, modification number, RFI number,
etc. The QC Manager shall initial each deviation or revision. Upon
completion of work, the QC Manager shall submit a certificate attesting to
the accuracy of the as-built drawings prior to submission to the KO.
1.15
NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCE
The KO will notify the Contractor of any detected non-compliance with the
foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective
action. If the contractor fails or refuses to correct the non-compliant
work, the KO will issue a non compliance notice. Such notice, when
delivered to the Contractor at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient
for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to
comply promptly, the KO may issue an order stopping all or part of the work
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall
make no part of the time lost due to such stop orders the subject of claim
for extension of time, for excess costs, or damages.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
08/09
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
Requirements of this Section apply to, and are a component of, each section
of the specifications.
1.2
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C511
(2007) Standard for Reduced-Pressure
Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH
(FCCCHR)
FCCCHR List
(continuously updated) List of Approved
Backflow Prevention Assemblies
FCCCHR Manual
(1988e9) Manual of Cross-Connection Control
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 241
(2009) Standard for Safeguarding
Construction,Alteration, and Demolition
Operations
NFPA 70
(2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical
Code - 2008 Edition
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
FAA AC 70/7460-1
(Rev K) Obstruction Marking and Lighting
U.S. FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)
MUTCD
1.3
(2000) Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
Devices
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submitted the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
SECTION 01 50 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Construction site plan; G
Traffic control plan; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Backflow Preventer Tests; G
SD-07 Certificates
Backflow Tester Certification; G
Backflow Preventers Certificate of Full Approval
1.4
CONSTRUCTION SITE PLAN
Prior to the start of work, submit a site plan showing the locations and
dimensions of temporary facilities (including layouts and details,
equipment and material storage area (onsite and offsite), and access and
haul routes, avenues of ingress/egress to the fenced area and details of
the fence installation. Identify any areas which may have to be graveled
to prevent the tracking of mud. Indicate if the use of a supplemental or
other staging area is desired. Show locations of safety and construction
fences, site trailers, construction entrances, trash dumpsters, temporary
sanitary facilities, and worker parking areas.
1.5
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS CERTIFICATE
Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List, University of Southern
California, attesting that the design, size and make of each backflow
preventer has satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance
testing and evaluation for the respective level of approval. Certificate
of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable.
1.5.1
Backflow Tester Certificate
Prior to testing, submit to the Contracting Officer certification issued by
the State or local regulatory agency attesting that the backflow tester has
successfully completed a certification course sponsored by the regulatory
agency. Tester must not be affiliated with any company participating in
any other phase of this Contract.
1.5.2
Backflow Prevention Training Certificate
Submit a certificate recognized by the State or local authority that states
the Contractor has completed at least 10 hours of training in backflow
preventer installations. The certificate must be current.
PART 2
2.1
2.1.1
PRODUCTS
TEMPORARY SIGNAGE
Bulletin Board
Immediately upon beginning of work, provide a weatherproof glass-covered
bulletin board not less than 36 by 48 inches in size for displaying the
Equal Employment Opportunity poster, a copy of the wage decision contained
in the contract, Wage Rate Information poster, and other information
SECTION 01 50 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
approved by the Contracting Officer. Locate the bulletin board at the
project site in a conspicuous place easily accessible to all employees, as
approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.1.2
Project and Safety Signs
The requirements for the signs, their content, and location are as required.
Erect signs within 15 days after receipt of the notice to proceed. Correct
the data required by the safety sign daily, with light colored metallic or
non-metallic numerals.
2.2
2.2.1
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Haul Roads
At contractors expense construct access and haul roads necessary for proper
prosecution of the work under this contract. Construct with suitable
grades and widths; sharp curves, blind corners, and dangerous cross traffic
are be avoided. Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and
distinctive markings for the safe movement of traffic. The method of dust
control, although optional, must be adequate to ensure safe operation at
all times. Location, grade, width, and alignment of construction and
hauling roads are subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Lighting
must be adequate to assure full and clear visibility for full width of haul
road and work areas during any night work operations.
2.2.2
Barricades
Erect and maintain temporary barricades to limit public access to hazardous
areas. Whenever safe public access to paved areas such as roads, parking
areas or sidewalks is prevented by construction activities or as otherwise
necessary to ensure the safety of both pedestrian and vehicular traffic
barricades will be required. Securely place barricades clearly visible
with adequate illumination to provide sufficient visual warning of the
hazard during both day and night.
2.2.3
a.
2.2.4
Fencing
Provide fencing along the construction site at all open excavations and
tunnels to control access by unauthorized people. Fencing must be
installed to be able to restrain a force of at least 250 pounds against
it.
Temporary Wiring
Provide temporary wiring in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 70, Article
305-6(b), Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program. Include frequent
inspection of all equipment and apparatus.
2.2.5
Backflow Preventers
Reduced pressure principle type conforming to the applicable requirements
AWWA C511. Provide backflow preventers complete with 150 pound flanged
cast iron, mounted gate valve and strainer, 304 stainless steel or bronze,
internal parts. The particular make, model/design, and size of backflow
preventers to be installed must be included in the latest edition of the
List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies issued by the FCCCHR List
and be accompanied by a Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List.
After installation conduct Backflow Preventer Tests and provide test
SECTION 01 50 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
reports verifing that the installation meets the FCCCHR Manual Standards.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EMPLOYEE PARKING
Contractor employees will park privately owned vehicles in an area
designated by the Contracting Officer. This area will be within reasonable
walking distance of the construction site. Contractor employee parking
must not interfere with existing and established parking requirements of
the government installation.
3.2
3.2.1
AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES
Temporary Utilities
Provide temporary utilities required for construction. Materials may be
new or used, must be adequate for the required usage, not create unsafe
conditions, and not violate applicable codes and standards.
3.2.2
a.
3.2.3
Utilities at Special Locations
Reasonable amounts of utilities will be made available to the
Contractor at the prevailing Government rates. These rates may be
obtained upon application to the Commanding Officer, NAVFAC Midlant, by
way of the Contracting Officer. The Contractor will be responsible for
making connections, providing transformers and meters, and making
disconnections; and for providing backflow preventer devices on
connections to domestic water lines.
Sanitation
a. Provide and maintain within the construction area minimum
field-type sanitary facilities approved by the Contracting Officer and
periodically empty wastes into a municipal, district, or station
sanitary sewage system, or remove waste to a commercial facility.
Obtain approval from the system owner prior to discharge into any
municipal, district, or commercial sanitary sewer system. Any
penalties and / or fines associated with improper discharge will be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Coordinate with the Contracting
Officer and follow station regulations and procedures when discharging
into the station sanitary sewer system. Maintain these conveniences at
all times without nuisance. Include provisions for pest control and
elimination of odors. Government toilet facilities will not be
available to Contractor's personnel.
3.2.4
Telephone
Make arrangements and pay all costs for telephone facilities desired.
3.2.5
Obstruction Lighting of Cranes
Provide a minimum of 2 aviation red or high intensity white obstruction
lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 100 feet above
ground level. Light construction and installation must comply with
FAA AC 70/7460-1. Lights must be operational during periods of reduced
visibility, darkness, and as directed by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 01 50 00
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.2.6
1313775
Fire Protection
Provide temporary fire protection equipment for the protection of personnel
and property during construction. Remove debris and flammable materials
daily to minimize potential hazards.
3.3
3.3.1
TRAFFIC PROVISIONS
Maintenance of Traffic
a.
Conduct operations in a manner that will not close any thoroughfare or
interfere in any way with traffic on railways or highways except with
written permission of the Contracting Officer at least 15 calendar days
prior to the proposed modification date, and provide a Traffic Control
Plan detailing the proposed controls to traffic movement for approval.
The plan must be in accordance with State and local regulations and the
MUTCD, Part VI. Contractor may move oversized and slow-moving vehicles
to the worksite provided requirements of the highway authority have
been met.
b.
Conduct work so as to minimize obstruction of traffic, and maintain
traffic on at least half of the roadway width at all times. Obtain
approval from the Contracting Officer prior to starting any activity
that will obstruct traffic.
c.
Provide, erect, and maintain, at contractors expense, lights, barriers,
signals, passageways, detours, and other items, that may be required by
the Life Safety Signage, overhead protection authority having
jurisdiction.
3.3.2
Protection of Traffic
Maintain and protect traffic on all affected roads during the construction
period except as otherwise specifically directed by the Contracting
Officer. Measures for the protection and diversion of traffic, including
the provision of watchmen and flagmen, erection of barricades, placing of
lights around and in front of equipment the work, and the erection and
maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs, will be as
required by the State and local authorities having jurisdiction. Protect
the traveling public from damage to person and property. Minimize the
interference with public traffic on roads selected for hauling material to
and from the site. Investigate the adequacy of existing roads and their
allowable load limit. Contractor is responsible for the repair of any
damage to roads caused by construction operations.
3.3.3
Rush Hour Restrictions
Do not interfere with the peak traffic flows preceding and during normal
operations without notification to and approval by the Contracting Officer.
3.3.4
a.
Commercial Vehicles In/Out of NAVSTA/NAS Norfolk, VA
Definitions.
(1)
(2)
Commercial vans and trucks are differentiated as follows:
Closed truck. A truck enclosed on four sides, top, and bottom to
which entry can be made only through end or side doors and to
which a seal can be applied.
Open truck.
A truck which is either fully open, such as flatbed,
SECTION 01 50 00
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
or contained by wooden slats or sideboards; or any truck to which
a seal cannot be applied.
b.
c.
(3)
Commercial vehicles. A common contract or commercial truck
without a decal issued by Norfolk, VA.
(4)
Trailer. A non-self-propelled enclosed cargo container used for
the transportation of goods, e.g., a trailer pulled by a truck.
Instructions and directions. Ensure that commercial trucks and
trailers follow the instructions below to provide for effective control
over their entry and exit from the base, movement within the base, and
to reduce congestion both at the gates and within the base. In
general, commercial trucks and common carriers are required to enter
and exit through specified gates and process immediately to a truck
control point for cargo manifest check. The driver shall be issued a
Material Movement Control and Gate Pass, routing instructions, and
directions to depart the base via a designated exit point where the
pass is to be turned in.
(1)
Common contract and commercial trucks going to the area of
Building LP-84 (MAC Terminal), NAS Norfolk shall enter and exit
Gate 22. Gate 22 hours of operations are 5:30 a.m. through 6:30
p.m. and 10:30 p.m. through 3:00 a.m., 7 days a week. The gate is
closed on holidays.
(2)
Other common contract and commercial trucks, except as noted
below are allowed to enter the Naval Base through any Gate and
exit through Gate 2.
(3)
Common contract and commercial trucks which enter the base may
depart through Gate 5, Gate 4, and Gate 22 only. The exit Truck
Control Point at Gate 4 is operated from 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.
(4)
For concrete- and asphalt-carrying trucks, the Resident Officer
in Charge of Construction (ROICC), Norfolk VA shall arrange entry
and exit through any gate other than Gate 2.
(5)
Contractor vehicles with black Norfolk Naval Base decals shall be
granted routine access to the base at all times. These trucks
shall not enter or exit the base through Gate 2. These trucks are
subject to random checks and searches at exit gates like other
personal and commercial vehicles to ensure that Government
property is not being taken off the base without authorization and
documentation.
Movement and Exit
(1)
Material movement control and gate pass. A Material Movement
Control and Gate Pass (5ND GEN 5510/1) is required for the removal
of Government, public, or private property from NAVSTA and NAS
Norfolk complex via commercial vans and truck.
(a) The Material Movement Control and Gate Pass shall be
originated by the Naval Base Police Truck Control Officer, and
shall be given to drivers of commercial trucks for retention
during transit to intermediate stops and to the exit gates. The
pass shall be presented by the driver to the Truck Control Officer
at the exit truck stop. If the driver has more than one delivery
SECTION 01 50 00
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
or pickup point, the driver shall present the pass at each stop so
the new activity may fill in appropriate information on the pass.
A copy of the pass shall be retained by each activity after
appropriate information has been entered; remaining copies of the
pass shall be returned to the driver. Passes are subject to
review by the Naval Base Police Department during transit and
within command areas by activity officials for verification of
cargo content and to determine if drivers are transiting promptly
and by the proper route. For trailers expecting to be picked up
and depart outside normal working hours, pre-prepared passes shall
be provided by the activity duty officer or authorized supervising
person prior to close of working hours. Trucking companies
expecting to pick up trailers after working hours should be
instructed to pick up a Material Movement Control and Gate Pass
from the responsible activity. The activity duty officer or
official shall notify Base Police Headquarters to clear the truck
for exit at Gate 5 if the seal and Material Movement Control and
Gate Pass are in order.
(b) When filling out a Material Movement Control and Gate Pass,
the last activity where business is conducted on the base is
responsible to ensure that the original of the pass is given to
the driver to turn in to the Truck Control officer at the truck
control stops.
(c) The Material Movement Control and Gate Pass shall be turned
in by the vehicle driver to a base police officer at a truck
control stop when he departures from the base.
(d) Government or commercial vehicles departing Naval Base,
Norfolk with Government, public, or private property shall possess
a Material Movement Control and Gate Pass filled out by a naval
officer or equivalent grade civilian within the driver's chain of
command. The Material Movement Control and Gate Pass shall be
inspected and verified during random gate departure searches.
(2)
Car Seals
(a) Commercial, sealable, closed trailers and trucks, full,
partially full, or empty, destined to leave the base shall be
sealed upon departure from any activity. The seal number and
trailer or truck number shall be entered on the Material Movement
Control and Gate Pass.
(b) Commercial closed trailers and trucks received empty for
loading with Government material shall have a Navy car seal
affixed to cargo doors after loading and prior to departing
through designated gates.
(c) Closed trailers and trucks which have been only partially
loaded or off-loaded shall be sealed completely at the end of
working hours with a Navy car seal.
(d) Application of Navy car seals is the responsibility of the
activity in charge of loading and unloading of trailers and trucks.
(e) The Naval Station Police Department will conduct random
checks of contents, seals, and forms of trailers and trucks on the
Naval Base complex.
SECTION 01 50 00
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
(f) A truck driver whose van or truck does not have a properly
completed Material Movement Control and Gate Pass or car seal will
be refused exit clearance.
3.4
3.4.1
CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Safety
Protect the integrity of any installed safety systems or personnel safety
devices. If entrance into systems serving safety devices is required, the
Contractor must obtain prior approval from the Contracting Officer. If it
is temporarily necessary to remove or disable personnel safety devices in
order to accomplish contract requirements, provide alternative means of
protection prior to removing or disabling any permanently installed safety
devices or equipment and obtain approval from the Contracting Officer.
3.4.2
Administrative Field Offices
Provide and maintain administrative field office facilities within the
construction area at the designated site. Government office and warehouse
facilities will not be available to the Contractor's personnel.
3.4.3
Storage Area
Construct a temporary 8 foot high chain link fence around trailers and
materials. Include plastic strip inserts, colored brown, so that
visibility through the fence is obstructed. Fence posts may be driven, in
lieu of concrete bases, where soil conditions permit. Do not place or
store Trailers, materials, or equipment outside the fenced area unless such
trailers, materials, or equipment are assigned a separate and distinct
storage area by the Contracting Officer away from the vicinity of the
construction site but within the installation boundaries. Trailers,
equipment, or materials must not be open to public view with the exception
of those items which are in support of ongoing work on any given day. Do
not stockpile materials outside the fence in preparation for the next day's
work. Park mobile equipment, such as tractors, wheeled lifting equipment,
cranes, trucks, and like equipment within the fenced area at the end of
each work day.
3.4.4
Supplemental Storage Area
Upon Contractor's request, the Contracting Officer will designate another
or supplemental area for the Contractor's use and storage of trailers,
equipment, and materials. This area may not be in close proximity of the
construction site but will be within the installation boundaries. Fencing
of materials or equipment will not be required at this site; however, the
Contractor is responsible for cleanliness and orderliness of the area used
and for the security of any material or equipment stored in this area.
Utilities will not be provided to this area by the Government.
3.4.5
a.
Appearance of Trailers
Trailers utilized by the Contractor for administrative or material
storage purposes must present a clean and neat exterior appearance and
be in a state of good repair. Trailers which, in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer, require exterior painting or maintenance will not
be allowed on installation property.
SECTION 01 50 00
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.4.6
1313775
Trailers or Storage Buildings
a.
Trailers or storage buildings will be permitted, where space is
available, subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer. The
trailers or buildings shall be in good condition, free from visible
damage rust and deterioration, and meet all applicable safety
requirements. Trailers shall be roadworthy and comply with all
appropriate state and local vehicle requirements. Failure to maintain
storage trailers or buildings to these standards shall result in the
removal of non-complying units at the Contractor's expense. A sign not
smaller than 24 by 24 inches shall be conspicuously placed on the
trailer depicting the company name, business phone number, and
emergency phone number. Trailers shall be anchored to resist high
winds and must meet applicable state of local standards for anchoring
mobile trailers.
b.
LANTNAVFACENGCOM Trailer Sign. A sign shall be mounted on the trailer
or building that shows the company name, phone number, emergency phone
number and conforms to the following requirements and sketch :
Graphic panel:
Copy:
Aluminum, painted blue
Screen painted or vinyl die-cut, white
Typeface:
Univers 65 u/lc
See Sketch No. 01500 (graphic).
3.4.7
a.
3.4.8
Maintenance of Storage Area
Keep fencing in a state of good repair and proper alignment. Grassed
or unpaved areas, which are not established roadways, will be covered
with a layer of gravel as necessary to prevent rutting and the tracking
of mud onto paved or established roadways, should the Contractor elect
to traverse them with construction equipment or other vehicles; gravel
gradation will be at the Contractor's discretion. Mow and maintain
grass located within the boundaries of the construction site for the
duration of the project. Grass and vegetation along fences, buildings,
under trailers, and in areas not accessible to mowers will be edged or
trimmed neatly.
Security Provisions
Provide adequate outside security lighting at the Contractor's temporary
facilities. The Contractor will be responsible for the security of its own
equipment; in addition, the Contractor will notify the appropriate law
enforcement agency requesting periodic security checks of the temporary
project field office.
3.4.9
Storage Size and Location
The site available for storage must be within 1,000 feet of the operations
area.
3.4.10
Storage in Existing Buildings
The Contractor will be working around existing buildings; the storage of
material will not be allowed in these buildings.
SECTION 01 50 00
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.4.11
1313775
Weather Protection of Temporary Facilities and Stored Materials
Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical
openings in the building are monitored carefully. Take immediate actions
required to seal off such openings when rain or other detrimental weather
is imminent, and at the end of each workday. Ensure that the openings are
completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building
from damage.
3.4.11.1
Building and Site Storm Protection
When a warning of gale force winds is issued, take precautions to minimize
danger to persons, and protect the work and nearby Government property.
Precautions must include, but are not limited to, closing openings;
removing loose materials, tools and equipment from exposed locations; and
removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work. Close openings
in the work when storms of lesser intensity pose a threat to the work or
any nearby Government property.
3.4.11.2
Hurricane Condition of Readiness
Unless directed otherwise, comply with:
a.
Condition FOUR (Sustained winds of 50 knots or greater expected within
72 hours): Normal daily jobsite cleanup and good housekeeping
practices. Collect and store in piles or containers scrap lumber,
waste material, and rubbish for removal and disposal at the close of
each work day. Maintain the construction site including storage areas,
free of accumulation of debris. Stack form lumber in neat piles less
than 4 feet high. Remove all debris, trash, or objects that could
become missile hazards. Contact Contracting Officer for Condition of
Readiness (COR) updates and completion of required actions.
b.
Condition THREE (Sustained winds of 50 knots or greater expected within
48 hours): Maintain "Condition FOUR" requirements and commence
securing operations necessary for "Condition ONE" which cannot be
completed within 18 hours. Cease all routine activities which might
interfere with securing operations. Commence securing and stow all
gear and portable equipment. Make preparations for securing
buildings. Review requirements pertaining to "Condition TWO" and
continue action as necessary to attain "Condition THREE" readiness.
Contact Contracting Officer for weather and COR updates and completion
of required actions.
c.
Condition TWO (Sustained winds of 50 knots or greater expected within
24 hours): Curtail or cease routine activities until securing
operation is complete. Reinforce or remove form work and scaffolding.
Secure machinery, tools, equipment, materials, or remove from the
jobsite. Expend every effort to clear all missile hazards and loose
equipment from general base areas. Contact Contracting Officer for
weather and Condition of Readiness (COR) updates and completion of
required actions.
d.
Condition ONE. (Sustained winds of 50 knots or greater expected within
12 hours): Secure the jobsite, and leave Government premises.
3.5
PLANT COMMUNICATION
Whenever the Contractor has the individual elements of its plant so located
SECTION 01 50 00
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
that operation by normal voice between these elements is not satisfactory,
the Contractor must install a satisfactory means of communication, such as
telephone or other suitable devices and made available for use by
Government personnel.
3.6
TEMPORARY PROJECT SAFETY FENCING
As soon as practicable, but not later than 15 days after the date
established for commencement of work, furnish and erect temporary project
safety fencing at the work site. The safety fencing must be a high
visibility orange colored, high density polyethylene grid or approved
equal, a minimum of 42 inches high, supported and tightly secured to steel
posts located on maximum 10 foot centers, constructed at the approved
location. Maintain the safety fencing during the life of the contract and,
upon completion and acceptance of the work, will become the property of the
Contractor and be removed from the work site.
3.7
CLEANUP
Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the
like from the work site daily. Any dirt or mud which is tracked onto paved
or surfaced roadways must be cleaned away. Store within the fenced area
described above or at the supplemental storage area any materials resulting
from demolition activities which are salvageable. Neatly stacked stored
materials not in trailers, whether new or salvaged.
3.8
RESTORATION OF STORAGE AREA
Upon completion of the project remove the bulletin board, signs,
barricades, haulroads, and any other temporary products from the site.
After removal of trailers, materials, and equipment from within the fenced
area, remove the fence that will become the property of the Contractor.
Restore to the original or better condition, areas used by the Contractor
for the storage of equipment or material, or other use. Gravel used to
traverse grassed areas must be removed and the area restored to its
original condition, including top soil and seeding as necessary.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 50 00
Page 11
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
11/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA 530/F-93/004
(1993; Rev O; Updates I, II, IIA, IIB, and
III) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid
Waste (Vol IA, IB, IC, and II) (SW-846)
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.120
Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency
Response
40 CFR 112
Oil Pollution Prevention
40 CFR 241
Guidelines for Disposal of Solid Waste
40 CFR 243
Guidelines for the Storage and Collection
of Residential, Commercial, and
Institutional Solid Waste
40 CFR 258
Subtitle D Landfill Requirements
40 CFR 260
Hazardous Waste Management System:
40 CFR 261
Identification and Listing of Hazardous
Waste
40 CFR 262
Standards Applicable to Generators of
Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 263
Standards Applicable to Transporters of
Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 264
Standards for Owners and Operators of
Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and
Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 265
Interim Status Standards for Owners and
Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment,
Storage, and Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 266
Standards for the Management of Specific
Hazardous Wastes and Specific Types of
Hazardous Waste Management Facilities
40 CFR 268
Land Disposal Restrictions
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 1
General
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
40 CFR 270
EPA Administered Permit Programs:
Hazardous Waste Permit Program
40 CFR 271
Requirements for Authorization of State
Hazardous Waste Programs
40 CFR 272
Approved State Hazardous Waste Management
Programs
40 CFR 273
Standards For Universal Waste Management
40 CFR 279
Standards for the Management of Used Oil
40 CFR 280
Technical Standards and Corrective Action
Requirements for Owners and Operators of
Underground Storage Tanks (UST)
40 CFR 300
National Oil and Hazardous Substances
Pollution Contingency Plan
40 CFR 355
Emergency Planning and Notification
40 CFR 372-SUBPART D
Specific Toxic Chemical Listings
40 CFR 761
Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)
Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in
Commerce, and Use Prohibitions
40 CFR 82
Protection of Stratospheric Ozone
49 CFR 171
General Information, Regulations, and
Definitions
49 CFR 172
Hazardous Materials Table, Special
Provisions, Hazardous Materials
Communications, Emergency Response
Information, and Training Requirements
49 CFR 173
Shippers - General Requirements for
Shipments and Packagings
49 CFR 178
Specifications for Packagings
1.2
1.2.1
The
DEFINITIONS
Sediment
Soil and other debris that have eroded and have been transported by runoff
water or wind.
1.2.2
Solid Waste
Garbage, refuse, debris, sludge, or other discharged material, including
solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained gaseous materials resulting from
domestic, industrial, commercial, mining, or agricultural operations.
Types of solid waste typically generated at construction sites may include:
a.
Green waste:
The vegetative matter from landscaping, land clearing and
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
grubbing, including, but not limited to, grass, bushes, scrubs, small
trees and saplings, tree stumps and plant roots. Marketable trees,
grasses and plants that are indicated to remain, be re-located, or be
re-used are not included.
b.
Surplus soil: Existing soil that is in excess of what is required for
this work, including aggregates intended, but not used, for on-site
mixing of concrete, mortars and paving. Contaminated soil meeting the
definition of hazardous material or hazardous waste is not included.
c.
Debris: Non-hazardous solid material generated during the
construction, demolition, or renovation of a structure which exceeds
2.5 inch particle size that is: a manufactured object; plant or animal
matter; or natural geologic material (e.g. cobbles and boulders),
broken or removed concrete, masonry, and rock asphalt paving; ceramics;
roofing paper and shingles. Inert materials may be reinforced with or
contain ferrous wire, rods, accessories and weldments. A mixture of
debris and other material such as soil or sludge is also subject to
regulation as debris if the mixture is comprised primarily of debris by
volume, based on visual inspection.
d.
Wood: Dimension and non-dimension lumber, plywood, chipboard,
hardboard. Treated and/or painted wood that meets the definition of
lead contaminated or lead based contaminated paint is not included.
e.
Scrap metal: Scrap and excess ferrous and non-ferrous metals such as
reinforcing steel, structural shapes, pipe and wire that are recovered
or collected and disposed of as scrap. Scrap metal meeting the
definition of hazardous material or hazardous waste is not included.
f.
Paint cans: Metal cans that are empty of paints, solvents, thinners
and adhesives. If permitted by the paint can label, a thin dry film
may remain in the can.
g.
Recyclables: Materials, equipment and assemblies such as doors,
windows, door and window frames, plumbing fixtures, glazing and mirrors
that are recovered and sold as recyclable. Metal meeting the
definition of lead contaminated or lead based paint contaminated may be
included as recyclable if sold to a scrap metal company. Paint cans
may not be included as recyclable if sold to a scrap metal company.
h.
Hazardous Waste: By definition, to be a hazardous waste a material
must first meet the definition of a solid waste. Hazardous waste and
hazardous debris are special cases of solid waste. They have
additional regulatory controls and must be handled separately. They
are thus defined separately in this document.
Material not regulated as solid waste are: nuclear source or byproduct
materials regulated under the Federal Atomic Energy Act of 1954 as
amended; suspended or dissolved materials in domestic sewage effluent
or irrigation return flows, or other regulated point source discharges;
regulated air emissions; and fluids or wastes associated with natural
gas or crude oil exploration or production.
1.2.3
Hazardous Debris
As defined in Solid Waste paragraph, debris that contains listed hazardous
waste (either on the debris surface, or in its interstices, such as pore
structure) per 40 CFR 261; or debris that exhibits a characteristic of
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
hazardous waste per 40 CFR 261.
1.2.4
Chemical Wastes
This includes salts, acids, alkalizes, herbicides, pesticides, and organic
chemicals.
1.2.5
Garbage
Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and
consumption of food.
1.2.6
Hazardous Waste
Any discarded material, liquid, solid, or gas, which meets the definition
of hazardous material or is designated hazardous waste by the Environmental
Protection Agency or State Hazardous Control Authority as defined in
40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265,
40 CFR 266, 40 CFR 268, 40 CFR 270, 40 CFR 271, 40 CFR 272, 40 CFR 273,
40 CFR 279, and 40 CFR 280.
1.2.7
Hazardous Materials
Hazardous materials as defined in 49 CFR 171 and listed in 49 CFR 172.
Hazardous material is any material that:
a.
Is regulated as a hazardous material per 49 CFR 173, or
b.
Requires a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) per 29 CFR 1910.120, or
c.
During end use, treatment, handling, packaging, storage, transpiration,
or disposal meets or has components that meet or have potential to meet
the definition of a hazardous waste as defined by 40 CFR 261 Subparts
A, B, C, or D.
Designation of a material by this definition, when separately regulated or
controlled by other instructions or directives, does not eliminate the need
for adherence to that hazard-specific guidance which takes precedence over
this instruction for "control" purposes. Such material include ammunition,
weapons, explosive actuated devices, propellants, pyrotechnics, chemical
and biological warfare materials, medical and pharmaceutical supplies,
medical waste and infectious materials, bulk fuels, radioactive materials,
and other materials such as asbestos, mercury, and polychlorinated
biphenyls (PCBs). Nonetheless, the exposure may occur incident to
manufacture, storage, use and demilitarization of these items.
1.2.8
Waste Hazardous Material (WHM)
Any waste material which because of its quantity, concentration, or
physical, chemical, or infectious characteristics may pose a substantial
hazard to human health or the environment and which has been so
designated. Used oil not containing any hazardous waste, as defined above,
falls under this definition.
1.2.9
Oily Waste
Those materials which are, or were, mixed with used oil and have become
separated from that used oil. Oily wastes also means materials, including
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
wastewaters, centrifuge solids, filter residues or sludges, bottom
sediments, tank bottoms, and sorbents which have come into contact with and
have been contaminated by, used oil and may be appropriately tested and
discarded in a manner which is in compliance with other State and local
requirements.
This definition includes materials such as oily rags, "kitty litter"
sorbent clay and organic sorbent material. These materials may be land
filled provided that:
a. It is not prohibited in other State regulations or local ordinances
b. The amount generated is "de minimus" (a small amount)
c. It is the result of minor leaks or spills resulting from normal process
operations
d. All free-flowing oil has been removed to the practical extent possible
Large quantities of this material, generated as a result of a major spill
or in lieu of proper maintenance of the processing equipment, are a solid
waste. As a solid waste, a hazardous waste determination must be performed
prior to disposal. As this can be an expensive process, it is recommended
that this type of waste be minimized through good housekeeping practices
and employee education.
1.2.10
Regulated Waste
Those solid waste that have specific additional Federal, state, or local
controls for handling, storage, or disposal.
1.2.11
Class I Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)
Class I ODS is defined in Section 602(a) of The Clean Air Act and includes
the following chemicals:
chlorofluorocarbon-11 (CFC-11)
chlorofluorocarbon-12 (CFC-12)
chlorofluorocarbon-13 (CFC-13)
chlorofluorocarbon-111
(CFC-111)
chlorofluorocarbon-112
(CFC-112)
chlorofluorocarbon-113
(CFC-113)
chlorofluorocarbon-114
(CFC-114)
chlorofluorocarbon-115
(CFC-115)
chlorofluorocarbon-211
(CFC-211)
chlorofluorocarbon-212
(CFC-212)
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
chlorofluorocarbon-213
(CFC-213)
chlorofluorocarbon-214
(CFC-214)
chlorofluorocarbon-215
(CFC-215)
chlorofluorocarbon-216
(CFC-216)
chlorofluorocarbon-217
(CFC-217)
chlorofluorocarbon-500
(CFC-500)
chlorofluorocarbon-502
(CFC-502)
chlorofluorocarbon-503
(CFC-503)
halon-1211
halon-1301
halon-2402
carbon tetrachloride
methyl bromide
methyl chloroform
Class II ODS is defined in Section 602(s) of The Clean Air Act and includes
the following chemicals:
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-21 (HCFC-21)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-22 (HCFC-22)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-31 (HCFC-31)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-121 (HCFC-121)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-122 (HCFC-122)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-123 (HCFC-123)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-124 (HCFC-124)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-131 (HCFC-131)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-132 (HCFC-132)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-133 (HCFC-133)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-141 (HCFC-141)
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-142 (HCFC-142)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-221 (HCFC-221)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-222 (HCFC-222)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-223 (HCFC-223)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-224 (HCFC-224)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-225 (HCFC-225)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-226 (HCFC-226)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-231 (HCFC-231)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-232 (HCFC-232)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-233 (HCFC-233)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-234 (HCFC-234)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-235 (HCFC-235)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-251 (HCFC-251)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-252 (HCFC-252)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-253 (HCFC-253)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-261 (HCFC-261)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-262 (HCFC-262)
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-271 (HCFC-271)
1.2.11.1
Universal Waste
The universal waste regulations streamline collection requirements for
certain hazardous wastes in the following categories: batteries,
pesticides, mercury-containing equipment (e.g., thermostats) and lamps
(e.g., fluorescent bulbs). The rule is designed to reduce hazardous waste
in the municipal solid waste (MSW) stream by making it easier for universal
waste handlers to collect these items and send them for recycling or proper
disposal. These regulations can be found at 40 CFR 273.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Preconstruction Survey; G
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Solid Waste Management Plan and Permit; G
Regulatory Notifications; G
Environmental Management Plan; G
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan; G
Storm Water Notice of Intent (for NPDES coverage under the general
permit for construction activities); G
Dirt and Dust Control Plan
Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Laboratory Analysis
Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Reports
Storm Water Inspection Reports for General Permit
Contractor 40 CFR employee training records
Solid Waste Management Report; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Some of the records listed below are also required as part of
other submittals. For the "Records" submittal, maintain on-site a
separate three-ring Environmental Records binder and submit at the
completion of the project. Make separate parts to the binder
corresponding to each of the applicable sub items listed below.
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan compliance notebook; G
Waste Determination Documentation
Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste
Contractor 40 CFR Employee Training Records
Solid Waste Management Permit
Solid Waste Management Report
Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log; G
Hazardous Waste/Debris Management
Regulatory Notifications
1.4
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
Provide and maintain, during the life of the contract, environmental
protection as defined. Plan for and provide environmental protective
measures to control pollution that develops during normal construction
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
practice. Plan for and provide environmental protective measures required
to correct conditions that develop during the construction of permanent or
temporary environmental features associated with the project. Comply with
Federal, State, and local regulations pertaining to the environment,
including water, air, solid waste, hazardous waste and substances, oily
substances, and noise pollution.
The Contractor may be required to promptly conduct tests and procedures for
the purpose of assessing whether construction operations are in compliance
with Applicable Environmental Laws. Analytical work shall be done by
qualified laboratories; and where required by law, the laboratories shall
be certified.
1.4.1
Environmental Compliance Assessment Training and Tracking System
(ECATTS)
The QC Manager is responsible for environmental compliance on projects
unless an Environmental Manager is named. The QC Manager (and alternative
QC Manager) or Environmental Manager shall complete ECATTS training prior
to starting respective portions of on-site work under this contract. If
personnel changes occur for any of these positions after starting work,
replacement personnel shall complete ECATTS training within 14 days of
assignment to the project
Submit an ECATTS certificate of completion for personnel who have completed
the required "Environmental Compliance Assessment Training and Tracking
System (ECATTS)" training. This training is web-based and can be accessed
from any computer with Internet access using the following instructions.
Register for NAVFAC Environmental Compliance Training and Tracking System,
by logging on to http://navfac.ecatts.com/. Obtain the password for
registration from the Contracting Officer.
This training has been structured to allow contractor personnel to receive
credit under this contract and also to carry forward credit to future
contracts. Contractors shall ensure that the QC Manager (and alternate QC
Manager) or Environmental Manager review their training plans for new
modules or updated training requirements prior to beginning work. Some
training modules are tailored for specific State regulatory requirements;
therefore, Contractors working in multiple states will be requires to
re-take modules tailored to the state where the contract work is being
performed.
ECATTS is available for use by all contractor and subcontractor personnel
associated with this project. These other personnel are encouraged (but
not required) to take the training and may do so at their discretion.
1.4.2
Conformance with the Environmental Management System
The Contractor shall perform work under this contract consistent with the
policy and objectives identified in the installation's Environmental
Management System (EMS). The Contractor shall perform work in a manner
that conforms to objectives and targets, environmental programs and
operational controls identified by the EMS. The Contractor will provide
monitoring and measurement information as necessary to address
environmental performance relative to environmental, energy, and
transportation management goals. In the event an EMS nonconformance or
environmental noncompliance associated with the contracted services, tasks,
or actions occurs, the Contractor shall take corrective and/or preventative
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
actions. In addition, the Contractor shall ensure that its employees are
aware of their roles and responsibilities under the EMS and how these EMS
roles and responsibilities affect work performed under the contract.
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that their employees receive
applicable environmental and occupational health and safety training, and
keep up to date on regulatory required specific training for the type of
work to be conducted onsite. All on-site Contractor personnel, and their
subcontractor personnel, performing tasks that have the potential to cause
a significant environmental impact shall be competent on the basis of
appropriate education, training or experience. Upon contract award, the
Contracting Officer's Representative will notify the installation's EMS
coordinator to arrange EMS training. The installation's EMS coordinator
shall identify training needs associated with environmental aspects and the
EMS, and arrange training or take other action to meet these needs. The
Contractor shall provide training documentation to the Contracting
Officer. The EMS coordinator shall retain associated records.
1.5
1.5.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Preconstruction Survey
Perform a Preconstruction Survey of the project site with the Contracting
Officer, and take photographs showing existing environmental conditions in
and adjacent to the site. Submit a report for the record.
1.5.2
Regulatory Notifications
The Contractor is responsible for all regulatory notification requirements
in accordance with Federal, State and local regulations. In cases where
the Navy must also provide public notification (such as stormwater
permitting), the Contractor must coordinate with the Contracting Officer.
The Contractor shall submit copies of all regulatory notifications to the
Contracting Officer prior to commencement of work activities. Typically,
regulatory notifications must be provided for the following (this listing
is not all inclusive): demolition, renovation, NPDES defined site work,
remediation of controlled substances (asbestos, hazardous waste, lead
paint).
1.5.3
Environmental Brief
Attend an environmental brief to be included in the preconstruction
meeting. Provide the following information: types, quantities, and use of
hazardous materials that will be brought onto the activity; types and
quantities of wastes/wastewater that may be generated during the contract.
Discuss the results of the Preconstruction Survey at this time.
Prior to initiating any work on site, meet with the Contracting Officer and
activity environmental staff to discuss the proposed Environmental
Management Plan. Develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of
environmental protection, including measures for protecting natural
resources, required reports, required permits, permit requirements, and
other measures to be taken.
1.5.4
Environmental Manager
Appoint in writing an Environmental Manager for the project site. The
Environmental Manager will be directly responsible for coordinating
contractor compliance with Federal, State, local, and station
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
requirements. The Environmental Manager will ensure compliance with
Hazardous Waste Program requirements (including hazardous waste handling,
storage, manifesting, and disposal); implement the Environmental Management
Plan; ensure that all environmental permits are obtained, maintained, and
closed out; ensure compliance with Storm Water Program Management
requirements; ensure compliance with Hazardous Materials (storage,
handling, and reporting) requirements; and coordinate any remediation of
regulated substances (lead, asbestos, PCB transformers). This can be a
collateral position; however the person in this position must be trained to
adequately accomplish the following duties: ensure waste segregation and
storage compatibility requirements are met; inspect and manage Satellite
Accumulation areas; ensure only authorized personnel add wastes to
containers; ensure all Contractor personnel are trained in 40 CFR
requirements in accordance with their position requirements; coordinate
removal of waste containers; and maintain the Environmental Records binder
and required documentation, including environmental permits compliance and
close-out.
1.5.5
Contractor 40 CFR Employee Training Records
Prepare and maintain employee training records throughout the term of the
contract meeting applicable 40 CFR requirements. The Contractor will
ensure every employee completes a program of classroom instruction or
on-the-job training that teaches them to perform their duties in a way that
ensures compliance with Federal, State and local regulatory requirements
for RCRA Large Quantity Generator. The Contractor will provide a Position
Description for each employee, by subcontractor, based on the Davis-Bacon
Wage Rate designation or other equivalent method, evaluating the employee's
association with hazardous and regulated wastes. This Position Description
will include training requirements as defined in 40 CFR 265 for a Large
Quantity Generator facility. Submit these training records to the
Contracting Officer at the conclusion of the project, unless otherwise
directed.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
Prior to initiating any work on site, the Contractor will meet with the
Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Environmental Protection Plan
and develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of environmental
protection, including measures for protecting natural resources, required
reports, and other measures to be taken. The Contractor's Environmental
Plan shall incorporate construction related objectives and targets from the
installation's Environmental Management System. The Environmental
Management Plan will be submitted in the following format and shall include
the elements specified below.
a.
Description of the Environmental Management Plan
(1)
General overview and purpose
(a) A brief description of each specific plan required by
environmental permit or elsewhere in this contract.
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 11
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
(b) The duties and level of authority assigned to the person(s) on
the job site that oversee environmental compliance.
(c) A copy of any standard or project specific operating
procedures that will be used to effectively manage and protect the
environment on the project site.
(d) Communication and training procedures that will be used to
convey environmental management requirements to contractor
employees and subcontractors.
(e) Emergency contact information contact information (office
phone number, cell phone number, and e-mail address).
(2)
(3)
b.
c.
d.
A letter signed by an officer of the firm appointing the
Environmental Manager and stating that he/she is responsible for
managing and implementing the Environmental Program as described
in this contract. Include in this letter the Environmental
Manager's authority to direct the removal and replacement of
non-conforming work.
Management of Natural Resources
(1)
Land resources
(2)
Tree protection
(3)
Replacement of damaged landscape features
(4)
Temporary construction
Protection of Historical and Archaeological Resources
(1)
Objectives
(2)
Methods
Storm Water Management and Control
(1)
Ground cover
(2)
Erodible soils
(3)
Temporary measures
(4)
e.
General site information
(a)
Mechanical retardation and control of runoff
(b)
Vegetation and mulch
Effective selection, implementation and maintenance of Best
Management Practices (BMPs).
Protection of the Environment from Waste Derived from Contractor
Operations
(1)
Control and disposal of solid and sanitary waste. If Section 01
74 19.05 20 is included in the contract, submit the plan required
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 12
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
by that section as part of the Environmental Management Plan.
(2)
Control and disposal of hazardous waste (Hazardous Waste
Management Section)
This item will consist of the management procedures for all
hazardous waste to be generated. The elements of those procedures
will coincide with the Activity Hazardous Waste Management Plan.
A copy of the Activity Hazardous Waste Management Plan will be
provided by the Contracting Officer. As a minimum, include the
following:
(a) Procedures to be employed to ensure a written waste
determination is made for appropriate wastes which are to be
generated;
(b)
Sampling/analysis plan;
(c) Methods of hazardous waste accumulation/storage (i.e., in
tanks and/or containers);
(d) Management procedures for storage, labeling, transportation,
and disposal of waste (treatment of waste is not allowed unless
specifically noted);
(e) Management procedures and regulatory documentation ensuring
disposal of hazardous waste complies with Land Disposal
Restrictions (40 CFR 268);
(f) Management procedures for recyclable hazardous materials such
as lead-acid batteries, used oil, and the like;
(g)
Used oil management procedures in accordance with 40 CFR 279;
(h)
Pollution prevention\hazardous waste minimization procedures;
(i) Plans for the disposal of hazardous waste by permitted
facilities;
(j) Procedures to be employed to ensure all required employee
training records are maintained.
f.
g.
Prevention of Releases to the Environment
(1)
Procedures to prevent releases to the environment
(2)
Notifications in the event of a release to the environment
Regulatory Notification and Permits
List what notifications and permit applications must be made.
Demonstrate that those permits have been obtained by including
copies of all applicable, environmental permits.
3.1.1
Environmental Protection Plan Review
Within thirty days after the Contract award date, submit the proposed
Environmental Management Plan for further discussion, review, and
approval. Commencement of work will not begin until the environmental
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 13
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
management plan has been approved.
3.1.2
Licenses and Permits
Obtain licenses and permits pursuant to the "Permits and Responsibilities"
FAR Clause 52.236-7.
No permits will be obtained by the Contracting Officer.
Where required by the State regulatory authority, the inspections and
certifications will be provided through the services of a Professional
Engineer (PE), registered in the State where the work is being performed.
Where a PE is not required, the individual must be otherwise qualified by
other current State licensure, specific training and prior experience
(minimum 5 years). As a part of the quality control plan, which is
required to be submitted for approval by the quality control section,
provide a sub item containing the name, appropriate professional
registration or licence number, address, and telephone number of the
professionals or other qualified persons who will be performing the
inspections and certifications for each permit.
3.2
PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES
Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside
the limits of permanent work. Restore to an equivalent or improved
condition upon completion of work. Confine construction activities to
within the limits of the work indicated or specified. If the work is near
streams, lakes, or other waterways, conform to the national permitting
requirements of the Clean Water Act.
Except in areas to be cleared, do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or
destroy trees or shrubs without the Contracting Officer's permission. Do
not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to existing nearby trees for
anchorages unless authorized by the Contracting Officer. Where such use of
attached ropes, cables, or guys is authorized, the Contractor will be
responsible for any resultant damage.
Protect existing trees which are to remain and which may be injured,
bruised, defaced, or otherwise damaged by construction operations. Remove
displaced rocks from uncleared areas. By approved excavation, remove trees
with 30 percent or more of their root systems destroyed. Remove trees and
other landscape features scarred or damaged by equipment operations, and
replace with equivalent, undamaged trees and landscape features. Obtain
Contracting Officer's approval before replacement.
3.2.1
Erosion and Sediment Control Measures
Refer to Specification Section 01 57 19.01 20 SUPPLEMENTAL RTEMPORARY
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.3.2.2
Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Reports
Submit "Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Reports" (E&S) and Storm
Water Inspection Reports for General Permit for General Permit to the
Contracting Officer.
3.2.2.1
Storm Water Notice of Intent for Construction Activities and Storm
Water Pollution Prevention Plan
The Contractor shall submit a Storm Water Notice of Intent (for NPDES
coverage under the general permit for construction activities) and a Storm
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 14
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). Refer to Specification Section 01
57 19.01 20 SUPPLEMENTAL RTEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
3.2.2.2
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Compliance Notebook
Refer to Specification Section 01 57 19.01 20 SUPPLEMENTAL RTEMPORARY
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
3.2.3
Stormwater Drainage and Construction Dewatering
Refer to Specification Section 01 57 19.01 20 SUPPLEMENTAL RTEMPORARY
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
3.3
HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES
Carefully protect in-place and report immediately to the Contracting
Officer historical and archaeological items or human skeletal remains
discovered in the course of work. Upon discovery, notify the Contracting
Officer. Stop work in the immediate area of the discovery until directed
by the Contracting Officer to resume work. The Government retains
ownership and control over historical and archaeological resources.
3.4
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN and PERMIT
Provide to the contracting officer written notification of the quantity of
solid waste/debris that is anticipated to be generated by construction.
Include in the report the locations where various types of waste will be
disposed or recycled. Include letters of acceptance or as applicable,
submit one copy of a State and local Solid Waste Management Permit or
license showing such agency's approval of the disposal plan before
transporting wastes off Government property.
3.4.1
Solid Waste Management Report
Monthly, submit a solid waste disposal report to the Contracting Officer.
For each waste, the report will state the classification (using the
definitions provided in this section), amount, location, and name of the
business receiving the solid waste.
The Contractor will include copies of the waste handling facilities' weight
tickets, receipts, bills of sale, and other sales documentation. In lieu
of sales documentation, the Contractor may submit a statement indicating
the disposal location for the solid waste which is signed by an officer of
the Contractor firm authorized to legally obligate or bind the firm. The
sales documentation or Contractor certification will include the receiver's
tax identification number and business, EPA or State registration number,
along with the receiver's delivery and business addresses and telephone
numbers. For each solid waste retained by the Contractor for his own use,
the Contractor will submit on the solid waste disposal report the
information previously described in this paragraph. Prices paid or
received will not be reported to the Contracting Officer unless required by
other provisions or specifications of this Contract or public law.
3.4.2
Control and Management of Solid Wastes
Pick up solid wastes, and place in covered containers which are regularly
emptied. Do not prepare or cook food on the project site. Prevent
contamination of the site or other areas when handling and disposing of
wastes. At project completion, leave the areas clean. Recycling is
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 15
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
encouraged and can be coordinated with the Contracting Officer and the
activity recycling coordinator. Remove all solid waste (including
non-hazardous debris) from Government property and dispose off-site at an
approved landfill. Solid waste disposal off-site must comply with most
stringent local, State, and Federal requirements including 40 CFR 241,
40 CFR 243, and 40 CFR 258.
Manage spent hazardous material used in construction, including but not
limited to, aerosol cans, waste paint, cleaning solvents, contaminated
brushes, and used rags, as per environmental law.
3.4.2.1
Dumpsters
Equip dumpsters with a secure cover and paint the standard base color.
Keep cover closed at all times, except when being loaded with trash and
debris. Locate dumpsters behind the construction fence or out of the
public view. Empty site dumpsters at least once a week. or as needed to
keep the site free of debris and trash. If necessary, provide 55 gallon
trash containers painted the darker base color to collect debris in the
construction site area. Locate the trash containers behind the
construction fence or out of the public view. Empty trash containers at
least once a day. For large demolitions, large dumpsters without lids are
acceptable but should not have debris higher than the sides before emptying.
3.5
WASTE DETERMINATION DOCUMENTATION
Complete a Waste Determination form (provided at the pre-construction
conference) for all contractor derived wastes to be generated. Base the
waste determination upon either a constituent listing from the manufacturer
used in conjunction with consideration of the process by which the waste
was generated, EPA approved analytical data, or laboratory analysis
(Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) by themselves are not adequate).
Attach all support documentation to the Waste Determination form. As a
minimum, a Waste Determination form must be provided for the following
wastes (this listing is not all inclusive): oil and latex based painting
and caulking products, solvents, adhesives, aerosols, petroleum products,
and all containers of the original materials.
3.6
CONTRACTOR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INVENTORY LOG
Submit the "Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log"(found at:
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf), which provides information
required by (EPCRA Sections 312 and 313) along with corresponding Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to the Contracting Officer at the start and at
the end of construction (30 days from final acceptance), and update no
later than January 31 of each calendar year during the life of the
contract. Documentation for any spills/releases, environmental reports or
off-site transfers may be requested by the Contracting Officer.
3.6.1
Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste
Manifest, pack, ship and dispose of hazardous or toxic waste and universal
waste that is generated as a result of construction in accordance with the
generating facilities generator status under the Recourse Conservation and
Recovery Act. Contact the Contracting Officer for the facility RCRA
identification number that is to be used on each manifest.
Submit a copy of the applicable EPA and or State permit(s), manifest(s), or
license(s) for transportation, treatment, storage, and disposal of
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 16
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
hazardous and regulated waste by permitted facilities. Hazardous or toxic
waste manifest must be reviewed, signed, and approved by the Navy before
the Contractor may ship waste. To obtain specific disposal instructions
the Contractor must coordinate with the Activity environmental office.
3.7
POLLUTION PREVENTION/HAZARDOUS WASTE MINIMIZATION
Minimize the use of hazardous materials and the generation of hazardous
waste. Include procedures for pollution prevention/ hazardous waste
minimization in the Hazardous Waste Management Section of the Environmental
Management Plan. Consult with the activity Environmental Office for
suggestions and to obtain a copy of the installation's pollution
prevention/hazardous waste minimization plan for reference material when
preparing this part of the plan. If no written plan exists, obtain
information by contacting the Contracting Officer. Describe the types of
the hazardous materials expected to be used in the construction when
requesting information.
3.8
WHM/HW MATERIALS PROHIBITION
No waste hazardous material or hazardous waste shall be disposed of on
government property. No hazardous material shall be brought onto
government property that does not directly relate to requirements for the
performance of this contract. The government is not responsible for
disposal of Contractor's waste material brought on the job site and not
required in the performance of this contract. The intent of this provision
is to dispose of that waste identified as waste hazardous
material/hazardous waste as defined herein that was generated as part of
this contract and existed within the boundary of the Contract limits and
not brought in from offsite by the Contractor. Incidental materials used
to support the contract including, but not limited to aerosol cans, waste
paint, cleaning solvents, contaminated brushes, rags, clothing, etc. are
the responsibility of the Contractor. The list is illustrative rather than
inclusive. The Contractor is not authorized to discharge any materials to
sanitary sewer, storm drain, or to the river or conduct waste treatment or
disposal on government property without written approval of the Contracting
Officer.
3.9
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT
No hazardous material shall be brought onto government property that does
not directly relate to requirements for the performance of this contract.
Include hazardous material control procedures in the Safety Plan. Address
procedures and proper handling of hazardous materials, including the
appropriate transportation requirements. Submit a MSDS and estimated
quantities to be used for each hazardous material to the Contracting
Officer prior to bringing the material on base. Typical materials
requiring MSDS and quantity reporting include, but are not limited to, oil
and latex based painting and caulking products, solvents, adhesives,
aerosol, and petroleum products. At the end of the project, provide the
Contracting Officer with the maximum quantity of each material that was
present at the site at any one time, the dates the material was present,
the amount of each material that was used during the project, and how the
material was used. Ensure that hazardous materials are utilized in a
manner that will minimize the amount of hazardous waste that is generated.
Ensure that all containers of hazardous materials have NFPA labels or their
equivalent. Keep copies of the MSDS for hazardous materials on site at all
times and provide them to the Contracting Officer at the end of the
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 17
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
project. Certify that all hazardous materials removed from the site are
hazardous materials and do not meet the definition of hazardous waste per
40 CFR 261.
3.10
PETROLEUM PRODUCTS AND REFUELING
Conduct the fueling and lubricating of equipment and motor vehicles in a
manner that protects against spills and evaporation. Manage all used oil
generated on site in accordance with 40 CFR 279. Determine if any used oil
generated while on-site exhibits a characteristic of hazardous waste. Used
oil containing 1000 parts per million of solvents will be considered a
hazardous waste and disposed of at Contractor's expense. Used oil mixed
with a hazardous waste will also be considered a hazardous waste.
3.10.1
Oily and Hazardous Substances
Prevent oil or hazardous substances from entering the ground, drainage
areas, or navigable waters. In accordance with 40 CFR 112, surround all
temporary fuel oil or petroleum storage tanks with a temporary berm or
containment of sufficient size and strength to contain the contents of the
tanks, plus 10 percent freeboard for precipitation. The berm will be
impervious to oil for 72 hours and be constructed so that any discharge
will not permeate, drain, infiltrate, or otherwise escape before cleanup
occurs.
3.10.2
Wastes
Inadvertent Discovery of Petroleum Contaminated Soil or Hazardous
If petroleum contaminated soil or suspected hazardous waste is found during
construction that was not identified in the contract documents, the
contractor shall immediately notify the contracting officer. The
contractor shall not disturb this material until authorized by the
contracting officer.
3.11
FUEL TANKS
Petroleum products and lubricants required to sustain up to 30 days of
construction activity may be kept on site. Storage and refilling practices
shall comply with 40 CFR Part 112. Secondary containment shall be provided
and be no less than 110 percent of the tank volume plus five inches of
free-board. If a secondary berm is used for containment then the berm
shall be impervious to oil for 72 hours and be constructed so that any
discharge will not permeate, drain, infiltrate, or otherwise escape before
cleanup occurs. Drips pans are required and the tanks must be covered
during inclement weather.
3.12
RELEASES/SPILLS OF OIL AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
Exercise due diligence to prevent, contain, and respond to spills of
hazardous material, hazardous substances, hazardous waste, sewage,
regulated gas, petroleum, lubrication oil, and other substances regulated
by environmental law. Maintain spill cleanup equipment and materials at
the work site. In the event of a spill, take prompt, effective action to
stop, contain, curtail, or otherwise limit the amount, duration, and
severity of the spill/release. In the event of any releases of oil and
hazardous substances, chemicals, or gases; immediately (within 15 minutes)
notify the Base or Activity Fire Department, the activity's Command Duty
Officer, and the Contracting Officer. If the contractor's response is
inadequate, the Navy may respond. If this should occur, the contractor
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 18
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
will be required to reimburse the government for spill response assistance
and analysis.
The Contractor is responsible for verbal and written notifications as
required by the federal 40 CFR 355, State, local regulations and Navy
Instructions. Spill response will be in accordance with 40 CFR 300 and
applicable State and local regulations. Contain and clean up these spills
without cost to the Government. If Government assistance is requested or
required, the Contractor will reimburse the Government for such
assistance. Provide copies of the written notification and documentation
that a verbal notification was made within 20 days.
Maintain spill cleanup equipment and materials at the work site. Clean up
all hazardous and non-hazardous (WHM) waste spills. The Contractor shall
reimburse the government for all material, equipment, and clothing
generated during any spill cleanup. The Contractor shall reimburse the
government for all costs incurred including sample analysis materials,
equipment, and labor if the government must initiate its own spill cleanup
procedures, for Contractor responsible spills, when:
a.
The Contractor has not begun spill cleanup procedure within one hour of
spill discovery/occurrence, or
b.
If, in the government's judgment, the Contractor's spill cleanup is not
adequately abating life threatening situation and/or is a threat to any
body of water or environmentally sensitive areas.
3.13
3.13.1
CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF HAZARDOUS WASTES
Facility Hazardous Waste Generator Status
Naval Station, Norfolk is designated as a Large Quantity Generator . All
work conducted within the boundaries of this activity must meet the
regulatory requirements of this generator designation. The Contractor will
comply with all provisions of Federal, State and local regulatory
requirements applicable to this generator status regarding training and
storage, handling, and disposal of all construction derived wastes.
3.13.2
Hazardous Waste/Debris Management
Identify all construction activities which will generate hazardous
waste/debris. Provide a documented waste determination for all resultant
waste streams. Hazardous waste/debris will be identified, labeled,
handled, stored, and disposed of in accordance with all Federal, State, and
local regulations including 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264,
40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 266, and 40 CFR 268.
Hazardous waste will also be managed in accordance with the approved
Hazardous Waste Management Section of the Environmental Protection Plan.
Store hazardous wastes in approved containers in accordance with 49 CFR 173
and 49 CFR 178. Hazardous waste generated within the confines of
Government facilities will be identified as being generated by the
Government.
Prior to removal of any hazardous waste from Government property, all
hazardous waste manifests must be signed by activity personnel from the
Station Environmental Office. No hazardous waste will be brought onto
Government property. Provide to the Contracting Officer a copy of waste
determination documentation for any solid waste streams that have any
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 19
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
potential to be hazardous waste or contain any chemical constituents listed
in 40 CFR 372-SUBPART D. For hazardous wastes spills, verbally notify the
Contracting Officer immediately.
3.13.2.1
Regulated Waste Storage/Satellite Accumulation/90 Day Storage Areas
If the work requires the temporary storage/collection of regulated or
hazardous wastes, the Contractor will request the establishment of a
Regulated Waste Storage Area, a Satellite Accumulation Area, or a 90 Day
Storage Area at the point of generation. The Contractor must submit a
request in writing to the Contracting Officer providing the following
information:
Contract Number
_____
Contractor
_____
Haz/Waste or Regulated Waste POC
_____
Phone Number
_____
Type of Waste
_____
Source of Waste
_____
Emergency POC
_____
Phone Number
_____
Location of the Site
_____
(Attach Site Plan to the Request)
Attach a waste determination form. Allow ten working days for processing
this request. The designated area where waste is being stored shall be
barricaded and a sign identifying as follows:
"DANGER - UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL KEEP OUT"
3.13.2.2
a.
Sampling and Analysis of HW
Waste Sampling
Sample waste in accordance with EPA 530/F-93/004. Each sampled drum
or container will be clearly marked with the Contractor's
identification number and cross referenced to the chemical
analysis performed.
b.
Laboratory Analysis
Follow the analytical procedure and methods in accordance with the
40 CFR 261. The Contractor will provide all analytical results
and reports performed to the Contracting Officer
c.
Analysis Type
Identify waste hazardous material/hazardous waste
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 20
by analyzing for
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
the following properties as a minimum: ignitability,
corrosiveness, total chlorides, BTU value, PCBs, TCLP for heavy
metals, and cyanide.
3.13.2.3
Asbestos Certification
Items, components, or materials disturbed by or included in work under this
contract do involve asbestos. Other materials in the general area around
where work will be performed may contain asbestos. All thermal insulation,
in all work areas, should be considered to be asbestos unless positively
identified by conspicuous tags or previous laboratory analysis certifying
them as asbestos free.
Inadvertent discovery of non-disclosed asbestos that will result in an
abatement action requires a change in scope before proceeding. Upon
discovery of asbestos containing material not identified in the contract
documents, the Contractor shall immediately stop all work that would
generate further damage to the material, evacuate the asbestos exposed
area, and notify the Contracting Officer for resolution of the situation
prior to resuming normal work activities in the affected area. The
Contractor will not remove or perform work on any asbestos containing
materials without the prior approval of the Contracting Officer. The
Contractor will not engage in any activity, which would remove or damage
such materials or cause the generation of fibers from such materials.
Asbestos containing waste shall be managed and disposed of in accordance
with applicable environmental law. Asbestos containing waste shall be
manifested and the manifest provided to the Contracting Officer.
3.13.2.4
Hazardous Waste Disposal
No hazardous, toxic, or universal waste shall be disposed or hazardous
material abandoned on government property. And unless otherwise noted in
this contract, the government is not responsible for disposal of Contractor
generated waste material. The disposal of incidental materials used to
accomplish the work including, but not limited to aerosol cans, waste
paint, cleaning solvents, contaminated brushes, rags, clothing, etc. are
the responsibility of the Contractor. The list is illustrative rather than
inclusive.
The Contractor is not authorized to discharge any materials to sanitary
sewer, storm drain, or water way or conduct waste treatment or disposal on
government property without written approval of the Contracting Officer.
Control of stored waste, packaging, sampling, analysis, and disposal will
be determined by the details in the contract. The requirements for jobs in
the following paragraphs will be used as the guidelines for disposal of any
hazardous waste generated.
a.
Responsibilities for Contractor's Disposal
Contractor responsibilities include any generation of WHM/HW requiring
Contractor disposal of solid waste or liquid.
(1) The Contractor agrees to provide all service necessary for
the final treatment/disposal of the hazardous material/waste in
accordance with all local, State and Federal laws and regulations,
and the terms and conditions of the contract within sixty (60)
days after the materials have been generated. These services will
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 21
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
include all necessary personnel, labor, transportation, packaging,
detailed analysis (if required for disposal, and/or
transportation, including manifesting or completing waste profile
sheets, equipment, and the compilation of all documentation is
required).
(2) Contain all waste in accordance with 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261,
40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 266,
40 CFR 268, 40 CFR 270, 40 CFR 272, 40 CFR 273, 40 CFR 279,
40 CFR 280, and 40 CFR 761.
(3) Obtaining a representative sample of the material generated
for each job done to provide waste stream determination.
(4)
Analyzing for each sample taken and providing analytical results
to the Contracting Officer. Provide two copies of the results.
(5)
Determine the DOT proper shipping names for all waste (each
container requiring disposal) and will demonstrate how this
determination is developed and supported by the sampling and
analysis requirements contained herein to the Contracting Officer.
Contractor Disposal Turn-In Requirements
For any waste hazardous materials or hazardous waste generated which
requires the Contractor to dispose of, the following conditions must be
complied with in order to be acceptable for disposal:
a.
Drums compatible with waste contents and drums meet DOT requirements
for 49 CFR 173 for transportation of materials.
b.
Drums banded to wooden pallets. No more than three (3) 55 gallon drums
to a pallet, or two (2) 85 gallon over packs.
c.
Band using 1-1/4 inch minimum band on upper third of drum.
d.
Recovery materials label (provided by Code 106.321) located in middle
of drum, filled out to indicate actual volume of material, name of
material manufacturer, other vendor information as available.
e.
Always have three (3) to five (5) inches of empty space above volume of
material. This space is called 'outage'.
3.13.3
Class I ODS Prohibition
Class I ODS as defined and identified herein will not be used in the
performance of this contract, nor be provided as part of the equipment.
This prohibition will be considered to prevail over any other provision,
specification, drawing, or referenced documents. Regulations related to
the protection of stratosphere ozone may be found in 40 CFR 82.
Heating and air conditioning technicians must be certified through an
EPA-approved program. Copies of certifications shall be maintained at the
employees' place of business and be carried as a wallet card by the
technician, as provided by environmental law. Accidental venting of a
refrigerant is a release and shall be reported to the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 22
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.13.3.1
1313775
Universal Waste/e-Waste Management
Universal waste including but not limited to some mercury containing
building products such as florescent lamps, mercury vapor lamps, high
pressure sodium lamps, CRTs, batteries, aerosol paint containers,
electrical equipment containing PCBs, and consumed electronic devices,
shall be managed in accordance with applicable environmental law and
installation instructions.
3.14
DUST CONTROL
Keep dust down at all times, including during nonworking periods. Sprinkle
or treat, with dust suppressants, the soil at the site, haul roads, and
other areas disturbed by operations. Dry power brooming will not be
permitted. Instead, use vacuuming, wet mopping, wet sweeping, or wet power
brooming. Air blowing will be permitted only for cleaning nonparticulate
debris such as steel reinforcing bars. Only wet cutting will be permitted
for cutting concrete blocks, concrete, and bituminous concrete. Do not
unnecessarily shake bags of cement, concrete mortar, or plaster.
3.14.1
Dirt and Dust Control Plan
Submit truck and material haul routes along with a plan for controlling
dirt, debris, and dust on base roadways. As a minimum, identify in the
plan the subcontractor and equipment for cleaning along the haul route and
measures to reduce dirt, dust, and debris from roadways.
3.15
NOISE
Make the maximum use of low-noise emission products, as certified by the
EPA. Blasting or use of explosives will not be permitted. Confine
pile-driving operations to the period between 8 a.m. and 4 p.m., Monday
through Friday, exclusive of holidays, unless otherwise specified.
3.16
MERCURY MATERIALS
Mercury is prohibited in the construction of this facility, unless
specified otherwise, and with the exception of mercury vapor lamps and
fluorescent lamps. Dumping of mercury-containing materials and devices
such as mercury vapor lamps, fluorescent lamps, and mercury switches, in
rubbish containers is prohibited. Remove without breaking, pack to prevent
breakage, and transport out of the activity in an unbroken condition for
disposal as directed. Immediately report to the Environmental Office and
the Contracting Officer instances of breakage or mercury spillage. Clean
mercury spill area to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.
Cleanup of a mercury spill shall not be recycled and shall be managed as a
hazardous waste for disposal.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
Page 23
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 57 19.01 20
SUPPLEMENTAL TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
02/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only. If state or local references are not provided
here, refer to Section 01 57 19.00 20 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS for
appropriate references.
STATE OF VIRGINIA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (VAC)
9 VAC 25-840
Title 9, Agency 25, Chapter 840: Erosion
And Sediment Control Regulations
9 VAC 25-850
Title 9, Agency 25, Chapter 850: Erosion
And Sediment Control And Stormwater
Management Certification Regulations
9 VAC 25-870
Title 9, Agency 25, Chapter 870: Virginia
Stormwater Management Program (Vsmp)
Regulation
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA 833-R-060-04
1.2
(2007) Developing Your Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Plan, a Guide for
Construction Sites
MID-ATLANTIC
1.2.1
Virginia
1.2.1.1
Definition and Disposal Requirements of Empty Paint Cans
Paint Cans: Paint cans that are empty (free of liquids and contains less
than 1 inch of dried material) of paints, solvents, thinners and adhesives
may be disposed of in dumpsters.
Metal paint cans that meet the empty standard can be placed in dumpsters
marked "metal only"; plastic cans may be placed in solid waste dumpsters.
Manage paint cans with liquid or more than 1 inch of solidified oil-based
paint as a hazardous waste and properly label. Manage paint cans with
excess water-based paint as non-hazardous waste. Contact NAVFAC MIDLANT
Environmental Services for management requirements.
1.2.1.2
1.2.1.2.1
Erosion and Sediment Control Measures and Stormwater Management
Erosion and Sediment Control
The land disturbance for this project will be 10,000 square feet or greater.
An Erosion and Sediment Control Plan has been prepared, submitted, and
approved by the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality. This plan
will be provided to the Contractor prior to construction. Comply with the
SECTION 01 57 19.01 20
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
requirements specified in the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Law and
Regulations. (Virginia Code: 9 VAC 25-840) Obtain a Certificate of
Competency in accordance with 9 VAC 25-850.
1.2.1.2.2
Construction Dewatering
There must be no release of construction discharge water to the stormwater
system or into State waters without prior authorization in writing from the
Environmental Division. Construction Dewatering must not be discharged to
the sanitary sewer system. The discharge of hazardous substances is not
permitted under any circumstances.
Construction site stormwater runoff must be treated through the use of
proper erosion control measures or stormwater management practices prior to
release from the construction site. Pollutants, including but not limited
to chemicals, fuels, lubricants, sewage, paints, sedimentation, and other
harmful materials must not be discharged into or alongside any River,
Stream, or Impoundment, or into any channels leading to them. Contractors
must implement appropriate erosion and sediment control measures to all
disturbed areas or bare soils to prevent unauthorized offsite
sedimentation. Denuded portions of a project which are at final grade or
where work has temporarily ceased must have stabilization measures applied
within 7 days.
1.2.1.3
Virginia Stormwater Management
The land disturbance for this project exceeds one acre. A Stormwater
Management Plan has been prepared, submitted, and approved by the Virginia
Department of Environmental Quality. This plan will be provided to the
Contractor prior to construction. Comply with the requirements specified in
the Virginia Stormwater Management Law and Regulations (Virginia Code:
9 VAC 25-870). Obtain Certificate of Competency in accordance with
9 VAC 25-850.
1.2.1.3.1
Storm Water General Permit for Construction Activities
Registration Statement
In accordance with 9 VAC 25-870, submit a Registration Statement to the
State to obtain Virginia Stormwater Management Program General Permit
coverage, and as required under the General Permit, develop a Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the project. The SWPPP must meet the
requirements of the State General Permit for storm water discharges from
construction activities. Submit the Registration Statement and appropriate
permit fees to the appropriate State agency for approval a minimum of 15
calendar days prior to the start of any land disturbing activities.
Maintain an approved copy of the SWPPP at the construction on-site office,
and continually update as regulations require, reflecting current site
conditions.
Coverage under this permit requires the contractor to prepare a SWPPP,
prepare and submit a Registration Statement and provide the permit fee to
the responsible state agency before any land disturbing activities begin.
The Contractor must file for permit coverage on behalf of both them and the
Construction Officer, and file a Notice of Termination once construction is
complete and the site is stabilized with a final sustainable cover. Under
the terms and conditions of the permit, the Contractor may be required to
install, inspect, maintain best management practices (BMPs), and submit
stormwater BMP inspection reports and stormwater pollution prevention plan
inspection reports. Ensure construction operations and management are
SECTION 01 57 19.01 20
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
constantly in compliance with the terms and conditions of the general
permit for storm water discharges from construction activities.
1.2.1.3.2
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Notebook
Create and maintain a three-ring binder of documents that demonstrate
compliance with the Stormwater Construction Activity permit. The binder
must include a copy of the permit Registration Statement, proof of permit
fee payment, SWPPP and SWPPP update amendments, inspection reports, copies
of correspondence with the appropriate state agency and a copy of the
permit Notice of Termination. At the completion of the project, the
completed binder becomes the property of the Government. Provide the
completed binder to the Contracting Officer. Provide an advance copy of
the Registration Statement to the Contracting Officer immediately after the
form is presented to the permitting agency.
The SWPPP must be consistent with the requirements of the General Permit,
and at a minimum included:
a. Identify potential sources of pollution which may be reasonably expected
to affect the quality of storm water discharge from the site.
b.
Describe and ensure implementation of practices which must be used to
reduce the pollutants in storm water discharge from the site.
c. Ensure compliance with terms of the State general permit for storm water
discharges.
d. Select applicable best management practices from EPA 833-R-060-04 or
appropriate State guidance documents.
e. Include a completed copy of the Registration Statement, State permit
coverage letter, BMP Inspection Report Template and Notice of
Termination except for the effective date.
f. Include copy of the approved Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and copy
of the approved Stormwater Management Plan.
1.2.1.3.3
Stormwater General Permit Inspection Reports
Complete and document, in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan
Notebook, the Storm Water Inspection Reports as required by the State VSMP
General Permit. The Stormwater inspections reports must include all items
required by the General Permit and must be completed at the inspection
frequency detailed in 9 VAC 25-870. Obtain certificate of competency in
accordance with 9 VAC 25-850.
1.2.1.4
1.2.1.4.1
Hazardous Waste Requirements for Virginia Installations:
Demolition
Ensure building has been surveyed for asbestos. Notify the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and Virginia Department of Labor and Industry
(VADOLI) at least 10 working days before start of demolition. This
notification is required for all demolition, even if no asbestos is
present. Follow asbestos notification requirements in accordance with
paragraph ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AND NOTIFICATION PROCEDURES. Implement Best
Management Practices (BMPs) to contain dust and debris emissions to the air.
SECTION 01 57 19.01 20
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Remove the following items from the site prior to demolition: PCB's,
fluorescent bulbs, mercury and metal components (such as furnaces, ducts,
and piping), and any hazardous materials. Manage all lead, fluorescent
bulbs, mercury containing equipment, and any other waste as "hazardous or
universal waste" as appropriate (see paragraph HAZARDOUS AND UNIVERSAL
WASTE GENERATION). If the demolition activity encompasses the whole
building (the building will be demolished to the ground), the resulting
construction debris (including lead paint) requires Toxicity Characteristic
Leaching Procedure (TCLP) analysis to make a waste determination and ensure
proper management and disposal before it can be disposed as solid waste.
1.2.1.4.2
Hazardous and Universal Waste Generation
Hazardous and Universal Waste includes fluorescent bulbs, PCB ballast, lead
paint, and mercury containing equipment. Contact the EV Hazardous Waste
(HW) Program Manager to set up an appropriate accumulation area. Manage
waste in a SAA, HWAA, or UWAA as directed by HW Program Manager. Keep all
containers securely closed unless adding or removing material/waste. Ensure
custodians managing the accumulation area(s) have appropriate training that
has been taken within the year prior to the area being established.
Training is an annual requirement that can be taken on the ECATTS site
(https://navfac.ecatts.com/start). Keep copies of training
records/certificates on site.
Hazardous Waste Accumulation Areas (less than 90 day sites) require
Virginia Department of Environmental Quality (VDEQ) notification.
Notification to VDEQ is made by the EV HW Program Manager. Notify the HW
MM 14 days prior to the start of waste accumulation. All agency
notifications will originate from the Regional Environmental. A copy of the
Activity Hazardous Material Reutilization, Hazardous Waste Minimization and
Disposal Guide will be provided by the Contracting Officer. For waste
disposal, phone the NAVFAC MIDLANT Environmental Service Desk to arrange
pick up in your area. Fax a completed DD 1348-1A to the Service Desk for
all waste turn-ins. Notify the Service Desk if any containers are leaking
or are in poor condition.
1.2.1.4.3
Excavation
If soil is to be reused on site, sampling is not required unless otherwise
directed. Excavated soil may be re-used within the construction site with
no testing necessary. Soil may be stockpiled until the end of the project,
then re-used as much as possible prior to sampling/analysis for residual
soil to be disposed of. Store all in a manner that prevents rain from
infiltrating the soil matrix and preventing any runoff into the surrounding
soil or pavement (e.g. store the soil on top of plastic sheets and covered
with plastic sheets or in lined, covered dumpsters). If the soil is going
to be relocated or disposed outside the construction site, sampling and
analysis is required. Contact the installation HW Program Manager prior to
disposal to determine the appropriate sampling/ test parameters. Soil
disposal requirements will depend on test results. If soil is to be shipped
to a destination outside the fire ant quarantine area (outside of James
City County, York County, Chesapeake, Hampton, Newport News, Norfolk,
Poquoson, Portsmouth, Suffolk, Virginia Beach or Williamsburg) it MUST have
a valid inspection certificate issued by an Officer of the Plant Protection
and Quarantine Program (PPQ) of the U.S. Department of Agriculture. Contact
the EV Pest Management Coordinator for additional information.
Sub-surface archaeological resources can be encountered unexpectedly.
During any soil disturbing activities, should historic or prehistoric
SECTION 01 57 19.01 20
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
artifacts, buried features, or structural foundations be discovered, halt
the action and contact the NAVFAC MIDLANT Regional Historic Preservation
Officer and the Contracting Officer immediately.
1.2.1.4.4
Painting and Paint Removal
Air drying cans for disposal is allowed only if liquid residue is less than
1 inch; keeping all paint or solvent containers closed and secured when not
adding or removing material or waste. Waste paint chips/debris must be
collected and sampled to determine proper disposal method. Contact the EV
HW Program Manager for sampling requirements. If waste paint is determined
to be hazardous, waste must be managed as hazardous and an appropriate
accumulation area must be established. Contact the EV HW Program Manager
for site setup.
Implement BMPs to contain dust and debris emissions to the air.
1.2.1.4.5
Dumpsters
Keep cover closed at all times, except when being loaded with trash and
debris. Empty site dumpsters at least once a week or as needed to keep the
site free of debris and trash. Label trash containers to appropriately
describe the contents.
1.2.1.5
1.2.1.5.1
Air Requirements:
Concrete Crushing
Secure an air permit for the crusher from the regulatory agency where the
equipment is home-based (in Virginia contact VADEQ). Provide a copy of the
permit to the environmental office (Air Manager) through the Contracting
Officer at least 30 days prior to bringing crusher on- site.
Utilize Best Management Practices (BMPs) (such as water suppression) during
crushing operations to minimize dust and debris emissions to the air.
Consider other environmental program requirements such as Clean Water Act
(CWA) requirements when making decisions in regard to BMPs.
1.2.1.5.2
Painting
Control volatile organic compound emissions by keeping all paint, solvent,
and waste containers closed/secured except when adding or removing material
or waste. Control air emissions via air drying cans for disposal only if
liquid residue is less than 1 inch.
Control particulate matter emissions by using containment such as shrouds
to contain overspray during spraying operations.
1.2.1.5.3
Paint Removal
Control dust, abrasive agent, paint chips, and other debris during abrasive
blasting or similar operations that could emit dust/debris. Containment
could include application of water and use of shrouding/containment.
Consider other environmental program requirements such as Clean Water Act
(CWA) requirements when making decisions in regard to BMPs.
1.2.1.6
Hazardous Material Management
At the end of the project, provide the Contracting Officer with the maximum
SECTION 01 57 19.01 20
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
quantity of each material that was present at the site at any one time, the
dates the material was present, the amount of each material that was used
during the project, and how the material was used.
1.2.1.7
Spill Response and Reporting
Spills include any spilling, leaking, pumping, emitting, discharging,
injecting, escaping, leaching, disposing, or dumping of liquid or solid
material that is not authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer.
Report all Spills at Hampton Roads Navy installations to the appropriate
installation ECC immediately upon discovery. The Responsible party will
fund all clean up and disposal costs.
After notification of installation ECC, notify your Navy point of contact.
Refer to the Activity Hazardous Material Reutilization, Hazardous Waste
Minimization and Disposal Guide Appendix 3 for spill contact procedures.
Refer to "Table 1 - Spill Reporting Contact Numbers" for the appropriate
point of contact.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 57 19.01 20
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01/07
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM E 1609
1.2
(2001) Development and Implementation of a
Pollution Prevention Program
GOVERNMENT POLICY
Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the design,
construction and use of facilities. As part of the implementation of that
policy the Contractor shall: (1) practice efficient waste management when
sizing, cutting, and installing products and materials and (2) use all
reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills
and incinerators and to facilitate their recycling or reuse.
1.3
MANAGEMENT
Develop and implement a waste management program in accordance with
ASTM E 1609 and as specified. Take a pro-active, responsible role in the
management of construction and demolition waste and require all
subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in the effort.
Construction and demolition waste includes products of demolition or
removal, excess or unusable construction materials, packaging materials for
construction products, and other materials generated during the
construction process but not incorporated into the work. In the management
of waste consideration shall be given to the availability of viable
markets, the condition of the material, the ability to provide the material
in suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to available markets,
and time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates. The
Contractor is responsible for implementation of any special programs
involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste.
Revenues or other savings obtained for salvage, or recycling accrue to the
Contractor. Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling,
reuse, and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by federal,
state, and local regulations. Also, provide on-site instruction of
appropriate separation, handling, recycling, salvage, reuse, and return
methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
SECTION 01 74 19
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Waste Management Plan; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Records
1.5
MEETINGS
Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings. After award of the
Contract and prior to commencement of work, schedule and conduct a meeting
with the Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan
and to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of waste
management. The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the
coordination and mutual understanding meeting. At a minimum, environmental
and waste management goals and issues shall be discussed at the following
additional meetings:
1.6
a.
Pre-bid meeting.
b.
Preconstruction meeting.
c.
Regular QC meetings.
d.
Work safety meetings.
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A waste management plan shall be submitted within 15 days after contract
award and not less than 10 days before the preconstruction meeting. The
plan shall demonstrate how the project waste diversion goal shall be met
and shall include the following:
a. Name of individuals on the Contractor's staff responsible for waste
prevention and management.
b. Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation,
including coordination with subcontractors to ensure awareness and
participation.
c. Description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste
management.
d. Description of the specific approaches to be used in
recycling/reuse of the various materials generated, including the areas
on site and equipment to be used for processing, sorting, and temporary
storage of wastes.
e. Characterization, including estimated types and quantities, of the
waste to be generated.
f. Name of landfill and/or incinerator to be used and the estimated
costs for use, assuming that there would be no salvage or recycling on
the project.
g. Identification of local and regional reuse programs, including
non-profit organizations such as schools, local housing agencies, and
organizations that accept used materials such as materials exchange
networks and Habitat for Humanity. Include the name, location, and
SECTION 01 74 19
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
phone number for each reuse facility to be used, and provide a copy of
the permit or license for each facility.
h. List of specific waste materials that will be salvaged for resale,
salvaged and reused on the current project, salvaged and stored for
reuse on a future project, or recycled. Recycling facilities that will
be used shall be identified by name, location, and phone number,
including a copy of the permit or license for each facility.
i. Identification of materials that cannot be recycled/reused with an
explanation or justification, to be approved by the Contracting Officer.
j. Description of the means by which any waste materials identified in
item (h) above will be protected from contamination.
k. Description of the means of transportation of the recyclable
materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to
designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a
waste hauler and removed from the site).
l. Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting Contractor
program management costs and the cost of disposal from the revenue
generated by sale of the materials and the incineration and/or landfill
cost avoidance.
Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the Contracting Officer. Approval
of Contractor's Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with applicable environmental regulations or meeting project
cumulative waste diversion requirement. Distribute copies of the Waste
Management Plan to each subcontractor, the Quality Control Manager, and the
Contracting Officer.
1.7
RECORDS
Records shall be maintained to document the quantity of waste generated;
the quantity of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the
quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Quantities may be
measured by weight or by volume, but must be consistent throughout. List
each type of waste separately noting the disposal or diversion date.
Identify the landfill, recycling center, waste processor, or other
organization used to process or receive the solid waste. Provide
explanations for any waste not recycled or reused. With each application
for payment, submit updated documentation for solid waste disposal and
diversion, and submit manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices
specifically identifying the project and waste material. The records shall
be made available to the Contracting Officer during construction, and a
copy of the records shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer upon
completion of the construction.
1.8
COLLECTION
Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable and
salvageable waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability and
salvagability of identified materials. Provide the necessary containers,
bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and clearly
and appropriately identify them. Provide materials for barriers and
enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are nonhazardous
and recyclable or reusable. Locate out of the way of construction traffic.
Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to
SECTION 01 74 19
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
subcontractors. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and
clean, and recyclable materials shall be handled to prevent contamination
of materials from incompatible products and materials. Clean contaminated
materials prior to placing in collection containers. Use cleaning materials
that are nonhazardous and biodegradable. Handle hazardous waste and
hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations. Separate
materials by one of the following methods:
1.8.1
Source Separated Method.
Waste products and materials that are recyclable shall be separated from
trash and sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate
containers and then transported to the respective recycling facility for
further processing. Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or
reuse facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, adhesives, solvents,
petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling
process). Separate materials into the following category types as
appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse
programs in the project area:
a.
Land clearing debris.
b.
Asphalt.
c.
Concrete and masonry.
d.
Metal (e.g. banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other
trim, steel, iron, galvanized, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc,
lead brass, bronze).
(1)
Ferrous.
(2)
Non-ferrous.
e.
Wood (nails and staples allowed).
f.
Debris.
g.
Glass (colored glass allowed).
h.
Paper.
i.
(1)
Bond.
(2)
Newsprint.
(3)
Cardboard and paper packaging materials.
Plastic.
(1)
Type 1:
Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE).
(2)
Type 2:
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).
(3)
Type 3:
Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).
(4)
Type 4:
Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE).
(5)
Type 5:
Polypropylene (PP).
SECTION 01 74 19
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
(6)
(7)
Type 6:
Polystyrene (PS).
Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in
question is made with a resin other than the six listed above, or
is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a
multi-layer combination.
j.
Gypsum.
k.
Carpet.
l.
Ceiling tiles.
m.
Insulation.
1.8.2
1313775
Co-Mingled Method.
Waste products and recyclable materials shall be placed into a single
container and then transported to a recycling facility where the recyclable
materials are sorted and processed.
1.8.3
Other Methods.
Other methods proposed by the Contractor may be used when approved by the
Contracting Officer.
1.9
DISPOSAL
Control accumulation of waste materials and trash. Recycle or dispose of
collected materials off-site at intervals approved by the Contracting
Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures. Except as
otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications, disposal shall
be in accordance with the following:
1.9.1
Recycle.
Waste materials not suitable for reuse, but having value as being
recyclable, shall be made available for recycling. All fluorescent lamps,
HID lamps, and mercury-containing thermostats removed from the site shall
be recycled. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to
recycling facilities in order to prevent contamination of recyclable
materials.
1.9.2
Waste.
Materials with no practical use or economic benefit shall be disposed at a
landfill or incinerator.
1.9.3
Return
Set aside and protect misdelivered and substandard products and materials
and return to supplier for credit.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used.
SECTION 01 74 19
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 74 19
Page 6
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 78 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
08/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM E1971
(2005) Stewardship for the Cleaning of
Commercial and Institutional Buildings
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GS-37
(2000; R 2009) Industrial and
Institutional Cleaners
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
UFC 1-300-08
1.2
(2009, with Change 2) Criteria for
Transfer and Acceptance of DoD Real
Property
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Warranty Management Plan
Final Cleaning
Posted Instructions
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-Built Drawings
Interim Form DD1354; G
Checklist for Form DD1354; G
SECTION 01 78 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.3
1.3.1
1313775
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
As-Built Drawings
The Contractor shall maintain at the job site one set of full-size prints
of the contract drawings, accurately marked in red with adequate
dimensiions, to show all variations between the construction actually
provided and that indicated or specified in the contract documents,
including buried or concealed construction. Special attention shall be
given to recording the horizontal and vertical location of all buried
utilities that differ from the final government-accepted drawings.
Existing utility lines and features revealed during the course of
contruction, shall also be accureately located and dimensioned. Variations
in the interior utility systems shall be clearly defined and dimensioned;
and coordinated with exterior utility connections at the building five-foot
line, where applicable. Existing topographic features which differ from
those shown on the contract drawings shall also be accurately located and
recorded. Where a choice of materials or methods is permitted herein, or
where variations in scope or character of methods is permitted herein, or
where variations in scope or character of work from that of the original
contract are authorized, the drawings shall be marked to define the
construction actually provided. The representations of such changes shall
conform to standard drafting practice and shall include such supplementary
notes, legends, and details as necessary to clearly portray the as-built
construction. These drawings shall be available for review by the
Contracting Officer at all times. Upon completion of the work, the set of
marked up prints shall be certified as correct, signed by the Contractor,
and delivered to the Cotracting Officer in electronic PDF format (full size
at 300dpi minimum resolution)for his approval before acceptance. Requests
for partial payments will not be approved if the marked prints are not kept
current, and request for final payment will not be approved until the
marked prints are delivered to the Cotracting Officer.
1.3.2
Construction Contract Specifications
Furnish one electronic PDF final copy of the (as-built) construction
contract specifications, including modifications thereto, 30 days after
transfer of the completed facility.
1.4
1.4.1
WARRANTY MANAGEMENT
Warranty Management Plan
At least 30 days before the planned pre-warranty conference, submit one set
set of the warranty management plan. Include within the warranty
management plan all required actions and documents to assure that the
Government receives all warranties to which it is entitled. The plan must
be in narrative form and contain sufficient detail to render it suitable
for use by future maintenance and repair personnel, whether tradesmen, or
of engineering background, not necessarily familiar with this contract.
The term "status" as indicated below must include due date and whether item
has been submitted or was accomplished. Warranty information made
available during the construction phase must be submitted to the
Contracting Officer for approval prior to each monthly pay estimate.
Assemble approved information in a binder and turn over to the Government
upon acceptance of the work. The construction warranty period will begin
on the date of project acceptance and continue for the full product
warranty period. A joint 4 month and 9 month warranty inspection will be
conducted, measured from time of acceptance, by the Contractor, Contracting
SECTION 01 78 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Officer and the Customer Representative. Include within the warranty
management plan , but not limited to, the following:
a.
Roles and responsibilities of all personnel associated with the
warranty process, including points of contact and telephone numbers
within the organizations of the Contractors, subContractors,
manufacturers or suppliers involved.
b.
Furnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone number of
each of the guarantor's representatives nearest to the project location.
c.
Listing and status of delivery of all Certificates of Warranty for
extended warranty items, to include roofs, HVAC balancing, pumps,
motors, transformers, and for all commissioned systems such as fire
protection and alarm systems, sprinkler systems, lightning protection
systems, etc.
d.
A list for each warranted equipment, item, feature of construction or
system indicating:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Name of item.
Model and serial numbers.
Location where installed.
Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers.
Names, addresses and telephone numbers of sources of spare parts.
Warranties and terms of warranty. Include one-year overall
warranty of construction, including the starting date of warranty
of construction. Items which have extended warranties must be
indicated with separate warranty expiration dates.
(7) Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable.
(8) Starting point and duration of warranty period.
(9) Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue the
warranty in force.
(10) Cross-reference to specific pertinent Operation and Maintenance
manuals.
(11) Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call for
warranty service.
(12) Typical response time and repair time expected for various
warranted equipment.
e.
The Contractor's plans for attendance at the 4 and 9 month
post-construction warranty inspections conducted by the Government.
f.
Procedure and status of tagging of all equipment covered by extended
warranties.
g.
Copies of instructions to be posted near selected pieces of equipment
where operation is critical for warranty and/or safety reasons.
1.4.2
Performance Bond
The Contractor's Performance Bond must remain effective throughout the
construction period.
a.
In the event the Contractor fails to commence and diligently pursue any
construction warranty work required, the Contracting Officer will have
the work performed by others, and after completion of the work, will
charge the remaining construction warranty funds of expenses incurred
by the Government while performing the work, including, but not limited
SECTION 01 78 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
to administrative expenses.
b.
In the event sufficient funds are not available to cover the
construction warranty work performed by the Government at the
Contractor's expense, the Contracting Officer will have the right to
recoup expenses from the bonding company.
c.
Following oral or written notification of required construction
warranty repair work, respond in a timely manner. Written verification
will follow oral instructions. Failure of the Contractor to respond
will be cause for the Contracting Officer to proceed against the
Contractor.
1.4.3
Pre-Warranty Conference
Prior to contract completion, and at a time designated by the Contracting
Officer, meet with the Contracting Officer to develop a mutual
understanding with respect to the requirements of this section.
Communication procedures for Contractor notification of construction
warranty defects, priorities with respect to the type of defect, reasonable
time required for Contractor response, and other details deemed necessary
by the Contracting Officer for the execution of the construction warranty
will be established/reviewed at this meeting. In connection with these
requirements and at the time of the Contractor's quality control completion
inspection, furnish the name, telephone number and address of a licensed
and bonded company which is authorized to initiate and pursue construction
warranty work action on behalf of the Contractor. This point of contact
will be located within the local service area of the warranted
construction, be continuously available, and be responsive to Government
inquiry on warranty work action and status. This requirement does not
relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities in connection with
other portions of this provision.
1.5
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Submit 6 copies of the project operation and maintenance manuals 30
calendar days prior to testing the system involved. Update and resubmit
data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to contract
completion.
1.5.1
Configuration
Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be consistent with the
manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions,
general operating procedures, and safety precautions. Bind information in
manual format and grouped by technical sections. Test data must be legible
and of good quality. Light-sensitive reproduction techniques are
acceptable provided finished pages are clear, legible, and not subject to
fading. Pages for vendor data and manuals must have 0.3937-inch holes and
be bound in 3-ring, loose-leaf binders. Organize data by separate index
and tabbed sheets, in a loose-leaf binder. Binder must lie flat with
printed sheets that are easy to read. Caution and warning indications must
be clearly labeled.
1.5.2
Training and Instruction
Submit classroom and field instructions in the operation and maintenance of
systems equipment where required by the technical provisions. These
services must be directed by the Contractor, using the manufacturer's
SECTION 01 78 00
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
factory-trained personnel or qualified representatives. Contracting
Officer will be given 7 calendar days written notice of scheduled
instructional services. Instructional materials belonging to the
manufacturer or vendor, such as lists, static exhibits, and visual aids,
must be made available to the Contracting Officer.
1.6
CLEANUP
Provide final cleaning in accordance with ASTM E1971 and submit two copies
of the listing of completed final clean-up items. Leave premises "broom
clean." Comply with GS-37 for general purpose cleaning and bathroom
cleaning. Use only nonhazardous cleaning materials, including natural
cleaning materials, in the final cleanup. Clean debris from drainage
systems. Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas. Remove waste
and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site.
Recycle, salvage, and return construction and demolition waste from project
in accordance with the Waste Management Plan. Promptly and legally
transport and dispose of any trash. Do not burn, bury, or otherwise
dispose of trash on the project site.
1.7
REAL PROPERTY RECORD
Near the completion of Project, but a minimum of 60 days prior to final
acceptance of the work, complete and submit an accounting of all installed
property with Interim Form DD1354 "Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real
Property." Include any additional assets/improvements/alterations from the
Draft DD Form 1354. Contact the Contracting Officer for any project
specific information necessary to complete the DD Form 1354. Refer to
UFC 1-300-08 for instruction on completing the DD Form 1354. For
information purposes, a blank DD Form 1354 (fill-able) in ADOBE (PDF) may
be obtained at the following web site:
http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/eforms/dd1354.pdf
Submit the completed Checklist for Form DD1354 of Installed Building
Equipment items. Attach this list to the updated DD Form 1354.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 78 00
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
07/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM E1971
1.2
(2005; R 2011) Stewardship for the
Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional
Buildings
SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data specifically applicable to this
contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment,
product, or system, stressing and enhancing the importance of system
interactions, troubleshooting, and long-term preventative maintenance and
operation. The subcontractors must compile and prepare data and deliver to
the Contractor prior to the training of Government personnel. The
Contractor must compile and prepare aggregate O&M data including clarifying
and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
Organize and present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain
O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and subassembly
level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance
with this section and Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.2.1
Package Quality
Documents must be fully legible. Poor quality copies and material with
hole punches obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted.
1.2.2
Package Content
Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled "Schedule of
Operation and Maintenance Data Packages." Comply with the data package
requirements specified in the individual technical sections, including the
content of the packages and addressing each product, component, and system
designated for data package submission, except as follows. Commissioned
items without a specified data package requirement in the individual
technical sections must use Data Package 3. Commissioned items with a Data
Package 1 or 2 requirement must use instead Data Package 3.
1.2.3
Changes to Submittals
Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data must be
furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so affected
subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Submit changes, additions, or
revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of
submitted data within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change
requirement.
SECTION 01 78 23
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.2.4
1313775
Review and Approval
The Contractor's Commissioning Authority (CA) must review the commissioned
systems and equipment submittals for completeness and applicability. The
CA must verify that the systems and equipment provided meet the
requirements of the Contract documents and design intent, particularly as
they relate to functionality, energy performance, water performance,
maintainability, sustainability, system cost, indoor environmental
quality, and local environmental impacts. The CA must communicate
deficiencies to the Contracting Officer. Upon a successful review of the
corrections, the CA must recommend approval and acceptance of these O&M
manuals to the Contracting Officer. This work is in addition to the normal
review procedures for O&M data.
1.3
TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES
1.3.1
Operating Instructions
Include specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the
following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each
system:
1.3.1.1
Safety Precautions
List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all
operating conditions.
1.3.1.2
Operator Prestart
Include procedures required to install, set up, and prepare each system for
use.
1.3.1.3
Startup, Shutdown, and Post-Shutdown Procedures
Provide narrative description for Startup, Shutdown and Post-shutdown
operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure.
1.3.1.4
Normal Operations
Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures. Include
Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and
specific equipment.
1.3.1.5
Emergency Operations
Include Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short
period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent
further damage to systems and equipment. Include Emergency Shutdown
Instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable
contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of
all utility systems including required valve positions, valve locations and
zones or portions of systems controlled.
1.3.1.6
Operator Service Requirements
Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as
lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and recording gage readings.
SECTION 01 78 23
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.3.1.7
1313775
Environmental Conditions
Include a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature, humidity, and
other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each
product, component or system. Describe conditions under which the item
equipment should not be allowed to run.
1.3.2
Preventive Maintenance
Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance
to minimize corrective maintenance and repair for the installed model and
features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air
quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.
1.3.2.1
Lubrication Data
Include preventative maintenance lubrication data, in addition to
instructions for lubrication provided under paragraph titled "Operator
Service Requirements":
a.
A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges
and applications.
b.
Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication
points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities.
c.
A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency.
1.3.2.2
Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule
Include manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance,
inspections, tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical
operation and to minimize corrective maintenance. Provide manufacturer's
projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily, weekly,
monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft.
For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified frequency and
procedures for each separate operation.
1.3.2.3
Cleaning Recommendations
Provide environmentally preferable cleaning recommendations in accordance
with ASTM E1971.
1.3.3
Corrective Maintenance (Repair)
Include manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for
correcting problems and making repairs for the installed model and features
of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air quality
impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.
1.3.3.1
Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques
Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical
malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what
conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test
equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused
or require replacement.
SECTION 01 78 23
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.3.3.2
1313775
Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of
wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a
complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and
control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and
pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to
actual installation configuration and numbering.
1.3.3.3
Maintenance and Repair Procedures
Include instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the
product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.
1.3.3.4
Removal and Replacement Instructions
Include step-by-step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for
removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies,
subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances,
dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Instructions shall include
a combination of text and illustrations.
1.3.3.5
Spare Parts and Supply Lists
Include lists of
repair to ensure
delays. Special
locations. List
obtain.
1.3.4
spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and
continued service or operation without unreasonable
consideration is required for facilities at remote
spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to
Corrective Maintenance Work-Hours
Include manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance work-hours
including requirements by type of craft. Corrective maintenance that
requires completion or participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be
identified and tabulated separately.
1.3.5
Appendices
Provide information required below and information not specified in the
preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the
product or equipment. Include the following:
1.3.5.1
Product Submittal Data
Provide a copy of all SD-03 Product Data submittals required in the
applicable technical sections.
1.3.5.2
Manufacturer's Instructions
Provide a copy of all SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions submittals required
in the applicable technical sections.
1.3.5.3
O&M Submittal Data
Provide a copy of all SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals
required in the applicable technical sections.
SECTION 01 78 23
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.3.5.4
1313775
Parts Identification
Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component,
assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to
replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to
use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial
number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further
identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and
exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When
illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations
and separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key number that
will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown
in the listings shall be grouped by components, assemblies, and
subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice.
Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment,
components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as
typically shown in a master parts catalog
1.3.5.5
Warranty Information
List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing
and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract
documents in order to keep warranties in force. Include warranty
information for primary components such as the compressor of air
conditioning system.
1.3.5.6
Personnel Training Requirements
Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for
use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the
equipment and systems.
1.3.5.7
Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information
Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests
and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of
components.
1.3.5.8
Testing and Performance Data
Include completed prefunctional checklists, functional performance test
forms, and monitoring reports. Include recommended schedule for retesting
and blank test forms.
1.3.5.9
Contractor Information
Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the
General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or
equipment, or system. For each item, also provide the name address and
telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service
organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project
site. Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product,
equipment, and system manufacturers.
1.4
TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN CONTROLS O&M DATA PACKAGES
Include Data Package 5 and the following for control systems:
a.
Narrative description on how to perform and apply all functions,
SECTION 01 78 23
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
features, modes, and other operations, including unoccupied operation,
seasonal changeover, manual operation, and alarms. Include detailed
technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and
algorithms.
b.
Full as-built sequence of operations.
c.
Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the
Contractor (not Cx tests).
d.
Full points list. A listing of rooms shall be provided with the
following information for each room:
(1)
Floor
(2)
Room number
(3)
Room name
(4)
Air handler unit ID
(5)
Reference drawing number
(6)
Air terminal unit tag ID
(7)
Heating and/or cooling valve tag ID
(8)
Minimum cfm
(9)
Maximum cfm
e.
Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and
acceptance of the system.
f.
Full as-built print out of software program.
g.
Electronic File:
(1) Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file
in PDF format. Provide HDD’s, DVD's or CD's as appropriate, so
that each one contains all maintenance and record files, and also
the Project Record Documents and Training Videos, of the entire
program for this facility.
(2) Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with
applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked
operation and maintenance directory.
(3) Link the index to separate files within the composite of files.
Book mark maintenance and record files, that have a Table of
Contents, according to the Table of Contents
h.
1.5
Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor
plan and mechanical drawings with their control system designations.
SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES
Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections.
The required information for each O&M data package is as follows:
SECTION 01 78 23
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.5.1
Data Package 1
a.
Safety precautions
b.
Cleaning recommendations
c.
Maintenance and repair procedures
d.
Warranty information
e.
Contractor information
f.
Spare parts and supply list
1.5.2
Data Package 2
a.
Safety precautions
b.
Normal operations
c.
Environmental conditions
d.
Lubrication data
e.
Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
f.
Cleaning recommendations
g.
Maintenance and repair procedures
h.
Removal and replacement instructions
i.
Spare parts and supply list
j.
Parts identification
k.
Warranty information
l.
Contractor information
1.5.3
Data Package 3
a.
Safety precautions
b.
Operator prestart
c.
Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
d.
Normal operations
e.
Emergency operations
f.
Environmental conditions
g.
Lubrication data
h.
Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
SECTION 01 78 23
Page 7
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
i.
Cleaning recommendations
j.
Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
k.
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
l.
Maintenance and repair procedures
m.
Removal and replacement instructions
n.
Spare parts and supply list
o.
Product submittal data
p.
O&M submittal data
q.
Parts identification
r.
Warranty information
s.
Testing equipment and special tool information
t.
Testing and performance data
u.
Contractor information
1.5.4
Data Package 4
a.
Safety precautions
b.
Operator prestart
c.
Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
d.
Normal operations
e.
Emergency operations
f.
Operator service requirements
g.
Environmental conditions
h.
Lubrication data
i.
Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
j.
Cleaning recommendations
k.
Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
l.
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
m.
Maintenance and repair procedures
n.
Removal and replacement instructions
o.
Spare parts and supply list
p.
Corrective maintenance man-hours
SECTION 01 78 23
Page 8
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
q.
Product submittal data
r.
O&M submittal data
s.
Parts identification
t.
Warranty information
u.
Personnel training requirements
v.
Testing equipment and special tool information
w.
Testing and performance data
x.
Contractor information
1.5.5
Data Package 5
a.
Safety precautions
b.
Operator prestart
c.
Start-up, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
d.
Normal operations
e.
Environmental conditions
f.
Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
g.
Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
h.
Wiring and control diagrams
i.
Maintenance and repair procedures
j.
Removal and replacement instructions
k.
Spare parts and supply list
l.
Product submittal data
m.
Manufacturer's instructions
n.
O&M submittal data
o.
Parts identification
p.
Testing equipment and special tool information
SECTION 01 78 23
Page 9
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
q.
Warranty information
r.
Testing and performance data
s.
Contractor information
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 78 23
Page 10
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 02 84 16
HANDLING OF LIGHTING BALLASTS AND LAMPS CONTAINING PCBs AND MERCURY
04/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
STATE OF VIRGINIA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (VAC)
9 VAC 20-60
Title 9, Agency 20, Chapter 60: Hazardous
Waste Management Regulations
9 VAC 20-80
Title 9, Agency 20, Chapter 80: Solid
Waste Management Regulations
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.1000
Air Contaminants
40 CFR 260
Hazardous Waste Management System:
40 CFR 261
Identification and Listing of Hazardous
Waste
40 CFR 262
Standards Applicable to Generators of
Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 263
Standards Applicable to Transporters of
Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 264
Standards for Owners and Operators of
Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and
Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 265
Interim Status Standards for Owners and
Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment,
Storage, and Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 268
Land Disposal Restrictions
40 CFR 270
EPA Administered Permit Programs:
Hazardous Waste Permit Program
40 CFR 273
Standards For Universal Waste Management
40 CFR 761
Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)
Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in
Commerce, and Use Prohibitions
49 CFR 178
Specifications for Packagings
SECTION 02 84 16
Page 1
General
The
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.2
1313775
REQUIREMENTS
Removal and disposal of PCB containing lighting ballasts and associated
mercury-containing lamps. Contractor may encounter leaking PCB ballasts.
1.3
1.3.1
DEFINITIONS
Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH)
A industrial hygienist hired by the contractor shall be certified by the
American Board of Industrial Hygiene.
1.3.2
Leak
Leak or leaking means any instance in which a PCB article, PCB container,
or PCB equipment has any PCBs on any portion of its external surface.
1.3.3
Lamps
Lamp, also referred to as "universal waste lamp", is defined as
the bulb or tube portion of an electric lighting device. A lamp is
specifically designed to produce radiant energy, most often in the
ultraviolet, visible, and infra-red regions of the electromagnetic
spectrum. Examples of common universal waste electric lamps include,
but are not limited to, fluorescent, high intensity discharge, neon,
mercury vapor, high pressure sodium, and metal halide lamps.
1.3.4
Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)
PCBs as used in this specification shall mean the same as PCBs, PCB
containing lighting ballast, and PCB container, as defined in 40 CFR 761,
Section 3, Definitions.
1.3.5
Spill
Spill means both intentional and unintentional spills, leaks, and other
uncontrolled discharges when the release results in any quantity of PCBs
running off or about to run off the external surface of the equipment or
other PCB source, as well as the contamination resulting from those
releases.
1.3.6
Universal Waste
Universal Waste means any of the following hazardous wastes that
are managed under the universal waste requirements 40 CFR 273:
(1) Batteries as described in Sec. 273.2 of this chapter;
(2) Pesticides as described in Sec. 273.3 of this chapter;
(3) Thermostats as described in Sec. 273.4 of this chapter; and
(4) Lamps as described in Sec. 273.5 of this chapter.
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Regulatory Requirements
Perform PCB related work in accordance with 40 CFR 761 and 9 VAC 20-60 and
9 VAC 20-80. Perform mercury-containing lamps storage and transport in
accordance with 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 273 and
9 VAC 20-60 and 9 VAC 20-80.
SECTION 02 84 16
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.4.2
1313775
Training
Certified industrial hygienist (CIH) shall instruct and certify the
training of all persons involved in the removal of PCB containing lighting
ballasts and mercury-containing lamps. The instruction shall include: The
dangers of PCB and mercury exposure, decontamination, safe work practices,
and applicable OSHA and EPA regulations. The CIH shall review and approve
the PCB and Mercury-Containing Lamp Removal Work Plans.
1.4.3
Regulation Documents
Maintain at all times one copy each at the office and one copy each in view
at the job site of 29 CFR 1910.1000, 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262,
40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 268, 40 CFR 270, 40 CFR 273 and 9 VAC 20-60
9 VAC 20-80 and of the Contractor removal work plan and disposal plan for
PCB and for associated mercury-containing lamps.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of CIH; G
Training Certification; G
PCB and Lamp Removal Work Plan; G
PCB and Lamp Disposal Plan; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Transporter certification of notification to EPA of their PCB
waste activities and EPA ID numbers; G
Certification of Decontamination
Certificate of Disposal and/or recycling. Submit to the
Government before application for payment within 30 days of the
date that the disposal of the PCB and mercury-containing lamp
waste identified on the manifest was completed.
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Use special clothing:
a.
Disposable gloves (polyethylene)
b.
Eye protection
c.
PPE as required by CIH
SECTION 02 84 16
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.7
1313775
SCHEDULING
Notify the Contracting Officer 20 days prior to the start of PCB and
mercury-containing lamp removal work.
1.8
1.8.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications of CIH
Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the Industrial Hygienist
selected to perform the duties in paragraph entitled "Certified Industrial
Hygienist." Submit training certification that the Industrial Hygienist is
certified, including certification number and date of certification or re
certification.
1.8.2
PCB and Lamp Removal Work Plan
Submit a job-specific plan within 20 calendar days after award of contract
of the work procedures to be used in the removal, packaging, and storage of
PCB-containing lighting ballasts and associated mercury-containing lamps.
Include in the plan: Requirements for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE),
spill cleanup procedures and equipment, eating, smoking and restroom
procedures. The plan shall be approved and signed by the Certified
Industrial Hygienist. Obtain approval of the plan by the Contracting
Officer prior to the start of PCB and/or lamp removal work.
1.8.3
PCB and Lamp Disposal Plan
Submit a PCB and lamp Disposal Plan with 45 calendar days after award of
contract. The PCB and Lamp Disposal Plan shall comply with applicable
requirements of federal, state, and local PCB and Universal waste
regulations and address:
a.
Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated, disposed of, and
recycled.
b.
Names and qualifications of each Contractor that will be transporting,
storing, treating, and disposing of the wastes. Include the facility
location. Furnish two copies of EPA and state PCB and
mercury-containing lamp waste permit applications and EPA
identification numbers, as required.
c.
Names and qualifications (experience and training) of personnel who
will be working on-site with PCB and mercury-containing lamp wastes.
d.
Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures to be
implemented.
e.
Work plan and schedule for PCB and mercury-containing lamp waste
removal, containment, storage, transportation, disposal and or
recycling. Wastes shall be cleaned up and containerize daily.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not used.
SECTION 02 84 16
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
PART 3
3.1
1313775
EXECUTION
WORK PROCEDURE
Furnish labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary for the removal
of PCB containing lighting ballasts, associated mercury-containing
fluorescent lamps, and high intensity discharge (HID) lamps in accordance
with local, state, or federal regulations. Do not expose PCBs to open
flames or other high temperature sources since toxic decomposition
by-products may be produced. Do not break mercury containing fluorescent
lamps or high intensity discharge lamps.
3.1.1
Work Operations
Ensure that work operations or processes involving PCB or PCB-contaminated
materials are conducted in accordance with 40 CFR 761, 40 CFR 262 40 CFR 263,
and the applicable requirements of this section, including but not limited
to:
a.
Obtaining suitable PCB and mercury-containing lamp storage sites.
b.
Notifying Contracting Officer prior to commencing the operation.
c.
Reporting leaks and spills to the Contracting Officer.
d.
Cleaning up spills.
e.
Inspecting PCB and PCB-contaminated items and waste containers for
leaks and forwarding copies of inspection reports to the Contracting
Officer.
f.
Maintaining inspection, inventory and spill records.
3.2
3.2.1
PCB SPILL CLEANUP REQUIREMENTS
PCB Spills
Immediately report to the Contracting Officer any PCB spills.
3.2.2
PCB Spill Control Area
Rope off an area around the edges of a PCB leak or spill and post a "PCB
Spill Authorized Personnel Only" caution sign. Immediately transfer
leaking items to a drip pan or other container.
3.2.3
PCB Spill Cleanup
40 CFR 761, subpart G. Initiate cleanup of spills as soon as possible, but
no later than 24 hours of its discovery. Mop up the liquid with rags or
other conventional absorbent. The spent absorbent shall be properly
contained and disposed of as solid PCB waste.
3.2.4
Records and Certification
Document the cleanup with records of decontamination in accordance with
40 CFR 761, Section 125, Requirements for PCB Spill Cleanup. Provide test
results of cleanup and certification of decontamination.
SECTION 02 84 16
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.3
3.3.1
1313775
REMOVAL
Ballasts
As ballast are removed from the lighting fixture, inspect label on ballast.
Ballasts without a "No PCB" label shall be assumed to contain PCBs and
containerized and disposed of as required under paragraphs STORAGE FOR
DISPOSAL and DISPOSAL. If there are less than 1600 "No PCB" labeled
lighting ballasts dispose of them as normal demolition debris.
3.3.2
Lighting Lamps
Remove lighting tubes/lamps from the lighting fixture and carefully place
(unbroken) into appropriate containers (original transport boxes or
equivalent). In the event of a lighting tube/lamp breaking, sweep and
place waste in double plastic taped bags and dispose of as universal waste
as specified herein.
3.4
3.4.1
STORAGE FOR DISPOSAL
Storage Containers for PCBs
49 CFR 178. Store PCB in containers approved by DOT for PCB.
3.4.2
Storage Containers for lamps
Store mercury containing lamps in appropriate DOT containers. The boxes
shall be stored and labeled for transport in accordance with 40 CFR 273.
3.4.3
Labeling of Waste Containers
Label with the following:
a.
Date the item was placed in storage and the name of the cognizant
activity/building.
b.
"Caution Contains PCB," conforming to 40 CFR 761, CFR Subpart C.
labels to PCB waste containers.
c.
Label mercury-containing lamp waste in accordance with 40 CFR 273.
Affix labels to all lighting waste containers.
3.5
Affix
DISPOSAL
Dispose of off Government property in accordance with EPA, DOT, and local
regulations at a permitted site.
3.5.1
Identification Number
Federal regulations 40 CFR 761, and 40 CFR 263 require that generators,
transporters, commercial storers, and disposers of PCB waste posses U.S.
EPA identification numbers. The contractor shall verify that the activity
has a U.S. EPA generator identification number for use on the Uniform
Hazardous Waste manifest. If not, the contractor shall advise the activity
that it must file and obtain an I.D. number with EPA prior to commencement
of removal work. For mercury containing lamp removal, Federal regulations
40 CFR 273 require that large quantity handlers of Universal waste (LQHUW)
must provide notification of universal waste management to the appropriate
EPA Region (or state director in authorized states), obtain an EPA
SECTION 02 84 16
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
identification number, and retain for three years records of off-site
shipments of universal waste. The contractor shall verify that the activity
has a U.S. EPA generator identification number for use on the Universal
Waste manifest. If not, the contractor shall advise the activity that it
must file and obtain an I.D. number with EPA prior to commencement of
removal work.
3.5.2
Transporter Certification
Comply with disposal and transportation requirements outlined in 40 CFR 761
and 40 CFR 263. Before transporting the PCB waste, sign and date the
manifest acknowledging acceptance of the PCB waste from the Government.
Return a signed copy to the Government before leaving the job site. Ensure
that the manifest accompanies the PCB waste at all times. Submit
transporter certification of notification to EPA of their PCB waste
activities (EPA Form 7710-53).
3.5.2.1
Certificate of Disposal and/or Recycling
40 CFR 761.
Certificate for the PCBs and PCB items disposed shall include:
a.
The identity of the disposal and or recycling facility, by name,
address, and EPA identification number.
b.
The identity of the PCB waste affected by the Certificate of Disposal
including reference to the manifest number for the shipment.
c.
A statement certifying the fact of disposal and or recycling of the
identified PCB waste, including the date(s) of disposal, and
identifying the disposal process used.
d.
A certification as defined in 40 CFR 761.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 02 84 16
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
05/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM E119
(2012a) Standard Test Methods for Fire
Tests of Building Construction and
Materials
ASTM E1399/E1399M
(1997; E 2013;R 2013) Cyclic Movement and
Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint
Widths of Architectural Joint Systems
ASTM E1966
(2007; R 2011) Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
ASTM E2174
(2010a; E 2011) Standard Practice for
On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops
ASTM E2307
(2010) Standard Test Method for
Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter
Fire Barrier Systems Using
Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test
Apparatus
ASTM E2393
(2010a) Standard Practice for On-Site
Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive
Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers
ASTM E699
(2009) Standard Practice for Evaluation of
Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality
Assurance, and Evaluating of Building
Components
ASTM E814
(2013a) Standard Test Method for Fire
Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
ASTM E84
(2013a) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM 4991
(2013) Approval of Firestop Contractors
FM APP GUIDE
(updated on-line) Approval Guide
http://www.approvalguide.com/
SECTION 07 84 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
ICC IBC
(2012) International Building Code
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1479
(2003; Reprint Oct 2012) Fire Tests of
Through-Penetration Firestops
UL 2079
(2004; Reprint Dec 2012) Tests for Fire
Resistance of Building Joint Systems
UL 723
(2008; Reprint Aug 2013) Test for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
UL Fire Resistance
(2012) Fire Resistance Directory
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1
General
Furnish and install tested and listed firestopping systems, combination of
materials, or devices to form an effective barrier against the spread of
flame, smoke and gases, and maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated
walls, partitions, floors, and ceiling-floor assemblies, including
through-penetrations and construction joints and gaps.
a.
Through-penetrations include the annular space around pipes, tubes,
conduit, wires, cables and vents.
b.
Construction joints include those used to accommodate expansion,
contraction, wind, or seismic movement; firestopping material shall not
interfere with the required movement of the joint.
Gaps requiring firestopping include gaps between the curtain wall and the
floor slab and between the top of the fire-rated walls and the roof or
floor deck above and at the intersection of shaft assemblies and
adjoining fire resistance rated assemblies.
1.2.2
Sequencing
Coordinate the specified work with other trades. Apply firestopping
materials, at penetrations of pipes and ducts, prior to insulating, unless
insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping. Apply
firestopping materials. at building joints and construction gaps, prior to
completion of enclosing walls or assemblies. Cast-in-place firestop
devices shall be located and installed in place before concrete placement.
Pipe, conduit or cable bundles shall be installed through cast-in-place
device after concrete placement but before area is concealed or made
inaccessible. Firestop material shall be inspected and approved prior to
final completion and enclosing of any assemblies that may conceal installed
firestop.
1.2.3
a.
Submittals Requirements
Submit detail drawings including manufacturer's descriptive data,
typical details conforming to UL Fire Resistance or other details
certified by another nationally recognized testing laboratory,
SECTION 07 84 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
installation instructions or UL listing details for a firestopping
assembly in lieu of fire-test data or report. For those firestop
applications for which no UL tested system is available through a
manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgment, derived from
similar UL system designs or other tests, shall be submitted for review
and approval prior to installation. Submittal shall indicate the
firestopping material to be provided for each type of application.
When more than a total of 5 penetrations and/or construction joints are
to receive firestopping, provide drawings that indicate location, "F"
"T" and "L" ratings, and type of application.
b.
Submit certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with
the specified requirements. For all intumescent firestop materials
used in through penetration systems, manufacturer shall provide
certification of compliance with UL 1479.
c.
Submit documentation of training and experience for Installer.
d.
Submit inspection report stating that firestopping work has been
inspected and found to be applied according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and the specified requirements.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Firestopping Materials; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Inspection; G
SD-07 Certificates
Inspector Qualifications
Firestopping Materials
Installer Qualifications; G
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer
Engage an experienced Installer who is:
a. FM Research approved in accordance with FM 4991, operating as a UL
Certified Firestop Contractor, or
b. Certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping
manufacturer as having the necessary staff, training, and a minimum of
3 years experience in the installation of manufacturer's products in
accordance with specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness
to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an installer
engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer installer
qualifications on the buyer. The Installer shall have been trained by
SECTION 07 84 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
a direct representative of the manufacturer (not distributor or agent)
in the proper selection and installation procedures. The installer
shall obtain from the manufacturer written certification of training,
and retain proof of certification for duration of firestop installation.
1.4.2
Inspector Qualifications
The inspector shall meet the criteria contained in ASTM E699 for agencies
involved in quality assurance and shall have a minimum of two years
experience in construction field inspections of firestopping systems,
products, and assemblies. The inspector shall be completely independent
of, and divested from, the installer, the manufacturer, and the supplier of
any material or item being inspected. The inspector shall not be a
competitor of the installer, the contractor, the manufacturer, or supplier
of any material or item being inspected. Include in the qualifications
submittal a notarized statement assuring compliance with the requirements
stated herein.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials in the original unopened packages or containers showing
name of the manufacturer and the brand name. Store materials off the
ground, protected from damage and exposure to elements and temperatures in
accordance with manufacturer requirements. Remove damaged or deteriorated
materials from the site. Use materials within their indicated shelf life.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
Provide firestopping materials, supplied from a single domestic
manufacturer, consisting of commercially manufactured, asbestos-free,
nontoxic products FM APP GUIDE approved, or UL listed, for use with
applicable construction and penetrating items, complying with the following
minimum requirements:
2.1.1
Fire Hazard Classification
Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less, and a smoke developed
rating of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
Material shall be an approved firestopping material as listed in
UL Fire Resistance or by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
2.1.2
Toxicity
Material shall be nontoxic and carcinogen free to humans at all stages of
application or during fire conditions and shall not contain hazardous
chemicals or require harmful chemicals to clean material or equipment.
Firestop material must be free from Ethylene Glycol, PCB, MEK, or other
types of hazardous chemicals.
2.1.3
Fire Resistance Rating
Firestop systems shall be UL Fire Resistance listed or FM APP GUIDE
approved with "F" rating at least equal to fire-rating of fire wall or
floor in which penetrated openings are to be protected. Where required,
firestop systems shall also have "T" rating at least equal to the
fire-rated floor in which the openings are to be protected.
SECTION 07 84 00
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.1.3.1
1313775
Through-Penetrations
Firestopping materials for through-penetrations, as described in paragraph
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, shall provide "F", "T" and "L" fire resistance ratings
in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479. Fire resistance ratings shall be
as follows:
2.1.3.1.1
Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Walls and Partitions
F Rating = Rating of wall or partition being penetrated.
2.1.3.1.2
Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Floors, Floor-Ceiling
Assemblies and the Ceiling Membrane of Roof-Ceiling Assemblies
Where the penetrating item is outside of a wall cavity the F rating must be
equal to the fire resistance rating of the floor penetrated, and the T
rating shall be in accordance with the requirements of ICC IBC.
2.1.3.1.3
Penetrations of Fire and Smoke Resistance Rated Walls, Floors,
Floor-Ceiling Assemblies, and the ceiling membrane of Roof-Ceiling Assemblies
F Rating = Rating of wall or partition being penetrated, T Rating = shall
be in accordance with the requirements of ICC IBC .
2.1.3.2
Construction Joints and Gaps
Fire resistance ratings of construction joints, as described in paragraph
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, and gaps such as those between floor slabs and curtain
walls shall be the same as the construction in which they occur.
Construction joints and gaps shall be provided with firestopping materials
and systems that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E119, ASTM E1966
or UL 2079 to meet the required fire resistance rating. Curtain wall
joints shall be provided with firestopping materials and systems that have
been tested in accordance with ASTM E2307 to meet the required fire
resistance rating. Systems installed at construction joints shall meet the
cycling requirements of ASTM E1399/E1399M or UL 2079. All joints at the
intersection of the top of a fire resistance rated wall and the underside
of a fire-rated floor, floor ceiling, or roof ceiling assembly shall
provide a minimum class II movement capability.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
Areas to receive firestopping shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, or loose
materials which may affect the fitting or fire resistance of the
firestopping system. For cast-in-place firestop devices, formwork or metal
deck to receive device prior to concrete placement shall be sound and
capable of supporting device. Prepare surfaces as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.2
INSTALLATION
Completely fill void spaces with firestopping material regardless of
geometric configuration, subject to tolerance established by the
manufacturer. Firestopping systems for filling floor voids 4 inches or
more in any direction shall be capable of supporting the same load as the
floor is designed to support or shall be protected by a permanent barrier
to prevent loading or traffic in the firestopped area. Install
SECTION 07 84 00
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
firestopping in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Provide tested and listed firestop systems in the following locations,
except in floor slabs on grade:
a.
Penetrations of duct, conduit, tubing, cable and pipe through floors
and through fire-resistance rated walls, partitions, and ceiling-floor
assemblies.
b.
Penetrations of vertical shafts such as pipe chases, elevator shafts,
and utility chutes.
c.
Gaps at the intersection of floor slabs and curtain walls, including
inside of hollow curtain walls at the floor slab.
d.
Gaps at perimeter of fire-resistance rated walls and partitions, such
as between the top of the walls and the bottom of roof decks.
e.
Construction joints in floors and fire rated walls and partitions.
f.
Other locations where required to maintain fire resistance rating of
the construction.
3.2.1
Insulated Pipes and Ducts
Thermal insulation shall be cut and removed where pipes or ducts pass
through firestopping, unless insulation meets requirements specified for
firestopping. Replace thermal insulation with a material having equal
thermal insulating and firestopping characteristics.
3.2.2
Data and Communication Cabling
Cabling for data and communication applications shall be sealed with
re-enterable firestopping products.
3.2.2.1
Re-Enterable Devices
Firestopping devices shall be pre-manufactured modular devices, containing
built-in self-sealing intumescent inserts. Firestopping devices shall
allow for cable moves, additions or changes without the need to remove or
replace any firestop materials. Devices must be capable of maintaining the
fire resistance rating of the penetrated membrane at 0 percent to 100
percent visual fill of penetrants; while maintaining "L" rating of <10
cfm/sf at 0 percent to 100 percent visual fill.
3.2.2.2
Re-Sealable Products
Provide firestopping pre-manufactured modular products, containing
self-sealing intumescent inserts. Firestopping products shall allow for
cable moves, additions or changes. Devices shall be capable of maintaining
the fire resistance rating of the penetrated membrane at 0 percent to 100
percent visual fill of penetrants.
3.3
3.3.1
INSPECTION
General Requirements
For Navy projects, install one of each type of penetration and have it
inspected and accepted by the Naval Facilities Engineering Command
Mid-Atlantic, Fire Protection Engineer prior to the installation of the
SECTION 07 84 00
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
remainder of the penetrations. At this inspection, the manufacturer's
technical representative of the firestopping material shall be present. For
all projects, the remainder of the firestopped areas shall not be covered
or enclosed until inspection is complete and approved by the Contracting
Officer. The inspector shall inspect the applications initially to ensure
adequate preparations (clean surfaces suitable for application, etc.) and
periodically during the work to assure that the completed work has been
accomplished according to the manufacturer's written instructions and the
specified requirements. Submit written reports indicating locations of and
types of penetrations and types of firestopping used at each location; type
shall be recorded by UL listed printed numbers.
3.3.2
Inspection Standards
Inspect all firestopping in accordance to ASTM E2393 and ASTM E2174 for
firestop inspection, and document inspection results to be submitted.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 07 84 00
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 12 93 00
SITE FURNISHINGS
02/09
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
AISC 360
(2010) Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B429/B429M
1.2
(2010; E 2012) Standard Specification for
Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe
and Tube
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shelters
Assembly Instruction Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Shelters
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
1.3
1.3.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installation Drawings
Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating thickness,
type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions. Show construction details,
reinforcement, anchorage, and installation.
1.3.2
Assembly Instruction Drawings
Submit assembly instruction drawings showing layout(s), connections,
bolting and anchoring details in accordance with manufacturer's standards.
Submit drawings showing scaled details of proposed site furnishings,
SECTION 12 93 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
elevations for each type of site furnishing; dimensions, details, and
methods of mounting or anchoring; shape and thickness of materials; and
details of construction.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Ship items knocked-down (KD) ready for site assembly. Packaged components
shall be complete including all accessories and hardware. Materials shall
be delivered, handled, and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Site furnishings shall be inspected upon arrival at the
job site for conformity to specifications and quality. Protect from
corrosion, staining, and other types of damage. Store items in designated
area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove and replace damaged
items with new items.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
SHELTERS
AISC 360. Provide prefabricated shelter systems to meet design conditions
indicated. Shelter design shall conform to all applicable State and Local
Building Codes and shall meet manufacturer's standards of construction and
materials. Shelter systems shall be preglazed, pre-drilled and pre-cut,
shipped with all hardware and accessories necessary for complete field
assembly. Shelter be ADA compliant with open front and measure 8' wide by
4' deep with matching bench.
2.1.1
Framing Systems
Framing system; columns, rafters, ridge, purlins and other structural
framing members shall be aluminum as indicated. Manufacturer shall provide
shop drawings and calculations prepared by a structural engineer.
2.1.1.1
Aluminum
Extruded aluminum alloy tubing shall conform to ASTM B429/B429M 6063-T5 or
3003-H14, dark bronze finish. Framing sizes and configurations shall be
as required for size of structure indicated meeting manufacturer's
standards and applicable building codes.
2.1.2
Roof Panels
Provide manufacturer's standard molded acrylic translucent roof panel.
Materials shall be factory finished and shipped with all necessary
fasteners and accessories as required for complete site assembly.
2.1.3
Glazing
Factory installed in separate structural window frames, gasketed and glazed
in accordance with manufacturer's standard, interchangeable, glazing
system. Provide 3/16 inch clear tempered glass on three sides of the
shelter.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Verify that finished grades and other operations affecting mounting
surfaces have been completed prior to the installation of site
SECTION 12 93 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
furnishings. Site furnishings shall be installed plumb and true, at
locations indicated,in accordance with the approved manufacturer's
instructions.
3.1.1
Assembly and Erection of Components
New parts shall be acquired from the manufacturer; substitute parts will
not be accepted unless approved by the manufacturer. When the inspection
of parts has been completed, the site furnishings shall be assembled and
anchored according to manufacturer's instructions or as indicated. When
site furnishings are assembled at the site, assembly shall not interfere
with other operations or pedestrian and vehicular circulation.
3.1.2
Anchorage, Fastenings, and Connections
Furnish metal work, mounting bolts or hardware in ample time for securing
into concrete or masonry as the work progresses. Provide anchorage where
necessary for fastening furniture or furnishings securely in place.
Provide, for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated, slotted
inserts, expansion shields, and power-driven fasteners, when approved for
concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine and carriage
bolts for steel; through bolts, lag bolts, and screws for wood. Do not use
wood plugs in any material. Provide non-ferrous attachments for
non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials,
generally matching in color and finish the fastenings to which they are
applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
3.2
TESTING
Test each site furnishing to ascertain a secure and correct installation.
A correct installation shall be according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and by the following procedure: Measure the physical
dimensions and clearance of each installed site furnishing for compliance
with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated. Site furnishings
which do not comply shall be reinstalled. Fasteners and anchors determined
to be non-compliant shall be replaced. Submit a written report describing
the results of the testing and a report of post-installation test results.
3.3
FINISHES
3.4
SHELTERS
Secure to the adjacent construction with the clip angles attached to the
concrete. Secure to concrete with not less than two 1/2 inch diameter
expansion bolts.
3.4.1
Glazing
Factory install windows into separate structural frame. Miter corners and
connect internally by extruded aluminum corner keys or screw bosses with
tamper-proof stainless steel screws. Provide continuous gasketing around
windows set to metal frames. Provide 1/2 to 3/4 inch deep pocket for
polycarbonate glazing. Fully gasket and frame in independent
interchangeable factory assembled units. Affix to shelter frame with 3/16
inch shallow head aluminum rivets at approximately13-1/4 inches on centers
for full 360 degrees, rivet from inside of shelter.
SECTION 12 93 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.4.2
1313775
Roof
Provide manufacturer's standard roof system including facia assembly,
ensuring a weather-tight seal and installation.
3.5
RESTORATION AND CLEAN UP
When the installation has been completed, clean up and protect the site.
Existing areas that have been damaged from the installation operation shall
be restored to original condition at Contractor's expense.
3.5.1
Clean Up
The site shall be cleaned of all materials associated with the
installation. Site furnishing surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, stains,
filings, and other blemishes occurring from shipment and installation.
Cleaning methods and agents shall be according to manufacturer's
instructions or as indicated.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 12 93 00
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 21 13 21.00 20
FOAM FIRE EXTINGUISHING FOR FUEL TANK PROTECTION
11/09
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C500
(2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water
Supply Service
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE
(updated on-line) Approval Guide
http://www.approvalguide.com/
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 11
(2010; TIA 10-1) Standard for Low-,
Medium- and High- Expansion Foam
NFPA 13
(2013) Standard for the Installation of
Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 14
(2013) Standard for the Installation of
Standpipes and Hose Systems
NFPA 16
(2011) Standard for Installation of
Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray
Systems
NFPA 24
(2013) Standard for the Installation of
Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances
NFPA 30
(2012; Errata 2011; Errata 2011) Flammable
and Combustible Liquids Code
NFPA 70
(2014) National Electrical Code
NFPA 72
(2013) National Fire Alarm and Signaling
Code
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC Paint 25
(1997; E 2004) Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed
Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned
Steel, Type I and Type II
SSPC SP 11
(2012) Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal
SECTION 21 13 21.00 20
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
SSPC SP 3
1313775
(1982; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
CID A-A-58092
(Basic; Notice 1) Tape, Antiseize,
Polytetrafluoroethylene
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 262
(2004; Reprint Oct 2011) Gate Valves for
Fire-Protection Service
UL Fire Prot Dir
(2012) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1
Design Requirements
Design and modify an existing aqueous film forming foam (AFFF) fuel tank
protection system for the CEP-11 Tank. System shall provide uniform
distribution of AFFF solution to provide complete coverage by surface
application to the tank(s) indicated. The design, equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the
required and advisory provisions of NFPA 11, NFPA 13, NFPA 14, NFPA 16,
NFPA 24, NFPA 30, NFPA 70, and NFPA 72, except as modified herein. Devices
and equipment for fire protection service shall be of a make and type
listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. in the UL Fire Prot Dir, or
approved by the Factory Mutual System and listed in FM APP GUIDE. In the
publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be
considered to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted
for "should" wherever it appears; reference to the "authority having
jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval
Facilities Engineering Command Fire Protection Engineer. Begin work at the
point indicated.
1.2.1.1
Shop Drawings
Prepare shop drawings for the fire extinguishing system in accordance with
the requirements for "Plans" as specified in NFPA 11 and "Working Plans" as
specified in NFPA 13. Each drawing shall be 34 by 22 inches. Do not
commence work until the design of the system and the various components
have been approved. Show:
a.
Tank and tank farm area layout and include data essential to the proper
installation of the system.
b.
Foam chambers, discharge nozzles and system piping layout annotated
with reference points for design calculations.
1.2.1.2
Calculations
Submit design calculations for the system.
a.
Hydraulic calculations showing basis for design in accordance with
NFPA 11 and NFPA 13.
b.
Pressure discharge graphs or tables showing relationship for foam
chambers and discharge nozzles.
SECTION 21 13 21.00 20
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
c.
1313775
Contractor is responsible for obtaining information on existing foam
chambers while conducting their initial site visit prior to the start
of work.
1.2.1.3
As-Built Drawings for the Fire Extinguishing System
Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, submit a complete
set of as-built drawings of each system. Submit 34 by 22 inch reproducible
as-built drawings on mylar film with 8 by 4 inch title block similar to
contract drawings. Submit as-built drawings in addition to the record
drawings required by Division 1.
1.2.2
System Operation
Flow of water and AFFF shall be controlled by the fire department's trucks.
1.2.2.1
Tank System
Tank AFFF system shall be controlled by the fire department.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
The fire protection engineer, Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities
Engineering Command will review any approve all submittals in this section
requiring Government approval.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fire extinguishing system; G
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe, fittings, and mechanical couplings; G
Valves, including gate, check, and globe; G
Pipe hangers and supports; G
Fire department inlet connections; G
Data which describe more than one type of item shall be clearly
marked to indicate which type the Contractor intends to provide.
Submit only originals. Photocopies will not be accepted. Partial
submittals will not be accepted.
SD-05 Design Data
Hydraulic calculations; G
Pressure discharge graphs or tables; G
SD-06 Test Reports
SECTION 21 13 21.00 20
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Preliminary tests; G
Acceptance tests; G
Submit for all inspections and tests specified under paragraph
entitled "Field Quality Control."
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of installer; G
Submit installers qualifications as required under paragraph
entitled "Qualifications of Installer."
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Instructions for operating the fire extinguishing system, Data
Package 4; G
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
Furnish one complete set of data prior to the time that final
acceptance tests are performed, and furnish the remaining sets
before the contract is completed.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-built drawings for the fire extinguishing system; G
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications of Installer
Prior to commencing work, submit data showing that the Contractor has
successfully installed automatic foam fire extinguishing systems of the
same type and design as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual
agreement with a subcontractor having the required experience. Include the
names and locations of at least two installations where the Contractor, or
the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate
the type and design of each system, and certify that the system has
performed satisfactorily for a period of at least 18 months.
Qualifications of System Technician: Installation drawings, shop drawing
and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an
individual who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and
is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum
Level-III certification in Special Hazard System program. Contractor shall
submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved
individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
DESIGN OF FOAM SYSTEMS
Design of fuel tank fire extinguishing foam systems shall be by hydraulic
calculations for uniform distribution of AFFF solution over the protected
area and shall conform to the NFPA standards listed above and to the
requirements as specified herein.
SECTION 21 13 21.00 20
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.1.1
1313775
Tankside Foam Chambers
Foam Chambers are existing to remain.
2.1.2
AFFF Solution Distribution
Distribution shall be essentially uniform from all foam chambers on any
single tank.
2.1.3
AFFF Solution Application Density
The solution application density shall be determined by the contractor
during the initial site visit.
2.1.4
Foam Chamber Discharge Area
Area shall be over the entire liquid surface as required by NFPA 11.
2.1.5
Friction Losses
Calculate losses in pipe in accordance with the Hazen-Williams Formula with
'C' value of 100 for steel pipe, 150 for copper tube, and 140 for cement
lined ductile iron pipe.
2.1.6
Location of Foam Chambers
Foam chambers are existing.
2.1.7
Water Supply
The available water supply shall be determined by conducting a flow test of
the fire hydrant located nearest to the fire department connections for the
AFFF system. The available pressure will be boosted by the fire department.
Ensure that the available flow and pressure exist to support the
hydraulically calculated demands of the AFFF system.
2.2
2.2.1
ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
Pipe, Fittings, and Mechanical Couplings
NFPA 11, except steel piping shall be Schedule 40 for sizes smaller than 8
inches, and Schedule 30 or 40 for sizes 8 inches and larger. All steel
piping shall be zinc-coated. Pipe nipples 6 inches long and shorter shall
be Schedule 80 steel pipe. Gasketed fittings are not permitted inside the
diked area. Use of restriction orifices, reducing flanges, and plain-end
fittings with mechanical couplings (which utilize steel gripping devices to
bite into the pipe when pressure is applied) are not permitted. Pipe and
fittings in contact with AFFF concentrate shall be stainless steel.
Fittings on concentrate lines shall be flanged or welded only. Screwed or
mechanical fittings will not be permitted.
2.2.2
Jointing Material
CID A-A-58092, Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) tape.
(pipe dope) is not acceptable.
2.2.3
Pipe Hangers and Supports
NFPA 11 and NFPA 13.
SECTION 21 13 21.00 20
Page 5
Pipe joint compound
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.2.4
1313775
Valves
Provide valves as required by NFPA 11 and NFPA 13 and of types approved for
fire service. Gate valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation.
Butterfly valves are not acceptable.
2.2.5
Identification Signs
Attach properly lettered approved metal signs conforming to NFPA 13 to each
valve and alarm device. Permanently affix design data nameplates to the
riser of each system. Provide a new permanently affixed sign at the fire
department connections. This sign shall indicate the required pressure to
be provided at these connections for proper system operation. The required
pressure shall be determined by the hydraulic calculations.
2.2.6
Drains
Provide a low point drain in order for the system to drain completely after
use. A ball drip at the low point is acceptable. Provide drain piping to
discharge at safe points outside each building or to sight cones attached
to drains of adequate size to readily receive the full flow from each drain
under maximum pressure. Provide auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 11
and NFPA 13.
2.2.7
Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes through walls, floors, roofs, and partitions.
Secure sleeves in proper position and location during construction. Provide
sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls,
floors, roofs, and partitions. Provide not less than 1/4 inch space
between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve. Firmly pack space with
insulation and caulk at both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof
cement.
2.2.8
Fire Department Inlet Connections
Provide 4 connections with 2 1/2 inch National Standard male/female hose
threads with plug, chain, and identifying fire department connection
escutcheon plate. Provide inlet connections about 3 feet above grade where
shown on drawings.
2.3
2.3.1
BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS
Pipe and Fittings
NFPA 24, outside coated cement lined ductile iron pipe and fittings for
piping under ground. Anchor the joints in accordance with NFPA 24 using
pipe clamps and steel rods. Minimum pipe size shall be 6 inches. Minimum
depth of cover shall be 3 feet.
2.3.2
Valves
Provide as required by NFPA 24 for fire service. Gate valves shall conform
to AWWA C500 or UL 262 with cast iron body and bronze trim, and shall open
by counterclockwise rotation.
SECTION 21 13 21.00 20
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.3.3
1313775
Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape
Provide detectable aluminum foil plastic-backed tape or detectable magnetic
plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of
buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection
instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 3 inches minimum width, color coded for
the utility involved, with warning and identification imprinted in bold
black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning
and identification shall be CAUTION BURIED WATER PIPING BELOW or similar.
Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other
substances contained in trench backfill material. Bury tape with the
printed side up at a depth of 12 inches below the top surface of earth or
the top surface of the subgrade under pavements.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Provide under this section as specified in Section 31 23 00.00 20
EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3.2
AFFF SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly,
erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with
the NFPA standards referenced herein. Install piping straight and true to
bear evenly on hangers and supports. Piping shall be inspected, tested and
approved before being concealed. Provide fittings for changes in direction
of piping and for all connections. Make changes in piping sizes through
standard reducing pipe fittings; do not use bushings. Cut pipe accurately
and work into place without springing or forcing. Ream pipe ends and free
pipe and fittings from burrs. Clean with solvent to remove all varnish and
cutting oil prior to assembly. Make screw joints with PTFE tape applied to
male thread only.
3.3
FIELD PAINTING
Clean, prime, and paint new foam systems including valves, piping, conduit,
hangers, miscellaneous metal work, and accessories. Apply coatings to
clean dry surfaces using clean brushes. Clean the surfaces in accordance
with SSPC SP 3 SSPC SP 11. Immediately after cleaning, prime the metal
surfaces with one coat of SSPC Paint 25 primer applied to a minimum dry
film thickness of 1.5 mils. Exercise care to avoid the painting of
operating devices. Upon completion of painting, remove materials which
were used to protect operating devices while painting is in process.
Remove operating devices which have been inadvertently painted and provide
new clean operating devices of the proper type. Finish primed surfaces as
follows:
3.3.1
Foam Systems in All Other Areas
Paint primed surfaces with two coats of paint to match adjacent surfaces,
except paint valves and operating accessories with two coats of CID A-A-2962
white enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
3.3.2
Piping Labels
Provide permanent labels in foam rooms, spaced at 20 foot maximum intervals
along pipe, indicating "WATER", "FOAM CONCENTRATE", and "FOAM SOLUTION" on
SECTION 21 13 21.00 20
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
corresponding piping.
3.3.3
Field Touch-Up
Clean damaged areas of shop coated tanks in accordance with SSPC SP 11 and
coat cleaned areas with the same materials used for the shop applied
coating system.
3.4
FLUSHING
Flush the piping system with potable water in accordance with NFPA 13.
Continue flushing operation until water is clear, but for not less than 10
minutes.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Prior to initial operation, inspect equipment and piping systems for
compliance with drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's submittals.
Perform tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer to determine
conformance with the specified requirements.
3.5.1
Preliminary Tests
Each piping system shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 psig in
accordance with NFPA 11 and NFPA 13 and shall show no leakage or reduction
in gage pressure after 2 hours. The Contractor shall conduct complete
preliminary tests, which shall encompass all aspects of system operation.
Individually test all detectors, manual actuation stations, alarms, control
panels, and all other components and accessories to demonstrate proper
functioning. Test water flow alarms by flowing water. When tests have been
completed and all necessary corrections made, submit to the Contracting
Officer a signed and dated certificate, similar to that specified in NFPA 13,
attesting to the satisfactory completion of all testing and stating that
the system is in operating condition. Also include a written request for a
formal inspection and test.
3.5.2
Formal Inspection and Tests (Acceptance Tests)
The Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command Fire
Protection Engineer, will witness formal tests and approve all systems
before they are accepted. The system shall be considered ready for such
testing only after all necessary preliminary tests have been made and all
deficiencies found have been corrected to the satisfaction of the equipment
manufacturer's technical representative and written certification to this
effect is received by the Division Fire Protection Engineer. Submit the
request for formal inspection at least 15 working days prior to the date
the inspection is to take place. The control panel(s) and detection
system(s) shall be in continuous service for a "break-in" period of at
least 15 consecutive days prior to the formal inspection. Experienced
technicians regularly employed by the Contractor in the installation of
both the mechanical and electrical portions of such systems shall be
present during the inspection and shall conduct the testing. All AFFF
concentrate, instruments, personnel, appliances and equipment for testing
shall be furnished by the Contractor. All necessary tests encompassing all
aspects of system operation shall be made including the following, and any
deficiency found shall be corrected and the system retested at no cost to
the Government.
SECTION 21 13 21.00 20
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.5.2.1
1313775
Systems and Device Testing
The entire initiating, alarm, actuation systems shall be operated. As a
minimum, operation and supervision of the following functions and devices
shall be demonstrated:
a.
All operational and supervisory functions of the control and
annunciator panels.
b.
Each manual actuation station and associated circuit(s).
c.
All detectors and associated circuits.
d.
All alarms and associated circuits.
e.
All actuator circuits and system control valve(s) (without foam
discharge).
f.
Activation of the fire alarm system.
g.
Activation of the Base fire alarm system (receipt of fire alarm at
alarm office).
h.
All of the above tests shall then be repeated with the system on
battery power only.
3.5.2.2
Flushing and Rinsing
After completion of tests flush all piping carrying AFFF concentrate and
solution with fresh water. Piping normally containing AFFF concentrate
when the system is in standby mode need not be flushed. Rinse with fresh
water all equipment and surfaces exposed to AFFF discharge.
3.5.3
Additional Tests
When deficiencies, defects or malfunctions develop during the tests
required, all further testing of the system shall be suspended until proper
adjustments, corrections or revisions have been made to assure proper
performance of the system. If these revisions require more than a nominal
delay, the Contracting Officer shall be notified when the additional work
has been completed, to arrange a new inspection and test of the system. All
tests required shall be repeated prior to final acceptance, unless directed
otherwise.
3.5.4
Manufacturer's Representative
Provide the services of representatives or technicians from the
manufacturers of the foam system and control panel, experienced in the
installation and operation of the type of system being provided, to
supervise installation, adjustment, preliminary testing, and final testing
of the system and to provide instruction to Government personnel.
3.6
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide operating instructions at control equipment and at each remote
control station. Instructions shall clearly indicate all necessary steps
for the operation of the system. Submit the proposed legend for operating
instructions for approval prior to installation. Instructions shall be in
engraved white letters on red rigid plastic or red enameled steel
SECTION 21 13 21.00 20
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
backgrounds and shall be of adequate size to permit them to be easily read.
3.7
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide two sessions of 4
hours each of operation and maintenance training to the Base Fire
Department and Public Works personnel on two different days to accommodate
both shifts of the Base Fire Department. Each training session shall
include emergency procedures, and unique maintenance and safety
requirements. Training areas will be provided by the Government. The
training conducted shall use operation and maintenance manuals specified in
paragraph entitled "Operations and Maintenance Manuals." Dates and times of
the training period shall be coordinated through the Contracting Officer
not less than two weeks prior to the session.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 21 13 21.00 20
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
07/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D709
(2013) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE C2
(2012; Errata 2012; INT 1-4 2012; INT 5-6
2013) National Electrical Safety Code
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
1.2
(2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2
2013; Errata 2 2013) National Electrical
Code
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
This section applies to certain sections of Division 02, EXISTING CONDITIONS
and to applies to all sections of Division 26 and 33, ELECTRICAL and
UTILITIES, of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the
individual sections. This section has been incorporated into, and thus,
does not apply to, and is not referenced in the following sections.
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
1.3
DEFINITIONS
a.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics
terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as
defined in IEEE 100.
b.
The technical sections referred to herein are those specification
sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment
operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of
submittal types.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
c.
1.4
1313775
The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in
PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that
describe products, systems, installation procedures, equipment, and
test methods.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 11.5 kV primary, three
phase, three wire, 60 Hz, and 208Y/120 volts secondary, three phase, four
wire.
Final connections to the power distribution system at the existing
overhead distribution line shall be made by the Contractor as directed by
the Contracting Officer.
1.5
ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION
Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must
conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.
1.5.1
Shop Drawings (SD-02)
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating
proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories,
piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a
coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals
and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate
adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating
equipment devices.
1.5.2
Product Data (SD-03)
Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.
1.6
1.6.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.6.2
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.
1.6.2.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.6.2.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.7
WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
1.8
MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.9
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment
enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical
sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall
identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall
be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.
Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align
lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block style.
1.10
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and
requirements specified herein.
1.11
INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of
competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government
personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified
systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required.
Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation
and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and
maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work
week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the
Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day)
of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2
2.1
1313775
PRODUCTS
FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which
shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test and the additional requirements specified in the technical sections.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in the section specifying the associated electrical equipment.
3.2
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as
indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 26 08 00
APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)
NETA ATS
1.2
(2013) Standard for Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to
this section with additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-06 Test Reports
Acceptance tests and inspections; G
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of organization, and lead engineering technician; G
Acceptance test and inspections procedure; G
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications
Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing organization to
provide inspection, testing, calibration, and adjustment of the electrical
distribution system and generation equipment listed in paragraph entitled
"Acceptance Tests and Inspections" herein. Organization shall be
independent of the supplier, manufacturer, and installer of the
equipment.
The organization shall be a first tier subcontractor. No work
required by this section of the specification shall be performed by a
second tier subcontractor.
a.
Submit name and qualifications of organization. Organization shall
have been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical materials,
devices, installations, and systems for a minimum of 5 years. The
organization shall have a calibration program, and test instruments
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
used shall be calibrated in accordance with NETA ATS.
b.
1.4.2
Submit name and qualifications of the lead engineering technician
performing the required testing services. Include a list of three
comparable jobs performed by the technician with specific names and
telephone numbers for reference. Testing, inspection, calibration, and
adjustments shall be performed by an engineering technician, certified
by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies (NICET) with a minimum of 5 years' experience inspecting,
testing, and calibrating electrical distribution and generation
equipment, systems, and devices.
Acceptance Tests and Inspections Reports
Submit certified copies of inspection reports and test reports. Reports
shall include certification of compliance with specified requirements,
identify deficiencies, and recommend corrective action when appropriate.
Type and neatly bind test reports to form a part of the final record.
Submit test reports documenting the results of each test not more than 10
days after test is completed.
1.4.3
Acceptance Test and Inspections Procedure
Submit test procedure reports for each item of equipment to be field tested
at least 45 days prior to planned testing date. Do not perform testing
until after test procedure has been approved.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Testing organization shall perform acceptance tests and inspections. Test
methods, procedures, and test values shall be performed and evaluated in
accordance with NETA ATS, the manufacturer's recommendations, and paragraph
entitled "Field Quality Control" of each applicable specification section.
Tests identified as optional in NETA ATS are not required unless otherwise
specified. Equipment shall be placed in service only after completion of
required tests and evaluation of the test results have been completed.
Contractor shall supply to the testing organization complete sets of shop
drawings, settings of adjustable devices, and other information necessary
for an accurate test and inspection of the system prior to the performance
of any final testing. Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 14
days in advance of when tests will be conducted by the testing
organization. Perform acceptance tests and inspections on applicable
equipment and systems specified in the following sections:
a.
Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
b.
Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
3.2
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance of the system is contingent upon satisfactory completion
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
of acceptance tests and inspections.
3.3
PLACING EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE
A representative of the approved testing organization shall be present when
equipment tested by the organization is initially energized and placed in
service.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02/14
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B1
(2013) Standard Specification for
Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
ASTM B8
(2011) Standard Specification for
Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
ASTM D709
(2013) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE 81
(2012) Guide for Measuring Earth
Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System
IEEE C2
(2012; Errata 2012; INT 1-4 2012; INT 5-7
2013) National Electrical Safety Code
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C80.1
(2005) American National Standard for
Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)
ANSI C80.3
(2005) American National Standard for
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA ICS 1
(2000; R 2008; E 2010) Standard for
Industrial Control and Systems: General
Requirements
NEMA ICS 2
(2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for
Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
NEMA ICS 4
(2010) Terminal Blocks
NEMA ICS 6
(1993; R 2011) Enclosures
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
NEMA MG 1
(2011; Errata 2012) Motors and Generators
NEMA MG 10
(2013) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency
Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase
Induction Motors
NEMA MG 11
(1977; R 2012) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors
NEMA WD 1
(1999; R 2005; R 2010) Standard for
General Color Requirements for Wiring
Devices
NEMA WD 6
(2012) Wiring Devices Dimensions
Specifications
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2
2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata 3
2014) National Electrical Code
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.147
Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag
Out)
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1063
(2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Machine-Tool
Wires and Cables
UL 44
(2014) Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
UL 467
(2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 486A-486B
(2013; Reprint Feb 2014) Wire Connectors
UL 486C
(2013; Reprint Feb 2014) Splicing Wire
Connectors
UL 489
(2013; Reprint Mar 2014) Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches,
and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
UL 498
(2012; Reprint Feb 2014) Attachment Plugs
and Receptacles
UL 50
(2007; Reprint Apr 2012) Enclosures for
Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental
Considerations
UL 506
(2008; Reprint Oct 2013) Specialty
Transformers
UL 508
(1999; Reprint Oct 2013) Industrial
Control Equipment
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
UL 510
(2005; Reprint Jul 2013) Polyvinyl
Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber
Insulating Tape
UL 514A
(2013) Metallic Outlet Boxes
UL 514B
(2012) Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings
UL 514C
(2014) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes,
Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers
UL 6
(2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid
Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 797
(2007; Reprint Dec 2012) Electrical
Metallic Tubing -- Steel
UL 83
(2014) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and
Cables
UL 984
(1996; Reprint Sep 2005) Hermetic
Refrigerant Motor-Compressors
1.2
DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms
used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in
IEEE 100.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Marking strips drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Receptacles; G
Circuit breakers; G
Motor controllers; G
SD-06 Test Reports
600-volt wiring test; G
Grounding system test; G
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" or "must" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment,
materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with the mandatory
and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.4.2
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship and:
a.
Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years
prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials
under similar circumstances and of similar size.
b.
Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.
c.
Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required,
provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts
of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless
stated in this section.
1.4.2.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.4.2.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
are not acceptable.
1.5
WARRANTY
Provide equipment items supported by service organizations that are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
As a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL standards are established
for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70 for all materials, equipment,
and devices.
2.2
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
Conform to the following:
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.2.1
1313775
Rigid Metallic Conduit
2.2.1.1
Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit
ANSI C80.1, UL 6.
2.2.2
Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)
UL 797, ANSI C80.3.
2.2.3
Fittings for Metal Conduit, and EMT
UL 514B.
UL 514B.
2.2.3.1
Ferrous fittings:
Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit
Threaded-type.
2.2.3.2
cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with
Split couplings unacceptable.
Fittings for EMT
Die Cast compression type.
2.3
OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS
UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal.
nonmetallic.
2.4
UL 514C, if
CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES
Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet
steel.
2.5
WIRES AND CABLES
Provide wires and cables in accordance applicable requirements of NFPA 70
and UL for type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or
indicated. Do not use wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months
prior to date of delivery to site.
2.5.1
Conductors
Provide the following:
a.
Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper, unless
indicated otherwise.
b.
Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter:
c.
Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter:
d.
Conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1,
2, and 3: stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise.
e.
All conductors:
copper.2.5.1.1
stranded.
solid.
Minimum Conductor Sizes
Provide minimum conductor size in accordance with the following:
a.
Branch circuits:
No. 12 AWG.
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
b.
Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits:
c.
Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits:
d.
Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits:
AWG.
2.5.2
No. 14 AWG.
No. 16 AWG.
No. 22
Color Coding
Provide color coding for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling
circuit conductors.
2.5.2.1
Ground and Neutral Conductors
Provide color coding of ground and neutral conductors as follows:
a.
Grounding conductors:
b.
Neutral conductors:
c.
Exception, where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same
raceway or box, other neutrals color coding: white with a different
colored (not green) stripe for each.
2.5.2.2
Green.
White.
Ungrounded Conductors
Provide color coding of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems
as follows:
a.
b.
2.5.3
208/120 volt, three-phase
(1)
Phase A - black
(2)
Phase B - red
(3)
Phase C - blue
120/240 volt, single phase:
Black and red
Insulation
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, provide
power wires rated for 600-volts, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83, except
that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83; remote-control and
signal circuits: Type TW or TF, conforming to UL 83.
2.5.4
Bonding Conductors
ASTM B1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter;
ASTM B8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger
diameter.
2.6
SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS
UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes.
Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires: insulated,
pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing
connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.7
1313775
DEVICE PLATES
Provide the following:
a.
UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices
installed.
b.
For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls:
steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges.
c.
For nonmetallic boxes and fittings, other suitable plates may be
provided.
d.
Plates on finished walls: satin finish stainless steel or
brushed-finish aluminum, minimum 0.03 inch thick.
e.
Screws: machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish
of plate.
f.
Sectional type device plates are not be permitted.
g.
Plates installed in wet locations:
locations."
2.8
zinc-coated sheet
gasketed and UL listed for "wet
RECEPTACLES
Provide the following:
a.
UL 498, hard use (also designated heavy-duty), grounding-type.
b.
Ratings and configurations:
c.
Bodies:
d.
Face and body:
e.
Dimensional requirements:
f.
Screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or of the solderless pressure
type having suitable conductor-release arrangement.
g.
Grounding pole connected to mounting strap.
h.
The receptacle: containing triple-wipe power contacts and double or
triple-wipe ground contacts.
2.9
2.9.1
as indicated.
white as per NEMA WD 1.
thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap.
per NEMA WD 6.
PANELBOARDS
Circuit Breakers
UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating
equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the
circuit breaker will be mounted. Breaker terminals: UL listed as suitable
for type of conductor provided. Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in
circuit breakers are unacceptable.
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.9.1.1
1313775
Multipole Breakers
Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Design breaker such
that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain
phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker
poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.
2.10
MOTORS
Provide motors in accordance with the following:
a.
NEMA MG 1.
b.
Hermetic-type sealed motor compressors:
c.
Provide the size in terms of HP, or kVA, or full-load current, or a
combination of these characteristics, and other characteristics, of
each motor as indicated or specified.
d.
Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of
correctly sized starters and overload heaters.
e.
Rate motors for operation on 208-volt, 3-phase circuits with a terminal
voltage rating of 200 volts, and those for operation on 480-volt,
3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 460 volts.
f.
Use motors designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation
of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating.
g.
Unless otherwise indicated, use continuous duty type motors if rated 1
HP and above.
h.
Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment
manufacturer, provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches
indicated.
2.10.1
Also comply with UL 984.
High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors
Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors: high
efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.
In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall
efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to
meet the overall system rating indicated.
2.10.2
Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors
Select polyphase motors based on high efficiency characteristics relative
to typical characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. In
addition, continuous rated, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors
must meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors in
accordance with NEMA MG 1, including the NEMA full load efficiency
ratings. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal
or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with
motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.
2.10.3
Motor Sizes
Provide size for duty to be performed, not exceeding the full-load
nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered. When motor
size provided differs from size indicated or specified, make adjustments to
wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate
equipment actually provided. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and
above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors
from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for
motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.
2.10.4
Wiring and Conduit
Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral
part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for
field-installed equipment as specified herein. Power wiring and conduit:
conform to the requirements specified herein. Control wiring: provided
under, and conform to, the requirements of the section specifying the
associated equipment.
2.11
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Provide motor controllers in accordance with the following:
a.
UL 508, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2.
b.
Provide controllers with thermal overload protection in each phase, and
one spare normally open auxiliary contact, and one spare normally
closed auxiliary contact.
c.
Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic
phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss,
undervoltage, and overvoltage.
d.
Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time
adjustable restart relay.
e.
When used with pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or
maintained-contact switch, provide a hand/off/automatic selector switch
with the controller.
f.
Connections to selector switch: wired such that only normal automatic
regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in "hand"
position.
g.
Safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high
temperature cutouts, and motor overload protective devices: connected
in motor control circuit in "hand" and "automatic" positions.
h.
Control circuit connections to hand/off/automatic selector switch or to
more than one automatic regulatory control device: made in accordance
with indicated or manufacturer's approved wiring diagram.
i.
Provide selector switch with the means for locking in any position.
j.
Provide a disconnecting means, capable of being locked in the open
position, for the motor that is located in sight from the motor
location and the driven machinery location. As an alternative, provide
a motor controller disconnect, capable of being locked in the open
position, to serve as the disconnecting means for the motor if it is in
sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location.
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
l.
Overload protective devices: provide adequate protection to motor
windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type; and include manual
reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case.
m.
Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit
breaker: interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit
breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or
circuit breaker is in "off" position.
2.11.1
Control Wiring
Provide control wiring in accordance with the following:
a.
All control wire: stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with
600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44, or Type MTW
meeting UL 1063, and passing the VW-1 flame tests included in those
standards.
b.
Hinge wire:
c.
Current transformer secondary leads:
d.
Control wire minimum size:
e.
Power wiring for 480-volt circuits and below:
wiring with No. 12 AWG minimum size.
f.
Provide wiring and terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to
permit the individual conductors of each external cable to be
terminated on adjacent terminal points.
2.11.2
Class K stranding.
not smaller than No. 10 AWG.
No. 14 AWG.
the same type as control
Control Circuit Terminal Blocks
Provide control circuit terminal blocks in accordance with the following:
a.
NEMA ICS 4.
b.
Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring: molded or
fabricated type with barriers, rated not less than 600 volts.
c.
Provide terminals with removable binding, fillister or washer head
screw type, or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts.
d.
Terminals: not less than No. 10 in size with sufficient length and
space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG
conductors to each terminal.
e.
Terminal arrangement: subject to the approval of the Contracting
Officer with not less than four (4) spare terminals or 10 percent,
whichever is greater, provided on each block or group of blocks.
f.
Modular, pull apart, terminal blocks are acceptable provided they are
of the channel or rail-mounted type.
g.
Submit data showing that any proposed alternate will accommodate the
specified number of wires, are of adequate current-carrying capacity,
and are constructed to assure positive contact between current-carrying
parts.
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.11.2.1
1313775
Types of Terminal Blocks
a.
Short-Circuiting Type: Short-circuiting type terminal blocks:
furnished for all current transformer secondary leads with provision
for shorting together all leads from each current transformer without
first opening any circuit. Terminal blocks: comply with the
requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS above.
b.
Load Type: Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and of
adequate capacity: provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3 and
smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits, except those
for feeder tap units. Provide terminals of either the stud type with
contact nuts and locking nuts or of the removable screw type, having
length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size
required on the conductors to be terminated. For conductors rated more
than 50 amperes, provide screws with hexagonal heads. Conducting parts
between connected terminals must have adequate contact surface and
cross-section to operate without overheating. Provide eEach connected
terminal with the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near
the terminal in permanent contrasting color.
2.11.3
Control Circuits
Control circuits: maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from control
transformer in same enclosure. Transformers: conform to UL 506, as
applicable. Transformers, other than transformers in bridge circuits:
provide primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for
correct control circuit voltage. Size transformers so that 80 percent of
rated capacity equals connected load. Provide disconnect switch on primary
side. Provide for automatic switchover and alarm upon failure of primary
control circuit.
2.11.4
Enclosures for Motor Controllers
NEMA ICS 6.
2.12
LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS
Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and
other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy
in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147. Comply with requirements of Division
23, "Mechanical" for mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment.
2.13
2.13.1
GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT
Ground Rods
UL 467. Ground rods:
copper-clad steel, with minimum diameter of 3/4 inch
and minimum length 10 feet. Sectional ground rods are permitted.
2.14
MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Provide on each item of equipment a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 11
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.15
1313775
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
Provide field fabricated nameplates in accordance with the following:
a.
ASTM D709.
b.
Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure,
relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings.
c.
Each nameplate inscription:
applicable, the position.
d.
Nameplates: melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black
center core.
f.
Surface: matte finish. Corners:
and engrave into the core.
g.
Minimum size of nameplates:
h.
Lettering size and style:
style.
2.16
identify the function and, when
square.
Accurately align lettering
one by 2.5 inches.
a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block
FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with
Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING .
2.17
FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Provide factory-applied finish on electrical equipment in accordance with
the following:
a.
NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as
specified herein.
b.
Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures:
thoroughly cleaned followed by a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or
equivalent treatment prior to painting.
c.
Exterior surfaces: free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose
scale or other imperfections.
d.
Interior surfaces: receive not less than one coat of
corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's
standard practice.
e.
Exterior surfaces: primed, filled where necessary, and given not less
than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish.
f.
Equipment located indoors:
outdoors: ANSI Dark Gray.
g.
Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in
paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.
ANSI Light Gray, and equipment located
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 12
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
PART 3
3.1
1313775
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations
and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces: conform to requirements
of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.
3.1.1
Wiring Methods
Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, or
EMT, except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required
by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise. Grounding conductor: separate from
electrical system neutral conductor. Provide insulated green equipment
grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways.
Minimum conduit size:
1/2 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and
power circuits. Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings: made
with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts, with metal conduit extending
through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches. Firestop conduit which
penetrates fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated floors in
accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.1.1
Pull Wire
Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire: plastic having minimum
200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each
end of pull wire.
3.1.2
Conduit Installation
Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within
finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away
from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit
parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members
where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible
after completion of project.
3.1.2.1
Restrictions Applicable to EMT
a.
Do not install underground.
b.
Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious
materials.
c.
Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not
limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could
physically damage the EMT.
d.
Do not use in hazardous areas.
e.
Do not use outdoors.
f.
Do not use in fire pump rooms.
g.
Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the
effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 13
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.1.2.2
1313775
Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit
Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Do not use when
the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude
Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
3.1.2.3
Conduit Support
Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, threaded rod conduit
hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts
on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete
or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension
clamps on steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit
only. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not
exceed one-fourth proof test load for load applied to fasteners. Provide
vibration resistant and shock-resistant fasteners attached to concrete
ceiling. Do not cut main reinforcing bars for any holes cut to depth of
more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than
3/4 inch in concrete joints. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light
steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling
construction, run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling
support system. Conduit and box systems: supported independently of both
(a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system
into which ceiling panels are placed. Do not share supporting means
between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Coordinate
installationwith above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum
accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used for
lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry
locations.Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable
watertight expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity
by bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches
inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the
equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the
downward direction.
3.1.2.4
Directional Changes in Conduit Runs
Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal
fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending
machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped
conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes,
fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of
obstructions.
3.1.2.5
Locknuts and Bushings
Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where
required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings
cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least
minimum single locknut and bushing. Provide locknuts with sharp edges for
digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of
conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.
3.1.2.6
Provide
subject
Install
conduit
Flexible Connections
flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for equipment
to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for motors.
flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel
size:
1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 14
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
wet and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, movement or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across
flexible connections.
3.1.3
Boxes, Outlets, and Supports
Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling
of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes
for metallic raceways: cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet locations,
when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, and when specifically
indicated. Boxes in other locations: sheet steel, except that aluminum
boxes may be used with aluminum conduit, and nonmetallic boxes may be used
with nonmetallic conduit system. Provide each box with volume required by
NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box. Fasten boxes and
supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion shields on
concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with
machine screws or welded studs on steel. Threaded studs driven in by
powder charge and provided with lockwashers and nuts or nail-type nylon
anchors may be used in lieu of wood screws, expansion shields, or machine
screws. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not
be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support
sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers.
Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of
box, and support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from
box. When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting
reinforcing steel.
3.1.3.1
Boxes
Boxes for use with raceway systems: minimum 1 1/2 inches deep, except
where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved.
3.1.3.2
Pull Boxes
Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge
aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, except where cast-metal boxes are
required in locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened
covers. Where several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to
indicate clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel
designation.
3.1.4
Mounting Heights
Mount motor controller so height of operating handle at its highest
position is maximum 78 inches above floor.
Mount other devices as
indicated.
3.1.5
Conductor Identification
Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice,
or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter,
provide color coding by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation. For
conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, provide color coding by
plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates;
or heat shrink-type sleeves.
3.1.5.1
Marking Strips
Provide marking strips in accordance with the following:
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 15
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
a.
Provide white or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened
by screws to each terminal block, for wire designations.
b.
Use permanent ink for the wire numbers
c.
Provide reversible marking strips to permit marking both sides, or
provide two marking strips with each block.
d.
Size marking strips to accommodate the two sets of wire numbers.
e.
Assign a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 to each
device to which a connection is made. Mark each device terminal to
which a connection is made with a distinct terminal marking
corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractor's
schematic and connection diagrams.
f.
The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractor's wiring
diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according
to the Contractor's standard practice; however, provide additional wire
and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits
for the Government's wire designations.
g.
Prints
marked
to the
points
3.1.6
of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so
and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations
terminal strips and tracings, along with any rearrangement of
required.
Splices
Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10
AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make
splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless
connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor
insulation.
3.1.7
Covers and Device Plates
Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces
without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not
permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of
sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates
installed in wet locations.
3.1.8
Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated
walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.9
Grounding and Bonding
Provide in accordance with NFPA 70. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying
metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding
conductor in metallic and neutral conductor of wiring systems.
3.1.9.1
Ground Rods
Provide cone pointed ground rods.
Measure the resistance to ground using
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 16
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. Do not exceed 25 ohms
under normally dry conditions for the maximum resistance of a driven
ground. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod,
additional rods, spaced on center, not less than twice the distance of the
length of the rod.
3.1.9.2
Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally
inaccessible.
a.
Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld
manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or
which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not
acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.
b.
Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to
provide the correct circumferential pressure. Provide tools and dies
as recommended by the manufacturer. Use an embossing die code or other
standard method to provide visible indication that a connector has been
adequately compressed on the ground wire.
3.1.9.3
Resistance
Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system: do not exceed 5 ohms
under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms, contact
Contracting Officer for further instructions.
3.1.10
Equipment Connections
Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment
under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically
noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and
protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this
section of the specifications and are provided under the section specifying
the associated equipment.
3.1.11
Repair of Existing Work
Perform repair of existing work as follows:
3.1.11.1
Workmanship
Lay out work in advance. Exercise care where cutting, channeling, chasing,
or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces is
necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of conduit,
raceways, or other electrical work. Repair damage to buildings, piping,
and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved.
3.1.11.2
Existing Concealed Wiring to be Removed
Disconnect existing concealed wiring to be removed from its source. Remove
conductors; cut conduit flush with floor, underside of floor, and through
walls; and seal openings.
3.1.11.3
Continuation of Service
Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Maintain
existing circuits of equipment energized. Restore circuits wiring and
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 17
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
power which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition back to
original condition.
3.2
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as
indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.3
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test
results. Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each tests.
3.4.1
Devices Subject to Manual Operation
Operate each device subject to manual operation at least five times,
demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.
3.4.2
600-Volt Wiring Test
Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or
accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring
No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of
approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum
resistance: 250,000 ohms.
3.4.3
Grounding System Test
Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground
is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before
making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for
resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not
earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test
to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance
and soil conditions at time measurements were made.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 18
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
05/13
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
(AASHTO)
AASHTO LTS
(2013; Errata 2013) Standard
Specifications for Structural Supports for
Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic
Signals
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP
(2013l INT 1 2013; Errata 1-3 2013; Errata
4 2014) Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A153/A153M
(2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
ASTM B108/B108M
(2012; E 2012) Standard Specification for
Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings
ASTM B117
(2011) Standard Practice for Operating
Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IES)
IES HB-10
(2011) IES Lighting Handbook
IES LM-79
(2008) Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-State Lighting
Products
IES LM-80
(2008) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED
Light Sources
IES RP-16
(2010; Addendum A 2008; Addenda B & C
2009) Nomenclature and Definitions for
Illuminating Engineering
IES RP-8
(2000; Errata 2004; R 2005; Errata 2007)
Roadway Lighting
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
IES TM-15
(2011) Luminaire Classification System for
Outdoor Luminaires
IES TM-21
(2011) Projecting Long Term Lumen
Maintenance of LED Light Sources
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE C2
(2012; Errata 2012; INT 1-4 2012; INT 5-7
2013) National Electrical Safety Code
IEEE C62.41.2
(2002) Recommended Practice on
Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C136.13
(2004; R 2009) American National Standard
for Roadway Lighting Equipment, Metal
Brackets for Wood Poles
ANSI C136.21
(2004; R 2009) American National Standard
for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Vertical Tenons Used with Post-Top-Mounted
Luminaires
ANSI C136.3
(2005; R 2009) American National Standard
for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment
Luminaire Attachments
NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA ANSLG C78.377
(2011) American National Standard for
Electric Lamps— Specifications for the
Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting
Products
NEMA C136.10
(2010) American National Standard for
Roadway and Area Lighting
Equipment-Locking-Type Photocontrol
Devices and Mating Receptacles--Physical
and Electrical Interchangeability and
Testing
NEMA C136.31
(2010) American National for Roadway and
Area Lighting Equipment - Luminaire
Vibration
NEMA C82.77
(2002) Harmonic Emission Limits - Related
Power Quality Requirements for Lighting
Equipment
NEMA IEC 60529
(2004) Degrees of Protection Provided by
Enclosures (IP Code)
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2
2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata 3
2014) National Electrical Code
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
47 CFR 15
Radio Frequency Devices
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1310
(2011; Reprint Oct 2013) UL Standard for
Safety Class 2 Power Units
UL 1598
(2008; Reprint Oct 2012) Luminaires
UL 773
(1995; Reprint Mar 2002) Standard for
Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for
Use with Area Lighting
UL 773A
(2006; Reprint Nov 2013) Standard for
Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for
Lighting Control
UL 8750
(2009; Reprint May 2014) UL Standard for
Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED)
Equipment for Use in Lighting Products
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Materials not considered to be luminaires or lighting equipment are
specified in Section(s) 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION and
33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
a.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics
terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings shall be as
defined in IEEE 100 and IES RP-16.
b.
For LED luminaire light sources, "Useful Life" is the operating hours
before reaching 70 percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with
no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions. This is
also known as 70 percent "Rated Lumen Maintenance Life" as defined in
IES LM-80.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Photometric Plan; G
LED Luminaire Warranty; G
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Luminaire drawings; G
Poles; G
SD-03 Product Data
LED Luminaires; G
Luminaire Light Sources; G
Luminaire Power Supply Units (Drivers); G
Photocell; G
Aluminum poles; G
Brackets
SD-05 Design Data
Design Data for luminaires; G
SD-06 Test Reports
LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report; G
LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report; G
Operating test
Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled
"Field Quality Control."
SD-07 Certificates
Luminaire Useful Life Certificate; G
Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected
useful life of the luminaires provided. The useful life shall be
directly correlated from the IES LM-80 test data using procedures
outlined in IES TM-21. Thermal properties of the specific
luminaire and local ambient operating temperature and conditions
shall be taken into consideration.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operational Service
Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of
procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the
project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials
for recycling and/or reuse.
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.5
1313775
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1
Drawing Requirements
1.5.1.1
Luminaire Drawings
Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and
installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal
lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized
candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.
1.5.1.2
Poles
Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS,
pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information.
1.5.2
Photometric Plan
For LED luminaires, include computer-generated photometric analysis of the
"designed to" values for the "end of useful life" of the luminaire
installation using a light loss factor of 0.7. For LED and all other types
of luminaires, the submittal shall include the following:
Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade, taken at a maximum
of every 10 feet.
Vertical illuminance measurements at 5 feet above finished grade.
Minimum and maximum footcandle levels.
Average maintained footcandle level.
Maximum to minimum ratio for horizontal illuminance only.
1.5.3
Design Data for Luminaires
a.
Provide distribution data according to IES classification type as
defined in IES HB-10.
b.
Shielding as defined by IES RP-8 or B.U.G. rating for the installed
position as defined by IES TM-15.
c.
Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family.
Include listing, labeling and identification per NFPA 70 (NEC).
Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety
Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratories (NRTL) and include: CSA (Canadian Standards Association),
ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), and UL (Underwriters Laboratories).
d.
Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire
in accordance with IES TM-21. Data used for projections shall be
obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80.
e.
Provide wind loading calculations for luminaires mounted on poles.
Weight and effective projected area (EPA) of luminaires and mounting
brackets shall not exceed maximum rating of pole as installed in
particular wind zone area.
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.5.4
1313775
LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report
Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire.
Submittal shall include all photometric and electrical measurements, as
well as all other pertinent data outlined under "14.0 Test Report" in
IES LM-79.
1.5.5
LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report
Submit report on manufacturer's standard production LED package, array, or
module. Submittal shall include:
a.
Testing agency, report number, date, type of equipment, and LED light
source being tested.
b.
All data required by IES LM-80.
1.5.5.1
Test Laboratories
Test laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports shall be one
of the following:
a.
National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited
for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient
Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program.
b.
One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy - Energy
Efficiency & Renewable Energy, Solid-State Lighting web site.
c.
A manufacturer's in-house lab that meets the following criteria:
1.5.6
1.
Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and
production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires
and the manufacturer's lab has been successfully certifying these
fixtures for a minimum of 15 years.
2.
Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in
accordance with National Institute of Standards and Technology.
Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.5.7
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.5.7.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production
of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires for a minimum of 15
years. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial
use for 15 years prior to bid opening. The product shall have been on sale
on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs,
or brochures during the 15-year period.
1.5.7.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.6
1.6.1
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES
Aluminum Poles
Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot
above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied
pole wrappings until just before installing pole.
1.7
WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
1.7.1
LED Luminaire Warranty
Provide Luminaire Useful Life Certificate.
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
a.
Provide a written five year on-site replacement warranty for material,
fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes
transportation, removal, and installation of new products.
1.
Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against
substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling,
chalking, or fading.
2.
Material warranty shall include:
(a) All power supply units (drivers).
(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any
lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
b.
1.8
1313775
Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy. Contractor
shall provide the Contracting Officer signed warranty certificates
prior to final payment.
OPERATIONAL SERVICE
Coordinate with manufacturer for maintenance agreement. Collect
information from the manufacturer about maintenance agreement options, and
submit to Contracting Officer. Services shall reclaim materials for
recycling and/or reuse. Services shall not deposit materials in landfills
or burn reclaimed materials. Indicate procedures for compliance with
regulations governing disposal of mercury. When such a service is not
available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
PRODUCT COORDINATION
Products and materials not considered to be luminaires, equipment or
accessories are specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL
DISTRIBUTION, Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION, and
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.2
LED LUMINAIRES
UL 1598, NEMA C82.77 and UL 8750. Provide luminaires as indicated in
luminaire schedule and XL plates or details on project plans. Provide
luminaires complete with light sources of quantity, type, and wattage
indicated. All luminaires of the same type shall be provided by the same
manufacturer.
2.2.1
General Requirements
a.
LED luminaire housings shall be die cast or extruded aluminum.
b.
LED luminaires shall be rated for operation within an ambient
temperature range of minus 22 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
c.
Luminaires shall be UL listed for wet locations per UL 1598. Optical
compartment for LED luminaires shall be sealed and rated a minimum of
IP65 per NEMA IEC 60529.
d.
LED luminaires shall produce a minimum efficacy as shown in the
following table, tested per IES LM-79. Theoretical models of initial
raw LED lumens per watt are not acceptable.
Application
Luminaire Efficacy
in Lumens per Watt
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
Exterior Pole/Arm-Mounted Area and
Roadway Luminaires
1313775
60
e.
Luminaires shall have IES distribution and NEMA field angle
classifications as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans per
IES HB-10.
f.
Housing finish shall be baked-on enamel, anodized, or baked-on powder
coat paint. Finish shall be capable of surviving ASTM B117 salt fog
environment testing for 2500 hours minimum without blistering or
peeling.
g.
Luminaires shall not exceed the following IES TM-15 Backlight, Uplight
and Glare (B.U.G.) ratings:
1.
Maximum Backlight (B) rating shall be determined by lighting zone
in which luminaire is placed.
2.
Maximum Uplight (U) rating shall be U0.
3.
Maximum Glare (G) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in
which luminaire is placed.
h.
Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to
shipment from factory.
i.
The finish color shall be as indicated in the luminaire schedule or
detail on the project plans.
j.
Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel or zinc-plated steel.
k.
Luminaire lenses shall be constructed of clear tempered glass or
UV-resistant acrylic.
l.
The wiring compartment on pole-mounted, street and area luminaires must
be accessible without the use of hand tools to manipulate small screws,
bolts, or hardware.
m.
Incorporate modular electrical connections, and construct luminaires to
allow replacement of all or any part of the optics, heat sinks, power
supply units, ballasts, surge suppressors and other electrical
components using only a simple tool, such as a manual or cordless
electric screwdriver.
n.
Luminaires shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name,
address, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number securely
affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing
agent will not be acceptable.
o.
Roadway and area luminaires shall have an integral tilt adjustment of
plus or minus 5 degrees to allow the unit to be leveled in accordance
with ANSI C136.3.
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
p.
Luminaire must pass 3G vibration testing in accordance with NEMA C136.31.
q.
All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp, locking,
or latching style connectors. Twist-style wire nuts are not acceptable.
2.2.2
Luminaire Light Sources
2.2.2.1
a.
LED Light Sources
Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be in accordance with
NEMA ANSLG C78.377:
Nominal CCT: 4000 degrees K: 3985 plus or minus 275 degrees K
b.
Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be:
Greater than or equal to 70 for 4000 degrees K light sources.
c.
Color Consistency:
Manufacturer shall utilize a maximum 4-step MacAdam ellipse binning
tolerance for color consistency of LEDs used in luminaires.
2.2.3
Luminaire Power Supply Units (Drivers)
2.2.3.1
LED Power Supply Units (Drivers)
UL 1310. LED Power Supply Units (Drivers) shall meet the following
requirements:
a.
Minimum efficiency shall be 85 percent.
b.
Drive current to each individual LED shall not exceed 600 mA, plus or
minus 10 percent.
c.
Shall be rated to operate between ambient temperatures of minus 22
degrees F and 104 degrees F.
d.
Shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are
connected, typically ranging from 120 V to 480 V nominal.
e.
Operating frequency shall be: 50 or 60 Hz.
f.
Power Factor (PF) shall be greater than or equal to 0.90.
g.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) current shall be less than or equal to
20 percent.
h.
Shall meet requirements of 47 CFR 15, Class B.
i.
Shall be RoHS-compliant.
j.
Shall be mounted integral to luminaire. Remote mounting of power supply
is not allowed.
k.
Power supplies in luminaires mounted under a covered structure, such as
a canopy, or where otherwise appropriate shall be UL listed with a
sound rating of A.
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
l.
2.2.4
1313775
Shall be equipped with over-temperature protection circuit that turns
light source off until normal operating temperature is achieved.
LED Luminaire Surge Protection
Provide surge protection integral to luminaire to meet C Low waveforms as
defined by IEEE C62.41.2, Scenario 1, Location Category C.
2.3
EXTERIOR LUMINAIRE CONTROLS
Controls shall comply with Section 9 of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP . Provide a
control system interface within each luminaire that is compatible with the
energy management or control system used by the utility department in
charge of the project area for control of site lighting.
2.3.1
Photocell
UL 773 or UL 773A. Photocells shall be hermetically sealed, silicon diode
light sensor type, rated at 90 watts, 120 volts, 50/60 Hz with single-pole,
single-throw contacts. Photocell shall be designed to fail to the ON
position. Housing shall be constructed of polycarbonate, rated to operate
within a temperature range of minus 40 to 158 degrees F. Photocell shall be
twist-lock receptacle type conforming to NEMA C136.10. Provide with solid
brass prongs and voltage markings and color coding on exterior of housing.
Photocell shall turn on at 1-3 footcandles and turn off at 3 to 15
footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from
transient light sources.
2.4
POLES
Provide poles designed for wind loading of 100 miles per hour determined in
accordance with AASHTO LTS while supporting luminaires and all other
appurtenances indicated.
The effective projected areas of luminaires and
appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual
products provided on each pole. Poles shall be anchor-base type designed
for use with underground supply conductors. Poles shall have oval-shaped
handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 by 5 inches. Handhole cover
shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws. Metal poles shall have
an internal grounding connection accessible from the handhole near the
bottom of each pole. Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall
not be installed.
2.4.1
Aluminum Poles
Provide aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion resistant aluminum alloys
conforming to AASHTO LTS for Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6005-T5 for wrought
alloys and Alloy 356-T4 (3,5) for cast alloys. Poles shall be seamless
extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 0.188 inch wall thickness.
Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when
used with copper ground wire. Tops of shafts shall be fitted with a round
or tapered cover. Base shall be anchor bolt mounted, made of cast 356-T6
aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B108/B108M and shall be machined to
receive the lower end of shaft. Joint between shaft and base shall be
welded. Base cover shall be cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with
ASTM B108/B108M. Hardware, except anchor bolts, shall be either 2024-T4
anodized aluminum alloy or stainless steel. Manufacturer's standard
provision shall be made for protecting the finish during shipment and
installation. Minimum protection shall consist of spirally wrapping each
pole shaft with protective paper secured with tape, and shipping small
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 11
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
parts in boxes.
2.5
BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS
ANSI C136.3, ANSI C136.13, and ANSI C136.21, as applicable. Pole brackets
shall be not less than 1 1/4 inch aluminum secured to pole. Slip-fitter or
pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but brackets shall be coordinated to
luminaires provided, and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall
be identical. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly
position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated. Mount brackets
not less than 24 feet above street. Special mountings or brackets shall be
as indicated and shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction
with luminaire head.
2.6
POLE FOUNDATIONS
Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000
psi; the top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A153/A153M. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 32 16 13
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS.
2.7
2.7.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
2.7.2
Labels
Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements.
Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific light sources
and ballasts according to proper light source type. The following light
source characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":
a.
Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for
all luminaires.
Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily
visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when
lamps are in place.
2.8
FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which
shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the
requirements specified herein.
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 12
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.1.1
1313775
Aluminum Poles
Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at
the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end. Provide ornamental
covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor bolts.
Concrete for anchor bases, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit ells, and
ground rods shall be as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting
arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the
end of conduit ell. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent
vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire
location. After installation, paint exposed surfaces of steel poles with
two finish coats of aluminum paint. Install according to pole
manufacturer's instructions. Alterations to poles after fabrication will
void manufacturer's warranty and shall not be allowed.
3.1.2
Pole Setting
Depth shall be as indicated. Poles in straight runs shall be in a straight
line. Dig holes large enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the
full depth of the hole. Place backfill in the hole in 6 inch maximum
layers and thoroughly tamp. Place surplus earth around the pole in a
conical shape and pack tightly to drain water away.
3.1.3
Photocell Switch Aiming
Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.4
GROUNDING
Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles,
luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified
in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Where copper
grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide
specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.
3.1.5
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly
installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test after 100
hours of burn-in time to show that the equipment operates in accordance
with the requirements of this section.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 13
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS (ESS), COMMERCIAL
04/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI C39.1
(1981; R 1992) Requirements for Electrical
Analog Indicating Instruments
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A123/A123M
(2013) Standard Specification for Zinc
(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
ASTM B32
(2008) Standard Specification for Solder
Metal
ASTM D709
(2013) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA ICS 2
(2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for
Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
NEMA ICS 6
(1993; R 2011) Enclosures
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2
2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata 3
2014) National Electrical Code
SOCIETY OF MOTION PICTURE AND TELEVISION ENGINEERS (SMPTE)
SMPTE 170M
(2004) Television - Composite Analog Video
Signal - NTSC for Studio Applications
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)
TIA-232
(1997f; R 2012) Interface Between Data
Terminal Equipment and Data
Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing
Serial Binary Data Interchange
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1037
(1999; Reprint Dec 2009) Safety Antitheft
Alarms and Devices
UL 1076
(1995; Reprint Sep 2010) Proprietary
Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
UL 1610
(1998; Reprint Sep 2010) Standard for
Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units
UL 294
(2013) Access Control System Units
UL 497B
(2004; Reprint Dec 2012) Protectors for
Data Communication Circuits
UL 681
(2014) Installation and Classification of
Burglar and Holdup Alarm Systems
UL 796
(2010; Reprint Sep 2013) Standard for
Printed-Wiring Boards
1.2
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. Items of equipment
shall essentially duplicate equipment that have been in satisfactory use at
least 2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a
service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer,
reasonably convenient to the site.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms
used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in
IEEE 100.
a.
Active mode: That in which some type of signal is continuously sent
across the link, resulting in simple link breaks being readily detected.
b.
Fail-safe: The capability to monitor system functions and report an
alarm when a failure is detected in a critical system function.
c.
Installer: Either the Contractor or a subcontractor with whom the
Contractor has a firm contractual agreement.
d.
Intruder: An animate object at least 48 inches in height, 75 pounds in
weight and 4 cubic feet in volume, moving through the protected zones
or portals at a velocity of 0.1 to 10 feet per second.
e.
Sensor zone: A geographic position for which an intrusion must be
identified and displayed and may be the combination of multiple
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
detection devices.
f.
1.4
Element: As used in this section means a constituent part of a complex
signal such as an ac or dc voltage or current, ac phase, or frequency
duration.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide new Electronic Security Systems (ESS), including associated
equipment and appurtenances. The design of the ESS shall include devices
and equipment used to detect intrusion, control access to restricted areas,
detect and deny unauthorized entries within specific areas, generate
reports, produce Photo Identification badges, provide surveillance and
annunciate alarms. The ESS shall be designed to provide operational
flexibility and reliable performance. The ESS shall be modular, allowing
for future incremental expansion or modification of inputs, outputs, and
remote control stations. Integrated system capabilities shall include but
not be limited to Intrusion Detection, Automated Access Control,
Intercommunications, CCTV and Photo Badge Identification. Each system shall
be complete and ready for operation and provide for a fully integrated
central station solution.
Include materials not normally furnished by
the manufacturer with the ESS equipment as specified in Section 33 71 02
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating
proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories,
piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a
coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals
and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate
adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating
equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and
capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military,
industry, and technical society publication references.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
ESS components; G
Overall system schematic; G
SD-03 Product Data
Card reader; G
Communications cable; G
Communications interface devices; G
CCTV camera; G
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
CCTV lenses; G
Auxiliary CCTV camera equipment; G
Video, Digital Video Recorder (DVR); G
Printer; G
Four quadrant multiplexer; G
SD-06 Test Reports
ESS operational test plan; G
SD-07 Certificates
ESS operational test plan; G
Installer's qualifications; G
Instructor's qualifications; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
ESS components, Data Package 5; G
ESS software, Data Package 1; G
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA and Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL
MATERIALS AND METHODS.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-Built drawings for ESS; G
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1
1.6.1.1
Drawings
ESS Components
Submit drawings that clearly and completely indicate the function of each
ESS component. Indicate termination points of devices, and
interconnections required for system operation. Indicate interconnection
between modules and devices. In addition, submit a layout drawing showing
spacing of components, location, mounting and positioning details.
1.6.1.2
Overall System Schematic
Indicate the relationship of integrated components on one diagram and show
power source, system controls, impedance matches; plus number, size,
identification, and maximum lengths of interconnecting wires. Drawings
shall be not less than 11 by 17 inches.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.6.2
1.6.2.1
1313775
Evidence of Experience and Qualifications
Installer's Qualifications
Prior to installation, submit data of the installer's experience and
certified qualifications. Show that the installer who will perform the
work has a minimum of 2 years experience successfully installing ESS of the
same type and design as specified herein. Include the names, locations,
and points of contact of at least two installations of the same type and
design as specified herein where the installer has installed such systems.
Indicate the type of each system and certify that each system has performed
satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less than 12
months.
1.6.2.2
Instructor's Qualifications
Prior to installation, submit data of the instructor's experience and
certified qualifications. Show that the instructor, who will train
operating and maintenance personnel, has received a minimum of 24 hours of
ESS training from a technical organization such as the National Burglar and
Fire Alarm Association, and 2 years experience in the installation of ESS
of the type specified.
1.6.3
Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.6.3.1
Reference Standard Compliance
Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and
technical society reference standards of the organizations such as American
National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA),
Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and Association of Edison Illuminating
Companies (AEIC), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by
the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance
1.6.3.2
Independent Testing Organization Certificate
In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent
testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the
Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been
tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and
that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard
Provide only UL listed ESS equipment for Both exterior and interior ESS
sensors, access control, and closed-circuit television (CCTV) components.
1.6.4
ESS Operational Test Plan
Submit at least 30 days prior to commencement of formal operational
testing. Include detailed procedures for operational testing of each ESS
component and subsystem, and for performance of an integrated system test.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.6.5
1313775
User's Software Data
Submit for approval not later than 30 days prior to formal operational
testing or instruction to Government personnel on ESS software, whichever
is earlier. ESS software shall be documented in the user's manual.
1.6.6
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section
1.6.6.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished
1.6.6.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
ESS SUBSYSTEMS
Provide a complete integrated ESS consisting of the following major
subsystems:
a.
Automated Access Control System
b.
Communications
c.
Closed-circuit television (CCTV)
d.
Power
2.2
INTEGRATED SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Ensure that ESS is fully integrated with physical security and other
elements of the overall facility security system. Provide specific
subsystem consisting of the following:
a. Automated Access Control subsystem: Electronic devices, access control
units (ACU), sensors and software modules to detect intrusion attempts
monitor and control personnel movement through normal access routes in
and out of the facility and between protected areas within the facility.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
b.
Communications subsystem: Elements required to ensure that pertinent
data is transferred from point of origin to point where appropriate
actions can be taken.
c. CCTV subsystem: Electronic devices required to provide
assessment of ESS alarms. Interface to ESS for control
up to monitors, Pan-tilt-Zoom control, Video recording
event triggers. Integration shall provide the means to
archived alarm events with recorded video.
d.
1313775
Power subsystem:
the entire ESS.
2.2.1
visual
of camera call
based on alarm
associate ESS
Components required to ensure continuous operation of
Growth Capability
Provide capability for modular ESS expansion with minimal equipment
modification. Products provided shall not limit growth capability to
products of a single manufacturer.
2.3
INTEGRATED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
The installed and operating ESS shall be integrated into the overall
facility Control Access, provide Closed Circuit Television (CCTV)
surveillance, provide visual verification and shall perform as an entity,
as specified below.
2.3.1
Manual and Self-Test
PCU shall have a provision that permits testing from any alphanumeric
keypad. The test shall include standby battery, alarm bell or siren, and
communication to the SCC. A provision for an automatic, daily, weekly,
thirty (30) day, or up to sixty (60)day communication link test from the
PCU installation site to the SCC. Include a provision for displaying the
internal system power and wiring conditions. Internal monitors shall
include the bell circuit, AC power, battery voltage level, charging
voltage, panel box tamper, phone trouble line 1, phone trouble line 2,
transmit trouble, and network trouble. A battery test shall be
automatically performed to test the integrity of the standby battery. The
test shall disconnect the standby battery from the charging circuit and
place a load on the battery. This test shall be performed no more than
every 180 seconds.
2.3.2
Electrical Power
Obtain by the normal commercial or base electrical distribution system.
Power shall be continuously monitored and, if interrupted, automatic
switching from primary to emergency backup sources shall be accomplished
without interruption or degradation of critical system function. Intrusion
alarms shall not be generated as a result of power switching; however, an
indication of power switching and on-line source shall be provided at the
alarm monitor. Upon restoration of prime power, system shall automatically
switch back to the primary source. Failure of an on-line battery shall be
detected and reported as a fault condition.
2.3.2.1
Primary Power
Furnish 120 volt ac service, transformed through a two-winding isolation
transformer and rectified to low-voltage AC or DC for system operation.
Obtain primary power at the location indicated. Provide a separate,
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
lockable, fused safety switch at the location indicated.
2.4
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Design system components to operate as described herein within the context
of the overall system performance previously described. Perceived
inconsistencies between the following component performance specifications
and overall system level performance descriptions shall be decided in favor
of the former.
2.4.1
Modularity
Provide components designed for modular increase or decrease of system
capability by installation or removal of plug-in modules. Design system
components to facilitate modular subassembly and part replacement.
2.4.2
Reliability
Provide only new components in current manufacturing production,
manufactured to meet requirements specified herein, and free from
characteristics and defects which affect appearance, or serviceability or
render equipment unsuitable for the intended purpose. MTBF for component
shall not be less than 5000 hours.
2.4.3
Maintainability
Components shall be capable of being maintained using commercially
available standard tools and equipment. Components shall be arranged and
assembled to be readily accessible to maintenance personnel without
compromising defeat resistance of ESS.
2.4.4
Availability
Provide components designed for continuous operation. Provide solid-state
electronic components, mounted on printed circuit boards conforming to
UL 796. Boards shall be plug-in, quick-disconnect type. Circuitry shall
not be so densely placed as to impede maintenance. Power-dissipating
components shall incorporate safety margins of not less than 25 percent
with respect to dissipation ratings, maximum voltages, and current-carrying
capacity. Light duty relays and similar switching devices shall be
solid-state type or hermetically sealed electromechanical. Electrical
indicating instruments incorporated into system components shall conform to
applicable provisions of ANSI C39.1.
2.4.5
Environmental Conditions
2.4.5.1
Interior Conditions
Equipment installed in environmentally protected interior areas shall meet
performance requirements specified for the following ambient conditions:
a.
Temperature: 32 to 120 degrees F. Components installed in unheated
security protected areas shall meet performance requirements for
temperatures as low as zero degrees F;
b.
Pressure:
c.
Relative humidity:
Sea level to 15,000 feet above sea level;
5 to 95 percent;
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
d.
Fungus: Components shall be constructed of nonfungus nutrient
materials or shall be treated to inhibit fungus growth; and
e.
Acoustical noise: Components shall be suitable for use in high noise
areas above 100 dB, such as boiler rooms, power plants, and foundries
without adversely affecting their performance.
2.4.5.2
Exterior Conditions
Components mounted in locations exposed to weather shall be housed in
corrosion-resistant enclosures with appropriate environmental protection.
Component performance shall not degrade because of improper housing design.
Components in enclosures shall meet performance requirements when exposed
to the following ambient conditions:
a.
Temperature:
b.
Pressure:
c.
Solar radiation: Six hours of solar radiation at dry bulb temperature
of 120 degrees F including 4 hours of solar radiation at 104 watts per
square foot;
d.
Sand and dust:
e.
Rain: 2 inches per hour and 5 inchesper hour cyclic with wind plus one
period of 12 inches per hour;
f.
Humidity:
g.
Fungus:
plants;
h.
Salt fog:
i.
Snow: Snow loading of 48 pounds per square foot (psf) per hour;
blowing snow of 4.6 psf per hour;
j.
Ice accretion:
k.
Wind: Up to 50 mph with gusts to 66 mph, except that fence sensors
shall detect intrusions up to 35 mph; and
l.
Acoustical noise: Components shall be suitable for use in high noise
areas above 110 dB, such as flight lines, runup pads, and generator
sites without adversely affecting their performance.
2.4.5.3
Minus 25 to 140 degrees F;
Sea level to 15,000 feet above sea level;
Wind driven for up to 6 miles per hour;
5 to 95 percent;
Warm, humid atmosphere conducive to the growth of heterotropic
Salt atmosphere with 5 percent salinity;
Up to 1/2 inch of radial ice;
Transient voltage surge suppression
Automated Access Control, CCTV video circuitry, and communication circuits
that lead to the SCC shall be protected at both ends against transient
voltage surges. Transient voltage surge suppressors (TVSS) or surge
protection devices (SPD) are required for the protection, within specified
limits, of AC electrical circuits and electronic equipment from the effects
of lightning induced voltages, external switching transients and internally
generated switching transients. Individual suppressors shall be installed
where shown on the drawings.
a.
Communication Lines:
The following standard for separately mounted
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
telephone and signal line suppressors shall apply. All protectors
shall be securely mounted at protected equipment location. All
suppressors shall provide common (L-G) mode protection on all lines.
Suppressors shall be tested in accordance with IEEE C62.36-1994 as a
minimum. Protective interfacing with the telephone wire pairs shall be
listed to UL 497B.
b.
Data Line Protection: Solid state, silicon avalanche diode or metal
oxide varistor circuitry for protection from over voltages on long
cable runs employing standard RS-232, RS422, or RS485. Appropriate
connectors shall be utilized to interface a remote station with a host
CPU.
c.
Signal Line Protection: Solid state, silicon avalanche diode and metal
oxide varistor hybrid circuitry for protection from over voltages on 2
or 4 wire signal lines such as balanced pair telephone, metallic pair
telephone, buried and overhead field cable, remote radio equipment, and
control systems. Unit shall have an LED diagnostic lamp that lights if
unit needs replacement. Unit shall be listed UL 497B.
d.
Modular, Twisted Pair Protection: Solid state, silicon avalanche diode
or metal oxide varistor circuitry for protection from over voltages on
twisted pair data or audio lines. Protectors shall clip mount on 66
punch down blocks furnished with grounding bar or studs and shall be
totally enclosed. Units shall be securely mounted at terminal
locations where shown and shall be grounded to the main building ground
with a minimum No.12 stranded copper green insulated ground conductor
kept as short as possible. Ground terminals shall be screw insertion
lug type. No crimp, fork or ring type permitted. Unit shall have a
multi-function diagnostic LED that shows continuity, ground present,
unit function and line status.
e.
Coaxial Cable Protectors: Solid state, silicon avalanche diode, metal
oxide varistor and/or gas tube circuitry for non-interrupting over
voltage protection of coaxial cable. Unit shall be provided with one
female input connector and one female output connector. Securely mount
adjacent to protection equipment and ground to equipment or local
building ground if an equipment ground is not available.
2.4.6
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
ESS components employing electromagnetic radiation shall be designed and
constructed to provide maximum practical invulnerability to electronic
countermeasures.
2.4.7
Interchangeability
Like components shall be physically and functionally interchangeable as
complete items, without modification of either the original items or of
other components with which the items are used.
2.4.8
Safety
ESS components shall conform to application rules and requirements of
NFPA 70 and applicable UL publications.
2.4.9
Human Engineering
Displays, other than wall-mount LCD, Plasma or DLP displays, shall be
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
housed in standard desk-type consoles or
19 inch racks. Central alarm
reporting and display shall be designed for operation by one or more
individual(s). Aural considerations shall include location of
annunciators, tone pitch, quality, and intensity. Number of different
audible signals shall not exceed four. Component design shall provide for
ease of accessibility for maintenance.
2.4.9.1
Visual Annunciators
Annunciators shall be either liquid crystal displays (LCDs), Plasma
Display, DLP projection Display or light emitting diodes (LEDs).
Annunciators shall be so connected in the circuit that a failure of the
annunciator, socket, or protective circuitry shall not result in an
improper or indeterminate signal. LCD Displays, Plasma Display, DLP
projection Display and LEDs shall be compatible with standby power
supplies. LCDs shall be back-lit with a minimum 800:1 contrast ratio.
Plasma and DLP projection shall produce no less than a 3000:1 Contrast
ratio.LEDs shall be brightly lit and visible from a distance of 30 feet in
an area illuminated at 75 footcandles. Use LEDs in outdoor applications or
in the presence of sunlight. Signals shall be clearly visible from a
distance of 30 feet in an area illuminated at 75 footcandles. LCDs and LEDs
shall be used for remote display to provide status indications within a
secured area. LCDs, Plasma Displays and DLP projection Displays shall be
used in Central monitoring Stations and interfaced to the ESS Servers, and
workstations.
2.4.9.2
Controls
Provide to ensure ease of operation of specified characteristics. Where
applicable, clockwise rotation of controls shall result in an increasing
function. Controls, switches, visual signals and indicating devices, input
and output connectors, terminals, and test points shall be clearly marked
or labeled on the hardware to permit quick identification, intended use,
and location. Terminal markings and labels shall be of a permanent and
legible type and located to be visible when associated system wiring is in
place. Identification markings shall be associated with each adjustment
device or item requiring periodic maintenance. Safety warning or cautions
shall be marked in conspicuous red letters. Control and indicator
identifications that are exposed outside enclosures shall be permanent,
machine-engraved letters, painted to contrast with background color.
Controls not required for system operation shall be inaccessible to the
system operator.
2.4.10
Computer Software
Software shall be comprised of computer programs and computer data bases as
required. Software shall be categorized as mission software and support
software.
2.4.10.1
Mission Software
Mission software shall consist of software implemented to provide complete
operation of the ESS.
2.4.10.2
Support Software
Support software shall consist of software implemented to support system
operation, such as system setup and off-line maintenance routines.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 11
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.4.10.3
1313775
Software Performance Requirements
Provide software in modules to meet application requirements of this
section. Software shall include the operating system (OS), be complete
off-the-shelf, modifiable for specific ESS application specified herein,
and be a product of and supported by the ESS central processor
manufacturer. OS executive shall accomplish in real time the scheduling
and sequencing of programs for execution. Each program shall be assigned a
priority level. Provide priority levels in sufficient number to provide
total functional operation as specified. Software shall be menu-driven.
Menu, reconfiguration, and other actions which could in any way compromise
the security and integrity of the ESS shall be password controlled. A
minimum of eight password levels shall be provided. Software provided
shall be documented in a user's manual which shall be approved by the
Government prior to system implementation.
2.4.11
Test Points
Test points, controls, and other adjustments inside enclosures shall be
readily visible and accessible with minimum disassembly of equipment. Test
points and other maintenance controls shall not be readily accessible to
operator personnel.
2.4.12
Component Enclosures
Consoles, annunciator housings, power supply enclosures, sensor control and
terminal cabinets, control units, wiring gutters, and other component
housings, collectively referred to as enclosures, shall be formed and
assembled to be sturdy and rigid.
2.4.12.1
Metal Thickness
Thicknesses of metal in cast and sheet metal enclosures of all types shall
be not less than those listed in Tables 8.1, 8.2, and 8.3 of UL 1610for
alarm components, and NEMA ICS 2 and NEMA ICS 6 for other enclosures.
Sheet steel used in fabrication of enclosures shall be not less than 16
gage, except consoles may be 18 gage.
2.4.12.2
Doors and Covers
Doors and covers shall be flanged. Where doors are mounted on hinges with
exposed pins, the hinges shall be of the tight pin type, or the ends of
hinge pins shall be tack welded to prevent ready removal. Provide doors
having a latch edge length of less than 24 inches with a single lock.
Where latch edge of a hinged door is 24 inchesor more in length, provide
the door with a three-point latching device with lock; or alternatively
with two locks, one located near each end. Covers of junction boxes
provided to facilitate initial installation of the system shall be held in
place by tack welding, brazing, or one-way screws.
2.4.12.3
Ventilation
Ventilation openings in enclosures and cabinets shall conform to
requirements of UL 1610.
2.4.12.4
Mounting
Unless otherwise indicated, sheet metal enclosures shall be designed for
wall mounting with top hole slotted. Mounting holes shall be in positions
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 12
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
which remain accessible when major operating components are in place and
door is open, but shall be inaccessible when door is closed.
2.4.12.5
Labels
Labels shall be affixed to such boxes indicating they contain no
connections. These labels shall not indicate that the box is part of the
intrusion detection system.
2.4.12.6
Enclosure Locks
Locks and key-lock-operated switches required to be installed on component
enclosures shall be UL listed, round-key type with three dual, one
mushroom, and three plain pin tumblers, or shall have a pick resistance
equal to a lock having a combination of five cylinder pin and five-point
three-position side bar in the same lock. Keys shall be stamped "U.S.
GOVT. DO NOT DUP." Key-lock-operated switches shall be keyed differently
and shall be two-position, with the key retractable from either position.
Furnish two keys for each switch. Maintenance locks shall be of the
one-way key-pull type arranged so that the key can be withdrawn only when
the lock is in the locked position. Locks on components for maintenance
access shall be keyed alike; only two keys shall be furnished for such
locks. Deliver keys, tagged with metal tags, accompanied by a
manufacturer's certificate which records the number of each key made.
2.4.13
Automated Access Control System (AACS)
Provide Automated access control system based upon a modular distributed
microprocessor architecture complete with access control cards and ready
for operation. System shall provide monitoring and control for the ESS.
System shall meet the Grade AA communications requirements of UL 1076 and
UL 294 and shall have the capability of controlling up to 4 card reader and
keypad per card reader controller. System shall grant or deny access or
exit based upon keypad identification data, card identification data, or a
combination of identification technologies, input through the access
control devices compared to data stored within the system, as well as time
of day and day of week. Decision to grant or deny access or exit shall be
based upon authorization for such data to be input at a specific location
for the current time period.
The AACS primary functions shall be to regulate access through specific
doors or portals to secured areas. The AACS shall utilize a single database
for its access control that shall seamlessly integrate with the ESS. The
AACS shall be able to control 32 alarm inputs, or 128 relay outputs or any
combination of these components.
The AACS shall support configuration and simultaneous monitoring of
multiple access control devices when TCP/IP communication interfaces are
used between the ESS and the primary Access Control Units (ACU). The
events of the AACS shall be viewable as separate or as a combined list of
all ESS events. Overall control of the AACS, alarm monitoring, and photo
identification shall be through software control of the ESS.
All AACS programming data shall reside on a single database and shall be
instantly accessible to every networked PC workstation connected to the ESS.
AACS functions shall include validation based on time of day and day of
week, special day/holiday scheduling with card validation override, video
image storage, access validation based on positive verification of card.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 13
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
AACS shall provide both supervised and non-supervised alarm point
monitoring. The system shall be capable of arming or disarming alarm points
both manually and automatically by time of day, day of week or by operator
command. The system shall be capable of disarming alarm points based on a
valid access event.
The AACS shall provide programmable 'delay' setting for all alarm points.
The alarm points shall not report an ENTRY type alarm condition until the
delay setting has expired. The system shall not report a DWELL type alarm
condition until the alarm has been active for the full delay period.
The AACS shall provide capability to place ACU(s) in an off-line mode. In
the off-line mode, the ACU(s) shall retain a historical summary of all ACU
activity transactions, up to the maximum capacity of the ACU memory buffer.
The system shall provide ability for manual operator control of system
output relays. The manual functions shall include the ability to energize,
de-energize, enable or disable.
The AACS shall provide ability to display stored 'video image' of
cardholder based on card activity, and switch real-time CCTV camera to card
reader location for specific card usage. The card reader shall not activate
the door lock until positive operator acknowledgment from the SCC.
The AACS software shall be capable of, but not limited to, the following
programming:
(1) Time Schedules: Up to 254 user-definable time schedules shall be
provided. These time schedules shall determine the day(s) and times
that access will be granted or a scheduled event shall occur. Any and
all of the time schedules shall be available for defining access
privileges and scheduled events. There shall be ALWAYS and NEVER
schedules that cannot be altered or removed from the system. Each
user-defined time schedule shall have the option of reacting or not
reacting to user-defined special days, with the ability to react
uniquely to each type of special day.
(2) Special Days: There shall be an unlimited number of user definable
special days. These days shall be used for configuring exceptions to
the normal operating rules, typically for specifying holiday operating
rules. Each special day shall be assigned to a type, with each type
defined by the user.
(3) ACU Daylight Savings Time Adjustment: There shall be a
software-configurable, user defined adjustment for Daylight Savings
Time. The ACU shall not need to be connected to a PC workstation in
order for the adjustment to occur.
(4) Scheduled Events: Any access controlled reader shall be capable of
scheduled unlock periods to allow for card-free access. The access
controlled reader shall also be capable of requiring one valid access
event before beginning a scheduled unlock period. Additionally, any
access control point shall be capable of requiring a valid card as well
as a PIN code via keypad on a scheduled basis for high security areas.
The use of PIN via keypad functions shall not reduce the number of card
reader or alarm points available in the ACU(s). Any designated alarm
input shall be able to be scheduled Armed and Disarmed. Any relay
output shall be capable of scheduled On and Off periods to allow for
automatic I/O system control.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 14
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
(5) Maximum User Capability: Up to 100 individual users may be given access
cards or codes and have their access controlled and recorded.
(6) Access Groups: Each system user shall be assignable to a maximum of 4
of 8 possible access groups. An access group shall be defined as one
or more people who are allowed access to the same areas at the same
days and time periods.
(7) Active/Expire Dates: Any card/user may be configured with activation
and expiration dates. The card can be assigned to any valid access
group and will be activated and expired according to the specified
dates.
(8) Maximum Use Settings: Any card/user may be configured with maximum
number of uses for that card. The card can be assigned to any valid
access group and will be expired according to the specified number of
card uses.
(9) Door Outputs: Each access control reader shall have two dedicated relay
outputs. Both relays shall provide Normally Open and Normally Closed
contacts. The first relay shall be used for electric lock control. The
second shall be software configurable to activate for door forced open,
door left open too long, duress, passback violations, invalid access
attempts and valid unlock conditions. Both relays shall be separately
programmable for energize times from 1 second to 10 minutes. The second
relay shall allow a delay time to be specified, causing its activation
to be delayed after an activating condition occurs.
(10) Anti-Passback: The AACS shall have global anti-passback capability.
Any door on the system can be linked to one of 254 user defined
passback areas or two 2 pre-defined areas. Each door may be set up to
automatically forgive passback entries at the following intervals:
Never, at Midnight, every 12 hours (Midnight and Noon), every 6 hours,
every 2 hours, each hour or every 30 minutes. Each door can be
configured to deny or grant access for passback violations and
individual users can be exempt to the passback rules. The anti-passback
features shall be a global function and operate completely independent
of the AACS software with the exception of configuring the passback
rules. Additionally, the operator shall have the ability to manually
forgive an individual user or all users by command from the AACS.
(11) Two Person Rule: Any access control reader on the system shall have
the ability to require two valid cards for access. This feature shall
be software programmable. Any access control reader on the system that
includes a keypad shall also have the ability to require a valid PIN
number associated with each of the two valid cards.
(12) User List/Who's In (Muster Reports): The AACS shall be capable of
generating dynamic lists of users in certain access-controlled areas,
based either upon selected users or selected areas. The lists shall
have the option of automatically refreshing after a user-selected
interval of time.
(13) Crisis Mode: The AACS shall support "crisis mode", in which the
activation of user-selected alarm points causes changes to user access
privileges. The changes to user access privileges shall be configurable
to restrict normal access to no access or limited access.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 15
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
(14) Door Groups: The system shall allow up to 2 door groups to be
configured. Doors belonging to the same group shall be able to be
locked, unlocked, disabled and enabled on command from the AACS.
(15) Door Interlocking: The system shall allow a group of doors to be
software configured so that if any door in the group is unsecure, all
other doors shall be automatically disabled. This feature also known as
"mantrap" configuration. The interlocking features shall not require
the AACS to be on-line for proper operation.
(16) PIN Required: The AACS shall support the required use of a keypad
code, in addition to a valid credential, at user-selected doors, during
user-selected schedules.
(17) Remote door control: The SCC operator shall have the capability of
manually controlling any access point by issuing a simple command from
the AACS. The operator shall have the ability to lock, unlock, enable,
disable and pulse any door in this manner. This activity shall cause an
entry to be logged displaying the door name, number and time that it
was performed. Additionally, the operator shall have the ability to
lock, unlock, enable and disable any group of doors in a Door Group by
a single command from the AACS.
(18) Key Control: When interfaced with an approved key-control system, the
system shall allow users to deny access to certain doors to any users
who have keys in their possession.
(19) Guard Tour: The AACS shall support user-defined guard tours. The
tour may be configured in a set pattern of tour points, or may follow a
mode in which all tour points can be visited in any order within an
allotted time. The AACS shall allow a tour to be started by
AACS-command, by use of a selected card at a selected reader, or by use
of a selected keypad code at a selected keypad. The system shall
detect guard late-to-point; point missed, and point out-of-sequence
events. The system shall generate a report at the completion of a tour.
(20) Reader Disable: The AACS shall support disabling readers in reaction
to a user-selected number of invalid access attempts.
(21) Disable Event Messages: The AACS shall allow users to disable
user-selected event messages (Door Forced Open, Door Open Too Long,
Door Closed, Request to Exit) for user-selected doors. The AACS shall
allow users to disable certain messages (Door Forced Open, Door Open
Too Long) according to a user-selected schedule.
(22) I/O Groups: The AACS shall allow up to 255 user-defined I/O
(input-output) groups to be defined. Each Input device shall be able to
be linked to these groups for arming, disarming, shunting and
unshunting as well as output control.
(23) Delays: Each alarm device shall allow a delay to be specified. The
delay shall be either an entry type or a dwell type. An entry-type
delay shall prevent the input from issuing an alarm event until the
delay elapses. If unarmed during the delay period, the alarm condition
shall be ignored. A dwell-type delay shall require the input to remain
in the alarm state for the full duration of the delay before issuing an
alarm condition.
(24) Remote Input control: The operator shall have the capability of
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 16
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
manually controlling any alarm/input point by issuing a simple command
from the AACS. The SCC operator shall have the ability to shunt,
unshunt, disable and restore any input in this manner. This activity
shall cause an entry to be logged displaying the input name and time
that it was performed. Additionally, the operator shall have the
ability to arm, disarm, shunt and unshunt any alarm partition/group by
a single command from the SCC. The arm disarm, shunt and unshunt any
alarm partition/group from the SCC shall not be permissible in DIA DCID
6/9 applications.
(25) Output Configuration: Each output relay shall be software configurable
as a FOLLOWS, LATCH, TIMEOUT, SCHEDULED, TIMEOUT RETRIGGERABLE, LIMIT,
or COUNTER type. The SCHEDULED type shall allow a time schedule to
automatically control its activation and de-activation. The FOLLOWS,
LATCH, TIMEOUT, TIMEOUT RETRIGGERABLE, LIMIT and COUNTER types shall be
configured to activate based on the condition of I/O groups.
Additionally, a time schedule shall be specified to configure when the
output shall actively monitor the I/O groups.
(26) Remote Output control: The operator shall have the capability of
manually controlling any output point by issuing a simple command from
the SCC. The SCC operator shall have the ability to ENABLE, DISABLE,
turn ON and turn OFF any output in this manner based on the output
type. A FOLLOWS type output shall not be capable of being turned OFF or
ON. This activity shall cause an entry to be logged displaying the
output name and time that it was performed. manual control of outputs
shall not be permissible in DIA DCID 6/9 applications.
(27) Remote Reset Command: Any ACU shall have the capability of being
reset manually or by command issued from the AACS. This reset command
shall have the option of simulating the ACU reset settings, or forcing
a reset type as specified by the user. The remote reset command shall
not cause the ACU to degrade its level of protection to any access
points defined.
(28) Dial Out: The ACU shall have the capability of using a modem to
automatically connect to the AACS when a critical alarm or service
event occurs. The conditions triggering the dial out capability shall
be user defined and software configurable.
(29) Time Zone: The AACS shall allow the user to select the time zone in
which the ACU is located, so that event times displayed for that ACU
will match the local time where the ACU is located.
(30) User-Selected LED Behavior: The AACS shall allow the user to select
different behaviors for the LEDs of each access controlled reader.
(31) Traced Cards: The AACS shall be capable of selecting any number of
cardholders for the purpose of limiting reports to only traced users.
The AACS shall be capable of displaying all traced cardholder events in
a user-selected alternate color.
(32) Badge Print Tracking: The AACS shall support setting a print limit
for any badge. The software will track the number of times any badge
has been printed, as well as display the date and time of the most
recent printing.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 17
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.4.13.1
1313775
Error and Throughput Rates
Rates shall be portal to portal performance averages obtained when
processing individuals one at a time. When serial verification techniques
or multiple attempts are required to satisfy error performance
requirements, features shall not reduce capability to meet throughput
requirements. A Type I error denies access to an authorized enrolled
individual. A Type II error grants access to an unauthorized individual.
Subsystem Type I and Type II error rates shall be both less than 0.1
percent. At the error rates, subsystem access throughput rate shall be
minimum of 12 individuals per minute through one card reader and keypad
access control device.
2.4.13.2
Access Control Subsystem Central Processing
Provide serial management and control of subsystem. Provide a
microprocessor control device designed to monitor and control units and up
to 8 card reader and keypad access control devices. Central processor
shall interrogate and receive responses from each ACU within 100
milliseconds. Failure to respond to an interrogation shall cause an
alarm. Provide a printer with a minimum print rate of 30 characters per
second to produce hard copy of subsystem events. Provide the central
processor with an TIA-232 interface port to communicate with the printer.
Provide an operator interface to control system operating functions.
Provide the central processor with a facility-tailorable data base for a
minimum of 100 card holders with by-name alphanumeric printout, and for
automated subsystem monitoring, management, and control functions. Provide
enrollment equipment to process access control cards and enroll personnel
into and disenroll personnel from the subsystem data base. Enrollment
equipment shall not be accessible to ESS operations personnel. Provide a
minimum of 150 percent of the number of card holders specified above
access control cards with the enrollment equipment. Provide system
configuration controls and electronic diagnostic aids for subsystem setup
and troubleshooting with the central processor. Components shall not be
accessible to operations personnel. Central processor components shall be
tamper alarmed.
2.4.13.3
Access Control Unit (ACU)
The ACU shall be micro-processor based with all access and I/O decisions to
be made by the individual ACU(s). The ACU shall be of modular design which
will allow for present security requirements and the capability to expand.
All field ACU panels shall be configured to intercommunicate via RS-422/485
or RS-232 hardwired, Dial-up, TCP/IP or fiber-optic communication. All
field ACU(s) shall be equipped with a tamper contact. One ACU shall be
designated a "Primary", responsible for all AACS-to-ACU communications. All
other ACU(s) up to a maximum of 16 shall be designated "Secondaries" and
shall communicate with the "Primary" via an RS-422/485 hardwire, TCP/IP
network or fiber-optic configuration. The ACU shall be capable of, but not
limited to, the following:
(1) All ACU(s) shall have built-in surge suppression circuitry on plug-in
modular circuit boards. The surge protection, designed as an integral
component of the system, shall be self-sacrificing in the event of
extreme surges or spikes.
(2) Each ACU shall be capable of supporting at least 2 ports and be
expandable in increments of two ports up to a maximum of 16 ports per
ACU.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 18
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
(4) Each ACU port shall be configured by AACS to support any one of the
following peripheral devices: Card reader or, Output Relay Module. Any
combination of these devices can be supported on each ACU, up to a
total of 8 devices per ACU.
(5) Each ACU shall have the capability of supporting multiple card reader
technologies simultaneously, including Transmissive Infrared, Wiegand,
Magnetic stripe, Proximity, Barcode, Keypad, Card/Keypad, Smart Card,
and Biometrics. This capability shall be an integral part of the ACU
and will not require special external equipment.
(6) Each ACU shall have built-in battery back-up of programmed information
and shall be sustainable for a period of not less than ninety days.
(7) Each ACU shall be powered by a 12VDC power source rated at a minimum of
2 amperes. The power supply shall have a battery back-up for complete
system operation in the event of power failure. Provide battery backup
for all ACU(s) to sufficiently power the ACU for 48 hours continuous
service.
(8) Electric strikes, other locking devices and ancillary peripherals shall
have a separate power supply. Battery back-up shall be utilized for
continued operation in the event of power failure.
(9) There shall be a minimum of a 10,300 event log buffer per ACU. The log
buffer shall be used to record and hold access and alarm activity
information until the AACS is connected and receives the information.
There shall be a software-configurable warning notification of log
buffer filling for ACU(s) configured with modem capabilities.
2.4.13.4
Card Reader Access Control Devices
Devices shall be tamper alarmed, tamper and vandal resistant, and solid
state, containing no electronics which could compromise the access control
subsystem should the subsystem be attacked. Devices shall be surface,
semiflush, pedestal, or weatherproof mountable as specified for each
individual location. Card readers shall be the proximity type and shall be
capable of reading proximity type access control cards.
2.4.13.5
Access Control Cards
Cards shall be manufactured with capability of modification and lamination
during enrollment process without reduction of readability for use as a
picture and identification badge. Cards shall contain binary coded data
arranged in a scrambled pattern as a unique identification code stored on
or within the card and of the type readable by the subsystem card readers.
No identifiable logo or wording is required on the card.
2.4.14
Communications
Communications shall link together subsystems of the ESS. ESS
communications links shall be via hardwire (cable). Communications links
shall be supervised. Common communications interface devices shall be
provided throughout the ESS. Sensor to control unit interface shall be by
dry relay contact normally open or normally closed, except as specified
otherwise. Control unit to central alarm reporting and display processor
interface shall be digital, asynchronous, or multiplexed data. Individual
data bits shall be grouped into word format and transmitted as coded
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 19
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
messages. Interface shall be implemented by modems which function as a
communications controller, perform data acquisition and distribution,
buffering message handling, error checking, and signal regeneration as
required to maintain communications.
2.4.14.1
a.
Link Supervision
Hardwire direct current line supervision: Provide only for sensor to
control unit links which are within ESS protected area. Circuit shall
be supervised by monitoring changes in the current that flows through
the detection circuit and a terminating resistor of at least 2.2
kohms. Supervision circuitry shall initiate an alarm in response to
opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of conductors by employing
Class C, standard line security. Class C circuit supervisor units
shall provide an alarm response in the annunciator in not more than one
second as a result of the following changes in normal transmission line
current:
(1)
Five percent or more in normal line signal when it consists of
direct current from 0.5 through 30 milliamperes.
(2)
Ten percent or more in normal line signal when it consists of
direct current from 10 microamperes to 0.5 milliampere.
(3)
Five percent or more of an element or elements of a complex
signal upon which security integrity of the system is dependent.
This tolerance will be applied for frequencies up to 100 Hz.
(4)
Fifteen percent or more of an element or elements of a complex
signal upon which the security integrity of the system is
dependent. This tolerance will be applicable for all frequencies
above 100 Hz.
b.
Hardwire alternating current supervision: Supervision shall not be
capable of compromise by use of resistance, voltage, or current
substitution techniques. The method shall be employed on circuits
which employ a tone modulated frequency-shift keying (FSK),
interrogate-and-reply communications method. Supervisory circuit shall
be immune to transmission line noise, crosstalk, and transients.
Detection circuit shall be terminated by a complex impedance.
Supervision of the line shall be maintained by monitoring current
amplitude and phase. Complex impedance shall be sized so that current
leads or lags the driving voltage by 45 plus or minus 5 degrees. For
supervision currents of 0.5 to 30 milliamperes root mean square (rms),
an alarm shall result when rms current changes by more than 5 percent,
or phase changes by more than 5 degrees. For lines with supervision
currents of 0.01 to 0.5 milliampere, an alarm shall result when rms
current changes by more than 10 percent, or phase changes by more than
8 degrees. Identified line supervision alarm shall be communicated
within one second of the alarm condition.
c.
Hardwire digital supervision: Modems at both ends of circuit shall
exchange digital data to indicate secure or alarm condition at least
every 2 seconds. For passive supervisory circuits, an alarm shall
sound if data is missed for more than one second. Coding used for data
shall not be decipherable by merely viewing data on an oscilloscope.
For transponder schemes, supervisory circuit shall asynchronously
transmit bursts of digital data. Data pattern shall be random in
nature. Remote detectors shall receive data and encode a response
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 20
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
based on a proprietary coding scheme. Each ESS shall have a unique
encoding scheme; an industry-wide or vendor standard is not
acceptable. Encoded response shall be transmitted back to supervisory
circuit. Supervisory circuit shall compare the response to an
anticipated response. Failure of the detector to return a data burst,
or return an incorrect response, shall initiate an alarm.
d.
RF link supervision: System shall consist of link supervision
components which provide a line supervision alarm declaration at the
annunciation end of the link in approximately 2 seconds after the
system has verified a problem by repeating the same signal no less than
nine times during a period of 30 seconds or less.
2.4.14.2
a.
Hardwire
Hardwire shall utilize electrical conductor lines. Alarm electrical
lines shall not rely on current path except for electrical wires;
neutral conductors of electrical distribution systems shall not be used
as signal transmitters. Conductors outside the protected area shall be
installed in rigid galvanized steel conduit as specified in Section
26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Supervision circuitry shall not
initiate nuisance alarms in response to normal line noise, transients,
crosstalk, or in response to normal parametric changes in the line over
a temperature range of minus 30 to 125 degrees F. Ambient current
levels chosen for line supervision shall be sufficient to detect
tampering and shall be within the normal operating range of electrical
components. Line supervision and tamper alarms shall be reported
regardless of mode of operation. Provide hardwire links as specified in
UL 1076 and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM for interior
applications with additions and modifications specified herein.
Conductors shall be copper. Conductors for links which also carry ac
voltage, shall be No. 12 AWG minimum; single conductors for low-voltage
dc links shall be No. 14 AWG minimum. Conductors shall be color
coded. Conceal wiring in finished areas of new construction and
wherever practical in existing construction if not otherwise precluded
by the Government. Identify conductors within each enclosure where a
tap, splice, or termination is made. Identify conductors by
plastic-coated, self-sticking, printed markers or by heat-shrink type
sleeves. Connect sensors, control units, and communication devices so
that removal will cause a tamper alarm to sound. Pigtail or "T" tap
connections are not acceptable. Each conductor used for identical
functions shall be distinctively color coded. Each circuit color code
wire shall remain uniform throughout circuit.
b. Communication link from sensor to control unit shall be by
dedicated circuit. An alarm condition shall be indicated by the
opening or closing of a relay contact. Analog signals shall be
converted to digital values or a relay closure or opening within 250
feet of the sensing point. Communications from control unit to central
alarm reporting and display processor shall operate in a continuous
interrogation and response mode, using time-multiplexed digital
communications techniques at a data rate of 5.12 kilobaud.
Interrogation and response communications between the control unit and
central processor shall be half-duplex, bidirectional on one dual
twisted pair cable, one pair for interrogation, one for response, which
may have one or more parallel branches. Individual control unit lines
shall be 22 AWG or larger wire. Connect control wires in parallel to
the hardwire link. Communications system shall provide for connection
of as many as 255 control units. When operating without line repeaters
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 21
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
or other signal regenerating or amplifying devices, communication
system shall maintain specified performance over a link length of 7500
feet. When operating with signal-regenerating line repeaters,
communications system shall maintain specified performance over a link
length of 75,000 feet. Control unit to central alarm reporting and
display processor communications link shall also be capable of
operating over a maximum of two standard voice grade telephone leased
or proprietary lines. Link shall be capable of operating half duplex
over a Type 3002 data transmission pair and be capable of modular
expansion. Telephone lines shall be provided by the Government.
Coordinate and check out system operation. General characteristics and
telephone line service shall be as follows:
c.
(1)
Connections:
Two- or four-wire
(2)
Impedance at 1000 Hz:
(3)
Transmitting level:
(4)
Transmitting level adjustment:
(5)
Type:
(6)
Direction:
(7)
Maximum speed:
(8)
Maximum loss at 1000 Hz:
600 ohms
0 to 12 dBm
3 dB increments
Data
Two-way alternate (half duplex)
1.2 kilobaud
33 dB.
Video hardwire links shall be as specified in paragraph entitled "Video
Transmission."
2.4.15
Closed-Circuit Television (CCTV) System
Provide UL Listed CCTV components to provide visual assessment of ESS
alarms. Subsystem shall continuously view remote areas with video cameras
and display the areas automatically upon ESS alarm, or upon SCC operator
selection. Provide the number of alarm monitors as required. Video systems
shall be capable of automatic and manual operation.
In systems where
monitors may display more than one camera scene, provide on-screen camera
identification. Subsystem shall be composed of components which are
integrated to provide a quality video surveillance system. The scene from
each camera shall appear clear, crisp, and stable on the respective monitor
during both daytime and nighttime operation. Component equipment shall
minimize both preventive and corrective maintenance. Components shall be
compatible with other components and with system as a whole and shall, to
the greatest extent possible, be supplied by the same manufacturer.
2.4.15.1
a.
Cameras
Except as specified herein, CCTV camera shall comply with SMPTE 170M
for standard monochrome or color camera and shall:
(1)
Camera: shall utilize digital signal processing (DSP) to produce
a high picture quality. Day/Night (Color/B&W) fixed or
pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras are to be used in all outdoor
environments. Standard DSP fixed or PTZ cameras are to be used
for all indoor applications except when backlighting issues are
observed. For backlighting or high contrast applications, use
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 22
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Day/Night cameras or standard cameras with backlighting
compensation.
(2)
All PTZ cameras shall feature a direct drive motor assembly.
Belt driven PTZ camera units are not acceptable. All PTZ cameras
shall be equipped with a slip ring assembly having an optical
interface and be rated for continuous duty. PTZ cameras shall be
fully integrated units. The pan-tilt mechanism shall be an
integral part of the camera.
(3)
Be identified with the manufacturer's part number, model number,
lens installed, and a serial number;
(4)
Operate over a voltage range of 105 to 130 volts ac or low
voltage 12 to 24 volts ac at 60 Hz;
(5)
(6)
(7)
Have electronic circuits which use solid-state devices.
Be constructed to provide rigid support for electrical and
optical systems so that unintentional changes in alignment or
microphonic effects will not occur during operation, movement, or
lens adjustments;
Have standard
C or CS lens mount;
(8)
Be designed to protect personnel from exposure to high voltage
during operation and adjustment; and
(9)
Meet requirements specified herein with either side of the power
source line grounded. Minimum essential requirements shall
include the following:
(a) Sensitivity: Minimum Illumination: 0.8 lux (0.08 fc) at
F1.4 color mode; 0.1 lux (0.01 fc) at F1.4 in the B&W mode.
(b) Signal-to-noise ratio: Show a signal-to-noise ratio of not
less than 50decibels (dB) at AGC "Off", weight "On".
(c) Resolution: Provide a horizontal resolution of at least 480
lines in color and 570 line in B&W with automatic gain and
bandwidth at the specified sensitivity.
(d) Digital Signal Processing: Cameras shall have Digital Signal
Processing (DSP) technology to produce clear, high quality video
images.
(e) Synchronization:
Drive Selectable.
Internal, line lock or multiplexed Vertical
(f) Day/Night cameras shall feature a B/W mode that may be
automatically engaged on low light level and permit the use of an
external infrared illuminator. Removal electronically of the
color signal is not acceptable. The camera shall feature an
infrared cut filter capable of being removed automatically upon
low light threshold or manually.
(g) Geometric distortion: Camera shall be accurate to within a
maximum 1.5 percent geometric distortion in Zone 1 and to within 2
percent in Zones 2 and 3.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 23
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
b.
Camera signals: CCTV camera vertical sync signal shall be phase-locked
to the ac power line frequency and shall remain line locked at 60 Hz,
plus or minus 0.3 Hz. Synchronization at the video output shall
conform to the timing specified by SMPTE 170M. Camera shall operate on
internally generated sync automatically upon loss of external sync.
c.
Camera resolution
(1)
Exterior: Horizontal resolution shall be 480 TV lines in the
center in the color mode and 570 lines in the black & white
mode,
Vertical resolution shall be 350 TV lines in the center.
Resolution shall be maintained over the specified input voltage
and frequency range, and shall not vary more than 100 TV lines
from minimum specification over the specified operating
temperature range. Composite video output level shall be
automatically maintained to within plus or minus 0.1 volt over
scene changes of 0.25 footcandle to 1 by 104 footcandles with
lenses of f/1.4 and greater.
(2)
Interior: Horizontal resolution shall be at least TV lines.
Vertical resolution shall be at least 350 TV lines. 480Resolution
shall be maintained over the specified input voltage and frequency
range.
d.
CCTV lenses: Provide lenses with automated light level metering device
and an auto-iris. Provide each lens with a metal density spot filter.
Light adjustment by the automatic metering device shall be a weighted
average rather than a simple average or a peak response. Provide lenses
for 1/3 and 1/4 inch format cameras. Provide lenses which are mountable
with standard C or CS mounts.
e.
Auxiliary CCTV camera equipment: Equipment shall consist of camera
mounts and housings with environmental protection as applicable for
each camera. Camera mounts shall be heavy duty industrial type, shall
provide stable support for the camera, and shall be the configuration
specified for each individual camera location. Housing shall protect
the camera to ensure continuous 24-hour per day operation under
specified environmental conditions. Housing shall be constructed of a
durable material. Access to housing shall allow for camera and
auto-iris removal and replacement within plus or minus 0.5 degree, both
vertical and horizontal centerline alignment. Sealed housings shall be
pressurized with dry nitrogen, or contain two units of desiccant in the
camera body area. Install a 10, 20, and 30 percent humidity level
indicator strip in a position that allows inspection through the
enclosure faceplate. Where used, thermostatically controlled heaters
shall be located near the auto-iris and faceplate and near the
midsection of the camera body. Where ventilation blower is used in
housing to prevent high temperature, it shall be thermostatically
controlled. Hinged louvers shall close over blower exhaust when blower
is off. For exterior cameras, video, sync, tamper, and power cables
shall enter camera housing via weatherproof fittings. Entry into
housing shall not interfere with housing heaters or blower operation.
Provide terminal strips for power inside environmental housings to
distribute 120 volts ac for the camera, heater, and blower, as
applicable.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 24
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.4.15.2
1313775
Video Signal
Requirements apply to the video signal present at the video monitor input.
Standard system video level shall be one volt peak-to-peak (Vp-p) composite
video and sync. Standard system impedance shall be 75 ohms over the
frequency range 0 to 5 MHz. System timing and synchronizing waveform shall
be according to SMPTE 170M. Peak-to-peak amplitude of the composite TV
waveform shall be one volt and shall be referred to as standard system
video level. Waveform shall be measured in IRE units on the IRE scale
graticule where 140 IRE units represent one volt. Synchronizing pulse
amplitude of a composite video signal of standard system video level shall
be measured from blanking level to negative peak of the sync pulse and
shall be 40 IRE units, 0.3 volt nominal. Video amplitude of a composite
video signal of standard system video level shall be measured from blanking
level to reference white level and shall be 100 IRE units, 0.7 volt
nominal. Picture setup of a composite video signal of standard system
video level shall be 7.5 IRE units, 7.5 percent of the video amplitude.
Pulse overshoot shall be less than 2 percent of the pulse amplitude. Video
signal voltage frequency response shall be measured from camera output to
video monitor input. It shall be plus or minus 2 dB from 60 Hz to 5 MHz
and not more than 3 dB down at 6 MHz. The low frequency distortion shall
be measured for every camera output over every normal program path to the
input of the associated monitor. Distortion shall be less than 2 percent
at line and field rates. Peak-to-peak signal-to-rms noise ratio shall be
measured for every camera output via the normal program path at input of
the associated monitor. Terminate circuits, except the one under test, at
inputs and outputs. Hum and noise shall be 60 dB below 1.0 Vp-p.
2.4.15.3
Video Matrix Switchers
Switching shall interface multiple video signals, cameras, with one or more
monitors. Switching shall be timed to occur during the video signal
blanking period, vertical interval switching. When an ESS zone goes into
alarm, a signal shall be sent from the alarm reporting and display
processor to the switcher. When the zone is covered by CCTV cameras,
switcher shall call up the camera views for display on one or more of the
dedicated video monitors wired to the switcher. In the case of multiple
alarms, applicable camera numbers shall be stored in an alarm queue until
zones are manually called up for viewing. First video display out of the
queue shall be from the last reported alarm. Active alarms shall cycle
between the alarm queue and video monitors as various zones are called up
for viewing. Alarms shall not leave the cycle until secured, reset or
placed in access at the alarm reporting and display processor.
Additionally, a sequential monitoring capability shall permit alarm
reporting and display subsystem operation to view zones in numerical order
at an operator adjustable scan rate. Individual cameras shall be capable
of being called up to display zones on the video monitors. Manual controls
for camera switching shall be from any remote controller connected to the
Matrix switcher. Switcher shall be configured for desk top console
operation. Performance requirements shall be as follows:
a.
Modular construction shall enable 16 camera inputs and 4 monitor
outputs.
b.
Matrix switcher shall provide optional alarm and communication boards.
c.
The Matrix switcher shall allow 1 remote controllers for system control
and operation.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 25
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
d.
Alarm modes shall be automatically enabled or disabled by time of day
and day of the week.
e.
Operator Registration and System Partitioning: Up to 4 operator(s) can
be registered in a system with different operator access levels.
Password protection shall be available to limit operator access.
Operator priority shall be available to lock out lower priority
operators and to limit operator access to specific cameras and controls.
f.
Video connectors:
2.4.15.4
BNC.
Video Transmission
Transmission shall be by 75-ohm coaxial cable , twisted pair or
optics dedicated to the associated circuit.
fiber
Interior cable shall be installed in conduit unless indicated otherwise.
Cable shall be designed for the installation method intended. Exterior
cable runs shall be underground.
a. Coaxial cable: Coaxial cable used shall provide a DC resistance rating
of less than 15 ohm/1000', solid copper center conductor and 95 percent
braided, pure copper shield.
b. Twisted pair wire: Use point to point unshielded twisted pair wire,
24-16 AWG, stranded or solid, Category 2 or better. The video signal
may co-exist in the same wire bundle as other video, telephone, data,
control or low voltage power. The wire shall be installed with no
bridge-taps, loading coils, talk-battery or MOV type protectors. The
high bandwidth signal will not pass through a telephone switching
system, however multiple punch-blocks are okay.
c. Twisted pair wire distance: Distance includes any coax in the path.
Wire distance shall be measured to ensure the capability of the product
is not exceeded. Wire resistance may be measured with an ohm meter by
shorting the two conductors together at the far end and measuring the
loop resistance out and back.
d. Twisted pair wire with DVR: When using a digital video recorder, reduce
distance by 25 percent due to lower tolerance of the digital video
recorder to synch level and overall video signal quality.
2.4.15.5
a.
Color Video Monitors
Except as specified herein, design video monitors to comply with
SMPTE 170M for distribution monitors and:
(1)
Video monitors shall be designed for continuous operation and
shall incorporate printed circuit modular construction.
(2)
Monitor design shall provide for easy replacement of printed
circuit modules.
(3)
Electronic circuits shall use solid-state devices with the
exception of the cathode ray tube (CRT).
(4)
Each monitor shall be constructed to provide rigid support for
electrical systems so that unintentional changes in alignment or
microphonic effects will not occur during operation or movement.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 26
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
(5)
Circuit design shall incorporate safety margins of not less than
25 percent where possible, with respect to power dissipation
ratings, voltage ratings, and current carrying capacity.
(6)
Provide monitors, LCD's or Plasma Displays with a diagonal
viewing angle that nominally measures 42 inches.
(7)
Provide adequate safeguards to protect personnel from exposure to
high voltage during operation or adjustment.
(8)
Front panel controls shall include a monitor power switch,
horizontal hold, vertical hold, height, contrast, brightness, and
focus.
(9)
Monitors shall have the following minimum essential requirements:
(a) Resolution: Horizontal resolution for CRT monitors shall not
be less than the following: 9 inch monitors - 350 lines; 14 inch
monitors - 750 lines;15 inch monitors - 750 lines; 17 inch
monitors - 700 lines; 20 inch monitors - 500 lines.
Horizontal resolution for TFT LCD Monitors shall not be less than
the following: 10.4 inch monitors - 640 lines; 12.1 inch,
monitors - 800 lines; 15 inch monitors - 1024 lines; 17 inch
monitors - 1280 lines; 20.1 inch monitors - 800 lines.
(b) Geometry: No point in the active raster shall deviate from
its correct position by more than 2 percent of raster height.
b.
c.
Mounting and identification
(1)
Mount the monitor and other devices subject to burnout or short
operating life to facilitate easy replacement.
(2)
Label the printed circuit board's function and provide component
numbers or markings.
(3)
To maintain a standard quality and reliability, components shall
be conservatively rated.
(4)
Mount TV monitors in a frame for mounting in a
desk top console.
(5)
One 21 inch diagonal TV monitors shall be dually mounted in the
console. Protect monitors from circuit overloads by fuse or fuses
in the power source line. Power source line fuses shall be
mounted in finger-operated extractor fuseposts. Fuseholders shall
be located in a readily accessible position.
19 inch rack or
Video and signal input
(1)
(2)
Monitors shall operate with video input requiring a one Vp-p
nominal composite video signal switchable to either loop-through
or internal 75-ohm terminating impedance.
Signal input shall be BNC connectors.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 27
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.4.15.6
1313775
Ancillary Equipment
Equipment shall consist of the items specified below.
a.
Video date/time generator: The video time/date shall originate from
either the camera, switcher, video, digital video recorder (DVR) or the
video matrix switcher.
b.
Camera identifiers: Video signal from each camera shall be identified
by alpha numeric identifiers. Camera alpha numeric identifiers may
originate from either the camera, switcher, digital video recorder or
Video Matrix Switcher.
c.
Digital Video Recorder (DVR): The DVR shall provide 9video channels.
The DVR will record all cameras onto a hard drive and shall allow
remote network viewing via intranet browser. Hard drive capability
shall be sized to store all cameras recording 24/7 at 3 images per
second per camera for 4 weeks. DVR performance shall be as follows:
(1)
The DVR shall use modular hard disk media, with a digital format
capacity of 160GB per module.
(2) Include a 9 channel triplex video multiplexer capable of
performing encoding, recording and multiscreen viewing modes
simultaneously. Provide 9 channels of live, simultaneous video
images in which all 16 channels are refreshed at 60 frames per
second.
(3) Furnish 10-100base-T connection for record review and camera view
and control on a PC workstation equipped with Microsoft Windows XP
Professional operating system software, Microsoft Internet
Explorer version 6 or greater Internet Browser Software.
(4) PC workstation Viewing: Each of the ESS PC workstations shall
include direct access to each DVR via a Microsoft Internet
Explorer Web Browser. All necessary descriptive bookmarks and
shortcuts shall be prepared on each PC workstation to allow this
direct access. All functions shall be accessible through html
commands from a user's web browser interface. Pictures shall be
available for attachment via a user-provided SMTP-based email
transport system, and included capability for 16 users and 3 user
access levels (admin, control and user).
(5) Include 720(H) by 480(V) (Pixel Memory) sampling and 3-D scan
conversion to enable jitter-free stabilized pictures in a single
frame. Include 720(H) by 240(V) and 320(H) by 240(V) (Pixel
Memory) sampling, with 120 Images per second system recording
rate. Include Emergency, Event, Schedule and Manual Recording
Modes.
(6) Each camera shall support individual Recording Rate and Image
Quality settings for each of Emergency, Event, Schedule and Manual
Recording Modes. This array of Camera Recording Rate and Image
Quality settings by the Recording Modes shall form one of 4
Program Actions. The Program Action shall be assignable to a Time
Table to form one of 16 Independent Recording Profiles. Each
Recording Profile shall be able to be manually activated,
activated via RS-232C interface, automatically activated by Time
Table, or activated by separate alarm or emergency inputs.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 28
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
(7) Furnish digital display on the monitor and also recording of the
following information: year, month, day, hour, minute and second,
as well as alphanumeric camera location ID up to 8 characters. In
addition to monitor display, the date and time shall be recorded
on the hard disk. The digital video recorder shall also feature
video loss detection on all channels.
(8) Pre-event recording: For all individual camera channels, up to 20
seconds of pre-event pictures shall be buffered simultaneously.
(9) Motion-based Recording: Advanced integrated VMD shall be used to
detect a specific area, direction and duration of motion for each
camera channel, independently and simultaneously. Motion Search
may be executed for a single camera channel for a selected area on
the image.
(10) Disk Partitioning: Furnish automated disk management and a RTOS
(real-time operating system) platform to include up to 4.8 TB of
digital video storage on a single partition within the DVR. The
DVR System shall provide a choice of Physical Partitioning as
RAID5 or Disk Mirroring redundant array recording. The operator
shall be able to partition the available recording areas in a
Virtual Partition by Regular, Event, and Copy Partitions.
Manually and Scheduled recorded video information shall be
assigned to a Regular Recording Partition, which may be
overwritten. Event and Emergency Recording Data shall be
assignable to an Event Partition, where image overwriting shall be
prohibited. Any copied data shall be able to be assigned to the
Copy Partition, which may be overwritten or saved as required.
(11) Permit direct camera selection for recording playback of any of 9
video sources at the same time as multiscreen viewing and
multiplexed camera encoding (triplex multiplexer capability).
(12) Multiplexer Functions: Built-in programmable switcher with dwell
time and camera order programming. The unit shall automatically
switch multiple camera images to enable sequential spot monitoring
and simultaneous field recording. Separate spot, multiscreen,
multiscreen/RGB and cascaded video monitor outputs. The unit shall
offer full screen, 4, 7, 9, 10, 13 and 16 multiscreen monitoring
modes.
(13) Camera Control: Camera functions and control shall be accessible
for all cameras. The multiplexer shall furnish access to all
camera control, set-up and alarm functions, including preset
sequence, digital motion detector mask set, and back light
compensation set-up. Controllable camera functions shall be
accessible via front panel controls or the optional system
controller. These functions shall include direct access of preset
position, zoom (near/far), focus (near/far), iris (open/close) and
pan (left/right). Camera functions and control shall be accessible
for all cameras through the use of the optional control unit.
These functions shall include direct access of preset position,
zoom (near/far), focus (near/far), iris (open/close) and pan
(left/right).
(14) Outputs: Furnish 9 looping outputs for connection of all video
sources to external monitoring systems including multiscreen and
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 29
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
spot monitor video outputs, via BNC female connections. Furnish 4
channels of audio connection, including audio loop through via RCA
phono jacks. Furnish 1 External Storage connection via High Speed
(480 Mbps) Serial Interface. Furnish One 1 External Copy
connection via High Speed (480 Mbps) Serial Interface. Furnish 2
independent Video Outputs assignable to Multiscreen or Spot
functions (both/either). Furnish one 1 Cascade output for
connecting 3 additional digital video recorder for centralized
control using a single video monitor. Furnish virtual camera
number programming capability to support 64 camera channels on a
single system. Furnish 1 independent RGB Video output, capable of
monitoring all DVR functions.
(15) Indicators: Furnish Alarm, Alarm Suspend, Operate, HDD1, Hard
drive identifier, Timer and Error indicators. Furnish Camera
Selection, Iris, Preset and Camera Automatic Mode, Pan/Tilt, Set,
Jog Dial, Shuttle Dial, Setup/Esc, Record, Search, Play/Pause,
Pan/Tilt Slow, Stop, Pan/Tilt Go to Last, Zoom/Focus, A-B, Repeat,
Shift, Alarm Reset Buttons. All Camera selection buttons shall
have Tri-State Indication, corresponding to Recording, Viewing and
Control functions on actual DVR hardware. PC emulation shall not
be an acceptable alternative.
(16) Networking: All DVR recording, review, playback, camera control
and setup shall be available via the internally mounted Network
Interface. Equip with 10-100base-T connection for record review
and camera view and control on a personal computer equipped with
Internet Browser Software and an Ethernet 100Base-T connection.
Feature shall permit direct camera selection for recording
playback of any of 9 video sources at the same time as multiscreen
viewing and multiplexed camera encoding (triplex multiplexer
mode). Up to eight 8 simultaneous clients viewing and 2
simultaneous FTP sessions shall be supported.
(17) Power: The DVR shall have a power source of 120VAC (50/60 Hz).
e.
Four quadrant multiplexer: Unit shall digitally capture full video
from four unsynchronized sources and reduce these images to quarter
screen size and combine images to provide a real time video output for
display of the four inputs in four quadrants of a single monitor.
(1)
Video performance requirements shall be as follows:
(a) Input level: One Vp-p nominal into 75 ohms from a 525 line,
60 fields per second source;
(b)
Output level:
One Vp-p nominal into 75 ohms;
(c)
Alarm inputs:
Four, rear panel mounted;
(d)
Alarm outputs:
(e)
Video inputs:
(f)
Switching:
(g)
Memory:
(h)
Gray scale:
Relay contacts, rear panel mounted;
Four, looping;
Five position, front panel mounted;
512 by 512 pixels, minimum, digital; and
64-level.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 30
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.4.16
1313775
Security Command Center (SCC)
The Security Command Center shall integrate all sub systems and
communications from and provide operator control interface to ESS. Major
components shall be as follows:
a.
ESS Software
b.
Digital Receiver
c.
Monitoring Display Software
2.4.16.1
ESS Software
The ESS software shall utilize a single database for the integration of all
sub systems. The integration shall be provided under one operating
environment. The System shall archive all events in a database stored
either on a local hard drive or a networked database server. The software
shall support configuration and simultaneous monitoring of all sub systems.
The software shall allow the configuration of networked PC workstations.
The PC workstations and file server shall be connected via a TCP/IP
network. Administrative tasks such as configuration, monitoring, schedules,
report generation shall be provided from any PC workstation on the network.
All system programming data shall reside on the single database and shall
be instantly accessible to every PC Workstation connected to the network.
The system shall utilize a non-proprietary SQL-based, ODBC-compliant
database, managed by Sybase Adaptive Server Anywhere, Microsoft SQL Server,
or Oracle.
The ESS shall utilize a preemptive multi-tasking operating system:
Microsoft Windows 2000, 2003 or Windows XP Professional environment.
System shall be designed to utilize the capabilities of multitasking
operation, with many processes running at the same time without
interference with each other and with higher priority tasks taking
precedence over lower priority tasks.
The
The ESS software shall support responses to alarms entering the system.
Each alarm shall be capable of initiating one or more of the following
actions: sending alarm commands to a CCTV system interface, triggering DVR
event recording, activating output devices, playing PC audio files,
controlling doors, and displaying floor-plan graphical maps associated with
the alarm device. The system shall provide mode of system operation that
requires operator acknowledgment of any alarm.
The ESS software shall be capable of, but not limited to, the following
programming and functionality:
a. Daylight Savings Time Adjustment: There shall be a
software-configurable, user defined adjustment for Daylight Savings
Time. The ACU(s) and PCU(s) shall not need to be connected to the ESS
in order for the adjustment to occur.
b. Operator Privileges: An unlimited number of system operators shall be
supported, each with a unique login and password combination.
Operators shall be assigned privileges based on the loops, commands, or
programming features that are available to each individual operator.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 31
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
c. Alarm Priorities: Each alarm device shall have the ability to be user
configured to belong to one of 10,000 priority levels. Priority levels
are numbers assigned to an alarm based on the importance of the alarm.
9,999 is the highest and most critical level of alarms. 0 is the least
significant. These priorities shall define which alarm events to
display on individually specified ESS workstations.
d. Reports: The ESS shall include integrated reporting capabilities as
well as the ability to run Crystal Report templates.
e. User Interface: The ESS programming shall be menu-driven, with
"wizards" to assist with software configuration, and shall include
on-line 'Help' information.
f. Messages: The ESS shall permit the use of user-selected colors for
event messages.
g. Graphics: The ESS shall be capable of displaying a floor-plan graphic
for card activity and alarm events as part of the ESS integration.
h. Device Status: The ESS shall be capable of displaying the dynamic
status of a user-selected list of devices, including doors, inputs, and
outputs.
i. Diagnostics: The ESS shall include diagnostic software tools that
interface and query the hardware for information and to issue commands.
j. Mandatory Data Fields: The ESS shall require any cardholder data field
to be selected by the user as mandatory. Mandatory data fields are to
force ESS operators to input data that is required for proper system
configuration.
k. User Defined Data Fields: The ESS shall provide 20 unassigned data
fields for storing user-defined data. The data fields shall support
user-defined labels, and shall be user-configurable as plain text
fields or drop-down selection lists.
l. Archive Database: The ESS shall include a connection to an archive
database, which stores purged events and deleted programming, and which
can be accessed for reporting.
m. Programmable Database Backup: The ESS shall include the capability of
performing user-scheduled database backups, without the use of
third-party backup software.
n. Programmable Database Purging: The ESS shall include the capability of
performing user-scheduled database purging, moving selected events to
an archive database when the events have aged a user-specified number
of days.
o. Database Importing: The ESS shall include the capacity to import user
data from an ODBC datasource (Access, Excel, text).
p. Data Exporting: The ESS shall include the capacity to export data from
any table in the database to either a text or HTML file, in any
user-selected order.
q. Event Log Output: The ESS shall include the capacity to send a
continuous stream of user-selected types of event messages to a text
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 32
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
file, serial port, or TCP/IP address.
r. Data Audit Trail: The ESS shall record changes to programming,
recording the date/time stamp of the change, the name of the operator
making the change, and the nature of the change. This data audit shall
be available in history for reporting.
2.4.16.2
Digital Receiver
The digital receiver system shall be capable of monitoring PCU digital
dialers, data networks and TCP/IP network communications of IDS account
zones on the same receiver. The digital receiver enclosure shall house the
processor card rack, modem rack, data rack and convenience panel. Built
into the front of the digital receiver enclosure shall be an LCD display
for viewing incoming reports with a keypad for acknowledging reports and
configuring the system and its components. The digital receiver enclosure
shall contain internal cards consisting of a processor board, 3 line cards,
modem power supply card, multibus power supply card, and transformer card.
The digital receiver shall be capable of, but not limited to, the following
programming and functionality:
a.
The digital receiver shall provide SCC with computerized monitoring of
PCU communication format of Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC).
Digital receiver features shall include automatic logging of alarm,
trouble, and supervisory account reports on a local printer with date
and time of their occurrence. Capacity of up to 65,535 digital dialer
or direct dedicated account zones for alarm, trouble, user and system
reports.
b.
The Digital receiver shall provide SCC with computerized monitoring of
PCU communication format of Host asynchronous (HOST). Digital receiver
features shall include automatic logging of alarm, trouble, and
supervisory account reports on a local printer with date and time of
their occurrence. Capacity for alarm, trouble, user and system reports
up to 65,535 host account zones that do not check in and 2,500 accounts
that do check in.
c.
LCD Display and Keypad: The LCD display shall allow the SCC operator to
view alarm reports before acknowledging the alarms using the system
keypad. The LCD and keypad shall be built-in to the front of the
digital receiver enclosure. The LCD and Keypad are used as a backup
when the ESS is not available during maintenance or unplanned system
outages.
d.
Printer: Routine reports shall be logged on an optional printer without
need of operator response. Supervisory and alarm reports shall be
logged on the printer and displayed on the LCD for operator
acknowledgement. Report capability shall be the over all role of the
ESS.
(1) Additional Reports: Receiver shall be able to process additional
reports transmitted to it by PCU(s):
(a) Addition and deletion of code numbers including user number of
the person making the change.
(b) Bypassing and resetting of zones by number and name including
the user number of the person making the change.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 33
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
(c) Schedule changes including user number of the person making
the change.
(d) Trouble and Restoral report by zone name and number.
(e) Door access reports including user number and number of the
door being accessed.
e.
Communication and Line Capacity:
(1) The digital receiver shall be capable of communication using the
IBM Synchronous Data Link Control format.
(2) The digital receiver shall accommodate up to 5 incoming lines.
(3) Digital receiver shall have the ability to be configured with
PCU(s) digital dialer, data network and TCP/IP network
communication receiving lines.
(4) PCU(s) digital dialer lines shall have a capacity of 65,535
separate accounts.
(5) Data TCP/IP network lines shall have a capacity of 65,535 separate
accounts that do not check in or 2,500 separate accounts that do
check in.
f. Digital Receiver Enclosure:
(1) Digital receiver enclosure shall provide housing for the
processor, power supply, line cards, and associated cables. The
enclosure shall measure 8.75 inches high, 19 inches wide and 12
inches deep.
(2) Contained in the top of the system enclosure is the modem
rack. The rack shall hold the modem power supply card and up to 5
line cards. The transformer card for connecting the 120 VAC shall
be mounted on the rear of the rack modem.
(3) Contained in the bottom of the system enclosure is the
multibus rack with cooling fan. The multibus rack holds the
processor card and the multibus power supply card.
g.
Processor Card: The main system processor shall control the line
cards, the LCD display, the built-in keypad, and the printer. The
processor shall contain the firmware for system operation, the EEPROM
memory of operator codes, line configuration, and perform all time
keeping functions.
h.
Line Card:
(1) Line card shall provide for 1 incoming line of PCU digital dialer,
data network or TCP/IP network communication to PCU(s). Each line
card shall have one 10-position flat cable for connection to the
processor card and one connector for a phone line or data network
line from an RJ11X connection block.
(2) When the line card is configured for PCU digital dialer operation,
the line card shall monitor the incoming phone line voltage.
During a loss of phone line voltage, a red Phone Line Fail LED
shall light and an alert sound. The alert shall be silenced by
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 34
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
pressing the silence switch on the card or software control from
ESS. The LED shall remain lit until the phone line is restored.
(3) Line card shall have a green LED labeled PWR to be lit when the
power supply on the line card is in a good condition.
(4) Line card shall have six yellow LEDs indicating the condition of
the line card during various stages of communication. Stages
indicated shall be: Transmit Data, Receive Data, Carrier Detect,
On Line, Ring Detect, and Data Terminal Ready.
(5) A Network Interface Card (NIC) shall be integral to the digital
receiver with a built in TCP/IP network router. External network
routers are not acceptable for Ethernet and Internet/Intranet
monitoring.
(6) A Network Interface Card (NIC) shall be integral to the receiver
with built in network router capable of 128 Bit AES Rijndael
Encryption process certified by NIST (National Institute of
Standards and Technology).
i.
Modem Power Supply Card:
(1) Modem power supply card shall provide power for up to 5 line
cards. Power shall be supplied through the modem rack backplane
connectors without additional cabling. The modem power supply card
shall also provide monitoring for the LCD connection, UPS system
status and 120 VAC input to the digital receiver.
(2) Modem power supply card shall have a green LED labeled PWR. The
PWR LED will light when the power supply to the modem power supply
card is in good condition. There shall also be a red LED labeled
PWR TRBL, which will light when there is a power problem on the
modem power supply card along with sounding an alert. The alert
shall be able to be silenced by pressing a silence switch on the
modem power supply card or software control from ESS. The red LED
shall remain lit until power problem is corrected.
(3) Modem power supply card shall have a trouble LED for the LCD that
lights and sounds an alert when the LCD is unplugged. The alert
shall be able to be silenced by pressing a silence button on the
modem power supply card or software control form ESS.
(4) Modem power supply card shall have a trouble LED for the UPS that
lights and sounds an alert when the UPS Brownout input is opened.
The alert shall be able to be silenced by pressing a silence
button on the modem power supply card or software control form ESS.
(5) Modem power supply card shall have a trouble LED for the AC power
to the transformer card that lights and sounds an alert when the
AC power to the transformer card fails. The alert shall be able to
be silenced by pressing a silence button on the modem power supply
card or software control form ESS.
j.
Special Applications Features: Receiver shall be able to act as a
communications path to panels for "Trapping" of PCU(s) for Remote
Programming/Interrogation processes. Receiver shall work in conjunction
with the ESS in pass thru configuration with an Automation System to
"Trap" a PCU and send notification for the panel to contact the remote
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 35
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
link Programming Software for remote interrogation in a Network
Application. (TCP/IP Network Trapping).
k.
Multibus Power Supply Card
(1) Multibus power supply card shall provide power to the processor
card through the multibus backplane. It also shall be able to
monitor the condition of the processor card, the voltage output of
the modem power supply card and its own internal voltages.
(2) Multibus power supply card shall monitor the processor through the
multibus backplane. There shall be a green OK LED that will light
when the processor is operating normally. If the processor stops
operating, the red FAIL LED will light and failure buzzer shall
sound. The system shall restart after the restart button on the
multibus power supply card is pressed. System restart button shall
not change system configuration.
(3) Multibus power supply card shall monitor three different system
voltages, +5, +12, -12 and the modem power supply. Four LEDs shall
be located on the multibus power supply card to display any
voltage failures.
l.
Transformer Card: Transformer card shall provide power to the modem
power supply card and the multibus power supply card. It shall also
have a power cord for connecting to the multibus rack-cooling fan.
m.
Power Cable: Power cable shall be 2 feet long and connect the
different system voltages the transformer card and the multibus power
supply card.
n.
Convenience Panel: Convenience panel shall provide cabling for 2
RS-232 ports. The ports shall be for the host output, activity log
printer(s) and auxiliary communications.
o.
Printer and Cable:
(1) Printer shall be an 80-column serial printer with a 10-foot RS-232
cable. The printer can be connected to the all events output
connector or the alarm only output connector.
(2) Printer shall be configured to 1200 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
and even parity.
p.
LCD Display and Keypad
(1) LCD display shall be a 32-character LCD display with a keypad for
entry of information and acknowledgment of alarm signals.
(2) LCD display shall be built-in to the front of the system
enclosure.
(3) Power shall be provided from the multibus power supply card.
2.4.16.3
a.
Printer Requirements
Report Printer: A laser text printer shall be provided for the purpose
of generating reports. The printer shall be a parallel or USB
interface dry-type laser process printer. The unit shall print a
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 36
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
minimum of 8 pages per minute at 600 dpi resolution.
2.4.16.4
ESS Monitor Display Software
ESS Monitor display software shall provide for text and graphics map
displays that include zone and device status integrated into the display.
Different colors shall be used for the various components and real time
data. Colors shall be uniform on all displays. The following color coding
shall be followed.
a.
FLASHING RED to alert an operator that a zone has gone into an alarm or
that primary power has failed.
b.
RED to alert an operator that a zone is in alarm and that the
alarm has been acknowledged.
c.
YELLOW to advise an operator that a zone is in access.
d.
GREEN to indicate that a zone is secure or that power is on.
2.4.16.5
Control and Display Integration
Accomplish so that SCC controls are human engineered as specified in
paragraph entitled "Human Engineering" so the entire SCC can be operated by
a single or multiple operator(s). In addition, switching and monitoring
components of the assessment subsystem shall also be integrated with the
SCC so that SCC operator(s) can effectively monitor, assess alarms and
control the ESS. Method of system integration shall be as a single
console. Provide chassis, and modules required for console configuration
of SCC.
2.5
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment
enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the
drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when
applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic,3 mm (0.125
inch) 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be
matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and
engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 25 by 65 mm
(one by 2.5 inches) one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of
6.35 mm (0.25 inch) 0.25 inch high normal block style.
2.5.1
Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
2.6
FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which
shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 37
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
PART 3
3.1
1313775
EXECUTION
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
UL 681, UL 1037, and UL 1076, and the appropriate installation manual for
each equipment type. Components within the system shall be configured with
appropriate "service points" to pinpoint system trouble in less than 20
minutes.
3.1.1
Cable and Wire Runs
NFPA 70 and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, and as
specified herein. Conduits including flexible metal and armored cable shall
terminate in the sensor or device enclosure. Ends of conduit shall be
fitted with insulated bushings. Exposed conductors at ends of conduits
external to sensors and devices are not acceptable.
3.1.2
Soldering
ASTM B32. For soldering electrical connections, use composition Sn60, Type
AR or S, for general purposes; use composition Sn62 or Sn63, Type AR or S,
for special purposes. When Type S solder is used for soldering electrical
connections, flux shall conform to ASTM B32.
3.1.3
Galvanizing
Ferrous metal shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
Screws, bolts, nuts, and other fastenings and supports shall be corrosion
resistant.
3.1.4
Fungus Treatment
Completely treat system components for fungus resistance. Do not use
treated materials containing mercury-bearing fungicide. Treating materials
shall not increase flammability of material or surface being treated.
Treating materials shall not cause skin irritation or other personnel
injury during fabrication, transportation, operation, or maintenance of
equipment, or during use of finished items when used for the purpose
intended.
3.1.5
Conduit
Install in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
3.1.6
Underground Cable Installation
Underground conductors connecting protected structures and objects to the
central alarm updating and display unit shall be run direct burial or in
conduit as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL
DISTRIBUTION. Coaxial cable shall not be spliced. If permitted, cables
connecting protected structures and objects to the security control console
shall be sized such that initially only approximately 60 percent of the
circuit pairs will be used. Cable pairs not used shall be reserved for
future use of additional detection circuits.
3.2
ADJUSTMENT, ALIGNMENT, SYNCHRONIZATION, AND CLEANING
Subsequent to installation, clean each system component of dust, dirt,
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 38
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
grease, or oil incurred during installation or accrued subsequent to
installation from other project activities, and prepared for system
activation by manufacturer's recommended procedures for adjustment,
alignment, or synchronization. Prepare each component in accordance with
appropriate provisions of component installation, operations, and
maintenance manuals. Remove large vegetation that may sway in the wind and
touch fencing.
3.3
3.3.1
ESS System Acceptance and Training
ESS System Acceptance Test
ESS System Acceptance testing shall be performed as follows;
a. The NAVFAC and NAVFAC Engineer will conduct final acceptance testing of
the system.
b. Prior to the final acceptance test, security contractor shall conduct a
complete test of the entire ESS including subsystems and provide the
NAVFAC and NAVFAC Engineer with a written report.
c. Following completion of the initial testing and correction of any noted
deficiencies, conduct a five-day burn-in test, intent of the burn-in
test shall be to prove the ESS by placing it in near real operating
conditions. During this period the ESS shall be fully functional and
programmed such that all points, interfaces, controls, reports,
messages, prompts, etc. can be exercised and validated. Record and
correct any system anomaly, deficiency, or failure noted during this
period. Scheduling of the final acceptance test shall be based on a
review of the results of this burn-in test.
d. Deliver a report describing the results of the functional tests, burn-in
tests, diagnostics, calibrations, corrections, and repairs including
written certification to the NAVFAC and NAVFAC Engineer that the
installed complete ESS has been calibrated, tested, and is fully
functional as specified herein.
e. Prior to the final acceptance test, complete all clean-up and patch work
requirements. Security equipment closets and similar areas shall be
free of accumulation of waste materials or rubbish
caused by operations under the Contract At completion of the Work,
remove all waste materials, rubbish, contractor tools, construction
equipment, machinery and all surplus materials.
f. Upon written notification from the Contractor that the ESS is completely
installed, integrated and operational, and the burn-in testing
completed, the NAVFAC and NAVFAC Engineer will conduct a final
acceptance test of the entire system at a mutually acceptable time.
g. During the final acceptance test, no adjustments, repairs or
modifications to the system shall be conducted without the permission
of the NAVFAC.
h. During the course of the final acceptance test by the NAVFAC and NAVFAC
Engineer, the Contractor shall be responsible for demonstrating that,
without exception, the completed and integrated ESS complies with the
contract requirements. Physical and functional requirements of the
project shall be demonstrated and shown. This demonstration will begin
by comparing as-built drawings conditions of the ESS to requirements
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 39
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
outlined in this Section, item by item. Following the Section
compliance review, ESS and SCCd equipment will be evaluated.
i. The functionality of the various interfaces between systems will be
tested.
j. The installation of all field devices will be inspected. This field
inspection will weigh heavily on the general neatness and quality of
installation, complete functionality of each device, and compliance
with mounting, back box and conduit requirements.
k. All equipment shall be on and fully operational during any and all
testing procedures. Provide personnel, equipment, and supplies
necessary to perform all site testing. Provide a minimum of two
Contractor employees familiar with the ESS for the final acceptance
test. One contractor employee shall be responsible for monitoring and
verifying alarms while the other will be required to demonstrate the
function of each device. Supply at least two radios or portable
telephones for use during the test.
l. The NAVFAC and NAVFAC Engineer retain the right to suspend, terminate or
reschedule testing at any time when the ESS is found to be incomplete
or fails to perform as specified. In the event that it becomes
necessary to suspend, terminate or reschedule the test, all of the
NAVFAC and NAVFAC Engineers fees and expenses related to the test shall
be deducted from the Contractor's retainage. In the event it becomes
necessary to suspend, terminate or reschedule the test, the Contractor
shall work diligently to complete and/or repair all outstanding items
as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall supply the
NAVFAC and NAVFAC Engineer with a detailed punch list completion
schedule outlining task-by-task completion dates and a tentative date
for a subsequent retest. During the final acceptance test, no
adjustments, repairs or modifications to the system shall be conducted
without the permission of the NAVFAC Engineer and NAVFAC.
3.3.2
ESS Training Outline
Provide training as coordinated with the NAVFAC. The following training
program is intended to identify typical training requirements and may be
modified and/or amended to meet specific NAVFAC training requirements.
3.3.2.1
ESS Administrator Training
a. ACS Administrator Training shall include:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Two eight-hour on-site training sessions.
Operating system procedures and configuration.
Operator functions.
Database functions and setup.
Cardholder input and deletion procedures.
Report generation.
Applications programs (as applicable).
(8) Items unique to the ACS interfaces with other systems
b. CCTV System Administrator Training shall include:
(1) One eight-hour session on site.
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 40
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
(2) Training shall include all administrator and operator functions,
and items unique to the installed CCTV System and the interfaces
with other systems.
3.3.2.2
ESS Operator Training
Coordinate the operator training syllabus with NAVFAC prior to conducting
operator training.
a. ACS Operator Training shall include:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(5)
One (one-day) 8 hours on-site training sessions.
System operating procedures.
System configuration orientation.
Alarm acknowledgment.
Alarm response logging.
Items unique to the ACS interfaces with other systems.
b. CCTV Operator Training shall include:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
3.3.3
One (one-day) 8 on-site training sessions.
Training shall include:
Operating procedures.
System configuration.
Video call-up.
Camera and monitor control.
Basic device terminology and troubleshooting.
Follow-up Training
a. One, two hour training session each month for one month after initial
training.
b. Follow-up training shall begin one month after initial training.
c. Training shall include testing for system competence.
3.3.4
Training Operating and Maintenance Personnel
Furnish instruction for operating staff in system operation and operator
troubleshooting and preventive maintenance procedures. Instruction shall
consist of 2 man-days, 8 hours per day, and shall be held during normal
duty hours. Commence instruction after system is fully operational, and
complete instruction prior to system acceptance and turnover to the
Government. Attendance at equipment manufacturer's recommended maintenance
training schools may be substituted for this training. Costs associated
with such schooling, less travel and per diem, shall be borne by the
Contractor. Complete maintenance instruction prior to system acceptance
and turnover to the Government.
3.4
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria.
3.5
NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as
indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 41
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 28 20 00.00 20
Page 42
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
EXCAVATION AND FILL
02/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C 136
(2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve
Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM D 1140
(2000; R 2006) Amount of Material in Soils
Finer than the No. 200 (75-micrometer)
Sieve
ASTM D 1556
(2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D 2487
(2010) Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D 4318
(2010) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D 6938
(2010) Standard Test Method for In-Place
Density and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
ASTM D 698
(2007e1) Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard
Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (600
kN-m/cu. m.))
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1
(2008; Errata 1-2010; Changes 1-3 2010;
Changes 4-6 2011) Safety and Health
Requirements Manual
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA 530/F-93/004
(1993; Rev O; Updates I, II, IIA, IIB, and
III) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid
Waste (Vol IA, IB, IC, and II) (SW-846)
EPA 600/4-79/020
(1983) Methods for Chemical Analysis of
Water and Wastes
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.2
1.2.1
1313775
DEFINITIONS
Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density
obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 698, for general soil
types, abbreviated as percent laboratory maximum density.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Shoring and Sheeting Plan
Dewatering work plan
SD-06 Test Reports
Borrow Site Testing; G
Fill and backfill test; G
Select material test; G
Density tests; G
Copies of all laboratory and field test reports within 24 hours of the
completion of the test.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials.
1.5
REQUIREMENTS FOR OFF SITE SOIL
Soils brought in from off site for use as backfill shall be tested for TPH,
BTEX and full TCLP including ignitability, corrosivity and reactivity.
Backfill shall contain less than 100 parts per million (ppm) of total
petroleum hydrocarbons (TPH) and less than 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene,
Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and shall not fail the TCPL
test. TPH concentrations shall be determined by using EPA 600/4-79/020
Method 418.1. BTEX concentrations shall be determined by using
EPA 530/F-93/004 Method 5030/8020. TCLP shall be performed in accordance
with EPA 530/F-93/004 Method 1311. Provide Borrow Site Testing for TPH,
BTEX and TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow site,
with at least one test from each borrow site. Material shall not be
brought on site until tests have been approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.6
1.6.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Shoring and Sheeting Plan
Submit drawings and calculations, certified by a registered professional
engineer, describing the methods for shoring and sheeting of excavations.
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Drawings shall include material sizes and types, arrangement of members,
and the sequence and method of installation and removal. Calculations
shall include data and references used.
The Contractor is required to hire a Professional Geotechnical Engineer to
provide inspection of excavations and soil/groundwater conditions
throughout construction. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be responsible
for performing pre-construction and periodic site visits throughout
construction to assess site conditions. The Geotechnical Engineer shall
update the excavation, sheeting and dewatering plans as construction
progresses to reflect changing conditions and shall submit an updated plan
if necessary. A written report shall be submitted, at least monthly,
informing the Contractor and Contracting Officer of the status of the plan
and an accounting of the Contractor's adherence to the plan addressing any
present or potential problems. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be
available to meet with the Contracting Officer at any time throughout the
contract duration.
1.6.2
Dewatering Work Plan
Submit procedures for accomplishing dewatering work.
1.6.3
Utilities
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities
during construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Excavation made
with power-driven equipment is not permitted within two feet of known
Government-owned utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately
adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried
obstruction, excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the
indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or
until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or
other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for
backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility
lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.
PART 2
2.1
2.1.1
PRODUCTS
SOIL MATERIALS
Satisfactory Materials
Any materials classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GP-GC,
GM-GC, SW, SP, SM, SW-SM, SC, SW-SC, or SP-SM,, free of debris, roots,
wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and
frozen, deleterious, or objectionable materials. Unless specified
otherwise, the maximum particle diameter shall be one-half the lift
thickness at the intended location.
2.1.2
Unsatisfactory Materials
Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory
materials. Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills, trash,
refuse, or backfills from previous construction. Unsatisfactory material
also includes material classified as satisfactory which contains root and
other organic matter, frozen material, and stones larger than 6 inches.
The Contracting Officer shall be notified of any contaminated materials.
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.1.3
1313775
Common Fill
Approved, unclassified soil material with the characteristics required to
compact to the soil density specified for the intended location.
2.1.4
Backfill and Fill Material
ASTM D 2487, classification GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, SM, with a maximum
ASTM D 4318 liquid limit of 35, maximum ASTM D 4318 plasticity index of 12,
and a maximum of 20 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve.
2.1.5
Select Material
Provide materials classified as GW, GP, SW, or SP
indicated.
2.1.6
by ASTM D 2487 where
Topsoil
Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in
the area, free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than one inch diameter,
brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material detrimental to plant
growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.
2.2
2.2.1
UTILITY BEDDING AND UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIAL
Sand
Clean, coarse-grained sand meeting the requirements of the VDOT Road &
Bridge Specifications, latest edition, Section 202, for "Fine Aggregates."
2.2.2
Gravel
Clean, coarsely graded natural gravel, crushed stone or a combination
thereof meeting the requirements of the VDOT Road & Bridge Specifications,
latest edition, Section 203 for "Coarse Aggregates," sizes 57, 67, or 78,
unless otherwise noted on the plans.
2.3
BORROW
Obtain borrow materials required in excess of those furnished from
excavations from sources outside of Government property.
2.4
BACKFILL FOR UNDERDRAINAGE SYSTEMS
Clean sand, crushed rock, or gravel meeting the requirements of the VDOT
Road & Bridge Specifications, latest edition, Section 203 for "Coarse
Aggregates," size 57, unless otherwise noted on the plans.
2.5
GEOTEXTILE/FILTER FABRIC
Geotextile and filter fabric material shall meet the requirements of the
VDOT Road & Bridge Specifications, latest edition, Section 245, for
"Geotextile for Use in Drainage Systems", unless otherwise noted on the
plans.
2.6
MATERIAL FOR RIP-RAP
Riprap material shall meet the requirements of the VDOT Road & Bridge
Specifications, latest edition, Sections 204 and 414, Class AI , unless
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
otherwise noted on the plans.
2.7
BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and
alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured
specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines.
Provide tape on rolls, 3 inch minimum width, color coded as specified below
for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold
black letters continuously over the entire tape length.
Warning and
identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or
similar wording. Color and printing shall be permanent, unaffected by
moisture or soil.
Warning Tape Color Codes
Red:
Yellow:
Orange:
Blue:
Green:
White:
2.7.1
Electric
Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials
Telephone and Other Communications
Water Systems
Sewer Systems
Steam Systems
Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping
Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing
requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0.004
inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250
psi crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil
backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape
is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a
protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
PROTECTION
3.1.1
Shoring and Sheeting
Provide shoring, bracing, cribbing, trench boxes, underpinning or sheeting
as required. In addition to Section 25 A and B of EM 385-1-1 and other
requirements set forth in this contract, include provisions in the shoring
and sheeting plan that will accomplish the following:
a.
Prevent undermining of pavements, foundations and slabs.
b.
Prevent slippage or movement in banks or slopes adjacent to the
excavation.
3.1.2
Drainage and Dewatering
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water
encountered during construction.
3.1.2.1
Drainage
So that construction operations progress successfully, completely drain
construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials
sufficiently dry. The Contractor shall establish/construct storm drainage
features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site development, and
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive
surface water runoff away from the construction activity and/or provide
temporary ditches, dikes, swales, and other drainage features and equipment
as required to maintain dry soils, prevent erosion and undermining of
foundations. When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and
unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop,
remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified
herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and
ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to
employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed. Excavated
slopes and backfill surfaces shall be protected to prevent erosion and
sloughing. Excavation shall be performed so that the site, the area
immediately surrounding the site, and the area affecting operations at the
site shall be continually and effectively drained.
3.1.2.2
Dewatering
Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to
prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave
in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of
construction. French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches will not be
permitted within 3 feet of the foundation of any structure, except with
specific written approval, and after specific contractual provisions for
restoration of the foundation area have been made. Control measures shall
be taken by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to
maintain the integrity of the in situ material. While the excavation is
open, the water level shall be maintained continuously below the working
level.
3.1.3
Underground Utilities
Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The
Contractor shall physically verify the location and elevation of the
existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction. The
Contractor shall scan the construction site with electromagnetic and sonic
equipment and mark the surface of the ground where existing underground
utilities are discovered.
3.1.4
Machinery and Equipment
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during
construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Repair, or remove and
provide new pipe for existing or newly installed pipe that has been
displaced or damaged.
3.2
3.2.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
Clearing and Grubbing
Unless indicated otherwise, remove trees, stumps, logs, shrubs, brush and
vegetation and other items that would interfere with construction
operations within the clearing limits. Remove stumps entirely. Grub out
matted roots and roots over 2 inches in diameter to at least 18 inches
below existing surface.
3.2.2
Stripping
Strip topsoil from the site at least 5' beyond the perimeter limits of
roadways, walks and structures and stockpile separately from other
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
excavated material. Material unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be wasted.
Locate topsoil so that the material can be used readily for the finished
grading. Where sufficient existing topsoil conforming to the material
requirements is not available on site, provide borrow materials suitable
for use as topsoil. Protect topsoil and keep in segregated piles until
needed.
3.2.3
Unsuitable Material
Remove vegetation, debris, decayed vegetable matter, sod, mulch, and
rubbish underneath paved areas or concrete slabs.
3.3
EXCAVATION
Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse excavated
materials that meet the specified requirements for the material type
required at the intended location. Keep excavations free from water.
Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations, soils
softened or made unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to
weather. Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted except
to remove unsatisfactory material. Unsatisfactory material encountered
below the grades shown shall be removed and backfilled as directed by the
Contracting Officer. . Satisfactory material removed below the depths
indicated, without specific direction of the Contracting Officer, shall be
replaced with satisfactory materials to the indicated excavation grade;
except as specified for paved areas, buildings and spread footings.
Determination of elevations and measurements of approved overdepth
excavation of unsatisfactory material below grades indicated shall be done
under the direction of the Contracting Officer.
3.3.1
Structures With Spread Footings
Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the
Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement. Fill over excavations
with concrete during foundation placement.
3.3.2
Pipe Trenches
Excavate to the dimension indicated. Grade bottom of trenches to provide
uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement.
Tamp if necessary to provide a firm pipe bed. Recesses shall be excavated
to accommodate bells and joints so that pipe will be uniformly supported
for the entire length. Rock, where encountered, shall be excavated to a
depth of at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe.
3.3.3
Excavated Materials
Satisfactory excavated material required for fill or backfill shall be
placed in the proper section of the permanent work required or shall be
separately stockpiled if it cannot be readily placed. Satisfactory material
in excess of that required for the permanent work and all unsatisfactory
material shall be disposed of as specified in Paragraph "DISPOSITION OF
SURPLUS MATERIAL."
3.3.4
Final Grade of Surfaces to Support Concrete
Excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before concrete is
to be placed. Only excavation methods that will leave the foundation rock
in a solid and unshattered condition shall be used. Approximately level
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
surfaces shall be roughened, and sloped surfaces shall be cut as indicated
into rough steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond. Shales shall
be protected from slaking and all surfaces shall be protected from erosion
resulting from ponding or flow of water.
3.4
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
Unsatisfactory material in surfaces to receive fill or in excavated areas
shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials as directed by
the Contracting Officer. The surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6
inches before the fill is started. Sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical
to 4 horizontal shall be plowed, stepped, benched, or broken up so that the
fill material will bond with the existing material. When subgrades are
less than the specified density, the ground surface shall be broken up to a
minimum depth of 6 inches, pulverized, and compacted to the specified
density. When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural
ground, the excavated or natural ground portion shall be scarified to a
depth of 12 inches and compacted as specified for the adjacent fill.
Material shall not be placed on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers,
pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved equipment
well suited to the soil being compacted. Material shall be moistened or
aerated as necessary to provide the moisture content that will readily
facilitate obtaining the specified compaction with the equipment used.
Minimum subgrade density shall be as specified herein.
3.4.1
Proof Rolling
Proof rolling shall be done on an exposed subgrade free of surface water
(wet conditions resulting from rainfall) which would promote degradation of
an otherwise acceptable subgrade. After stripping, proof roll the existing
subgrade of the building and roads with six passes of a dump truck loaded
with 212 cubic feet of soil. Operate the truck in a systematic manner to
ensure the number of passes over all areas, and at speeds between 2 1/2 to
3 1/2 miles per hour. When proof rolling under buildings, the building
subgrade shall be considered to extend 5 feet beyond the building lines,
and one-half of the passes made with the roller shall be in a direction
perpendicular to the other passes. Notify the Contracting Officer a
minimum of 3 days prior to proof rolling. Proof rolling shall be performed
in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Rutting or pumping of material
shall be undercut and backfilled as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.5
SUBGRADE GEOTEXTILE/FILTER FABRIC
Place synthetic fiber filter fabric as indicated directly on prepared
subgrade free of vegetation, stumps, rocks larger than 2 inches diameter
and other debris which may puncture or otherwise damage the fabric. Repair
damaged fabric by placing an additional layer of fabric to cover the
damaged area a minimum of 3 feet overlap in all directions. Overlap fabric
at joints a minimum of 3 feet. Obtain approval of filter fabric
installation before placing fill or backfill. Place fill or backfill on
fabric in the direction of overlaps and compact as specified herein.
Follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
3.6
FILLING AND BACKFILLING
Fill and backfill to contours, elevations, and dimensions indicated.
Compact each lift before placing overlaying lift.
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.6.1
1313775
Common Fill Placement
Provide for general site. Use satisfactory materials. Place in 6 inch
lifts. Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors with
mechanical hand tampers. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to
a satisfactory moisture content. Finish to a smooth surface by blading,
rolling with a smooth roller, or both.
3.6.2
Backfill and Fill Material Placement
Provide for paved and other roadway areas and under concrete slabs, except
where select material is provided. Place in 6 inch lifts. Do not place
over wet or frozen areas. Place backfill material adjacent to structures
as the structural elements are completed and accepted. Backfill against
concrete only when approved. Place and compact material to avoid loading
upon or against the structure.
3.6.3
Select Material Placement
Provide under porous fill of structures not pile supported. Place in 6 inch
lifts. Do not place over wet or frozen areas. Backfill adjacent to
structures shall be placed as structural elements are completed and
accepted. Backfill against concrete only when approved. Place and compact
material to avoid loading upon or against structure.
3.6.4
Backfill and Fill Material Placement Over Pipes and at Walls
Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been
approved, underground utilities systems have been inspected, tested and
approved, forms removed, and the excavation cleaned of trash and debris.
Backfill shall be brought to indicated finish grade. Heavy equipment for
spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to
foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to the height of
backfill above the top of footing; the area remaining shall be compacted in
layers not more than 4 inches in compacted thickness with power-driven hand
tampers suitable for the material being compacted. Backfill shall be
placed carefully around pipes or tanks to avoid damage to coatings,
wrappings, or tanks. Backfill shall not be placed against foundation walls
prior to 7 days after completion of the walls. As far as practicable,
backfill shall be brought up evenly on each side of the wall and sloped to
drain away from the wall.
3.6.5
Trench Backfilling
Backfill as rapidly as construction, testing, and acceptance of work
permits. Install utility backfill material around the utility line as
shown on the plans. Place and compact backfill under structures and paved
areas in 6 inch lifts to top of trench and in 6 inch lifts to one foot over
pipe outside structures and paved areas.
3.7
BORROW
Where satisfactory materials are not available in sufficient quantity from
required excavations, approved borrow materials shall be obtained as
specified herein.
3.8
BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape.
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 9
Bury tape
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
12 inches below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6
inches below top of subgrade.
3.9
COMPACTION
Determine in-place density of existing subgrade; if required density
exists, no compaction of existing subgrade will be required.
3.9.1
General Site
Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5
foot line of the paved area or structure to 90 percent of ASTM D 698.
3.9.2
Structures, Spread Footings, and Concrete Slabs
Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 698.
fill and backfill material to 95 percent of ASTM D 698.
3.9.3
Paved Areas
Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 698.
fill and backfill materials to 95 percent of ASTM D 698.
3.10
Compact
Compact
SPECIAL EARTHWORK REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBSURFACE DRAINS
Excavate to dimensions indicated. Place special granular filter material in
6 inch lifts and compact with mechanical, vibrating plate tampers or
rammers until no further consolidation can be achieved. Compact backfill
overlying the special granular filter material as specified for adjacent or
overlying work.
3.10.1
Granular Backfill
3.10.1.1
Perforated or Slotted Wall Pipe
Place granular material as pipe is laid and extend fit for a minimum of one
pipe diameter on each side of and 6 inches above the top of the pipe, or as
shown on the plans.
3.11
RIP-RAP CONSTRUCTION
Construct rip-rap material in accordance with the the requirements of the
VDOT Road & Bridge Specifications, latest edition, Sections 414, unless
otherwise noted on the plans.
3.12
3.12.1
FINISH OPERATIONS
Grading
Finish grades as indicated within one-tenth of one foot. Grade areas to
drain water away from structures. Maintain areas free of trash and
debris. For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by
Contractor's operations, grade as directed.
3.12.2
Topsoil and Seed
Scarify existing subgrade. Provide 4 inches of topsoil for newly graded
finish earth surfaces and areas disturbed by the Contractor. Topsoil shall
not be placed when the subgrade is frozen, excessively wet, extremely dry,
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
or in a condition otherwise detrimental to seeding, planting, or proper
grading. If there is insufficient on-site topsoil meeting specified
requirements for topsoil, provide topsoil required in excess of that
available.
Provide mulch, fertilizer, and water to establish an acceptable stand of
grass. All seeding and mulching shall meet the requirements of the
"Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook", latest edition, Standard
3.32 "Permanent Seeding" and Standard 3.35 "Mulching" and the approved
Erosion and Sediment Control Plan.
3.12.3
Protection of Surfaces
Protect newly backfilled, graded, and topsoiled areas from traffic,
erosion, and settlements that may occur. Repair or reestablish damaged
grades, elevations, or slopes.
3.13
DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
Remove from Government property surplus or other soil material not required
or suitable for filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots,
and timber.
3.14
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.14.1
Sampling
Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests.
3.14.2
Testing
Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used. Provide
additional tests for each source change.
3.14.2.1
Fill and Backfill Material Testing
Test fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for
conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits; ASTM D 1140 for material finer
than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D 4318 for liquid limit and for plastic limit;
ASTM D 698 for moisture density relations, as applicable.
3.14.2.2
Select Material Testing
Test select material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to
ASTM D 2487 gradation limits; ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No.
200 sieve; ASTM D 698 for moisture density relations, as applicable.
3.14.2.3
Density Tests
Test density in accordance with ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 6938. When
ASTM D 6938 density tests are used, verify density test results by
performing an ASTM D 1556 density test at a location already ASTM D 6938
tested as specified herein. Perform an ASTM D 1556 density test at the
start of the job, and for every 10 ASTM D 6938 density tests thereafter.
Test each lift at randomly selected locations every 2000 square feet of
existing grade in fills for structures and concrete slabs, and every 2500
square feet for other fill areas and every 2000 square feet of subgrade in
cut. Include density test results in daily report.
Bedding and backfill in trenches: One test per 50 linear feet in each lift.
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 11
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
-- End of Section --
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
Page 12
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 32 11 23
AGGREGATE AND/OR GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
(AASHTO)
AASHTO T 180
(2010) Standard Method of Test for
Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using
a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm
(18-in.) Drop
AASHTO T 224
(2010) Standard Method of Test for
Correction for Coarse Particles in the
Soil Compaction Test
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 1556
(2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D 1557
(2009) Standard Test Methods for
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000
ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D 2167
(2008) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D 2487
(2010) Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D 6938
(2010) Standard Test Method for In-Place
Density and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
1.2
DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply.
1.2.1
Aggregate Course
Aggregate course is well graded, durable aggregate uniformly moistened and
mechanically stabilized by compaction.
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.2.2
1313775
Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is
expressed as a percentage of the maximum laboratory dry density obtained by
the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 abbreviated as a percent of
laboratory maximum dry density. Since ASTM D 1557 applies only to soils
that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the
3/4 inch sieve, the degree of compaction for material having more than 30
percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve are
expressed as a percentage of the laboratory maximum dry density in
accordance with AASHTO T 180 Method D and corrected with AASHTO T 224.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
All plant, equipment and tools used in the performance of the work will be
subject to approval before the work is started and shall be maintained in
satisfactory working condition at all times. Submit a list of proposed
equipment, including descriptive data. Provide adequate equipment having
the capability of producing the required compaction, meeting grade
controls, thickness control, and smoothness requirements as set forth
herein.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-07 Certificates
Aggregate Material Certification; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Density Tests; G
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor and performed by a testing
laboratory approved in accordance with Section 01 45 00.10 20 QUALITY
CONTROL. Work requiring testing will not be permitted until the testing
laboratory has been inspected and approved. Test the materials to
establish compliance with the specified requirements; perform testing at
the specified frequency. The Contracting Officer may specify the time and
location of the tests. Furnish copies of test results to the Contracting
Officer within 24 hours of completion of the tests.
1.5.1
Tests
Perform the following tests in conformance with the applicable standards
listed.
1.5.1.1
Moisture-Density Determinations
Determine the laboratory maximum dry density and optimum moisture content
in accordance with ASTM D 1557.
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.5.1.2
1313775
Field Density Tests
Measure field density in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167 or
ASTM D 6938.
a.
Submit copies of field test results within 24 hours after the tests are
performed.
1.5.2
Testing Frequency
1.5.2.1
In Place Tests
Perform each of the following tests on samples taken from the placed and
compacted aggregate. Samples shall be taken and tested at the rates
indicated.
a.
Perform density tests on every lift of material placed and at a
frequency of one set of tests for every 250 square yards, or portion
thereof, of completed area.
b.
Measure the total thickness of the base course at intervals, in such a
manner as to ensure one measurement for each 500 square yards of base
course. Measurements shall be made in 3 inch diameter test holes
penetrating the base course.
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Perform construction when the atmospheric temperature is above 35 degrees F.
When the temperature falls below 35 degrees F, protect all completed areas
by approved methods against detrimental effects of freezing. Correct
completed areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions
to meet specified requirements.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
AGGREGATES
Provide aggrgates consisting of clean, sound, durable particles of crushed
stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, angular sand, or other approved
material.
2.1.1
Aggregate Base Course
Provide coarse aggregates with angular particles of uniform density. When
the coarse aggregate is supplied from more than one source, aggregate from
each source shall meet the specified requirements and shall be stockpiled
separately.
Aggregate shall meet the requirements of the VDOT Road & Bridge
Specifications, latest edition, Section 208 for "Subbase and Aggregate Base
Material," size 21A or 21B. Submit Aggregate Material Certification
reflecting compliance with the required specifications.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
When the Aggregate Course is constructed in more than one layer, clean the
previously constructed layer of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
power sweepers or power brooms, except that hand brooms may be used in
areas where power cleaning is not practicable. Provide adequate drainage
during the entire period of construction to prevent water from collecting
or standing on the working area. Provide line and grade stakes as
necessary for control. Grade stakes shall be in lines parallel to the
centerline of the area under construction and suitably spaced for string
lining.
3.2
PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE
Prior to constructing the base course(s), the underlying course or subgrade
shall be cleaned of all foreign substances. At the time of construction of
the base course(s), the underlying course shall contain no frozen
material. The surface of the underlying course or subgrade shall meet
specified compaction and surface tolerances. The underlying course shall
conform to Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL. Ruts or soft
yielding spots in the underlying courses, areas having inadequate
compaction, and deviations of the surface from the requirements set forth
herein shall be corrected by loosening and removing soft or unsatisfactory
material and by adding approved material, reshaping to line and grade, and
recompacting to specified density requirements. For cohesionless
underlying courses containing sands or gravels, as defined in ASTM D 2487,
the surface shall be stabilized prior to placement of the base course(s).
The finished underlying course shall not be disturbed by traffic or other
operations and shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition until the
base course is placed.
3.3
3.3.1
INSTALLATION
Placing
Place the mixed material on the prepared subgrade or subbase in layers of
uniform thickness with an approved spreader. When a compacted layer 6
inches or less in thickness is required, place the material in a single
layer. When a compacted layer in excess of 6 inches is required, place the
material in layers of equal thickness. No layer shall be thicker than 6
inches or thinner than 3 inches when compacted. The layers shall be so
placed that when compacted they will be true to the grades or levels
required with the least possible surface disturbance. Where the base
course is placed in more than one layer, the previously constructed layers
shall be cleaned of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power
sweepers, power brooms, or hand brooms, as directed. Such adjustments in
placing procedures or equipment shall be made as may be directed to obtain
true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to adjust the water
content, and to insure an acceptable base course.
3.3.2
Grade Control
The finished and completed base course shall conform to the lines, grades,
and cross sections shown. Underlying material(s) shall be excavated and
prepared at sufficient depth for the required base course thickness so that
the finished base course and the subsequent surface course will meet the
designated grades.
3.3.3
Compaction
Compact each layer of the base course, as specified, with approved
compaction equipment. Maintain water content during the compaction
procedure to within plus or minus 2 percent of the optimum water content
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
determined from laboratory tests as specified in this Section. Begin
rolling at the outside edge of the surface and proceed to the center,
overlapping on successive trips at least one-half the width of the roller.
Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly different lengths. Speed
of the roller shall be such that displacement of the aggregate does not
occur. In all places not accessible to the rollers, the mixture shall be
compacted with hand-operated power tampers. Continue compaction until each
layer has a degree of compaction that is at least 100 percent of laboratory
maximum density through the full depth of the layer. Make such adjustments
in compacting or finishing procedures as may be directed to obtain true
grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to reduce or increase
water content, and to ensure a satisfactory base course. Any materials
that are found to be unsatisfactory shall be removed and replaced with
satisfactory material or reworked, as directed, to meet the requirements of
this specification.
3.3.4
Thickness
Construct the compacted thickness of the base course as indicated. No
individual layer shall be thicker than 6 inches nor be thinner than 3 inches
in compacted thickness. The total compacted thickness of the base
course(s) shall be within 1/2 inch of the thickness indicated. Where the
measured thickness is more than 1/2 inch deficient, correct such areas by
scarifying, adding new material of proper gradation, reblading, and
recompacting as directed. Where the measured thickness is more than 1/2
inch thicker than indicated, the course shall be considered as conforming
to the specified thickness requirements. Average job thickness shall be
the average of all thickness measurements taken for the job, but shall be
within 1/4 inch of the thickness indicated. The total thickness of the
base course shall be measured at intervals in such a manner as to ensure
one measurement for each 500 square yards of base course. Measurements
shall be made in 3 inch diameter test holes penetrating the base course.
3.3.5
Finishing
The surface of the top layer of base course shall be finished after final
compaction by cutting any overbuild to grade and rolling with a
steel-wheeled roller. Thin layers of material shall not be added to the
top layer of base course to meet grade. If the elevation of the top layer
of base course is 1/2 inch or more below grade, then the top layer should
be scarified to a depth of at least 3 inches and new material shall be
blended in and compacted to bring to grade. Adjustments to rolling and
finishing procedures shall be made as directed to minimize segregation and
degradation, obtain grades, maintain moisture content, and insure an
acceptable base course. Should the surface become rough, corrugated,
uneven in texture, or traffic marked prior to completion, the
unsatisfactory portion shall be scarified, reworked and recompacted or it
shall be replaced as directed.
3.3.6
Smoothness
The surface of the top layer shall show no deviations in excess of 3/8 inch
when tested with a 12 foot straightedge. Take measurements in successive
positions parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved. Measurements
shall also be taken perpendicular to the centerline at 50 foot intervals.
Deviations exceeding this amount shall be corrected by removing material
and replacing with new material, or by reworking existing material and
compacting it to meet these specifications.
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.4
1313775
MAINTENANCE
Maintain the base course in a satisfactory condition until the full
pavement section is completed and accepted. Maintenance shall include
immediate repairs to any defects and shall be repeated as often as
necessary to keep the area intact. Any base course that is not paved over
prior to the onset of winter, shall be retested to verify that it still
complies with the requirements of this specification. Any area of base
course that is damaged shall be reworked or replaced as necessary to comply
with this specification.
3.5
DISPOSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS
Any unsuitable materials that must be removed shall be disposed of outside
the limits of Government-controlled land. No additional payments will be
made for materials that must be replaced.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 32 12 17
HOT MIX BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT
04/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D1188
(2007; E 2010) Bulk Specific Gravity and
Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
Using Paraffin-Coated Specimens
ASTM D1559
(1989) Resistance to Plastic Flow of
Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall
Apparatus
ASTM D2726
(2011) Bulk Specific Gravity and Density
of Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures
ASTM D995
(1995b; R 2002) Mixing Plants for
Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving
Mixtures
ASTM D3666
(2011) Standard Specification for Minimum
Requirements for Agencies Testing and
Inspecting Road and Paving Materials
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-05 Design Data; G
MIX DESIGN; G
1.3
1.3.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Safety Requirements
Provide adequate and safe stairways with handrails to the mixer platform,
and safe and protected ladders or other means for accessibility to plant
operations. Guard equipment and exposed steam or other high temperature
lines or cover with a suitable type of insulation.
1.3.2
Required Data
MIX DESIGN shall show the following:
SECTION 32 12 17
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
a.
Source and proportions, percent by weight, of each ingredient of the
mixture;
b.
Correct gradation, the percentages passing each size sieve listed in
the specifications for the mixture to be used, for the aggregate and
mineral filler from each separate source and from each different size
to be used in the mixture and for the composite mixture;
c.
Amount of material passing the No. 200 sieve determined by dry sieving;
d.
Number of blows of hammer compaction per side of molded specimen;
e.
Temperature viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement;
f.
Stability, flow, percent voids in mineral aggregate, percent air voids,
unit weight;
g.
Asphalt absorption by the aggregate;
h.
Effective asphalt content as percent by weight of total mix;
i.
Temperature of the mixture immediately upon completion of mixing;
j.
Asphalt performance grade viscosity grade; and
k.
Curves for the binder and wearing courses.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage and store with a minimum
of handling. Store aggregates in such a manner as to prevent segregation,
contamination, or intermixing of the different aggregate sizes.
1.5
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Place bituminous mixture only during dry weather and on dry surfaces. Place
courses only when the surface temperature of the underlying course is
greater than 45 degrees F for course thicknesses greater than one inch and
55 degrees F for course thicknesses one inch or less.
1.6
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
Calibrated equipment, such as scales, batching equipment, spreaders and
similar equipment, shall have been recalibrated by a calibration laboratory
approved by the Contracting Officer within 12 months of commencing work.
1.6.1
Mixing Plant
Design, coordinate, and operate the mixing plant to produce a mixture
within the job-mix formula tolerances and to meet the requirements of
ASTM D995, including additional plant requirements specified herein. The
plant shall be a batch type, continuous mix type or drum-dryer mixer type,
and shall have sufficient capacity to handle the new bituminous
construction. Minimum plant capacity shall be 100 tons per hour. The
mixing plant and equipment shall remain accessible at all times for
inspecting operation, verifying weights, proportions and character of
materials, and checking mixture temperatures. The plant and plant site
shall meet the requirements of Section 01 57 19.00 20 TEMPORARY
SECTION 32 12 17
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
1.6.2
Paving Equipment
1.6.2.1
Spreading Equipment
Self-propelled electronically controlled type, unless other equipment is
authorized by the Contracting Officer. Equip spreading equipment of the
self-propelled electronically controlled type with hoppers, tamping or
vibrating devices, distributing screws, electronically adjustable screeds,
and equalizing devices. Capable of spreading hot bituminous mixtures
without tearing, shoving, or gouging and to produce a finished surface of
specified grade and smoothness. Operate spreaders, when laying mixture, at
variable speeds between 5 and 45 feet per minute. Design spreader with a
quick and efficient steering device; a forward and reverse traveling speed;
and automatic devices to adjust to grade and confine the edges of the
mixture to true lines. The use of a spreader that leaves indented areas or
other objectionable irregularities in the fresh laid mix during operations
is prohibited.
1.6.2.2
Rolling Equipment
Self-propelled pneumatic-tired rollers supplemented by three-wheel and
tandem type steel wheel rollers. The number, type and weight of rollers
shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the required density without
detrimentally affecting the compacted material. Rollers shall be suitable
for rolling hot-mix bituminous pavements and capable of reversing without
backlash. Pneumatic-tired rollers shall be capable of being operated both
forward and backward without turning on the mat, and without loosening the
surface being rolled. Equip rollers with suitable devices and apparatus to
keep the rolling surfaces wet and prevent adherence of bituminous mixture.
Vibratory rollers especially designed for bituminous concrete compaction
may be used provided rollers do not impair stability of pavement structure
and underlying layers. Repair depressions in pavement surfaces resulting
from use of vibratory rollers. Rollers shall be self-propelled, single or
dual vibrating drums, and steel drive wheels, as applicable; equipped with
variable amplitude and separate controls for energy and propulsion.
1.6.2.3
Hand Tampers
Minimum weight of 25 pounds with a tamping face of not more than 50 square
inches.
1.6.2.4
Mechanical Hand Tampers
Commercial type, operated by pneumatic pressure or by internal combustion.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MIX DESIGN
The following bituminous pavement mixes shall be in accordance with the
VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, latest edition:
Surface Course
2.2
SM-9.5A
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Employ a commercial laboratory approved by the Contracting Officer to
SECTION 32 12 17
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
perform testing. The laboratory used to develop the JMF and the laboratory
used to perform all sampling and testing shall meet the requirements of
ASTM D3666. A certification signed by the manager of the laboratory
stating that it meets these requirements or clearly listing all
deficiencies shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer prior to the
start of construction.
PART 3
3.1
3.1.1
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
Transportation of Bituminous Mixtures
Transport bituminous material from the mixing plant to the paving site in
trucks having tight, clean, smooth beds that have been coated with a
minimum amount of concentrated solution of hydrated lime and water or other
approved coating to prevent adhesion of the mixture to the truck. Petroleum
products will not be permitted for coating truck. If air temperature is
less than 60 degrees F or if haul time is greater than 30 minutes, cover
each load with canvas or other approved material of ample size to protect
the mixture from the loss of heat. Make deliveries so that the spreading
and rolling of all the mixture prepared for one day's run can be completed
during daylight, unless adequate approved artificial lighting is provided.
Deliver mixture to area to be paved so that the temperature at the time of
dumping into the spreader is within the range specified herein. Reject
loads that are below minimum temperature, that have crusts of cold
unworkable material, or that have been wet excessively by rain. Hauling
over freshly laid material is prohibited.
3.1.2
Surface Preparation of Underlying Course
Prior to the laying of the asphalt concrete, clean underlying course of
foreign or objectionable matter with power blowers or power brooms,
supplemented by hand brooms and other cleaning methods where necessary.
During the placement of multiple lifts of bituminous concrete, each
succeeding lift of bituminous concrete shall have its underlying lift
cleaned and provided with a bituminous tack coat if the time period between
the placement of each lift of bituminous concrete exceeds 14 days, or the
underlying bituminous concrete has become dirty. Remove grass and other
vegetative growth from existing cracks and surfaces.
3.2
3.2.1
PLACEMENT
Machine Spreading
The range of temperatures of the mixtures at the time of spreading shall be
between 250 degrees F and 300 degrees F. Bituminous concrete having
temperatures less than minimum spreading temperature when dumped into the
spreader will be rejected. Adjust spreader and regulate speed so that the
surface of the course is smooth and continuous without tears and pulling,
and of such depth that, when compacted, the surface conforms with the cross
section, grade, and contour indicated. Unless otherwise directed, begin
the placing along the centerline of areas to be paved on a crowned section
or on the high side of areas with a one-way slope. Place mixture in
consecutive adjacent strips having a minimum width of 10 feet, except where
the edge lanes require strips less than 10 feet to complete the area.
Construct longitudinal joints and edges to true line markings. Establish
lines parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved, and place string
lines coinciding with the established lines for the spreading machine to
SECTION 32 12 17
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
follow. Provide the number and location of the lines needed to accomplish
proper grade control. When specified grade and smoothness requirements can
be met for initial lane construction by use of an approved long ski-type
device of not less than 30 feet in length and for subsequent lane
construction by use of a short ski or shoe, in-place string lines for grade
control may be omitted. Place mixture as nearly continuous as possible and
adjust the speed of placing as needed to permit proper rolling.
3.2.2
Shoveling, Raking, and Tamping After Machine-Spreading
Shovelers and rakers shall follow the spreading machine. Add or remove hot
mixture and rake the mixture as required to obtain a course that when
completed will conform to requirements specified herein. Broadcasting or
fanning of mixture over areas being compacted is prohibited. When
segregation occurs in the mixture during placing, suspend spreading
operation until the cause is determined and corrected. Correct
irregularities in alignment left by the spreader by trimming directly
behind the machine. Immediately after trimming, compact edges of the
course by tamping laterally with a metal lute or by other approved methods.
Distortion of the course during tamping is prohibited.
3.2.3
Hand-Spreading in Lieu of Machine-Spreading
In areas where the use of machine spreading is impractical, spread mixture
by hand. The range of temperatures of the mixtures when dumped onto the
area to be paved shall be between 250 and 300 degrees F. Mixtures having
temperatures less than minimum spreading temperature when dumped onto the
area to be paved will be rejected. Spread hot mixture with rakes in a
uniformly loose layer of a thickness that, when compacted, will conform to
the required grade, thickness, and smoothness. During hand spreading,
place each shovelful of mixture by turning the shovel over in a manner that
will prevent segregation. Do not place mixture by throwing or broadcasting
from a shovel. Do not dump loads any faster than can be properly handled
by the shovelers and rakers.
3.3
COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
Compact mixture by rolling. Begin rolling as soon as placement of mixture
will bear rollers. Delays in rolling freshly spread mixture shall not be
permitted. Start rolling longitudinally at the extreme sides of the lanes
and proceed toward center of pavement, or toward high side of pavement with
a one-way slope. Operate rollers so that each trip overlaps the previous
adjacent strip by at least one foot. Alternate trips of the roller shall
be of slightly different lengths. Conduct tests for conformity with the
specified crown, grade and smoothness immediately after initial rolling.
Before continuing rolling, correct variations by removing or adding
materials as necessary. If required, subject course to diagonal rolling
with the steel wheeled roller crossing the lines of the previous rolling
while mixture is hot and in a compactible condition. Speed of the rollers
shall be slow enough to avoid displacement of hot mixture. Correct
displacement of mixture immediately by use of rakes and fresh mixture, or
remove and replace mixture as directed. Continue rolling until roller
marks are eliminated and course has a density of at least 96 percent but
not more than 100 percent of that attained in a laboratory specimen of the
same mixture prepared in accordance with ASTM D1559. During rolling,
moisten wheels of the rollers enough to prevent adhesion of mixture to
wheels, but excessive water is prohibited. Operation of rollers shall be
by competent and experienced operators. Provide sufficient rollers for
each spreading machine in operation on the job and to handle plant output.
SECTION 32 12 17
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
In places not accessible to the rollers, compact mixture thoroughly with
hot hand tampers. Skin patching of an area after compaction is
prohibited. Remove mixture that becomes mixed with foreign materials or is
defective and replace with fresh mixture compacted to the density specified
herein. Roller shall pass over unprotected edge of the course only when
laying of course is to be discontinued for such length of time as to permit
mixture to become cold.
3.4
JOINTS
Joints shall present the same texture and smoothness as other portions of
the course, except permissible density at the joint may be up to 2 percent
less than the specified course density. Carefully make joints between old
and new pavement or within new pavements in a manner to ensure a thorough
and continuous bond between old and new sections of the course. Vertical
contact surfaces of previously constructed sections that are coated with
dust, sand, or other objectionable material shall be painted with a thin
uniform coat of emulsion or other approved bituminous material just before
placing fresh mixture.
3.4.1
Transverse
Roller shall pass over unprotected end of freshly laid mixture only when
laying of course is to be discontinued. Except when an approved bulkhead
is used, cut back the edge of previously laid course to expose an even,
vertical surface for the full thickness of the course. When required, rake
fresh mixture against joints, thoroughly tamp with hot tampers, smooth with
hot smoothers, and roll. Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be
offset a minimum of 2 feet.
3.4.2
Longitudinal Joints
Space 6 inches apart. Do not allow joints to coincide with joints of
existing pavement or previously placed courses. Spreader screed shall
overlap previously placed lanes 2 to 3 inches and be of such height to
permit compaction to produce a smooth dense joint. With a lute, push back
mixture placed on the surface of previous lanes to the joint edge. Do not
scatter mix. Remove and waste excess material. When edges of longitudinal
joints are irregular, honeycombed, or poorly compacted, cut back
unsatisfactory sections of joint and expose an even vertical surface for
the full thickness of the course. When required, rake fresh mixture
against joint, thoroughly tamp with hot tampers, smooth with hot smoothers,
and roll while hot.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.5.1
Testing
3.5.1.1
Pavement Courses
Perform the following tests:
a.
Density: For each 1000 tons of bituminous mixture placed, determine
the representative laboratory density by averaging the density of four
laboratory specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM D1559. Samples
for laboratory specimens shall be taken from trucks delivering mixture
to the site; record in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer the
project areas represented by the laboratory densities. From each
representative area recorded, determine field density of pavement by
SECTION 32 12 17
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
averaging densities of 4 inch diameter cores obtained from wearing
courses; take one core for each 2000 square yards or fraction thereof
of course placed. Determine density of laboratory prepared specimens
and cored samples in accordance with ASTM D1188 or ASTM D2726, as
applicable. Separate pavement layers by sawing or other approved means.
Maximum allowable deficiency at any point, excluding joints, shall not
be more than 2 percent less than the specified density for any course.
The average density of each course, excluding joints, shall be not less
than the specified density. Joint densities shall not be more than 2
percent less than specified course densities and are not included when
calculating average course densities. When the deficiency exceeds the
specified tolerances, correct each such representative area or areas by
removing the deficient pavement and replacing with new pavement.
b.
Thickness: Determine thickness of binder and wearing courses from
samples taken for the field density test. The maximum allowable
deficiency at any point shall not be more than 1/4 inch less than the
thickness for the indicated course. Average thickness of course or of
combined courses shall be not less than the indicated thickness. Where
a deficiency exceeds the specified tolerances, correct each such
representative area or areas by removing the deficient pavement and
replacing with new pavement.
c.
Smoothness: Straightedge test the compacted surface of the wearing
course as work progresses. Apply straightedge parallel with and at
right angles to the centerline after final rolling. Unevenness of the
wearing course shall not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Correct
each portion of the pavement showing irregularities greater than that
specified.
d.
Finished Grades: Finish grades of each course placed shall not vary
from the finish elevations, profiles, and cross sections indicated by
more than 1/2 inch. Finished surface of the final wearing course will
be tested by running lines of levels at intervals of 25 feet
longitudinally and transversely to determine elevations of completed
pavement. Within 45 days after completion of final placement, perform
a level survey at the specified grid spacing and plot the results on a
plan drawn to the same scale as the drawings. Elevations not in
conformance with the specified tolerance shall be noted on the plan in
an approved manner. The survey shall be performed by a registered land
surveyor. The Contracting Officer will inform the Contractor in writing
of paved areas that fail to meet the final grades indicated within the
specified tolerances. Correct deficient paved areas by removing
existing work and replacing with new materials that meet the
specifications. Skin patching for correcting low areas is prohibited.
e.
Finish Surface Texture of Wearing Course: Visually check final surface
texture for uniformity and reasonable compactness and tightness. Final
wearing course with a surface texture having undesirable irregularities
such as segregation, cavities, pulls or tears, checking, excessive
exposure of coarse aggregates, sand streaks, indentations, ripples, or
lack of uniformity shall be removed and replaced with new materials.
3.6
PROTECTION
Do not permit vehicular traffic, including heavy equipment, on pavement
until surface temperature has cooled to at least 120 degrees F. Measure
surface temperature by approved surface thermometers or other satisfactory
methods.
SECTION 32 12 17
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
-- End of Section --
SECTION 32 12 17
Page 8
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 32 16 13
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS
04/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 182
(2005; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and
Cotton Mats
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A185/A185M
(2007) Standard Specification for Steel
Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete
ASTM A615/A615M
(2009b) Standard Specification for
Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C 143/C 143M
(2010) Standard Test Method for Slump of
Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C 171
(2007) Standard Specification for Sheet
Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C 173/C 173M
(2010b) Standard Test Method for Air
Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
ASTM C 309
(2007) Standard Specification for Liquid
Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
ASTM C 31/C 31M
(2010) Standard Practice for Making and
Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C 920
(2011) Standard Specification for
Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C172/C172M
(2010) Standard Practice for Sampling
Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C231/C231M
(2010) Standard Test Method for Air
Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
ASTM D 1751
(2004; R 2008) Standard Specification for
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types)
ASTM D 1752
(2004a; R 2008) Standard Specification for
Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled
PVC Expansion
ASTM D5893/D5893M
(2010) Cold Applied, Single Component,
Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant
for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
1.2
1.2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
General Requirements
Provide plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work subject to
approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times.
The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product,
meeting grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as
specified. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces
unsatisfactory results. The Contracting Officer shall have access at all
times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance
with specifications.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Concrete and admixtures; G
Copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in the
construction.
SD-05 Design Data
Concrete Design Mix; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control
Copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the
test.
1.4
1.4.1
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Placing During Cold Weather
Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 40 degrees F and is
falling, or is already below that point. Placement may begin when the air
temperature reaches 35 degrees F and is rising, or is already above 40
degrees F. Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
the specified curing period. If necessary to place concrete when the
temperature of the air, aggregates, or water is below 35 degrees F,
placement and protection shall be approved in writing. Approval will be
contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions. The
underlying material shall be prepared and protected so that it is entirely
free of frost when the concrete is deposited. Mixing water and aggregates
shall be heated as necessary to result in the temperature of the in-place
concrete being between 50 and 85 degrees F. Methods and equipment for
heating shall be approved. The aggregates shall be free of ice, snow, and
frozen lumps before entering the mixer. Covering and other means shall be
provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50
degrees F for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature
above freezing for the remainder of the curing period.
1.4.2
Placing During Warm Weather
The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed 85 degrees F
except where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water and/or
aggregates shall be cooled, if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory
placing temperature. The placing temperature shall not exceed 95 degrees F
at any time.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
CONCRETE
Provide concrete design mix conforming to the applicable requirements of
the Virginia Department of Transportation Road and Bridge Specifications,
latest edition, Class A4, unless noted otherwise. Maximum size of
aggregate shall be 1-1/2 inches.
2.1.1
Air Content
Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent,
based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer.
2.1.2
Slump
The concrete slump shall be 2 inches plus or minus 1 inch where determined
in accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M.
2.1.3
Reinforcement Steel
Reinforcement bars shall conform to ASTM A615/A615M.
reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A185/A185M.
2.2
2.2.1
Wire mesh
CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
Impervious Sheet Materials
Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C 171, type optional,
except that polyethylene film, if used, shall be white opaque.
2.2.2
Burlap
Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.2.3
1313775
White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309,
Type 2.
2.3
2.3.1
JOINT FILLER STRIPS
Contraction Joint Filler for Curb and Gutter
Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter shall consist of hard-pressed
fiberboard.
2.3.2
Expansion Joint Filler, Premolded
Expansion joint filler, premolded, shall conform to ASTM D 1751 or
ASTM D 1752, 1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
JOINT SEALANTS
Joint sealant, cold-applied shall conform to ASTM C 920 or ASTM D5893/D5893M.
2.5
FORM WORK
Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will
conform accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and
within the tolerances specified. Forms shall be of wood or steel,
straight, of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and
consolidating concrete. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 2 inches
nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits
or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet.
Radius bends may be formed with 3/4 inch boards, laminated to the required
thickness. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top
surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two
intermediate points. Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and
self-aligning. Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius
forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Steel forms shall have
a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per
form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and
pointed tips designed for use with steel forms.
2.5.1
Sidewalk Forms
Sidewalk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the finished
sidewalk.
2.5.2
Curb and Gutter Forms
Curb and gutter outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth
of the curb or gutter. The inside form of curb shall have batter as
indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside
form. Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns, except that benders
or thin plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of
10 feet or more, where grade changes occur in the return, or where the
central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees
cannot be used. Back forms for curb returns may be made of 1-1/2 inch
benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated together. In lieu of
inside forms for curbs, a curb "mule" may be used for forming and finishing
this surface, provided the results are approved.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
PART 3
3.1
1313775
EXECUTION
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
The subgrade shall be constructed to the specified grade and cross section
prior to concrete placement. Subgrade shall be placed and compacted in
conformance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3.1.1
Sidewalk Subgrade
The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template
extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms.
3.1.2
Curb and Gutter Subgrade
The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section by means of a
template extending the full width of the curb and gutter. The subgrade
shall be of materials equal in bearing quality to the subgrade under the
adjacent pavement.
3.1.3
Maintenance of Subgrade
The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in
conformity with the required section and established grade until the
concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when
concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be prepared and protected to
produce a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited.
3.2
FORM SETTING
Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions. Hold forms
rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not
to exceed 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have
additional stakes and braces, as required. Clamps, spreaders, and braces
shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms. Forms shall
be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools shall not be
used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete found
defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily
repaired. Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before
concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with
water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing
temperatures, oiling is mandatory.
3.2.1
Sidewalks
Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an
allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 foot long section. After forms
are set, grade and alignment shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge.
Forms shall have a transverse slope as indicated with the low side adjacent
to the roadway. Side forms shall not be removed for 12 hours after
finishing has been completed.
3.2.2
Curbs and Gutters
The forms of the front of the curb shall be removed not less than 2 hours
nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms back of
curb shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have been
finished, as specified for concrete finishing. Gutter forms shall not be
removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
direction.
3.3
3.3.1
SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
Formed Sidewalks
Place concrete in the forms in one layer. When consolidated and finished,
the sidewalks shall be of the thickness indicated. After concrete has been
placed in the forms, a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to
bring the surface to proper section to be compacted. The concrete shall be
consolidated by tamping and spading or with an approved vibrator, and the
surface shall be finished to grade with a strike off.
3.3.2
Concrete Finishing
After straightedging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and
just before the concrete hardens, finish the surface with a wood or
magnesium float or darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy
texture free of waves, irregularities, or tool marks. A scored surface
shall be produced by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction
transverse to that of the traffic, followed by edging.
3.3.3
Edge and Joint Finishing
All slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be finished with an
edger having a radius of 1/8 inch. Transverse joint shall be edged before
brooming, and the brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by the
surface face of the edger. Corners and edges which have crumbled and areas
which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned and
filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then
finished.
3.3.4
Surface and Thickness Tolerances
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 5/16 inch from the testing edge
of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness
will be up to 1/4 inch.
3.4
3.4.1
CURB AND GUTTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
Formed Curb and Gutter
Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift.
Consolidation shall be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators.
Curve shaped gutters shall be finished with a standard curb "mule".
3.4.2
Curb and Gutter Finishing
Approved slipformed curb and gutter machines may be used in lieu of hand
placement.
3.4.3
Concrete Finishing
Exposed surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float
until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. Floated surfaces
shall then be brushed with a fine-hair brush with longitudinal strokes.
The edges of the gutter and top of the curb shall be rounded with an edging
tool to a radius of 1/2 inch. Immediately after removing the front curb
form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been
removed. The front curb surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the
same manner as the gutter and curb top. The top surface of gutter and
entrance shall be finished to grade with a wood float.
3.4.4
Joint Finishing
Curb edges at formed joints shall be finished as indicated.
3.4.5
Surface and Thickness Tolerances
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the testing edge
of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness
will be up to 1/4 inch.
3.5
SIDEWALK JOINTS
Sidewalk joints shall be constructed to divide the surface into rectangular
areas. Transverse contraction joints shall be spaced at a distance equal
to the sidewalk width or 5 feet on centers, whichever is less, and shall be
continuous across the slab. Longitudinal contraction joints shall be
constructed along the centerline of all sidewalks 10 feet or more in
width. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at sidewalk returns
and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. Where the sidewalk is
not in contact with the curb, transverse expansion joints shall be
installed as indicated. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures
and features which project through or into the sidewalk pavement, using
joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated. Expansion joints
are not required between sidewalks and curb that abut the sidewalk
longitudinally.
3.5.1
Sidewalk Contraction Joints
The contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete by cutting a
groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of
the sidewalk slab thickness, using a jointer to cut the groove, or by
sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw, unless
otherwise approved. Sawed joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove
in the concrete with a 1/8 inch blade to the depth indicated. An ample
supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete
placement is started, and at least one standby sawing unit in good working
order shall be available at the jobsite at all times during the sawing
operations.
3.5.2
Sidewalk Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be formed with 1/2 inch joint filler strips. Joint
filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the
sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D 1752
or building paper. Joint filler shall be held in place with steel pins or
other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and
finishing. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, joint
edges shall be rounded with an edging tool having a radius of 1/8 inch, and
concrete over the joint filler shall be removed. At the end of the curing
period, expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with cold-applied
joint sealant. Joint sealant shall be gray or stone in color. The joint
opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed.
Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete.
Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of
joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed surfaces of the
concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned.
3.5.3
Reinforcement Steel Placement
Reinforcement steel shall be accurately and securely fastened in place with
suitable supports and ties before the concrete is placed.
3.6
CURB AND GUTTER JOINTS
Curb and gutter joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of
curb and gutter.
3.6.1
Contraction Joints
Contraction joints shall be constructed directly opposite contraction
joints in abutting portland cement concrete pavements and spaced so that
monolithic sections between curb returns will not be less than 5 feet nor
greater than 15 feet in length.
a. Contraction joints (except for slip forming) shall be constructed
by means of 1/8 inch thick separators and of a section conforming to
the cross section of the curb and gutter. Separators shall be removed
as soon as practicable after concrete has set sufficiently to preserve
the width and shape of the joint and prior to finishing.
b. When slip forming is used, the contraction joints shall be cut in
the top portion of the gutter/curb hardened concrete in a continuous
cut across the curb and gutter, using a power-driven saw. The depth of
cut shall be at least one-fourth of the gutter/curb depth and 1/8 inch
in width.
3.6.2
Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed expansion joint
filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of curb and gutter.
Expansion joints shall be provided in curb and gutter directly opposite
expansion joints of abutting portland cement concrete pavement, and shall
be of the same type and thickness as joints in the pavement. Where curb
and gutter do not abut portland cement concrete pavement, expansion joints
at least 1/2 inch in width shall be provided at intervals not less than 30
feet nor greater than 120 feet. Expansion joints shall be provided in
nonreinforced concrete gutter at locations indicated. Expansion joints
shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon
thereafter as weather conditions permit. Expansion joints and the top 1
inch depth of curb and gutter contraction-joints shall be sealed with joint
sealant. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing
material is placed. Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed
surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and
atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the
time of application of joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed
surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces
cleaned.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.7
1313775
CURING AND PROTECTION
3.7.1
General Requirements
Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for
at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation. Protect
unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water. All equipment needed for
adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready
for use before actual concrete placement begins. Protection shall be
provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to
temperature changes during the curing period.
3.7.1.1
Mat Method
The entire exposed surface shall be covered with 2 or more layers of
burlap. Mats shall overlap each other at least 6 inches. The mat shall be
thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and shall
be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with
concrete for not less than 7 days.
3.7.1.2
Impervious Sheeting Method
The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and
then covered with impervious sheeting material. Sheets shall be laid
directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and
overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing
medium shall not be less than 18-inches wider than the concrete surface to
be cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or a
bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets. Sheets
shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged
during curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to
be cured for not less than 7 days.
3.7.1.3
Membrane Curing Method
A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound shall be
applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after
finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface.
Formed surfaces shall be coated immediately after the forms are removed and
in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms. Concrete shall
not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane. If any
drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete shall be moistened with a
fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the free
water disappears. Curing compound shall be applied in two coats by
hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square
feet/gallon for the total of both coats. The second coat shall be applied
in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of
application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform,
continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be
free from pinholes or other imperfections. If pinholes, abrasion, or other
discontinuities exist, an additional coat shall be applied to the affected
areas within 30 minutes. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy
rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be
resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above. Areas where
the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within
the curing period shall be resprayed. Necessary precautions shall be taken
to insure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints, and that no
curing compound enters the joints. The top of the joint opening and the
joint groove at exposed edges shall be tightly sealed before the concrete
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound. The method
used for sealing the joint groove shall prevent loss of moisture from the
joint during the entire specified curing period. Approved standby
facilities for curing concrete pavement shall be provided at a location
accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the
spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct
application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time. Concrete
surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be
adequately protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and
vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and
surface tests, and from any other possible damage to the continuity of the
membrane.
3.7.2
Backfilling
After curing, debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete
shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding
area in accordance with lines and grades indicated.
3.7.3
Protection
Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accepted. Repair
damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction.
Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire
length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion
will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as
directed.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.8.1
General Requirements
Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified
requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing. Based upon
the results of these inspections and tests, take the action and submit
reports as required below, and any additional tests to insure that the
requirements of these specifications are met.
3.8.2
3.8.2.1
Concrete Testing
Strength Testing
Provide molded concrete specimens for strength tests. Samples of concrete
placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once
for every 250 cubic yards of concrete. The samples for strength tests
shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M. Cylinders for
acceptance shall be molded in conformance with ASTM C 31/C 31M by an
approved testing laboratory. Each strength test result shall be the
average of 2 test cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28
days, unless otherwise specified or approved. Concrete specified on the
basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the
averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or
exceed the specified strength, and no individual strength test result falls
below the specified strength by more than 500 psi.
3.8.2.2
Air Content
Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M or
ASTM C231/C231M. ASTM C231/C231M shall be used with concretes and mortars
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
made with relatively dense natural aggregates. Two tests for air content
shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed
during each shift. Additional tests shall be made when excessive variation
in concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the
Government inspector. If results are out of tolerance, the placing foreman
shall be notified and he shall take appropriate action to have the air
content corrected at the plant. Additional tests for air content will be
performed on each truckload of material until such time as the air content
is within the tolerance specified.
3.8.2.3
Slump Test
Two slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of
concrete for every 250 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of concrete placed
during each shift. Additional tests shall be performed when excessive
variation in the workability of the concrete is noted or when excessive
crumbling or slumping is noted along the edges of slip-formed concrete.
3.8.3
Thickness Evaluation
The anticipated thickness of the concrete shall be determined prior to
placement by passing a template through the formed section or by measuring
the depth of opening of the extrusion template of the curb forming
machine. If a slip form paver is used for sidewalk placement, the subgrade
shall be true to grade prior to concrete placement and the thickness will
be determined by measuring each edge of the completed slab.
3.8.4
Surface Evaluation
The finished surface of each category of the completed work shall be
uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks.
3.9
3.9.1
SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS
Thickness Deficiency
When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient
in thickness by more than 1/4 inch the deficient section will be removed,
between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.
3.9.2
High Areas
In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements, high
areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with
carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours old or
by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine
after the concrete is 36 hours old or more. The area corrected by grinding
the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 5 percent of the area
of any integral slab, and the depth of grinding shall not exceed 1/4 inch.
Pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess
of the limits specified above shall be removed and replaced.
3.9.3
Appearance
Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government
and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified. Areas which exhibit
excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or tool marks or which are
otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be
removed and replaced.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 11
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
-- End of Section --
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 12
1313775
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
04/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D792
(2008) Density and Specific Gravity
(Relative Density) of Plastics by
Displacement
ASTM E28
(1999; R 2009) Softening Point of Resins
Derived from Naval Stores by Ring and Ball
Apparatus
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS TT-P-1952
1.2
(Rev E) Paint, Traffic and Airfield
Markings, Waterborne
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as
otherwise designated. The following shall be submitted in accordance with
Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Paints for roads and streets; G
Thermoplastic compound; G
Equipment; G
Lists of proposed equipment, including descriptive data, and
notifications of proposed Contractor actions as specified in this
section. List of removal equipment shall include descriptive data
indicating area of coverage per pass, pressure adjustment range,
tank and flow capacities, and safety precautions required for the
equipment operation.
Qualifications; G
Documentation on personnel qualifications, as specified.
SD-07 Certificates
Paints for roads and streets; G
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Thermoplastic compound; G
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Paints for roads and streets
Thermoplastic compound
Submit manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets.
1.3
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deliver paints, paint materials and thermoplastic compound materials in
original sealed containers that plainly show the designated name,
specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture,
manufacturer's directions, and name of manufacturer. Provide storage
facilities at the job site for maintaining materials at temperatures
recommended by the manufacturer.
1.4
WEATHER LIMITATIONS
Apply paint to clean, dry surfaces, and unless otherwise approved, only
when the air and pavement surface temperature is at least 5 degrees above
the dew point and the air and pavement temperatures are above 40 degrees F
and less than 95 degrees F for oil-based materials; above 50 degrees F and
less than 110 degrees F for water-based materials. Maintain paint
temperature within these same limits.
1.5
EQUIPMENT
Machines, tools, and equipment used in the performance of the work shall be
approved by the Contracting Officer and maintained in satisfactory
operating condition. Submit construction equipment list for approval by
the Contracting Officer.
1.5.1
Mobile and Maneuverable
Application equipment shall be mobile and maneuverable to the extent that
straight lines can be followed and normal curves can be made in a true
arc.
1.5.2
1.5.2.1
Paint Application Equipment
Hand-Operated, Push-Type Machines
Provide hand-operated push-type applicator machine of a type commonly used
for application of paint to pavement surfaces. Paint applicator machine
shall be acceptable for marking small street and parking areas. Applicator
machine shall be equipped with the necessary paint tanks and spraying
nozzles, and shall be capable of applying paint uniformly at coverage
specified. Applicator for water-based markings shall be equipped with
non-stick coated hoses; metal parts in contact with the paint material
shall be constructed of grade 302, 304, 316, or equal stainless steel.
1.5.2.2
Self-Propelled or Mobile-Drawn Pneumatic Spraying Machines
Provide self-propelled or mobile-drawn pneumatic spraying machine with
suitable arrangements of atomizing nozzles and controls to obtain the
specified results. Provide machine having a speed during application
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
capable of applying the stripe widths indicated at the paint coverage rate
specified herein and of even uniform thickness with clear-cut edges.
Provide paint applicator with paint reservoirs or tanks of sufficient
capacity and suitable gages to apply paint in accordance with requirements
specified. Equip tanks with suitable air-driven mechanical agitators.
Equip spray mechanism with quick-action valves conveniently located, and
include necessary pressure regulators and gages in full view and reach of
the operator. Install paint strainers in paint supply lines to ensure
freedom from residue and foreign matter that may cause malfunction of the
spray guns. The paint applicator shall be readily adaptable for attachment
of an air-actuated dispenser for the reflective media approved for use.
Provide pneumatic spray guns for hand application of paint in areas where
the mobile paint applicator cannot be used. Applicator for water-based
markings shall be equipped with non-stick coated hoses; metal parts in
contact with the paint material shall be constructed of grade 302, 304,
316, or equal stainless steel.
1.5.3
Thermoplastic Application Equipment
1.5.3.1
Thermoplastic Material
Thermoplastic material shall be applied to the primed pavement surface by
spray techniques or by the extrusion method, wherein one side of the
shaping die is the pavement and the other three sides are contained by, or
are part of, suitable equipment for heating and controlling the flow of
material. By either method, the markings shall be applied with equipment
that is capable of providing continuous uniformity in the dimensions of the
stripe.
1.5.3.2
Application Equipment
a.
Application equipment shall provide continuous mixing and agitation of
the material. Conveying parts of the equipment between the main
material reservoir and the extrusion shoe or spray gun shall prevent
accumulation and clogging. All parts of the equipment which come into
contact with the material shall be easily accessible and exposable for
cleaning and maintenance. All mixing and conveying parts up to and
including the extrusion shoes and spray guns shall maintain the
material at the required temperature with heat-transfer oil or
electrical-element-controlled heat.
b.
The application equipment shall be constructed to ensure continuous
uniformity in the dimensions of the stripe. The applicator shall
provide a means for cleanly cutting off stripe ends squarely and shall
provide a method of applying "skiplines". The equipment shall be
capable of applying varying widths of traffic markings.
1.5.3.3
Mobile and Maneuverable
Application equipment shall be mobile and maneuverable to the extent that
straight lines can be followed and normal curves can be made in a true
arc.
The equipment used for the placement of thermoplastic pavement
markings shall be of two general types: mobile applicator and portable
applicator.
1.5.3.4
Mobile Application Equipment
The mobile applicator shall be defined as a truck-mounted, self-contained
pavement marking machine that is capable of hot applying thermoplastic by
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
either the extrusion or spray method. The unit shall be equipped to apply
the thermoplastic marking material at temperatures exceeding 375 degrees F,
at widths varying from 3 to 12 inches and in thicknesses varying from 0.040
to 0.200 inch and shall have an automatic drop-on bead system. The mobile
unit shall be capable of operating continuously and of installing a minimum
of 20,000 lineal feet of longitudinal markings in an 8-hour day.
The mobile unit shall be equipped with a melting kettle which holds a
minimum of 6000 pounds of molten thermoplastic material. The kettle shall
be capable of heating the thermoplastic composition to temperatures of 375
to 425 degrees F. A thermostatically controlled heat transfer liquid shall
be used. Heating of the composition by direct flame shall not be allowed.
Oil and material temperature gauges shall be visible at both ends of the
kettle. The mobile unit shall be equipped with a minimum of two extrusion
shoes located one on each side of the truck, and shall be capable of
marking simultaneous edgeline and centerline stripes. Each extrusion shoe
shall be a closed, oil-jacketed unit; shall hold the molten thermoplastic
at a temperature of 375 to 425 degrees F; and shall be capable of extruding
a line of 3 to 8 inches in width; and at a thickness of not less than 0.120
inch nor more than 0.190 inch, and of generally uniform cross section.
The mobile unit shall be equipped with an electronic programmable line
pattern control system. The control system shall be capable of applying
skip or solid lines in any sequence, through any and all of the extrusion
shoes, or the spray guns, and in programmable cycle lengths. In addition,
the mobile unit shall be equipped with an automatic counting mechanism
capable of recording the number of lineal feet of thermoplastic markings
applied to the pavement surface with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.
1.5.3.5
Portable Application Equipment
The portable applicator shall be defined as hand-operated equipment,
specifically designed for placing special markings such as crosswalks,
stopbars, legends, arrows, and short lengths of lane, edge and
centerlines.
The portable applicator shall be capable of applying
thermoplastic pavement markings by the extrusion method. The portable
applicator shall be loaded with hot thermoplastic composition from the
melting kettles on the mobile applicator. The portable applicator shall be
equipped with all the necessary components, including a materials storage
reservoir, bead dispenser, extrusion shoe, and heating accessories, so as
to be capable of holding the molten thermoplastic at a temperature of 375
to 425 degrees F, of extruding a line of 3 to 12 inches in width, and in
thickness of not less than 0.120 inch nor more than 0.190 inch and of
generally uniform cross section.
1.5.4
Traffic Controls
Suitable warning signs shall be placed near the beginning of the worksite
and well ahead of the worksite for alerting approaching traffic from both
directions. Small markers shall be placed along newly painted lines or
freshly placed raised markers to control traffic and prevent damage to
newly painted surfaces or displacement of raised pavement markers.
Painting equipment shall be marked with large warning signs indicating
slow-moving painting equipment in operation.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.6
1313775
MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
1.6.1
Roads, Streets, and Parking Areas
When traffic must be rerouted or controlled to accomplish the work, the
necessary warning signs, flagpersons, and related equipment for the safe
passage of vehicles shall be provided.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall submit documentation certifying that pertinent
personnel are qualified for equipment operation and handling of chemicals.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Provide materials conforming to the requirements specified herein.
2.1.1
Paints for Roads and Streets
FS TT-P-1952 , color as indicated.
2.1.2
Thermoplastic Compound
The thermoplastic reflectorized pavement marking compound shall be extruded
or sprayed in a molten state onto a primed pavement surface. Following a
surface application of glass beads and upon cooling to normal pavement
temperatures, the marking shall be an adherent reflectorized strip of the
specified thickness and width that is capable of resisting deformation by
traffic.
2.1.2.1
Composition Requirements
The binder component shall be formulated as a hydrocarbon resin. The
pigment, beads and filler shall be uniformly dispersed in the binder
resin.
The thermoplastic composition shall be free from all skins, dirt,
and foreign objects and shall comply with the following requirements:
Component
Percent by Weight
White
Yellow
Binder
17 min
17 min
Titanium dioxide
10 min
Glass beads
20 min
20 min
Calcium carbonate and
49 min
*
i
Yellow i
pigments
*
*Amount and type of yellow pigment, calcium
carbonate and inert fillers shall be at the
option of the manufacturer, providing the
other composition requirements of this
specification are met.
2.1.2.2
a.
Physical Properties
Drying time: When installed at 70 degrees F and in thicknesses between
0.120 and 0.190 inch, the composition shall be completely solid and
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
shall show no damaging effect from traffic after curing 15 minutes.
b.
Softening point: The composition shall have a softening point of not
less than 194 degrees F when tested in accordance with ASTM E28.
c.
Specific gravity: The specific gravity of the composition shall be
between 1.9 and 2.2 as determined in accordance with ASTM D792.
2.1.2.3
Primer
a.
Asphalt concrete primer: The primer for asphalt concrete pavements
shall be a thermosetting adhesive with a solids content of pigment
reinforced synthetic rubber and synthetic plastic resin dissolved or
dispersed in a volatile organic solvent. The solids content shall not
be less than 10 percent by weight at 70 degrees F and 60 percent
relative humidity. A wet film thickness of 0.005 inch, plus or minus
0.001 inch, shall dry to a tack-free condition in less than 5 minutes.
b.
Portland cement concrete primer: The primer for portland cement
concrete pavements shall be an epoxy resin primer. The primer shall be
of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the thermoplastic
composition.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
SURFACE PREPARATION
Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 30 days
before application of marking materials. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be
marked before application of the paint. Remove dust, dirt, and other
granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing
with water, or a combination of these methods as required. Do not commence
painting in any area until pavement surfaces are dry and clean.
3.1.1
Early Painting of Asphalt Pavements
For asphalt pavement systems requiring painting application at less than 30
days, apply the paint and beads at half the normal application rate,
followed by a second application at the normal rate after 30 days.
3.2
3.2.1
APPLICATION
Testing for Moisture
Apply pavement markings to dry pavement only. The Contractor shall test
the pavement surface for moisture before beginning work after each period
of rainfall, fog, high humidity, or cleaning, or when the ambient
temperature has fallen below the dew point. Do not commence marking until
the pavement is sufficiently dry and the pavement condition has been
approved by the CO or authorized representative. Employ the "plastic wrap
method" to test the pavement for moisture as follows: Cover the pavement
with a 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inch by 12 inch) section of clear plastic wrap
and seal the edges with tape. After 15 minutes, examine the plastic wrap
for any visible moisture accumulation inside the plastic. Do not begin
marking operations until the test can be performed with no visible moisture
accumulation inside the plastic wrap.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.2.2
1313775
Rate of Application
3.2.2.1
Nonreflective Markings
Apply paint evenly to the pavement surface to be coated at a rate of 105
plus or minus 5 square feet per gallon.
3.2.2.2
Thermoplastic Compound
After surface preparation has been completed, prime the asphalt or concrete
pavement surface with spray equipment. Allow primer materials to "set-up"
prior to applying the thermoplastic composition. Allow the asphalt concrete
primer to dry to a tack-free condition, usually occurring in less than 10
minutes. Apply asphalt concrete primer to all asphalt concrete pavements at
a wet film thickness of 0.005 inch, plus or minus 0.001 inch 265 to 400
square feet per gallon. After the primer has "set-up", apply the
thermoplastic at temperatures no lower than 375 degrees F nor higher than
425 degrees F at the point of deposition.
Apply all extruded
thermoplastic markings at the specified width and at a thickness of not
less than 0.125 inch nor more than 0.190 inch.
Apply all sprayed
thermoplastic markings at the specified width and the thickness designated
in the contract plans. If the plans do not specify a thickness, apply
centerline markings at a wet thickness of 0.090 inch, plus or minus 0.005
inch, and edgeline markings at a wet thickness of 0.060 inch, plus or minus
0.005 inch.
3.2.3
Painting
Apply paint pneumatically with approved equipment at rate of coverage
specified herein. Provide guidelines and templates as necessary to control
paint application. Take special precautions in marking numbers, letters,
and symbols. Manually paint numbers, letters, and symbols. Sharply
outline all edges of markings. The maximum drying time requirements of the
paint specifications will be strictly enforced, to prevent undue softening
of bitumen, and pickup, displacement, or discoloration by tires of traffic.
Discontinue painting operations if there is a deficiency in drying of the
markings until cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected.
3.2.4
Thermoplastic Compound
Place thermoplastic pavement markings upon dry pavement. At the time of
installation the pavement surface temperature shall be a minimum of 40
degrees F and rising. Thermoplastics, as placed, shall be free from dirt
or tint. Apply all centerline, skipline, edgeline, and other longitudinal
type markings with a mobile applicator. Place all special markings,
crosswalks, stop bars, legends, arrows, and similar patterns with a
portable applicator, using the extrusion method.
3.3
3.3.1
FIELD TESTING, INSPECTION, AND DEMONSTRATIONS
Inspection
Examine material at the job site to determine that it is the material
referenced in the report of test results or certificate of compliance.
certificate of compliance shall be accompanied by test results
substantiating conformance to the specified requirements.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20
Page 7
A
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.3.2
1313775
Surface Preparations and Application Procedures
Surface preparations and application procedures will be examined by the
Contracting Officer to determine conformance with the requirements
specified. Approve each separate operation prior to initiation of
subsequent operations.
3.3.2.1
Test Stripe Demonstration
Prior to paint application, demonstrate test stripe application within the
work area using the proposed materials and equipment. Apply separate test
stripes in each of the line widths and configurations required herein using
the proposed equipment. The test stripes shall be long enough to determine
the proper speed and operating pressures for the vehicle(s) and machinery,
but not less than 50 feet long.
3.3.2.2
Application Rate Demonstration
During the Test Stripe Demonstration, demonstrate compliance with the
application rates specified herein. Document the equipment speed and
operating pressures required to meet the specified rates in each
configuration of the equipment and provide a copy of the documentation to
the Contracting Officer or authorized representative prior to proceeding
with the work.
3.3.2.3
Level of Performance Demonstration
The Contracting Officer or authorized representative will be present the
application demonstrations to observe the results obtained and to validate
the operating parameters of the vehicle(s) and equipment. If accepted by
the Contracting Officer or authorized representative, the test stripe shall
be the measure of performance required for this project. Work shall not
proceed until the demonstration results are satisfactory to the Contracting
Officer or authorized representative.
3.4
TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PROTECTION
Place warning signs near the beginning of the work site and well ahead of
the work site for alerting approaching traffic from both directions. Place
small markers along newly painted lines to control traffic and prevent
damage to newly painted surfaces. Mark painting equipment with large
warning signs indicating slow-moving painting equipment in operation. Do
not use foil-backed material for temporary pavement marking because of its
potential to conduct electricity during accidents involving downed power
lines.
3.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Demonstrate success of bond of reflective media, new paint marking and the
pavement surface, vacuum cured surface of new marking after a seven (7) day
dry time. Inspect newly applied markings for signs of bond failure based
on visual inspection and comparison to results from Test Stripe
Demonstration paragraph.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 32 31 13.53
HIGH-SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
04/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A116
(2011) Standard Specification for
Metallic-Coated, Steel Woven Wire Fence
Fabric
ASTM A121
(2007) Standard Specification for
Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire
ASTM A153/A153M
(2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
ASTM A392
(2011) Standard Specification for
Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric
ASTM A780/A780M
(2009) Standard Practice for Repair of
Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A824
(2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension
Wire for Use With Chain Link Fence
ASTM C 94/C 94M
(2011) Standard Specification for
Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM F 1043
(2011) Strength and Protective Coatings on
Metal Industrial Chain-Link Fence Framework
ASTM F 1083
(2010) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized)
Welded, for Fence Structures
ASTM F 1184
(2005; R 2010) Industrial and Commercial
Horizontal Slide Gates
ASTM F 567
(2011) Standard Practice for Installation
of Chain Link Fence
ASTM F 626
(2008) Standard Specification for Fence
Fittings
ASTM F 900
(2005) Industrial and Commercial Swing
SECTION 32 31 13.53
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Gates
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS RR-F-191
(Rev K) Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (and
Gates, Chain-Link Fence Fabric, and
Accessories)
FS RR-F-191/1
(Rev F) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal
(Chain-Link Fence Fabric)
FS RR-F-191/2
(Rev E) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal
(Chain-Link Fence Gates)
FS RR-F-191/3
(Rev E; Am 1) Fencing, Wire and Post,
Metal (Chain-Link Fence Posts, Top Rails
and Braces)
FS RR-F-191/4
(Rev F) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal
(Chain-Link Fence Accessories)
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fence Installation; G
Installation Drawings; G
Location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts; G
Gate Assembly; G
Gate Hardware and Accessories; G
Installation drawings in accordance with paragraph titled,
"ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS" of this section.
SD-03 Product Data; G
Fence Installation; G
Gate Assembly; G
Gate Hardware and Accessories; G
Manufacturer's catalog data.
SD-07 Certificates
Chain Link Fence; G
Submit reports, signed by an official authorized to certify on
behalf of the manufacturer, attesting that the chain link fence
and component materials meet the specified requirements.
Zinc Coating; G
Fabric; G
Barbed Wire; G
Stretcher Bars; G
Gate Hardware and Accessories; G
SECTION 32 31 13.53
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Concrete; G
GATE OPERATOR
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Submit Manufacturer's instructions for the following items:
Fence Installation; G
Gate Assembly; G
Hardware Assembly; G
Accessories; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Electro-Mechanical Locks
Gate Operator
Submit operating and maintenance instructions
1.3
1.3.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Required Report Data
Submit reports of chain-link fencing listing and accessories regarding
weight in ounces for zinc coating. Submit reports demonstrating full
compliance with the following standards: FS RR-F-191, FS RR-F-191/1,
FS RR-F-191/2, FS RR-F-191/3, and FS RR-F-191/4
1.3.2
Assembly and Installation Drawings
Submit complete Fence Installation Drawings for review and approval by the
Contracting Officer prior to shipment. Drawing details shall include, but
are not limited to: Fence Installation, Location of gate, corner, end, and
pull posts, Gate Assembly, and Gate Hardware and Accessories.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition. Store materials off
the ground to provide protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.
PART 2
2.1
2.1.1
PRODUCTS
FENCE FABRIC
General
Provide ASTM A392, Class 1, zinc-coated steel wire with minimum coating
weight of 1.2 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface. Fabricate
fence fabric of 9 gauge wire woven in 2 inch mesh conforming to ASTM A116.
Set fabric height as shown. Fabric shall be twisted and barbed on the top
selvage and on the bottom selvage. Secure fabric to posts using stretcher
bars or ties spaced 15 inches on center, or by integrally weaving to
integral fastening loops of end, corner, pull, and gate posts for full
length of each post. Install fabric on opposite side of posts from area
being secured.
SECTION 32 31 13.53
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.2
2.2.1
1313775
POSTS
Metal Posts for Chain Link Fence
a. FS RR-F-191/3 line posts; Class 1, steel pipe, Grade A.
corner, and pull posts; Class 1, steel pipe, Grade A.
2.2.2
End,
Accessories
a. Provide accessories conforming to ASTM F 626.
shall be zinc coated.
Ferrous accessories
b. Furnish truss rods for each terminal post. Provide truss rods with
turnbuckles or other equivalent provisions for adjustment.
c. Provide Barbed wire supporting arms of the V 6 strand arm type and
of the design required for the post furnished. Secure arms by bolting
or riveting.
d. Furnish post caps in accordance with manufacturer's standard
accessories.
e. Provide 9 gauge steel tie wire for attaching fabric to rails,
braces, and posts and match the coating of the fence fabric.
Miscellaneous hardware coatings shall conform to ASTM A153/A153M unless
modified.
2.3
BRACES AND RAILS
a. Braces and bottom rails; Class 1, steel pipe, Grade A , in minimum
sizes listed in FS RR-F-191/3 for each class and grade.
2.4
2.4.1
WIRE
Wire Ties
FS RR-F-191/4. Provide wire ties constructed of the same material as the
fencing fabric.
2.4.2
Barbed Wire
Provide barbed wire conforming to ASTM A121 zinc-coated, Type Z, Class 3,
with 12.5 gauge wire with 14 gauge, round, 4-point barbs spaced no more than
5 inches apart.
2.4.3
Tension Wire
Provide Type I or Type II tension wire, Class 4 coating, in accordance with
ASTM A824.
2.5
CONCRETE
ASTM C 94/C 94M, using 3/4 inch maximum size aggregate, and having minimum
compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Grout shall consist of one
part portland cement to three parts clean, well-graded sand and the minimum
amount of water to produce a workable mix.
SECTION 32 31 13.53
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.6
2.6.1
1313775
GATES
Gate Assembly
Provide gate assembly conforming to ASTM F 900 and/or ASTM F 1184 of the
type and swing shown. Provide gate frames conforming to strength and
coating requirements of ASTM F 1083 for Group IA, steel pipe, with external
coating Type A, nominal pipe size (NPS) 1-1/2. Provide gate frames
conforming to strength and coating requirements of ASTM F 1043, for Group
IC, steel pipe with external coating Type A or Type B, nominal pipe size
(NPS) 1-1/2. Gate fabric shall be as specified for chain link fabric.
2.6.2
Gate Leaves
For gate leaves, more than 8 feet wide, provide either intermediate members
and diagonal truss rods or tubular members as necessary to provide rigid
construction, free from sag or twist. Gate leaves less than 8 feet wide
shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Provide intermediate braces
on all gate frames with an electro-mechanical lock. Attach fabric to the
gate frame by method standard with the manufacturer except that welding
will not be permitted.
2.6.3
Gate Hardware and Accessories
Furnish and install latches, hinges, stops, keepers, rollers, and other
hardware items as required for the operation of the gate. Arrange latches
for padlocking so that the padlock will be accessible from both sides of
the gate. Provide stops for holding the gates in the open position. For
high security applications, each end member of gate frames shall be
extended sufficiently above the top member to carry three strands of barbed
wire in horizontal alignment with barbed wire strands on the fence.
2.7
GATE OPERATOR
Provide electric gate operators for sliding gates as follows: Electrical
gate operators shall have a right angle gearhead instantly reversing motor
with magnetic drum-type brake, friction disc clutch, reversing starter with
thermal overload protection, and a chain-driven geared rotary-type
automatic limit switch. Gears shall consist of a hardened steel machine
cut worm and mating bronze gear. All gears and bearings shall operate in a
bath of oil. Gate operators with V-belt pulleys are not allowed. Equip
gate operators with an emergency release to allow the gate to be operated
manually. The emergency release mechanism shall be capable of being locked
in the engaged or disengaged position. Provide positive stops on the gate
tracks as a backup to the limit switches.
2.8
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL LOCKS
Electro-mechanical locking devices for sliding gates and personnel gates
shall be solenoid actuated such that the deadbolt retracts when the
solenoid is energized and remains electrically retracted until the gate is
closed. Provide continuous duty type solenoid, rated for 120V ac, 60Hz
operation. The locking device shall be unlockable by key and keyed on both
sides. Status of the electro-mechanical lock shall be monitored by two
limit switches (integral to the locking device) wired in series. One
switch shall monitor the deadlock lever and the other monitor the locking
tongue.
SECTION 32 31 13.53
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
PART 3
3.1
1313775
EXECUTION
FENCE INSTALLATION
Perform complete installation conforming to ASTM F 567.
3.1.1
Line and Grade
Install fence to the lines and grades indicated. Clear the area on either
side of the fence line to the extent indicated. Space line posts
equidistant at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Terminal (corner, gate,
and pull) posts shall be set at abrupt changes in vertical and horizontal
alignment. Provide fabric continuous between terminal posts; however, runs
between terminal posts shall not exceed 500 feet. Repair any damage to
galvanized surfaces, including welding, with paint containing zinc dust in
accordance with ASTM A780/A780M.
3.1.2
Excavation
Clear all post holes of loose material. Spread waste material where
directed. Eliminate ground surface irregularities along the fence line to
the extent necessary to maintain a 2 inch clearance between the bottom of
the fabric and finish grade.
3.2
3.2.1
POST INSTALLATION
Earth and Bedrock
a. Set posts plumb and in alignment. Except where solid rock is
encountered, set posts in concrete to the depth indicated on the
drawings. Where solid rock is encountered with no overburden, set
posts to a minimum depth of 18 inches in rock. Where solid rock is
covered with an overburden of soil or loose rock, set posts to the
minimum depth indicated on the drawing unless a penetration of 18 inches
in solid rock is achieved before reaching the indicated depth, in
which case terminate depth of penetration. Grout all portions of posts
set in rock.
b. Portions of posts not set in rock shall be set in concrete from the
rock to ground level. Posts set in concrete shall be set in holes not
less than the diameter shown on the drawings. Make diameters of holes
in solid rock at least 1 inch greater than the largest cross section of
the post. Thoroughly consolidate concrete and grout around each post,
free of voids and finished to form a dome. Allow concrete and grout to
cure for 72 hours prior to attachment of any item to the posts. Group
II line posts may be mechanically driven, for temporary fence
construction only, if rock is not encountered. Set driven posts to a
minimum depth of 3 feet and protect with drive caps when setting.
Test fence post rigidity by applying a 50 pound force on the post,
perpendicular to the fabric, at 5 feet above ground. Post movement
measured at the point where the force is applied shall be less than or
equal to 3/4 inch from the relaxed position. Test every tenth post for
rigidity. When a post fails this test, make further tests on the next
four posts on either side of the failed post. All failed posts shall
be removed, replaced, and retested at the Contractor's expense.
SECTION 32 31 13.53
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.3
1313775
RAILS
Bolt bottom rail to rail ends and securely fasten rail ends to the posts.
Peen bolts to prevent easy removal. Install rails before chain link
fabric.
3.4
FABRIC INSTALLATION
a. Install chain link fabric on the side of the post indicated.
Attach fabric to terminal posts with stretcher bars and tension bands.
Space bands at approximately 15 inch intervals. Install fabric and
pull taut to provide a smooth and uniform appearance free from sag,
without permanently distorting the fabric diamond or reducing the
fabric height. Fasten fabric to line posts at approximately 15 inch
intervals and fastened to all rails and tension wires at approximately
12 inch intervals.
b. Cut fabric by untwisting and removing pickets. Accomplish splicing
by weaving a single picket into the ends of the rolls to be joined.
The bottom of the installed fabric shall be 2 inchs above the ground.
c. After the fabric installation is complete, exercise the fabric by
applying a 50 pound push-pull force at the center of the fabric between
posts; the use of a 30 pound pull at the center of the panel shall
cause fabric deflection of not more than 2.5 inches when pulling fabric
from the post side of the fence; every second fence panel shall meet
this requirement; resecure and retest all failed panels at the
Contractor's expense.
3.5
SUPPORTING ARMS
Install barbed wire supporting arms and barbed wire as indicated on the
drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. Anchor supporting arms to
the posts in a manner to prevent easy removal with hand tools with 3/8 inch
diameter plain pin rivets. Pull barbed wire taut and attach to the arms
with clips or other means that will prevent easy removal.
3.6
GATE INSTALLATION
a. Install gates at the locations shown. Mount gates to swing as
indicated. Install latches, stops, and keepers as required. Install
gates as recommended by the manufacturer.
b. Attach padlocks to gates or gate posts with chains. Weld or
otherwise secure hinge pins, and hardware assembly to prevent removal.
c. Submit three copies of operating and maintenance instructions, a
minimum of 2 weeks prior to field training. Operating instructions
shall outline the step-by-step procedures required for system startup,
operation, and shutdown. Include the manufacturer's name, model
number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all
equipment and their basic operating features. Include in the
maintenance instructions routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. Also include the
general gate layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring and control
diagrams of the system as installed.
SECTION 32 31 13.53
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.7
1313775
GROUNDING
a.
Ground fencing as indicated on drawings and specified.
b. Ground fences on each side of all gates, at each corner, at the
closest approach to each building located within 50 feet of the fence,
and where the fence alignment changes more than 15 degrees. Grounding
locations shall not exceed 650 feet. Bond each gate panel with a
flexible bond strap to its gate post. Ground fences crossed by
powerlines of 600 volts or more at or near the point of crossing and at
distances not exceeding 150 feet on each side of crossing.
c. Provide ground conductor consisting of 1/0 AWG solid copper wire.
Grounding electrodes shall be 3/4 inch by 10 foot long copper-clad
steel rod. Drive electrodes into the earth so that the top of the
electrode is at least 6 inches below the grade. Where driving is
impracticable, electrodes shall be buried a minimum of 12 inches deep
and radially from the fence. The top of the electrode shall not be
less than 2 feet or more than 8 feet from the fence. Clamp ground
conductor to the fence and electrodes with bronze grounding clamps to
create electrical continuity between fence posts, fence fabric, and
ground rods. Total resistance of the fence to ground shall not be
greater than 25 ohms.
3.8
SECURITY
Install new security fencing, remove existing security fencing, and perform
related work to provide continuous security for facility. Schedule and
fully coordinate work with Contracting Officer and cognizant Security
Officer.
3.9
CLEANUP
Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the work site each
workday.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 32 31 13.53
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 33 11 00
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C104/A21.4
(2008; Errata 2010) Cement-Mortar Lining
for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for
Water
AWWA C110/A21.10
(2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings
for Water
AWWA C111/A21.11
(2007) Rubber-Gasket Joints for
Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
AWWA C151/A21.51
(2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally
Cast, for Water
AWWA C153/A21.53
(2011) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for
Water Service
AWWA C500
(2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water
Supply Service
AWWA C502
(2005) Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants
AWWA C509
(2009) Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for
Water Supply Service
AWWA C600
(2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water
Mains and Their Appurtenances
AWWA C651
(2005; Errata 2005) Standard for
Disinfecting Water Mains
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B16.15
(2011) Cast Bronze Alloy Threaded Fittings
Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.18
(2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder
Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.22
(2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper
and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
ASME B16.26
(2011) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy
Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes
ASME B18.2.2
(2010) Standard for Square and Hex Nuts
ASME B18.5.2.1M
(2006; R 2011) Metric Round Head Short
Square Neck Bolts
ASME B18.5.2.2M
(1982; R 2010) Metric Round Head Square
Neck Bolts
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A307
(2010) Standard Specification for Carbon
Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength
ASTM A47/A47M
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A48/A48M
(2003; R 2008) Standard Specification for
Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A536
(1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM B32
(2008) Standard Specification for Solder
Metal
ASTM B42
(2010) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes
ASTM B88
(2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 24
(2010) Standard for the Installation of
Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 246
(2011; Reprint Aug 2011) Hydrants for
Fire-Protection Service
UL 262
(2004; Reprint Oct 2011) Gate Valves for
Fire-Protection Service
UL 789
(2004; Reprint Aug 2008) Standard for
Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Service
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SD-03 Product Data
Piping Materials; G
Water distribution main piping, fittings, joints, valves, and
coupling; G
Hydrants; G
Indicator posts; G
Valve boxes; G
Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts, except
submit both drawings and cuts for push-on joints. Include
information concerning gaskets with submittal for joints and
couplings.
SD-06 Test Reports
Pressure test results from commercial laboratory.; G
SD-07 Certificates
Water distribution main piping, fittings, joints, valves, and
coupling; G
Water service line piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling
Lining; G
Fire hydrants; G
Certificates shall attest that tests set forth in each applicable
referenced publication have been performed, whether specified in
that publication to be mandatory or otherwise and that production
control tests have been performed at the intervals or frequency
specified in the publication. Other tests shall have been
performed within 3 years of the date of submittal of certificates
on the same type, class, grade, and size of material as is being
provided for the project.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Delivery, storage, and handling; G
Installation procedures for water piping; G
1.3
1.3.1
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Delivery and Storage
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with
minimum handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under
protective covering. Store rubber gaskets under cover out of direct
sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of
pipes, fittings, valves and hydrants free of dirt and debris.
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.3.2
1313775
Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and other accessories in a manner
to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take
special care to avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings;
make repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Do not place any other
material or pipe inside a pipe or fitting after the coating has been
applied. Carry, do not drag pipe to the trench. Use of pinch bars and
tongs for aligning or turning pipe will be permitted only on the bare ends
of the pipe. The interior of pipe and accessories shall be thoroughly
cleaned of foreign matter before being lowered into the trench and shall be
kept clean during laying operations by plugging or other approved method.
Before installation, the pipe shall be inspected for defects. Material
found to be defective before or after laying shall be replaced with sound
material without additional expense to the Government.
Store rubber
gaskets that are not to be installed immediately, under cover out of direct
sunlight.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
WATER DISTRIBUTION MAIN MATERIALS
2.1.1
Piping Materials
2.1.1.1
Ductile-Iron Piping
a.
Pipe and Fittings: Pipe, AWWA C151/A21.51, Pressure Class 350.
Fittings, AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53 ; fittings with push-on
joint ends conforming to the same requirements as fittings with
mechanical-joint ends, except that the bell design shall be modified,
as approved, for push-on joint. Fittings shall have pressure rating at
least equivalent to that of the pipe. Ends of pipe and fittings shall
be suitable for the specified joints. Pipe and fittings shall have
cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness.
b.
Joints and Jointing Material:
(1)
Joints: Joints for pipe and fittings shall be push-on joints or
mechanical joints unless otherwise indicated. Provide mechanical
joint restraint at all joints. Provide mechanically coupled type
joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling where indicated.
(2)
Push-On Joints: Shape of pipe ends and fitting ends, gaskets,
and lubricant for joint assembly, AWWA C111/A21.11.
(3)
Mechanical Joints: Dimensional and material requirements for
pipe ends, glands, bolts and nuts, and gaskets, AWWA C111/A21.11.
(4)
Sleeve-Type Mechanical Coupled Joints: As specified in paragraph
entitled "Sleeve-Type Mechanical Couplings."
2.1.2
2.1.2.1
Valves, Hydrants, and Other Water Main Accessories
Gate Valves on Buried Piping
AWWA C509 or UL 262. Unless otherwise specified, valves conforming to:
(1) AWWA C509 shall be nonrising stem type with mechanical-joint ends or
resilient-seated gate valves 3 to 12 inches in size, and (2) UL 262 shall
be inside-screw type with operating nut, split-wedge type gate, designed
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
for a hydraulic working pressure of 250 psi, and shall have
mechanical-joint ends or push-on joint ends as appropriate for the pipe to
which it is joined. Materials for UL 262 valves shall conform to the
reference standards specified in AWWA C500. Valves shall open by
counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Stuffing boxes shall have
0-ring stem seals. Stuffing boxes shall be bolted and constructed so as to
permit easy removal of parts for repair. In lieu of mechanical-joint ends
and push-on joint ends, valves may have special ends for connection to
sleeve-type mechanical coupling. Valve ends and gaskets for connection to
sleeve-type mechanical coupling shall conform to the applicable
requirements specified for the coupling. Where a post indicator is shown,
the valve shall have an indicator post flange. Valves shall be of one
manufacturer.
2.1.2.2
Fire Hydrants
Dry-barrel type. Paint hydrants with at least one coat of primer and two
coats of red enamel paint, except use black enamel paint for tops of
hydrants in non-potable water systems. Stencil hydrant number and main
size on the hydrant barrel using black stencil paint.
a.
Dry-Barrel Type Fire Hydrants: Dry-barrel type hydrants, AWWA C502 or
UL 246, "Base Valve" design, shall have 6 inch inlet, 5 1/4 inch valve
opening, one 4 1/2 inch pumper connection, and two 2 1/2 inch hose
connections.
Inlet shall have mechanical-joint or push-on joint end;
end shall conform to the applicable requirements as specified for the
joint. Size and shape of operating nut, cap nuts, and threads on hose
and pumper connections shall be as specified in AWWA C502 or UL 246.
Hydrants indicated as "traffic type," shall have frangible sections as
mentioned in AWWA C502.
The traffic type hydrant shall have special
couplings joining upper and lower sections of hydrant barrel and upper
and lower sections of hydrant stem and shall be designed to have the
special couplings break from a force not less than that which would be
imposed by a moving vehicle; hydrant shall operate properly under
normal conditions.
2.1.2.3
UL 789.
2.1.2.4
Indicator Posts
Provide for gate valves where indicated.
Valve Boxes
Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping, except where
indicator post is shown. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron of a size
suitable for the valve on which it is to be used and shall be adjustable.
Cast-iron boxes shall have a minimum cover and wall thickness of 3/16 inch.
Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. The least
diameter of the shaft of the box shall be 5 1/4 inches. Cast-iron box
shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2.1.2.5
Sleeve-Type Mechanical Couplings
Couplings shall be designed to couple plain-end piping by compression of a
ring gasket at each end of the adjoining pipe sections. The coupling shall
consist of one middle ring flared or beveled at each end to provide a
gasket seat; two follower rings; two resilient tapered rubber gaskets; and
bolts and nuts to draw the follower rings toward each other to compress the
gaskets. The middle ring and the follower rings shall be true circular
sections free from irregularities, flat spots, and surface defects; the
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
design shall provide for confinement and compression of the gaskets. For
ductile iron pipe, the middle ring shall be of cast-iron or steel; and the
follower rings shall be of malleable or ductile iron. Cast iron,
ASTM A48/A48M not less than Class 25. Malleable and ductile iron shall,
conform to ASTM A47/A47M and ASTM A536, respectively. Steel shall have a
strength not less than that of the pipe. Gaskets shall be designed for
resistance to set after installation and shall meet the applicable
requirements specified for gaskets for mechanical joint in AWWA C111/A21.11.
Bolts shall be track-head type, ASTM A307, Grade A, with nuts, ASMT A563,
Grade A; or round-head square-neck type bolts, ASME B18.5.2.1M and
ASME B18.5.2.2M with hex nuts, ASME B18.2.2. Bolts shall be 5/8 inch in
diameter; minimum number of bolts for each coupling shall be 5 for 6 inch
pipe , 7 for 10 inch pipe, and 8 for 12 inch pipe. Bolt holes in follower
rings shall be of a shape to hold fast the necks of the bolts used.
Mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling shall
not be used as an optional method of jointing except where pipeline is
adequately anchored to resist tension pull across the joint. Mechanical
couplings shall provide a tight flexible joint under all reasonable
conditions, such as pipe movements caused by expansion, contraction, slight
setting or shifting in the ground, minor variations in trench gradients,
and traffic vibrations. Couplings shall be of strength not less than the
adjoining pipeline.
2.2
WATER SERVICE LINE MATERIALS
2.2.1
Piping Materials
2.2.1.1
Copper Pipe and Associated Fittings
Pipe, ASTM B42, regular, threaded ends.
ASME B16.15, 125 pound.
2.2.1.2
Fittings shall be brass or bronze,
Copper Tubing and Associated Fittings
Tubing, ASTM B88, Type K. Fittings for solder-type joint, ASME B16.18 or
ASME B16.22; fittings for compression-type joint, ASME B16.26, flared tube
type.
2.2.2
Water Service Line Appurtenances
2.2.2.1
Meter Boxes
The boxes shall be of sufficient size to completely enclose the meter and
shutoff valve or service stop. Meter boxes shall be concrete with cast
iron meter reader lid. Box height shall extend from invert of the meter to
final grade at the meter location. The lid shall have the word "WATER"
cast in it.
PART 3
3.1
3.1.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES
General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines
These requirements shall apply to all pipeline installation except where
specific exception is made in the "Special Requirements..." paragraphs.
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.1.1.1
1313775
Earthwork
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20
EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3.1.1.2
Pipe Laying and Jointing
Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings. Before placing in position,
clean pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories, and maintain in a clean
condition. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into
trenches. Do not under any circumstances drop or dump pipe, fittings,
valves, or any other water line material into trenches. Cut pipe in a neat
workmanlike manner accurately to length established at the site and work
into place without springing or forcing. Replace by one of the proper
length any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper
installation of jointing material. Blocking or wedging between bells and
spigots will not be permitted. Lay bell-and-spigot pipe with the bell end
pointing in the direction of laying. Grade the pipeline in straight lines;
avoid the formation of dips and low points. Support pipe at proper
elevation and grade. Secure firm, uniform support. Wood support blocking
will not be permitted. Lay pipe so that the full length of each section of
pipe and each fitting will rest solidly on the pipe bedding; excavate
recesses to accommodate bells, joints, and couplings. Provide anchors and
supports where necessary for fastening work into place. Make proper
provision for expansion and contraction of pipelines. Keep trenches free
of water until joints have been properly made. At the end of each work
day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. Do
not lay pipe when conditions of trench or weather prevent installation.
Depth of cover over top of pipe shall not be less than 2 1/2 feet.
3.1.1.3
Connections to Existing Water Lines
Make connections to existing water lines after approval is obtained and
with a minimum interruption of service on the existing line.
3.1.1.4
Penetrations
Pipe passing through walls of valve pits and structures shall be provided
with ductile-iron or Schedule 40 steel wall sleeves. Annular space between
walls and sleeves shall be filled with rich cement mortar. Annular space
between pipe and sleeves shall be filled with mastic.
3.1.1.5
Flanged Pipe
Flanged pipe shall only be installed above ground or with the flanges in
valve pits.
3.1.2
Special Requirements for Installation of Water Mains
3.1.2.1
Installation of Ductile-Iron Piping
Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with
paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" and
with the requirements of AWWA C600 for pipe installation, joint assembly,
valve-and-fitting installation, and thrust restraint.
a.
Jointing: Make push-on joints with the gaskets and lubricant specified
for this type joint; assemble in accordance with the applicable
requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly. Make mechanical joints
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
with the gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts specified for this type
joint; assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of
AWWA C600 for joint assembly and the recommendations of Appendix A to
AWWA C111/A21.11. Make flanged joints with the gaskets, bolts, and nuts
specified for this type joint. Make flanged joints up tight; avoid
undue strain on flanges, fittings, valves, and other accessories. Align
bolt holes for each flanged joint. Use full size bolts for the bolt
holes; use of undersized bolts to make up for misalignment of bolt
holes or for any other purpose will not be permitted. Do not allow
adjoining flange faces to be out of parallel to such degree that the
flanged joint cannot be made watertight without overstraining the
flange. When flanged pipe or fitting has dimensions that do not allow
the making of a proper flanged joint as specified, replace it by one of
proper dimensions. Use setscrewed flanges to make flanged joints where
conditions prevent the use of full-length flanged pipe and assemble in
accordance with the recommendations of the setscrewed flange
manufacturer. Assemble joints made with sleeve-type mechanical
couplings in accordance with the recommendations of the coupling
manufacturer. Provide mechanical joint restraint for all joints.
b.
Allowable Deflection: The maximum allowable deflection shall be as
given in AWWA C600. If the alignment requires deflection in excess of
the above limitations, special bends or a sufficient number of shorter
lengths of pipe shall be furnished to provide angular deflections
within the limit set forth.
c.
Pipe Anchorage: Provide metal harness for all pipe anchorage. Metal
harness shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for
thrust restraint, using tie rods and clamps as shown in NFPA 24 ,
except as otherwise indicated.
3.1.2.2
Installation of Valves and Hydrants
a.
Installation of Valves: Install gate valves, AWWA C500 and UL 262, in
accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting
installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix
("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C500.
Install gate valves, AWWA C509, in accordance with the requirements of
AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation and with the
recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C509. Make and assemble joints to
gate valves and check valves as specified for making and assembling the
same type joints between pipe and fittings.
b.
Installation of Hydrants: Install hydrants in accordance with
AWWA C600 for hydrant installation and as indicated. Make and assemble
joints as specified for making and assembling the same type joints
between pipe and fittings. Provide metal harness as specified under
pipe anchorage requirements for the respective pipeline material to
which hydrant is attached. Install hydrants with the 4 1/2 inch
connections facing the adjacent paved surface. If there are two paved
adjacent surfaces, contact the Contracting Officer for further
instructions.
3.1.3
3.1.3.1
Special Requirements for Installation of Water Service Piping
Installation of Metallic Piping
Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" and with the applicable
requirements of AWWA C600 for pipe installation, unless otherwise specified.
a.
Jointing:
(1)
3.1.4
Joints for Copper Tubing: Cut copper tubing with square ends;
remove fins and burrs. Handle tubing carefully; replace dented,
gouged, or otherwise damaged tubing with undamaged tubing. Make
solder joints using ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony or Grade Sn96
solder. Solder and flux shall contain not more than 0.2 percent
lead. Before making joint, clean ends of tubing and inside of
fitting or coupling with wire brush or abrasive. Apply a rosin
flux to the tubing end and on recess inside of fitting or
coupling. Insert tubing end into fitting or coupling for the full
depth of the recess and solder. For compression joints on flared
tubing, insert tubing through the coupling nut and flare tubing.
Disinfection
Prior to disinfection, obtain Contracting Officer approval of the proposed
method for disposal of waste water from disinfection procedures. Disinfect
new water piping and existing water piping affected by Contractor's
operations in accordance with AWWA C651. Fill piping systems with solution
containing minimum of 50 parts per million of available chlorine and allow
solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours.
Flush solution from the
systems with domestic water until maximum residual chlorine content is
within the range of 0.2 and 0.5 parts per million, or the residual chlorine
content of domestic water supply. Obtain at least two consecutive
satisfactory bacteriological samples from new water piping, analyze by a
certified laboratory, and submit the results prior to the new water piping
being placed into service. Disinfection of systems supplying nonpotable
water is not required.
3.2
3.2.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Field Tests and Inspections
Prior to hydrostatic testing, obtain Contracting Officer approval of the
proposed method for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic testing. The
Contracting Officer will conduct field inspections and witness field tests
specified in this section. The Contractor shall perform field tests, and
provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. The
Contractor shall produce evidence, when required, that any item of work has
been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
3.2.2
Testing Procedure
Test water mains and water service lines in accordance with the applicable
specified standard, except for the special testing requirements given in
paragraph entitled "Special Testing Requirements." Test ductile-iron water
mains in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for hydrostatic
testing. The amount of leakage on ductile-iron pipelines with
mechanical-joints or push-on joints shall not exceed the amounts given in
AWWA C600; no leakage will be allowed at joints made by any other method.
3.2.3
Special Testing Requirements
For pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi greater than the
maximum working pressure of the system, except that for those portions of
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
the system having pipe size larger than 2 inches in diameter, hydrostatic
test pressure shall be not less than 200 psi. Hold this pressure for not
less than 2 hours. Prior to the pressure test, fill that portion of the
pipeline being tested with water for a soaking period of not less than 24
hours. For leakage test, use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the
maximum working pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at
the same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test.
3.3
CLEANUP
Upon completion of the installation of water lines, and appurtenances, all
debris and surplus materials resulting from the work shall be removed.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 33 30 00
SANITARY SEWERS
04/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C104/A21.4
(2013) Cement-Mortar Lining for
Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water
AWWA C110/A21.10
(2012) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings
for Water
AWWA C111/A21.11
(2012) Rubber-Gasket Joints for
Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
AWWA C153/A21.53
(2011) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for
Water Service
AWWA C600
(2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water
Mains and Their Appurtenances
AWWA C605
(2013) Underground Installation of
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and
Fittings for Water
AWWA C900
(2007; Errata 2008) Polyvinyl Chloride
(PVC) Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated
Fittings, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm
Through 300 mm), for Water Distribution
AWWA M23
(2002; 2nd Ed) Manual:
and Installation
PVC Pipe - Design
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C270
(2012a) Standard Specification for Mortar
for Unit Masonry
ASTM C443
(2011) Standard Specification for Joints
for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using
Rubber Gaskets
ASTM C478
(2013) Standard Specification for Precast
Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
ASTM C923
(2008; R 2013) Standard Specification for
Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced
Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Laterals
ASTM C94/C94M
(2014) Standard Specification for
Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C990
(2009) Standard Specification for Joints
for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast
Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible
Joint Sealants
ASTM D3139
(1998; R 2011) Joints for Plastic Pressure
Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D4101
(2011) Standard Specification for
Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion
Materials
ASTM F477
(2010) Standard Specification for
Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.27
Fixed Ladders
UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA)
UBPPA UNI-B-6
1.2
(1998) Recommended Practice for
Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed
Sewer Pipe
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Precast concrete manhole
Metal items
Frames, covers, and gratings
SD-03 Product Data
Pipeline materials
1.3
1.3.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications
Install specified materials by a licensed underground utility Contractor
licensed for such work in the state where the work is to be performed.
Installing Contractor's License shall be current and be state certified or
state registered.
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.4
1313775
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.4.1
Delivery and Storage
1.4.1.1
Piping
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of
handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective
coverings. Store plastic piping and jointing materials and rubber gaskets
under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the
ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.
1.4.1.2
Metal Items
Check upon arrival; identify and segregate as to types, functions, and
sizes. Store off the ground in a manner affording easy accessibility and
not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable
materials.
1.4.2
Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such manner as to ensure
delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care not
to damage linings of pipe and fittings; if lining is damaged, make
satisfactory repairs. Carry, do not drag, pipe to trench.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
PIPELINE MATERIALS
Pipe shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements
specified below. Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts.
2.1.1
PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Associated Fittings
2.1.1.1
PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings
Pipe shall conform to AWWA C900 and shall be plain end or gasket bell
end, Pressure Class 150 (DR 18), with cast-iron-pipe-equivalent OD.
Fittings shall be gray-iron or ductile-iron conforming to
AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53 and shall have cement-mortar
lining conforming to AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness. Fittings
with push-on joint ends shall conform to the same requirements as
fittings with mechanical-joint ends, except that bell design shall be
modified, as approved, for push-on joint suitable for use with the PVC
plastic pressure pipe specified in this paragraph.
2.1.1.2
PVC Plastic Pressure Joints and Jointing Material
Joints for pipe shall be push-on joints as specified in ASTM D3139. Joints
between pipe and fittings shall be push-on joints as specified in ASTM D3139
or shall be compression-type joints/mechanical-joints as respectively
specified in ASTM D3139 and AWWA C111/A21.11. Each joint connection shall
be provided with an elastomeric gasket suitable for the bell or coupling
with which it is to be used. Gaskets for push-on joints for pipe shall
conform to ASTM F477. Gaskets for push-on joints and compression-type
joints/mechanical-joints for joint connections between pipe and fittings
shall be as specified in AWWA C111/A21.11, respectively, for push-on joints
and mechanical-joints.
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.2
1313775
CONCRETE MATERIALS
2.2.1
Cement Mortar
Cement mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Type M with Type II cement.
2.2.2
Portland Cement Concrete
Portland cement concrete shall conform to ASTM C94/C94M, compressive
strength of 4000 psi at 28 days, except for concrete cradle and encasement
or concrete blocks for manholes. Concrete used for cradle and encasement
shall have a compressive strength of 2500 psi minimum at 28 days. Concrete
in place shall be protected from freezing and moisture loss for 7 days.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.3.1
Precast Concrete Manholes
Precast concrete manhole risers, base sections, and tops shall conform to
ASTM C478.
2.3.2
Gaskets and Connectors
Gaskets for joints between manhole sections shall conform to ASTM C443.
Resilient connectors for making joints between manhole and pipes entering
manhole shall conform to ASTM C923 or ASTM C990.
2.3.3
Metal Items
2.3.3.1
Frames, Covers, and Gratings for Manholes
Frames and covers shall be cast iron, ductile iron or reinforced concrete.
Cast iron frames and covers shall be as indicated or shall be of type
suitable for the application, circular, without vent holes. The frames and
covers shall have a combined weight of not less than 400 pounds.
Reinforced concrete frames and covers shall be as indicated or shall
conform to ASTM C478. The word "Sanitary Sewer" shall be stamped or cast
into covers so that it is plainly visible.
2.3.3.2
Manhole Steps
Zinc-coated steel conforming to 29 CFR 1910.27. As an option, plastic or
rubber coating pressure-molded to the steel may be used. Plastic coating
shall conform to ASTM D4101, copolymer polypropylene. Rubber shall conform
to ASTM C443, except shore A durometer hardness shall be 70 plus or minus 5.
Aluminum steps or rungs will not be permitted. Steps are not required in
manholes less than 4 feet deep.
PART 3
3.1
3.1.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT CONSTRUCTION
General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines
These general requirements apply except where specific exception is made in
the following paragraphs entitled "Special Requirements."
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.1.1.1
1313775
Location
Where sanitary sewer lines pass above water lines, encase sewer in concrete
for a distance of 10 feet on each side of the crossing, or substitute
rubber-gasketed pressure pipe for the pipe being used for the same distance.
Where sanitary sewer lines pass below water lines, lay pipe so that no
joint in the sewer line will be closer than 10 feet, horizontal distance,
to the water line.
a.
Sanitary piping installation parallel with water line:
(1)
Normal conditions: Sanitary piping or manholes shall be laid at
least 10 feet horizontally from a water line whenever possible.
The distance shall be measured edge-to-edge.
(2)
Unusual conditions: When local conditions prevent a horizontal
separation of 10 feet, the sanitary piping or manhole may be laid
closer to a water line provided that:
(a) The top (crown) of the sanitary piping shall be at least 18
inches below the bottom (invert) of the water main.
(b) Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained, the
sanitary piping shall be constructed of AWWA-approved ductile iron
water pipe pressure tested in place without leakage prior to
backfilling.
(c) The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and
tested in place.
b.
Installation of sanitary piping crossing a water line:
(1)
Normal conditions: Lay sanitary sewer piping by crossing under
water lines to provide a separation of at least 18 inches between
the top of the sanitary piping and the bottom of the water line
whenever possible.
(2)
Unusual conditions: When local conditions prevent a vertical
separation described above, use the following construction:
(a) Sanitary piping passing over or under water lines shall be
constructed of AWWA-approved ductile iron water pipe, pressure
tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling.
(b) Sanitary piping passing over water lines shall, in addition,
be protected by providing:
c.
(1)
A vertical separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of
the sanitary piping and the top of the water line.
(2)
Adequate structural support for the sanitary piping to prevent
excessive deflection of the joints and the settling on and
breaking of the water line.
(3)
That the length, minimum 20 feet, of the sanitary piping be
centered at the point of the crossing so that joints shall be
equidistant and as far as possible from the water line.
Sanitary sewer manholes:
No water piping shall pass through or come in
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
contact with any part of a sanitary sewer manhole.
3.1.1.2
Earthwork
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20
EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3.1.1.3
Pipe Laying and Jointing
Inspect each pipe and fitting before and after installation; replace those
found defective and remove from site. Provide proper facilities for
lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lay nonpressure pipe with the bell
ends in the upgrade direction. Adjust spigots in bells to give a uniform
space all around. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not
be permitted. Replace by one of the proper dimensions, pipe or fittings
that do not allow sufficient space for installation of joint material. At
the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood
blocks or bulkheads. Provide batterboards not more than 25 feet apart in
trenches for checking and ensuring that pipe invert elevations are as
indicated. Laser beam method may be used in lieu of batterboards for the
same purpose. Branch connections shall be made by use of regular fittings
or solvent cemented saddles as approved.
3.1.1.4
Connections to Existing Lines
Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer before making connection to
existing line. Conduct work so that there is minimum interruption of
service on existing line.
3.1.2
Special Requirements
3.1.2.1
Installation of PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings
Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with
paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of
this section; with the requirements of AWWA C605 for laying of pipe,
joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, and setting of hydrants,
valves, and fittings; and with the recommendations for pipe joint assembly
and appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation."
Make push-on joints with the elastomeric gaskets specified for this type
joint, using either elastomeric-gasket bell-end pipe or
elastomeric-gasket couplings. For pipe-to-pipe push-on joint
connections, use only pipe with push-on joint ends having factory-made
bevel; for push-on joint connections to fittings, cut spigot end of
pipe off square and re-bevel pipe end to a bevel approximately the same
as that on ductile-iron pipe used for the same type of joint. Use an
approved lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer for push-on
joints. Assemble push-on joints for pipe-to-pipe joint connections in
accordance with the requirements of AWWA C605 for laying the pipe and
the recommendations in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation," for pipe
joint assembly. Assemble push-on joints for connection to fittings in
accordance with the requirements of AWWA C605 for joining PVC pipe to
fittings and accessories and with the applicable requirements of
AWWA C600 for joint assembly. Make compression-type
joints/mechanical-joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, nuts, and
internal stiffeners specified for this type joint and assemble in
accordance with the requirements of AWWA C605 for joining PVC pipe to
fittings and accessories, with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
for joint assembly, and with the recommendations of Appendix A to
AWWA C111/A21.11. Cut off spigot end of pipe for compression-type
joint/mechanical-joint connections and do not re-bevel.
3.1.3
Manhole Construction
Construct base slab of cast-in-place concrete or use precast concrete base
sections. Make inverts in cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete
bases with a smooth-surfaced semi-circular bottom conforming to the inside
contour of the adjacent sewer sections. For changes in direction of the
sewer and entering branches into the manhole, make a circular curve in the
manhole invert of as large a radius as manhole size will permit. For
cast-in-place concrete construction, either pour bottom slabs and walls
integrally or key and bond walls to bottom slab. No parging will be
permitted on interior manhole walls. For precast concrete construction,
make joints between manhole sections with the gaskets specified for this
purpose; install in the manner specified for installing joints in concrete
piping. Parging will not be required for precast concrete manholes.
Cast-in-place concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified under paragraph entitled "Concrete Work" of this section. Make
joints between concrete manholes and pipes entering manholes with the
resilient connectors specified for this purpose; install in accordance with
the recommendations of the connector manufacturer. Where a new manhole is
constructed on an existing line, remove existing pipe as necessary to
construct the manhole. Cut existing pipe so that pipe ends are
approximately flush with the interior face of manhole wall, but not
protruding into the manhole. Use resilient connectors as previously
specified for pipe connectors to concrete manholes.
3.1.4
Miscellaneous Construction and Installation
3.1.4.1
Connecting to Existing Manholes
Pipe connections to existing manholes shall be made so that finish work
will conform as nearly as practicable to the applicable requirements
specified for new manholes, including all necessary concrete work, cutting,
and shaping. The connection shall be centered on the manhole. Holes for
the new pipe shall be of sufficient diameter to allow packing cement mortar
around the entire periphery of the pipe but no larger than 1.5 times the
diameter of the pipe. Cutting the manhole shall be done in a manner that
will cause the least damage to the walls.
3.1.4.2
Metal Work
a.
Workmanship and finish: Perform metal work so that workmanship and
finish will be equal to the best practice in modern structural shops
and foundries. Form iron to shape and size with sharp lines and
angles. Do shearing and punching so that clean true lines and surfaces
are produced. Make castings sound and free from warp, cold shuts, and
blow holes that may impair their strength or appearance. Give exposed
surfaces a smooth finish with sharp well-defined lines and arises.
Provide necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets wherever necessary for
fitting and support.
b.
Field painting: After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers,
gratings, and steps not buried in concrete to bare metal of mortar,
rust, grease, dirt, and other deleterious materials and apply a coat of
bituminous paint. Do not paint surfaces subject to abrasion.
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.2
1313775
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.2.1
Field Tests and Inspections
The Contracting Officer will conduct field inspections and witness field
tests specified in this section. Perform field tests and provide labor,
equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Be able to produce
evidence, when required, that each item of work has been constructed in
accordance with the drawings and specifications.
3.2.2
Tests for Nonpressure Lines
Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a
light in a manhole; it shall show a practically full circle of light
through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line. When
pressure piping is used in a nonpressure line for nonpressure use, test
this piping as specified for nonpressure pipe.
3.2.2.1
Leakage Tests
Test lines for leakage by either infiltration tests or exfiltration tests,
or by low-pressure air tests. Prior to testing for leakage, backfill
trench up to at least lower half of pipe. When necessary to prevent
pipeline movement during testing, place additional backfill around pipe
sufficient to prevent movement, but leaving joints uncovered to permit
inspection. When leakage or pressure drop exceeds the allowable amount
specified, make satisfactory correction and retest pipeline section in the
same manner. Correct visible leaks regardless of leakage test results.
a.
Low-pressure air tests:
(1)
Perform tests as follows:
PVC plastic pipelines: Test in accordance with UBPPA UNI-B-6.
Allowable pressure drop shall be as given in UBPPA UNI-B-6. Make
calculations in accordance with the Appendix to UBPPA UNI-B-6.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 33 40 00
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
02/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A48/A48M
(2003; R 2012) Standard Specification for
Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A536
(1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A929/A929M
(2001; R 2013) Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the
Hot-Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe
ASTM B26/B26M
(2012) Standard Specification for
Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings
ASTM C1433
(2014) Standard Specification for Precast
Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for
Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers
ASTM C270
(2012a) Standard Specification for Mortar
for Unit Masonry
ASTM C32
(2013) Standard Specification for Sewer
and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale)
ASTM C425
(2004; R 2013) Standard Specification for
Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe
and Fittings
ASTM C443
(2011) Standard Specification for Joints
for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using
Rubber Gaskets
ASTM C478
(2013) Standard Specification for Precast
Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
ASTM C55
(2011) Concrete Brick
ASTM C62
(2013a) Building Brick (Solid Masonry
Units Made from Clay or Shale)
ASTM C76
(2014) Standard Specification for
Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain,
and Sewer Pipe
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
ASTM C990
(2009) Standard Specification for Joints
for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast
Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible
Joint Sealants
ASTM D1557
(2012) Standard Test Methods for
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000
ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D2167
(2008) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D6938
(2010) Standard Test Method for In-Place
Density and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Placing Pipe; G
Pipe for Culverts and Storm Drains; G
Frame and Cover for Gratings; G
Precast Concrete Structures; G
Submit printed copies of the manufacturer's recommendations for
installation procedures of the material being placed, prior to
installation.
SD-07 Certificates
Determination of Density
1.3
1.3.1
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Delivery and Storage
Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and
stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly
on the ground. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept free of dirt
and debris. Before, during, and after installation, plastic pipe and
fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in
damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's
instructions available at the construction site at all times and follow
these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer.
Solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any
similar materials required to install plastic pipe shall be stored in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be discarded
if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use
shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded.
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.3.2
1313775
Handling
Materials shall be handled in a manner that ensures delivery to the trench
in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe shall be carried to the trench, not
dragged.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
PIPE FOR CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS
Pipe for culverts and storm drains shall be of the sizes indicated and
shall conform to the requirements specified.
2.1.1
Concrete Pipe
Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C76, Class III.
2.2
2.2.1
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Flared End Sections
Sections shall be of a standard design fabricated from zinc coated steel
sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A929/A929M.
2.2.2
Precast Reinforced Concrete Box
Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C1433.
2.3
2.3.1
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Concrete
Unless otherwise specified, concrete and reinforced concrete shall conform
to the requirements for 4,000 psi concrete.
2.3.2
Mortar
Mortar for pipe joints, connections to other drainage structures, and brick
or block construction shall conform to ASTM C270, Type M, except that the
maximum placement time shall be 1 hour. The quantity of water in the
mixture shall be sufficient to produce a stiff workable mortar. Water
shall be clean and free of harmful acids, alkalis, and organic impurities.
The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after the ingredients are mixed
with water. The inside of the joint shall be wiped clean and finished
smooth. The mortar head on the outside shall be protected from air and sun
with a proper covering until satisfactorily cured.
2.3.3
Brick
Brick shall conform to ASTM C62, Grade SW; ASTM C55, Grade S-I or S-II; or
ASTM C32, Grade MS. Mortar for jointing and plastering shall consist of
one part portland cement and two parts fine sand. Lime may be added to the
mortar in a quantity not more than 25 percent of the volume of cement. The
joints shall be filled completely and shall be smooth and free from surplus
mortar on the inside of the structure. Brick structures shall be plastered
with 1/2 inch of mortar over the entire outside surface of the walls. For
square or rectangular structures, brick shall be laid in stretcher courses
with a header course every sixth course. For round structures, brick shall
be laid radially with every sixth course a stretcher course.
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.3.4
1313775
Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes
Conform to ASTM C478. Joints between precast concrete risers and tops
shall be full-bedded in cement mortar and shall be smoothed to a uniform
surface on both interior and exterior of the structure.
2.3.5
Frame and Cover for Gratings
Submit certification on the ability of frame and cover or gratings to carry
the imposed live load. Frame and cover for gratings shall be cast gray
iron, ASTM A48/A48M, Class 35B; cast ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade
65-45-12; or cast aluminum, ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy 356.OT6. Weight, shape,
size, and waterway openings for grates and curb inlets shall be as
indicated on the plans. The word "Storm Sewer" shall be stamped or cast
into covers so that it is plainly visible.
2.3.6
Joints
2.3.6.1
a.
PART 3
3.1
Flexible Watertight Joints
Materials: Flexible watertight joints shall be made with plastic or
rubber-type gaskets for concrete pipe and with factory-fabricated
resilient materials for clay pipe. The design of joints and the
physical requirements for preformed flexible joint sealants shall
conform to ASTM C990, and rubber-type gaskets shall conform to ASTM C443.
Factory-fabricated resilient joint materials shall conform to ASTM C425.
Gaskets shall have not more than one factory-fabricated splice, except
that two factory-fabricated splices of the rubber-type gasket are
permitted if the nominal diameter of the pipe being gasketed exceeds 54
inches.
EXECUTION
EXCAVATION FOR PIPE CULVERTS, STORM DRAINS, AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Excavation of trenches, and for appurtenances and backfilling for culverts
and storm drains, shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of
Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL and the requirements specified
below.
3.1.1
Trenching
The width of trenches at any point below the top of the pipe shall be not
greater than the outside diameter of the pipe plus 12 inches to permit
satisfactory jointing and thorough tamping of the bedding material under
and around the pipe. Sheeting and bracing, where required, shall be placed
within the trench width as specified, without any overexcavation. Where
trench widths are exceeded, redesign with a resultant increase in cost of
stronger pipe or special installation procedures will be necessary. Cost
of this redesign and increased cost of pipe or installation shall be borne
by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.
3.1.2
Removal of Unstable Material
Where wet or otherwise unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the
pipe, as determined by the Contracting Officer, is unexpectedly encountered
in the bottom of a trench, such material shall be removed to the depth
required and replaced to the proper grade with select granular material,
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
compacted as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING. When removal of unstable
material is due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor while performing
shoring and sheeting, water removal, or other specified requirements, such
removal and replacement shall be performed at no additional cost to the
Government.
3.2
BEDDING
The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform
density throughout the entire length of the pipe.
3.2.1
Concrete Pipe Requirements
When no bedding class is specified or detailed on the drawings, concrete
pipe shall be bedded in granular material minimum 4 inch in depth in
trenches with soil foundation. Depth of granular bedding in trenches with
rock foundation shall be 1/2 inch in depth per foot of depth of fill,
minimum depth of bedding shall be 8 inch up to maximum depth of 24 inches.
The middle third of the granular bedding shall be loosely placed. Bell
holes and depressions for joints shall be removed and formed so entire
barrel of pipe is uniformly supported. The bell hole and depressions for
the joints shall be not more than the length, depth, and width required for
properly making the particular type of joint.
3.3
PLACING PIPE
Each pipe shall be thoroughly examined before being laid; defective or
damaged pipe shall not be used. Pipelines shall be laid to the grades and
alignment indicated. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering
sections of pipe into trenches. Lifting lugs in vertically elongated metal
pipe shall be placed in the same vertical plane as the major axis of the
pipe. Pipe shall not be laid in water, and pipe shall not be laid when
trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. Diversion of
drainage or dewatering of trenches during construction shall be provided as
necessary.
3.3.1
Concrete Pipe
Laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe and
tongue ends of tongue-and-groove pipe pointing in the direction of the flow.
3.4
JOINTING
3.4.1
3.4.1.1
Concrete Pipe
Flexible Watertight Joints
Gaskets and jointing materials shall be as recommended by the particular
manufacturer in regard to use of lubricants, cements, adhesives, and other
special installation requirements. Surfaces to receive lubricants,
cements, or adhesives shall be clean and dry. Gaskets and jointing
materials shall be affixed to the pipe not more than 24 hours prior to the
installation of the pipe, and shall be protected from the sun, blowing
dust, and other deleterious agents at all times. Gaskets and jointing
materials shall be inspected before installing the pipe; any loose or
improperly affixed gaskets and jointing materials shall be removed and
replaced. The pipe shall be aligned with the previously installed pipe,
and the joint pushed home. If, while the joint is being made the gasket
becomes visibly dislocated the pipe shall be removed and the joint remade.
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.5
1313775
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
3.5.1
Manholes and Inlets
Construction shall be of reinforced concrete, plain concrete, brick,
precast reinforced concrete, precast concrete segmental blocks,
prefabricated corrugated metal, or bituminous coated corrugated metal;
complete with frames and covers or gratings; and with fixed galvanized
steel ladders where indicated. Pipe studs and junction chambers of
prefabricated corrugated metal manholes shall be fully bituminous-coated
and paved when the connecting branch lines are so treated. Pipe
connections to concrete manholes and inlets shall be made with flexible,
watertight connectors.
3.5.2
Walls and Headwalls
Construction shall be as indicated.
3.6
BACKFILLING
3.6.1
Backfilling Pipe in Trenches
After the pipe has been properly bedded, selected material from excavation
or borrow, at a moisture content that will facilitate compaction, shall be
placed along both sides of pipe in layers not exceeding 6 inches in
compacted depth. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of
pipe for the full length of pipe. The fill shall be thoroughly compacted
under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted
with mechanical tampers or rammers. This method of filling and compacting
shall continue until the fill has reached an elevation equal to the
midpoint (spring line) of RCP or has reached an elevation of at least 12
inches above the top of the pipe for flexible pipe. The remainder of the
trench shall be backfilled and compacted by spreading and rolling or
compacted by mechanical rammers or tampers in layers not exceeding 6 inches.
Tests for density shall be made as necessary to ensure conformance to the
compaction requirements specified below. Where it is necessary, in the
opinion of the Contracting Officer, that sheeting or portions of bracing
used be left in place, the contract will be adjusted accordingly.
Untreated sheeting shall not be left in place beneath structures or
pavements.
3.6.2
Movement of Construction Machinery
When compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with the
pipe, displacement of or injury to the pipe shall be avoided. Movement of
construction machinery over a culvert or storm drain at any stage of
construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Any damaged pipe shall be
repaired or replaced.
3.6.3
3.6.3.1
Compaction
General Requirements
Cohesionless materials include gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, sands, and
gravelly sands. Cohesive materials include clayey and silty gravels,
gravel-silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand-clay mixtures, clays,
silts, and very fine sands. When results of compaction tests for
moisture-density relations are recorded on graphs, cohesionless soils will
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
show straight lines or reverse-shaped moisture-density curves, and cohesive
soils will show normal moisture-density curves.
3.6.3.2
Minimum Density
Backfill over and around the pipe and backfill around and adjacent to
drainage structures shall be compacted at the approved moisture content to
the following applicable minimum density, which will be determined as
specified below.
a.
Under airfield and heliport pavements, paved roads, streets, parking
areas, and similar-use pavements including adjacent shoulder areas, the
density shall be not less than 90 percent of maximum density for
cohesive material and 95 percent of maximum density for cohesionless
material, up to the elevation where requirements for pavement subgrade
materials and compaction shall control.
b.
Under unpaved or turfed traffic areas, density shall not be less than
90 percent of maximum density for cohesive material and 95 percent of
maximum density for cohesionless material.
c.
Under nontraffic areas, density shall be not less than that of the
surrounding material.
3.6.4
Determination of Density
Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor and performed at no
additional cost to the Government. Testing shall be performed by an
approved commercial testing laboratory or by the Contractor subject to
approval. Tests shall be performed in sufficient number to ensure that
specified density is being obtained. Laboratory tests for moisture-density
relations shall be made in accordance with ASTM D1557 except that
mechanical tampers may be used provided the results are correlated with
those obtained with the specified hand tamper. Field density tests shall
be determined in accordance with ASTM D2167 or ASTM D6938. When ASTM D6938
is used, the calibration curves shall be checked and adjusted, if
necessary, using the sand cone method as described in paragraph Calibration
of the referenced publications. ASTM D6938 results in a wet unit weight of
soil and ASTM D6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the
soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall be
checked along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D6938.
Test results shall be furnished the Contracting Officer. The calibration
checks of both the density and moisture gauges shall be made at the
beginning of a job on each different type of material encountered and at
intervals as directed.
3.7
3.7.1
PIPELINE TESTING
Post-Installation Inspection
One hundred percent of all reinforced concrete pipe installations shall be
checked for joint separations, soil migration through the joint, cracks
greater than 0.01 inches, settlement and alignment.
a.
Replace pipes having cracks greater than 0.1 inches in width or
deflection greater than 5 percent deflection. An engineer shall
evaluate all pipes with cracks greater than 0.01 inches but less than
0.10 inches to determine if any remediation or repair is required.
Repair or replace any pipe with crack exhibiting displacement across
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
the crack, exhibiting bulges, creases, tears, spalls, or delamination.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 33 71 01
OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
07/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B16.11
(2011) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
Threaded
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A123/A123M
(2013) Standard Specification for Zinc
(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
ASTM A153/A153M
(2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
ASTM A475
(2003a; E 2009; R 2009) Standard
Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire
Strand
ASTM A53/A53M
(2012) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM B117
(2011) Standard Practice for Operating
Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B3
(2013) Standard Specification for Soft or
Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM D1654
(2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated
Specimens Subjected to Corrosive
Environments
ASTM D709
(2013) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE C2
(2012; Errata 2012; INT 1-4 2012; INT 5-6
2013) National Electrical Safety Code
IEEE C37.42
(2009) Standard Specifications for
High-Voltage (> 1000 V) Expulsion-Type
SECTION 33 71 01
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Distribution-Class Fuses, Fuse and
Disconnecting Cutouts, Fuse Disconnecting
Switches, and Fuse Links, and Accessories
Used with These Devices
IEEE C62.11
(2012) Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge
Arresters for Alternating Current Power
Circuits (>1kV)
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)
NETA ATS
(2013) Standard for Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C29.4
(1989; R 2012) Standard for Wet-Process
Porcelain Insulators - Strain Type
ANSI C29.5
(1984; R 2002) Wet-Process Porcelain
Insulators (Low and Medium Voltage Pin
Type)
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2
2013; Errata 2 2013) National Electrical
Code
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)
RUS 202-1
(2004) List of Materials Acceptable for
Use on Systems of RUS Electrification
Borrowers
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 467
(2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 486A-486B
(2013; Reprint Dec 2013) Wire Connectors
UL 510
(2005; Reprint Jul 2013) Polyvinyl
Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber
Insulating Tape
UL 6
(2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid
Metal Conduit-Steel
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section
with additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms
used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in
SECTION 33 71 01
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
IEEE 100.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Insulators; G
Cutouts; G
Surge arresters; G
Guy strand
Anchors
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control; G
Ground resistance test reports; G
Submit report of the acceptance test results as specified by
paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control"
1.5
1.5.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 unless more stringent
requirements are specified or indicated.
1.5.2
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
SECTION 33 71 01
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1.5.2.1
1313775
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.5.2.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.5.3
Ground Resistance Test Reports
Submit the measured ground resistance of grounding system. When testing
grounding electrodes and grounding systems, identify each grounding
electrode and each grounding system for testing. Include the test method
and test setup (i.e. pin location) used to determine ground resistance and
soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Devices and equipment shall be visually inspected by the Contractor when
received and prior to acceptance from conveyance. Stored items shall be
protected from the environment in accordance with the manufacturer's
published instructions. Damaged items shall be replaced. Oil filled
transformers and switches shall be stored in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements.
1.7
WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Consider materials specified herein or shown on contract drawings which are
identical to materials listed in RUS 202-1 as conforming to requirements.
Equipment and component items, not hot-dip galvanized or porcelain enamel
finished, shall be provided with corrosion-resistant finishes which shall
withstand 120 hours of exposure to the salt spray test specified in
ASTM B117 without loss of paint or release of adhesion of the paint primer
coat to the metal surface in excess of 1/16 inch from the test mark. The
described test mark and test evaluation shall be in accordance with
ASTM D1654 with a rating of not less than 7 in accordance with TABLE 1,
(procedure A). Cut edges or otherwise damaged surfaces of hot-dip
galvanized sheet steel or mill galvanized sheet steel shall be coated with
a zinc rich paint conforming to the manufacturer's standard.
2.2
HARDWARE
Hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M and
ASTM A123/A123M.
SECTION 33 71 01
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.3
1313775
INSULATORS
Provide wet-process porcelain insulators which are radio interference free.
a. Guy strain insulators:
e. Pin insulators:
2.4
2.4.1
ANSI C29.4, Class 54-4.
ANSI C29.5, Class 55-3.
OVERHEAD CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
Connectors and Splices
Connectors and splices shall be of copper alloys for copper conductors,
aluminum alloys for aluminum-composition conductors, and a type designed to
minimize galvanic corrosion for copper to aluminum-composition conductors.
Aluminum-composition, aluminum-composition to copper, and copper-to-copper
shall comply with UL 486A-486B.
2.5
GUY STRAND
ASTM A475, high-strength, Class A or B, galvanized strand steel cable. Guy
strand shall be 5/16 inch in diameter with a minimum breaking strength of
6,000 pounds. Provide guy terminations designed for use with the
particular strand and developing at least the ultimate breaking strength of
the strand.
2.6
ROUND GUY MARKERS
Vinyl or PVC material, yellow colored, 8 feet long and shatter resistant at
sub-zero temperatures.
2.6.1
Guy Attachment
Thimble eye guy attachment.
2.7
ANCHORS AND ANCHOR RODS
Anchors shall present holding area indicated on drawings as a minimum.
Anchor rods shall be triple thimble-eye, 3/4 inch diameter by 8 feet long.
Anchors and anchor rods shall be hot dip galvanized.
2.7.1
Screw Anchors
Screw type anchors having a manufacturer's rating of not less than 23,000
pounds in loose to medium sand/clay soil, Class 6 and extra heavy pipe rods
conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 80, and couplings conforming to
ASME B16.11.
2.8
2.8.1
GROUNDING AND BONDING
Driven Ground Rods
Provide copper-clad steel ground rods conforming to UL 467 not less than
3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length. Sectional type rods may be used
for rods 20 feet or longer.
2.8.2
Grounding Conductors
ASTM B3.
Provide soft drawn copper wire ground conductors a minimum No. 4
SECTION 33 71 01
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
AWG. Ground wire protectors shall be PVC.
2.8.3
Grounding Connections
UL 467.
2.9
Exothermic weld or compression connector.
SURGE ARRESTERS
IEEE C62.11, metal oxide, polymeric-housed, surge arresters arranged for
crossarm mounting. RMS voltage rating shall be 12 kV. Arresters shall be
Distribution class.
2.10
FUSED CUTOUTS
Open type fused cutouts rated 100 amperes 15/26 kV gnd Y, conforming to
IEEE C37.42. Type K fuses conforming to IEEE C37.42 with ampere ratings as
indicated. Open link type fuse cutouts are not acceptable.
2.11
CONDUIT RISERS AND CONDUCTORS
The riser shield shall be PVC containing a PVC back plate and PVC extension
shield or a rigid galvanized steel conduit, as indicated, and conforming to
UL 6. Provide conductors and terminations as specified in Section 33 71 02
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.
2.12
ELECTRICAL TAPES
Tapes shall be UL listed for electrical insulation and other purposes in
wire and cable splices. Terminations, repairs and miscellaneous purposes,
electrical tapes shall comply with UL 510.
2.13
CAULKING COMPOUND
Compound for sealing of conduit risers shall be of a puttylike consistency
workable with hands at temperatures as low as 35 degrees F, shall not slump
at a temperature of 300 degrees F, and shall not harden materially when
exposed to air. Compound shall readily caulking or adhere to clean
surfaces of the materials with which it is designed to be used. Compound
shall have no injurious effects upon the workmen or upon the materials.
2.14
2.14.1
NAMEPLATES
Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable. Equipment containing liquid-dielectrics shall have the type of
dielectric on the nameplate.
2.14.2
Field Fabricated Nameplates
ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment
enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the
drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when
applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch
thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish.
Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the
core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering
SECTION 33 71 01
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Provide overhead pole line installation conforming to requirements of
IEEE C2 for Grade B construction of overhead lines in medium loading
districts and NFPA 70 for overhead services. Provide material required to
make connections into existing system and perform excavating, backfilling,
and other incidental labor. Consider street, alleys, roads and drives
"public." Pole configuration shall be as indicated.
3.1.1
Anchors and Guys
Place anchors in line with strain. The length of the guy lead (distance
from base of pole to the top of the anchor rod) shall be as indicated.
3.1.1.1
Setting Anchors
Set anchors in place with anchor rod aligned with, and pointing directly
at, guy attachment on the pole with the anchor rod projecting 6 to 9 inches
out of ground to prevent burial of rod eye.
3.1.1.2
Backfilling Near Anchors
Backfill expanding, concrete, or cone type anchors with tightly tamped
coarse rock 2 feet immediately above anchor and then with tightly tamped
earth filling remainder of hole.
3.1.1.3
Screw Anchors
Install screw anchors by torquing with boring machine.
3.1.1.4
Guy Installation
Provide guys where indicated, with loads and strengths as indicated, and
wherever conductor tensions are not balanced, such as at angles, corners
and dead-ends. Where single guy will not provide the required strength,
two or more guys shall be provided. Where guys are wrapped around poles,
at least two guy hooks shall be provided. Provide pole shims where guy
tension exceeds 6000 pounds. Guy clamps 6 inches in length with three 5/8
inch bolts, or offset-type guy clamps, or approved guy grips shall be
provided at each guy terminal. Securely clamp plastic guy marker to the
guy or anchor at the bottom and top of marker.Complete anchor and guy
installation, dead end to dead end, and tighten guy before wire stringing
and sagging is begun on that line section.
3.1.2
Hardware
Provide hardware with washer against wood and with nuts and lock nuts
applied wrench tight. Provide locknuts on threaded hardware connections.
Locknuts shall be M-F style and not palnut style.
3.1.3
Grounding
Unless otherwise indicated, grounding shall conform to IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.
SECTION 33 71 01
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.1.3.1
1313775
Grounding Electrode Installation
Grounding electrodes shall be installed as follows:
a.
Driven rod electrodes - Unless otherwise indicated, ground rods shall
be located approximately 3 feetout from base of the pole and shall be
driven into the earth until the tops of the rods are approximately 1
foot below finished grade. Multiple rods shall be evenly spaced at
least 10 feet apart and connected together 2 feet below grade with a
minimum No. 6 bare copper conductor.
3.1.3.2
Grounding Electrode Conductors
Grounding electrode conductors shall be sized as indicated. Secondary
system neutral conductors shall be connected directly to the transformer
neutral bushings, then connected with a neutral bonding jumper between the
transformer neutral bushing and the vertical grounding electrode conductor
as indicated. Bends greater than 45 degrees in grounding electrode
conductor are not permitted.
3.1.3.3
Grounding Electrode Connections
Make above grade grounding connections on pole lines by exothermic weld or
by using a compression connector. Make below grade grounding connections
by exothermic weld. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with
manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which have puffed up or
which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning, are not
acceptable. No mechanical connectors are required at exothermic
weldments. Compression connectors shall be type that uses a hydraulic
compression tool to provide correct pressure. Provide tools and dies
recommended by compression connector manufacturer. An embossing die code
or similar method shall provide visible indication that a connector has
been fully compressed on ground wire.
3.1.3.4
Grounding and Grounded Connections
a.
Where no primary or common neutral exists, surge arresters and frames
of equipment operating at over 750 volts shall be bonded together and
connected to a dedicated primary grounding electrode.
b.
Where no primary or common neutral exists, transformer secondary
neutral bushing, secondary neutral conductor, and frames of equipment
operating at under 750 volts shall be bonded together and connected to
a dedicated secondary grounding electrode.
c.
When a primary or common neutral exists, connect all grounding and
grounded conductors to a common grounding electrode.
3.1.3.5
Protective Molding
Protect grounding conductors which are run on surface of wood poles by PVC
molding extending from ground line throughout communication and transformer
spaces.
3.1.4
Risers
Secure galvanized steel conduits on poles by two hole galvanized steel pipe
straps spaced as indicated and within 3 feet of any outlet or termination.
Ground metallic conduits.
SECTION 33 71 01
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.2
1313775
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria.
3.3
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as
indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4.1
General
Field testing shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting
Officer. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer 15 days prior
to conducting tests. The Contractor shall furnish materials, labor, and
equipment necessary to conduct field tests. The Contractor shall perform
tests and inspections recommended by the manufacturer unless specifically
waived by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall maintain a written
record of tests which includes date, test performed, personnel involved,
devices tested, serial number and name of test equipment, and test
results.
Field reports will be signed and dated by the Contractor.
3.4.2
Safety
The Contractor shall provide and use safety devices such as rubber gloves,
protective barriers, and danger signs to protect and warn personnel in the
test vicinity. The Contractor shall replace any devices or equipment which
are damaged due to improper test procedures or handling.
3.4.3
Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests
Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include
the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests,
performed in accordance with NETA ATS.
3.4.3.1
a.
Grounding System
Visual and mechanical inspection
Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications.
b.
Electrical tests
Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential
method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform
tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a
single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take
measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after
rainfall. Use a portable ground testing megger in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds.
The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms
or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or
grounding systems under test.
SECTION 33 71 01
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.4.4
1313775
Devices Subject to Manual Operation
Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least three
times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.
3.4.5
Follow-Up Verification
Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show
by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating
condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception
to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer
shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of
checking and testing.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 33 71 01
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
SECTION 33 71 02
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
02/14
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
(AASHTO)
AASHTO HB-17
(2002; Errata 2003; Errata 2005, 17th
Edition) Standard Specifications for
Highway Bridges
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)
ACI 318M
(2011; Errata 2013) Building Code
Requirements for Structural Concrete &
Commentary
ACI SP-66
(2004) ACI Detailing Manual
ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)
AEIC CS8
(2007) specification for Extruded
Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5
Through 46 kV
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B1
(2013) Standard Specification for
Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
ASTM B3
(2013) Standard Specification for Soft or
Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM B496
(2013a) Standard Specification for Compact
Round Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors
ASTM B8
(2011) Standard Specification for
Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
ASTM C309
(2011) Standard Specification for Liquid
Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
ASTM C32
(2013) Standard Specification for Sewer
and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale)
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 1
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
ASTM C478
(2013) Standard Specification for Precast
Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
ASTM C857
(2013) Standard Practice for Minimum
Structural Design Loading for Underground
Precast Concrete Utility Structures
ASTM C990
(2009) Standard Specification for Joints
for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast
Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible
Joint Sealants
ASTM F512
(2012) Smooth-Wall Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Conduit and Fittings for Underground
Installation
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 386
(2006; INT 1 2011) Standard for Separable
Insulated Connector Systems for Power
Distribution Systems Above 600V
IEEE 400.2
(2013) Guide for Field Testing of Shielded
Power Cable Systems Using Very Low
Frequency (VLF)
IEEE 404
(2012) Standard for Extruded and Laminated
Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated
2500 V to 500,000 V
IEEE 48
(2009) Standard for Test Procedures and
Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable
Terminations Used on Shielded Cables
Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV
through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation
Rated 2.5 kV through 500 kV
IEEE 81
(2012) Guide for Measuring Earth
Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System
IEEE C2
(2012; Errata 2012; INT 1-4 2012; INT 5-6
2013) National Electrical Safety Code
IEEE Stds Dictionary
(2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary
of Terms & Definitions
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)
NETA ATS
(2013) Standard for Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C119.1
(2011) Electric Connectors - Sealed
Insulated Underground Connector Systems
Rated 600 Volts
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 2
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659
(1999) Standard for Nonshielded Cables
Rated 2001-5000 Volts for use in the
Distribution of Electric Energy
NEMA TC 2
(2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) Conduit
NEMA TC 9
(2004) Standard for Fittings for Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for
Underground Installation
NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639
(2012) 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for
Use in the Transmission and Distribution
of Electric Energy
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2
2013; Errata 2 2013) National Electrical
Code
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)
TIA-758
(2012b) Customer-Owned Outside Plant
Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
THE SOCIETY OF CABLE TELECOMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERS (SCTE)
ANSI/SCTE 77
(2013) Specification for Underground
Enclosure Integrity
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)
RUS Bull 1751F-644
(2002) Underground Plant Construction
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
CID A-A-60005
(Basic; Notice 2) Frames, Covers,
Gratings, Steps, Sump And Catch Basin,
Manhole
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1072
(2006; Reprint Jun 2013) Medium-Voltage
Power Cables
UL 467
(2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 486A-486B
(2013; Reprint Dec 2013) Wire Connectors
UL 510
(2005; Reprint Jul 2013) Polyvinyl
Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber
Insulating Tape
UL 514B
(2012) Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings
UL 6
(2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid
Metal Conduit-Steel
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 3
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
UL 651
(2011; Reprint Mar 2012) Standard for
Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and
Fittings
UL 83
(2008) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and
Cables
UL 854
(2004; Reprint Sep 2011) Standard for
Service-Entrance Cables
1.2
DEFINITIONS
a.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics
terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined
in IEEE Stds Dictionary.
b.
In the text of this section, the words conduit and duct are used
interchangeably and have the same meaning.
c.
In the text of this section, "medium voltage cable splices," and
"medium voltage cable joints" are used interchangeably and have the
same meaning.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Precast underground structures; G
SD-03 Product Data
Medium voltage cable; G
Medium voltage cable joints; G
Medium voltage cable terminations; G
Precast concrete structures; G
Sealing Material
Pulling-In Irons
Manhole frames and covers; G
Handhole frames and covers; G
Composite/fiberglass handholes; G
Cable supports (racks, arms and insulators); G
SD-06 Test Reports
Medium voltage cable qualification and production tests; G
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 4
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Field Acceptance Checks and Tests; G
Arc-proofing test for cable fireproofing tape; G
Cable Installation Plan and Procedure; G
Six copies of the information described below in 8-1/2 by 11 inch
binders having a minimum of three rings from which material may
readily be removed and replaced, including a separate section for
each cable pull. Separate sections by heavy plastic dividers with
tabs, with all data sheets signed and dated by the person
supervising the pull.
a.
Site layout drawing with cable pulls numerically identified.
b. A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications.
The manufacturer and quantity of lubricant used on pull.
c.
The cable manufacturer and type of cable.
d. The dates of cable pulls, time of day, and ambient
temperature.
e. The length of cable pull and calculated cable pulling
tensions.
f.
The actual cable pulling tensions encountered during pull.
SD-07 Certificates
Cable splicer/terminator; G
Cable Installer Qualifications; G
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Precast Underground Structures
Submittal required for each type used. Provide calculations and drawings
for precast manholes and handholes bearing the seal of a registered
professional engineer including:
a.
Material description (i.e., f'c and Fy)
b.
Manufacturer's printed assembly and installation instructions
c.
Design calculations
d.
Reinforcing shop drawings in accordance with ACI SP-66
e.
Plans and elevations showing opening and pulling-in iron locations and
details
1.4.2
Certificate of Competency for Cable Splicer/Terminator
The cable splicer/terminator must have a certification from the National
Cable Splicing Certification Board (NCSCB) in the field of splicing and
terminating shielded medium voltage (5 kV to 35 kV) power cable using
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 5
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
pre-manufactured kits (pre-molded, heat-shrink, cold shrink). Submit
"Proof of Certification" for approval, for the individuals that will be
performing cable splicer and termination work, 30 days before splices or
terminations are to be made.
1.4.3
Cable Installer Qualifications
Provide at least one onsite person in a supervisory position with a
documentable level of competency and experience to supervise all cable
pulling operations. Provide a resume showing the cable installers'
experience in the last three years, including a list of references complete
with points of contact, addresses and telephone numbers. Cable installer
must demonstrate experience with a minimum of three medium voltage cable
installations. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require
additional proof of competency or to reject the individual and call for an
alternate qualified cable installer.
1.4.4
Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "must" had been substituted
for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these
publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar
meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship must be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of IEEE C2 and NFPA 70 unless more stringent
requirements are specified or indicated.
1.4.5
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products must have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period must include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product must have been for sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items must be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.4.5.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.4.5.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
are not acceptable, unless specified otherwise.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 6
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2
2.1
1313775
PRODUCTS
CONDUIT, DUCTS, AND FITTINGS
2.1.1
Rigid Metal Conduit
UL 6.
2.1.2
Plastic Conduit for Direct Burial
UL 651, Schedule 40.
2.1.3
Plastic Duct for Concrete Encasement
UL 651 and ASTM F512, NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC.
2.1.4
Innerduct
Provide corrugated polyethylene (PE) or PVC innerducts, or fabric-mesh
innerducts, with pullwire. Size as indicated.
2.1.5
Conduit Sealing Compound
Compounds for sealing ducts and conduit must have a putty-like consistency
workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 35 degrees F, must
neither slump at a temperature of 300 degrees F, nor harden materially when
exposed to the air. Compounds must adhere to clean surfaces of fiber or
plastic ducts; metallic conduits or conduit coatings; concrete, masonry, or
lead; any cable sheaths, jackets, covers, or insulation materials; and the
common metals. Compounds must form a seal without dissolving, noticeably
changing characteristics, or removing any of the ingredients. Compounds
must have no injurious effect upon the hands of workmen or upon materials.
2.1.6
Fittings
2.1.6.1
Metal Fittings
UL 514B.
2.1.6.2
PVC Conduit Fittings
UL 514B, UL 651.
2.1.6.3
PVC Duct Fittings
NEMA TC 9.
2.2
LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Insulated conductors must be rated 600 volts and conform to the
requirements of NFPA 70, including listing requirements. Wires and cables
manufactured more than 24 months prior to date of delivery to the site are
not acceptable. Service entrance conductors must conform to UL 854, type
USE.
2.2.1
Conductor Types
Cable and duct sizes indicated are for copper conductors and THHN/THWN
unless otherwise noted. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller must be solid.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 7
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger must be stranded. All conductors must be
copper.
2.2.2
Conductor Material
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, wires in
conduit, other than service entrance, must be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN
conforming to UL 83. Copper conductors must be annealed copper complying
with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8.
2.2.3
In Duct
2.2.4
Cable Marking
Insulated conductors must have the date of manufacture and other
identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular
intervals throughout the cable length.
Identify each cable by means of a fiber, laminated plastic, or non-ferrous
metal tags, or approved equal, in each manhole, handhole, junction box, and
each terminal. Each tag must contain the following information; cable
type, conductor size, circuit number, circuit voltage, cable destination
and phase identification.
Conductors must be color coded. Provide conductor identification within
each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Conductor
identification must be by color-coded insulated conductors, plastic-coated
self-sticking printed markers, colored nylon cable ties and plates, heat
shrink type sleeves,or colored electrical tape. Control circuit
terminations must be properly identified. Color must be green for
grounding conductors and white for neutrals; except where neutrals of more
than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals must
be white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each. Color of
ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems must be as follows:
a.
208/120 volt, three-phase
(1) Phase A - black
(2) Phase B - red
(3) Phase C - blue
2.3
LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS
Must provide a uniform compression over the entire conductor contact
surface. Use solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.
a.
2.4
For use with copper conductors:
UL 486A-486B.
LOW VOLTAGE SPLICES
Provide splices in conductors with a compression connector on the conductor
and by insulating and waterproofing using one of the following methods
which are suitable for continuous submersion in water and comply with
ANSI C119.1.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 8
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.4.1
1313775
Heat Shrinkable Splice
Provide heat shrinkable splice insulation by means of a thermoplastic
adhesive sealant material applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions.
2.4.2
Cold Shrink Rubber Splice
Provide a cold-shrink rubber splice which consists of EPDM rubber tube
which has been factory stretched onto a spiraled core which is removed
during splice installation. The installation must not require heat or
flame, or any additional materials such as covering or adhesive. It must
be designed for use with inline compression type connectors, or indoor,
outdoor, direct-burial or submerged locations.
2.5
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE
Cable (conductor) sizes are designated by American Wire Gauge (AWG) and
Thousand Circular Mils (Kcmil). Conductor and conduit sizes indicated are
for copper conductors unless otherwise noted. Insulated conductors must
have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the
outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout cable length.
Wires and cables manufactured more than 24 months prior to date of delivery
to the site are not acceptable. Provide single conductor type cables
unless otherwise indicated.
2.5.1
Cable Configuration
Provide Type MV cable, conforming to NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 and UL 1072 .
Provide cables manufactured for use in duct applications. Cable must be
rated 15 kV with 133 percent insulation level.
2.5.2
Conductor Material
Provide concentric-lay-stranded, Class B compact round conductors. Provide
soft drawn copper cables complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8 for regular
concentric and compressed stranding or ASTM B496 for compact stranding.
2.5.3
Insulation
Provide ethylene-propylene-rubber (EPR) insulation conforming to the
requirements of ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659 and AEIC CS8.
2.5.4
Shielding
Cables rated for 2 kV and above must have a semiconducting conductor
shield, a semiconducting insulation shield, and an overall copper tape
shield for each phase.
2.5.5
Neutrals
Neutral conductors must be copper, employing the same insulation and jacket
materials as phase conductors, except that a 600-volt insulation rating is
acceptable.2.5.6
Jackets
Provide cables with a PVC jacket. Provide PVC jackets with a separator
that prevents contact with underlying semiconducting insulating shield.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 9
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.6
1313775
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS
IEEE 48 Class 1; of the molded elastomer, prestretched elastomer, or
heat-shrinkable elastomer. Acceptable elastomers are track-resistant
silicone rubber or track-resistant ethylene propylene compounds, such as
ethylene propylene rubber or ethylene propylene diene monomer. Separable
insulated connectors may be used for apparatus terminations, when such
apparatus is provided with suitable bushings. Terminations, where required,
must be provided with mounting brackets suitable for the intended
installation and with grounding provisions for the cable shielding,
metallic sheath, or armor. Terminations must be provided in a kit,
including: skirts, stress control terminator, ground clamp, connectors,
lugs, and complete instructions for assembly and installation.
Terminations must be the product of one manufacturer, suitable for the
type, diameter, insulation class and level, and materials of the cable
terminated. Do not use separate parts of copper or copper alloy in contact
with aluminum alloy parts in the construction or installation of the
terminator.
2.6.1
Cold-Shrink Type
Terminator must be a one-piece design, utilizing the manufacturer's latest
technology, where high-dielectric constant (capacitive) stress control is
integrated within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber. Termination
must not require heat or flame for installation. Termination kit must
contain all necessary materials (except for the lugs). Termination must be
designed for installation in low or highly contaminated indoor and outdoor
locations and must resist ultraviolet rays and oxidative decomposition.
2.6.2
Heat Shrinkable Type
Terminator must consist of a uniform cross section heat shrinkable
polymeric construction stress relief tubing and environmentally sealed
outer covering that is nontracking, resists heavy atmospheric contaminants,
ultra violet rays and oxidative decomposition. Provide heat shrinkable
sheds or skirts of the same material. Termination must be designed for
installation in low or highly contaminated indoor or outdoor locations.
2.6.3
Separable Insulated Connector Type
IEEE 386. Provide connector with steel reinforced hook-stick eye,
grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact material. Provide
connectors of the loadbreak or deadbreak type as indicated, of suitable
construction for the application and the type of cable connected, and that
include cable shield adaptors. Provide external clamping points and test
points. Separable connectors must not be used in manholes/handholes.
a.
200 Ampere loadbreak connector ratings: Voltage: 15 kV, 95 kV BIL.
Short time rating: 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
b.
600 Ampere deadbreak connector ratings: Voltage: 15 kV, 95 kV BIL.
Short time rating: 25,000 rms symmetrical amperes. Connectors must
have 200 ampere bushing interface for surge arresters.
2.7
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS
Provide joints (splices) in accordance with IEEE 404 suitable for the rated
voltage, insulation level, insulation type, and construction of the cable.
Joints must be certified by the manufacturer for waterproof, submersible
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 10
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
applications. Upon request, supply manufacturer's design qualification
test report in accordance with IEEE 404. Connectors for joint must be
tin-plated electrolytic copper, having ends tapered and having center stops
to equalize cable insertion.
2.7.1
Heat-Shrinkable Joint
Consists of a uniform cross-section heat-shrinkable polymeric construction
with a linear stress relief system, a high dielectric strength insulating
material, and an integrally bonded outer conductor layer for shielding.
Replace original cable jacket with a heavy-wall heat-shrinkable sleeve with
hot-melt adhesive coating.
2.7.2
Cold-Shrink Rubber-Type Joint
Joint must be of a cold shrink design that does not require any heat source
for its installation. Splice insulation and jacket must be of a one-piece
factory formed cold shrink sleeve made of black EPDM rubber. Splice must
be packaged three splices per kit, including complete installation
instructions.
2.8
2.8.1
TAPE
Insulating Tape
UL 510, plastic insulating tape, capable of performing in a continuous
temperature environment of 80 degrees C.
2.8.2
Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide detectable tape in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20
EXCAVATION AND FILL.
2.8.3
Fireproofing Tape
Provide tape composed of a flexible conformable unsupported intumescent
elastomer. Tape must be not less than .030 inch thick, noncorrosive to
cable sheath, self-extinguishing, noncombustible, and must not deteriorate
when subjected to oil, water, gases, salt water, sewage, and fungus.
2.9
PULL ROPE
Plastic or flat pull line (bull line) having a minimum tensile strength of
200 pounds.
2.10
2.10.1
GROUNDING AND BONDING
Driven Ground Rods
Provide copper-clad steel ground rods conforming to UL 467 not less than
3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length. Sectional type rods may be
used for rods 20 feet or longer.
2.10.2
Grounding Conductors
Stranded-bare copper conductors must conform to ASTM B8, Class B,
soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated. Solid-bare copper conductors must
conform to ASTM B1 for sizes No. 8 and smaller. Insulated conductors must
be of the same material as phase conductors and green color-coded, except
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 11
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
that conductors must be rated no more than 600 volts.
acceptable.
2.11
1313775
Aluminum is not
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Provide concrete in accordance with Section 32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND
CURBS AND GUTTERS. In addition, provide concrete for encasement of
underground ducts with 3000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength.
Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of
underground ducts must be 4000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength
unless specified otherwise.
2.12
UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
Provide precast concrete underground structures or standard type
cast-in-place manhole types as indicated, conforming to ASTM C857 and
ASTM C478. Top, walls, and bottom must consist of reinforced concrete.
Walls and bottom must be of monolithic concrete construction. Locate duct
entrances and windows near the corners of structures to facilitate cable
racking. Covers must fit the frames without undue play. Form steel and
iron to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Castings must be free
from warp and blow holes that may impair strength or appearance. Exposed
metal must have a smooth finish and sharp lines and arises. Provide
necessary lugs, rabbets, and brackets. Set pulling-in irons and other
built-in items in place before depositing concrete. Install a pulling-in
iron in the wall opposite each duct line entrance. Cable racks, including
rack arms and insulators, must be adequate to accommodate the cable.
2.12.1
Cast-In-Place Concrete Structures
Concrete must conform to Section 32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND
GUTTERS. Construct walls on a footing of cast-in-place concrete except
that precast concrete base sections may be used for precast concrete
manhole risers.
2.12.2
Precast Concrete Structures, Risers and Tops
Precast concrete underground structures may be provided in lieu of
cast-in-place subject to the requirements specified below. Precast units
must be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture
of precast concrete products, including precast manholes.
2.12.2.1
General
Precast concrete structures must have the same accessories and facilities
as required for cast-in-place structures. Likewise, precast structures
must have plan area and clear heights not less than those of cast-in-place
structures. Concrete materials and methods of construction must be the
same as for cast-in-place concrete construction, as modified herein. Slope
in floor may be omitted provided precast sections are poured in reinforced
steel forms. Concrete for precast work must have a 28-day compressive
strength of not less than 4000 psi. Structures may be precast to the
design and details indicated for cast-in-place construction, precast
monolithically and placed as a unit, or structures may be assembled
sections, designed and produced by the manufacturer in accordance with the
requirements specified. Structures must be identified with the
manufacturer's name embedded in or otherwise permanently attached to an
interior wall face.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 12
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
2.12.2.2
1313775
Design for Precast Structures
ACI 318M. In the absence of detailed on-site soil information, design for
the following soil parameters/site conditions:
a.
Angle of Internal Friction (phi) =
b.
Unit Weight of Soil (Dry) =
= 130 pcf
c.
Coefficient of Lateral Earth Pressure (Ka) = 0.33
d.
Ground Water Level =
e.
Vertical design loads must include full dead, superimposed dead, and
live loads including a 30 percent magnification factor for impact.
Live loads must consider all types and magnitudes of vehicular
(automotive, industrial, or aircraft) traffic to be encountered. The
minimum design vertical load must be for H20 highway loading per
AASHTO HB-17.
f.
Horizontal design loads must include full geostatic and hydrostatic
pressures for the soil parameters, water table, and depth of
installation to be encountered. Also, horizontal loads imposed by
adjacent structure foundations, and horizontal load components of
vertical design loads, including impact, must be considered, along with
a pulling-in iron design load of 6000 pounds.
g.
Each structural component must be designed for the load combination and
positioning resulting in the maximum shear and moment for
thatparticular component.
h.
Design must also consider the live loads induced in the handling,
installation, and backfilling of the manholes. Provide lifting devices
to ensure structural integrity during handling and installation.
2.12.2.3
30 degrees
110 pcf, (Saturated)
3 feet below ground elevation
Construction
Structure top, bottom, and wall must be of a uniform thickness of not less
than 6 inches. Thin-walled knock-out panels for designed or future duct
bank entrances are not permitted. Provide quantity, size, and location of
duct bank entrance windows as directed, and cast completely open by the
precaster. Size of windows must exceed the nominal duct bank envelope
dimensions by at least 12 inches vertically and horizontally to preclude
in-field window modifications made necessary by duct bank misalignment.
However, the sides of precast windows must be a minimum of 6 inches from
the inside surface of adjacent walls, floors, or ceilings. Form the
perimeter of precast window openings to have a keyed or inward flared
surface to provide a positive interlock with the mating duct bank
envelope. Provide welded wire fabric reinforcing through window openings
for in-field cutting and flaring into duct bank envelopes. Provide
additional reinforcing steel comprised of at least two No. 4 bars around
window openings. Provide drain sumps a minimum of 12 inches in diameter and
4 inches deep for precast structures.
2.12.2.4
Joints
Provide tongue-and-groove joints on mating edges of precast components.
Shiplap joints are not allowed. Design joints to firmly interlock
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 13
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
adjoining components and to provide waterproof junctions and adequate shear
transfer. Seal joints watertight using preformed plastic strip conforming
to ASTM C990. Install sealing material in strict accordance with the
sealant manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide waterproofing at
conduit/duct entrances into structures, and where access frame meets the
top slab, provide continuous grout seal.
2.12.3
Manhole Frames and Covers
Provide cast iron frames and covers for manholes conforming to CID A-A-60005.
Cast the words "ELECTRIC" or "TELECOMMUNICATIONS" in the top face of power
and telecommunications manhole covers, respectively.
2.12.4
Handhole Frames and Covers
Frames and covers of steel must be welded by qualified welders in
accordance with standard commercial practice. Steel covers must be
rolled-steel floor plate having an approved antislip surface. Hinges must
be of wrought steel, 5 by 5 inches by approximately 3/16 inch thick,
without screw holes, and must be for full surface application by fillet
welding. Hinges must have nonremovable pins and five knuckles. The
surfaces of plates under hinges must be true after the removal of raised
antislip surface, by grinding or other approved method.
2.12.5
Brick for Manhole Collar
Provide sewer and manhole brick conforming to ASTM C32, Grade MS.
2.12.6
Composite/Fiberglass Handholes and Covers
Provide handholes and covers of polymer concrete, reinforced with heavy
weave fiberglass conforming to ANSI/SCTE 77.
2.13
CABLE SUPPORTS (RACKS, ARMS, AND INSULATORS)
The metal portion of racks and arms must be zinc-coated after fabrication.
2.13.1
Cable Rack Stanchions
The wall bracket or stanchion must be 4 inches by approximately 1 inch
glass-reinforced nylon with recessed bolt mounting holes, 48 inches long
(minimum) in manholes. Slots for mounting cable rack arms must be spaced at
8 inch intervals.
2.13.2
Rack Arms
Cable rack arms must be glass reinforced nylon and must be of the removable
type. Rack arm length must be a minimum of 8 inches and a maximum of 12
inches.
2.13.3
Insulators
Insulators for metal rack arms must be dry-process glazed porcelain.
Insulators are not required for nylon arms.
2.14
CABLE TAGS IN MANHOLES
Provide tags for each power cable located in manholes. The tags must be
polyethylene. Do not provide handwritten letters. The first position on
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 14
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
the power cable tag must denote the voltage. The second through sixth
positions on the tag must identify the circuit. The next to last position
must denote the phase of the circuit and include the Greek "phi" symbol.
The last position must denote the cable size. As an example, a tag could
have the following designation: "11.5 NAS 1-8(Phase A)500," denoting that
the tagged cable is on the 11.5kV system circuit number NAS 1-8,
underground, Phase A, sized at 500 kcmil.
2.14.1
Polyethylene Cable Tags
Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 3250
pounds per square inch; and that are 0.08 inch thick (minimum),
non-corrosive non-conductive; resistive to acids, alkalis, organic
solvents, and salt water; and distortion resistant to 170 degrees F.
Provide 0.05 inch (minimum) thick black polyethylene tag holder. Provide a
one-piece nylon, self-locking tie at each end of the cable tag. Ties must
have a minimum loop tensile strength of 175 pounds. The cable tags must
have black block letters, numbers, and symbols one inch high on a yellow
background. Letters, numbers, and symbols must not fall off or change
positions regardless of the cable tags' orientation.
2.15
2.15.1
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Arc-Proofing Test for Cable Fireproofing Tape
Manufacturer must test one sample assembly consisting of a straight lead
tube 12 inches long with a 2 1/2 inch outside diameter, and a 1/8 inch
thick wall, and covered with one-half lap layer of arc and fireproofing
tape per manufacturer's instructions. The arc and fireproofing tape must
withstand extreme temperature of a high-current fault arc 13,000 degrees K
for 70 cycles as determined by using an argon directed plasma jet capable
of constantly producing and maintaining an arc temperature of 13,000
degrees K. Temperature (13,000 degrees K) of the ignited arc between the
cathode and anode must be obtained from a dc power source of 305 (plus or
minus 5) amperes and 20 (plus or minus 1) volts. The arc must be directed
toward the sample assembly accurately positioned 5 (plus or minus 1)
millimeters downstream in the plasma from the anode orifice by fixed flow
rate of argon gas (0.18 g per second). Each sample assembly must be tested
at three unrelated points. Start time for tests must be taken from
recorded peak current when the specimen is exposed to the full test
temperature. Surface heat on the specimen prior to that time must be
minimal. The end point is established when the plasma or conductive arc
penetrates the protective tape and strikes the lead tube. Submittals for
arc-proofing tape must indicate that the test has been performed and passed
by the manufacturer.
2.15.2
Medium Voltage Cable Qualification and Production Tests
Results of AEIC CS8 qualification and production tests as applicable for
each type of medium voltage cable.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Install equipment and devices in accordance with the manufacturer's
published instructions and with the requirements and recommendations of
NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable. In addition to these requirements,
install telecommunications in accordance with TIA-758 and RUS Bull 1751F-644.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 15
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.2
1313775
CABLE INSPECTION
Inspect each cable reel for correct storage positions, signs of physical
damage, and broken end seals prior to installation. If end seal is broken,
remove moisture from cable prior to installation in accordance with the
cable manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3
CABLE INSTALLATION PLAN AND PROCEDURE
Obtain from the manufacturer an installation manual or set of instructions
which addresses such aspects as cable construction, insulation type, cable
diameter, bending radius, cable temperature limits for installation,
lubricants, coefficient of friction, conduit cleaning, storage procedures,
moisture seals, testing for and purging moisture, maximum allowable pulling
tension, and maximum allowable sidewall bearing pressure. Perform pulling
calculations and prepare a pulling plan and submit along with the
manufacturer's instructions in accordance with SUBMITTALS. Install cable
strictly in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations and
the approved installation plan.
Calculations and pulling plan must include:
a.
Site layout drawing with cable pulls identified in numeric order of
expected pulling sequence and direction of cable pull.
b.
List of cable installation equipment.
c.
Lubricant manufacturer's application instructions.
d.
Procedure for resealing cable ends to prevent moisture from entering
cable.
e.
Cable pulling tension calculations of all cable pulls.
f.
Cable percentage conduit fill.
g.
Cable sidewall bearing pressure.
h.
Cable minimum bend radius and minimum diameter of pulling wheels used.
i.
Cable jam ratio.
j.
Maximum allowable pulling tension on each different type and size of
conductor.
k.
Maximum allowable pulling tension on pulling device.
3.4
UNDERGROUND STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION
Provide standard type cast-in-place construction as specified herein and as
indicated, or precast construction as specified herein. Horizontal
concrete surfaces of floors must have a smooth trowel finish. Cure
concrete by applying two coats of white pigmented membrane forming-curing
compound in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions,
except that precast concrete may be steam cured. Curing compound must
conform to ASTM C309. Locate duct entrances and windows in the center of
end walls (shorter) and near the corners of sidewalls (longer) to
facilitate cable racking and splicing. Covers for underground structures
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 16
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
must fit the frames without undue play. Steel and iron must be formed to
shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Castings must be free from
warp and blow holes that may impair strength or appearance. Exposed metal
must have a smooth finish and sharp lines and arises. Provide necessary
lugs, rabbets, and brackets. Set pulling-in irons and other built-in items
in place before depositing concrete. Manhole locations, as indicated, are
approximate. Coordinate exact manhole locations with other utilities and
finished grading and paving.
3.4.1
Cast-In-Place Concrete Structures
Construct walls on a footing of cast-in-place concrete except that precast
concrete base sections may be used for precast concrete manhole risers.
3.4.2
Precast Concrete Construction
Set commercial precast structures on 6 inches of level, 90 percent
compacted granular fill, 3/4 inch to 1 inch size, extending 12 inches
beyond the structure on each side. Compact granular fill by a minimum of
four passes with a plate type vibrator. Installation must additionally
conform to the manufacturer's instructions.
3.4.3
Pulling-In Irons
Provide steel bars bent as indicated, and cast in the walls and floors.
Alternatively, pipe sleeves may be precast into the walls and floors where
required to accept U-bolts or other types of pulling-in devices possessing
the strengths and clearances stated herein. The final installation of
pulling-in devices must be made permanent. Cover and seal exterior
projections of thru-wall type pulling-in devices with an appropriate
protective coating. In the floor the irons must be a minimum of 6 inches
from the edge of the sump, and in the walls the irons must be located within
6 inches of the projected center of the duct bank pattern or precast
window in the opposite wall. However, the pulling-in iron must not be
located within 6 inches of an adjacent interior surface, or duct or precast
window located within the same wall as the iron. If a pulling-in iron
cannot be located directly opposite the corresponding duct bank or precast
window due to this clearance limitation, locate the iron directly above or
below the projected center of the duct bank pattern or precast window the
minimum distance required to preserve the 6 inch clearance previously
stated. In the case of directly opposing precast windows, pulling-in irons
consisting of a 3 foot length of No. 5 reinforcing bar, formed into a
hairpin, may be cast-in-place within the precast windows simultaneously
with the end of the corresponding duct bank envelope. Irons installed in
this manner must be positioned directly in line with, or when not possible,
directly above or below the projected center of the duct bank pattern
entering the opposite wall, while maintaining a minimum clear distance of 3
inches from any edge of the cast-in-place duct bank envelope or any
individual duct. Pulling-in irons must have a clear projection into the
structure of approximately 4 inches and must be designed to withstand a
minimum pulling-in load of 6000 pounds. Irons must be hot-dipped
galvanized after fabrication.
3.4.4
Cable Racks, Arms and Insulators
Cable racks, arms and insulators must be sufficient to accommodate the
cables. Space racks in power manholes not more than 3 feet apart, and
provide each manhole wall with a minimum of two racks. Space racks in
signal manholes not more than 16 1/2 inches apart with the end rack being
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 17
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
no further than 12 inches from the adjacent wall.
cable racks must be as follows:
1313775
Methods of anchoring
a.
Provide a 5/8 inch diameter by 5 inch long anchor bolt with 3 inch foot
cast in structure wall with 2 inch protrusion of threaded portion of
bolt into structure. Provide 5/8 inch steel square head nut on each
anchor bolt. Coat threads of anchor bolts with suitable coating
immediately prior to installing nuts.
b.
Provide concrete channel insert with a minimum load rating of 800
pounds per foot. Insert channel must be steel of the same length as
"vertical rack channel;" channel insert must be cast flush in structure
wall. Provide 5/8 inch steel nuts in channel insert to receive 5/8
inch diameter by 3 inch long steel, square head anchor bolts.
c.
Provide concrete "spot insert" at each anchor bolt location, cast flush
in structure wall. Each insert must have minimum 800 pound load
rating. Provide 5/8 inch diameter by 3 inch long steel, square head
anchor bolt at each anchor point. Coat threads of anchor bolts with
suitable coating immediately prior to installing bolts.
3.4.5
Field Painting
Cast-iron frames and covers not buried in concrete or masonry must be
cleaned of mortar, rust, grease, dirt and other deleterious materials, and
given a coat of bituminous paint.
3.5
3.5.1
UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND DUCT SYSTEMS
Requirements
Run conduit in straight lines except where a change of direction is
necessary. Provide numbers and sizes of ducts as indicated. Ducts must
have a continuous slope downward toward underground structures and away
from buildings, laid with a minimum slope of 3 inches per 100 feet.
Depending on the contour of the finished grade, the high-point may be at a
terminal, a manhole, a handhole, or between manholes or handholes.
Short-radius manufactured 90-degree duct bends may be used only for pole or
equipment risers, unless specifically indicated as acceptable. The minimum
manufactured bend radius must be 18 inches for ducts of less than 3 inch
diameter, and 36 inches for ducts 3 inches or greater in diameter.
Otherwise, long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet must be used
for a change of direction of more than 5 degrees, either horizontally or
vertically. Both curved and straight sections may be used to form long
sweep bends, but the maximum curve used must be 30 degrees and manufactured
bends must be used. Provide ducts with end bells whenever duct lines
terminate in structures.
3.5.2
Treatment
Ducts must be kept clean of concrete, dirt, or foreign substances during
construction. Field cuts requiring tapers must be made with proper tools
and match factory tapers. A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer
must be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different
material or shape. Ducts must be stored to avoid warping and deterioration
with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water or solid
substances. Ducts must be thoroughly cleaned before being laid. Plastic
ducts must be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays
of the sun.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 18
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.5.3
1313775
Conduit Cleaning
As each conduit run is completed, for conduit sizes 3 inches and larger,
draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 12 inches long with a
diameter less than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit.
After which, draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of
particles of earth, sand and gravel; then immediately install conduit
plugs. For conduit sizes less than 3 inches, draw a stiff bristle brush
through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel; then
immediately install conduit plugs.
3.5.4
Jacking and Drilling Under Roads and Structures
Conduits to be installed under existing paved areas which are not to be
disturbed, and under roads and railroad tracks, must be zinc-coated, rigid
steel, jacked into place. Where ducts are jacked under existing pavement,
rigid steel conduit must be installed because of its strength. To protect
the corrosion-resistant conduit coating, predrilling or installing conduit
inside a larger iron pipe sleeve (jack-and-sleeve) is required. For
crossings of existing railroads and airfield pavements greater than 50 feet
in length, the predrilling method or the jack-and-sleeve method will be
used. Separators or spacing blocks must be made of steel, concrete,
plastic, or a combination of these materials placed not farther apart than
4 feet on centers.
3.5.5
Multiple Conduits
Separate multiple conduits by a minimum distance of 3 inches, except that
light and power conduits must be separated from control, signal, and
telephone conduits by a minimum distance of 12 inches. Stagger the joints
of the conduits by rows (horizontally) and layers (vertically) to
strengthen the conduit assembly. Provide plastic duct spacers that
interlock vertically and horizontally. Spacer assembly must consist of
base spacers, intermediate spacers, ties, and locking device on top to
provide a completely enclosed and locked-in conduit assembly. Install
spacers per manufacturer's instructions, but provide a minimum of two
spacer assemblies per 10 feet of conduit assembly.
3.5.6
Conduit Plugs and Pull Rope
New conduit indicated as being unused or empty must be provided with plugs
on each end. Plugs must contain a weephole or screen to allow water
drainage. Provide a plastic pull rope having 3 feet of slack at each end
of unused or empty conduits.
3.5.7
Conduit and Duct Without Concrete Encasement
Depths to top of the conduit must be not less than 24 inches below finished
grade. Provide not less than 3 inches clearance from the conduit to each
side of the trench. Grade bottom of trench smooth; where rock, soft spots,
or sharp-edged materials are encountered, excavate the bottom for an
additional 3 inches, fill and tamp level with original bottom with sand or
earth free from particles, that would be retained on a 1/4 inch sieve. The
first 6 inch layer of backfill cover must be sand compacted as previously
specified. The rest of the excavation must be backfilled and compacted in
3 to 6 inch layers. Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as
specified in Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 19
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.5.7.1
1313775
Encasement Under Roads and Structures
Under roads, paved areas, and railroad tracks, install conduits in concrete
encasement of rectangular cross-section providing a minimum of 3 inch
concrete cover around ducts. Concrete encasement must extend at least 5
feet beyond the edges of paved areas and roads, and 12 feet beyond the
rails on each side of railroad tracks. Depths to top of the concrete
envelope must be not less than 24 inches below finished grade.
3.5.8
Duct Encased in Concrete
Construct underground duct lines of individual conduits encased in
concrete. Depths to top of the concrete envelope must be not less than 18
inches below finished grade, except under roads and pavement, concrete
envelope must be not less than 24 inches below finished grade. Do not mix
different kinds of conduit in any one duct bank.
Concrete encasement
surrounding the bank must be rectangular in cross-section and must provide
at least 3 inches of concrete cover for ducts. Separate conduits by a
minimum concrete thickness of 3 inches. Before pouring concrete, anchor
duct bank assemblies to prevent the assemblies from floating during
concrete pouring. Anchoring must be done by driving reinforcing rods
adjacent to duct spacer assemblies and attaching the rods to the spacer
assembly. Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as specified in
Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3.5.8.1
Connections to Manholes
Duct bank envelopes connecting to underground structures must be flared to
have enlarged cross-section at the manhole entrance to provide additional
shear strength. Dimensions of the flared cross-section must be larger than
the corresponding manhole opening dimensions by no less than 12 inches in
each direction. Perimeter of the duct bank opening in the underground
structure must be flared toward the inside or keyed to provide a positive
interlock between the duct bank and the wall of the structure. Use
vibrators when this portion of the encasement is poured to assure a seal
between the envelope and the wall of the structure.
3.5.8.2
Connections to Existing Underground Structures
For duct bank connections to existing structures, break the structure wall
out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in the structure wall.
Cut steel and bend out to tie into the reinforcing of the duct bank
envelope. Chip the perimeter surface of the duct bank opening to form a
key or flared surface, providing a positive connection with the duct bank
envelope.
3.5.8.3
Connections to Existing Concrete Pads
For duct bank connections to concrete pads, break an opening in the pad out
to the dimensions required and preserve steel in pad. Cut the steel and
bend out to tie into the reinforcing of the duct bank envelope. Chip out
the opening in the pad to form a key for the duct bank envelope.
3.5.8.4
Partially Completed Duct Banks
During construction wherever a construction joint is necessary in a duct
bank, prevent debris such as mud, and, and dirt from entering ducts by
providing suitable conduit plugs. Fit concrete envelope of a partially
completed duct bank with reinforcing steel extending a minimum of 2 feet
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 20
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
back into the envelope and a minimum of 2 feet beyond the end of the
envelope. Provide one No. 4 bar in each corner, 3 inches from the edge of
the envelope. Secure corner bars with two No. 3 ties, spaced approximately
one footapart. Restrain reinforcing assembly from moving during concrete
pouring.
3.6
CABLE PULLING
Test existing duct lines with a mandrel and thoroughly swab out to remove
foreign material before pulling cables. Pull cables down grade with the
feed-in point at the manhole or buildings of the highest elevation. Use
flexible cable feeds to convey cables through manhole opening and into duct
runs. Do not exceed the specified cable bending radii when installing
cable under any conditions, including turnups into switches, transformers,
switchgear, switchboards, and other enclosures. Cable with tape shield
must have a bending radius not less than 12 times the overall diameter of
the completed cable. If basket-grip type cable-pulling devices are used to
pull cable in place, cut off the section of cable under the grip before
splicing and terminating.
3.6.1
Cable Lubricants
Use lubricants that are specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer
for assisting in pulling jacketed cables.
3.7
CABLES IN UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
Do not install cables utilizing the shortest path between penetrations, but
route along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare
cable lengths. Form cables to closely parallel walls, not to interfere with
duct entrances, and support on brackets and cable insulators. Support
cable splices in underground structures by racks on each side of the
splice. Locate splices to prevent cyclic bending in the spliced sheath.
Install cables at middle and bottom of cable racks, leaving top space open
for future cables, except as otherwise indicated for existing
installations. Provide one spare three-insulator rack arm for each cable
rack in each underground structure.
3.7.1
Cable Tag Installation
Install cable tags in each manhole as specified, including each splice.
Tag wire and cable provided by this contract. Install cable tags over the
fireproofing, if any, and locate the tags so that they are clearly visible
without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes.
3.8
CONDUCTORS INSTALLED IN PARALLEL
Conductors must be grouped such that each conduit of a parallel run
contains 1 Phase A conductor, 1 Phase B conductor, 1 Phase C conductor, and
1 neutral conductor.
3.9
LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SPLICING AND TERMINATING
Make terminations and splices with materials and methods as indicated or
specified herein and as designated by the written instructions of the
manufacturer. Do not allow the cables to be moved until after the splicing
material has completely set. Make splices in underground distribution
systems only in accessible locations such as manholes or, handholes.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 21
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.10
1313775
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS
Make terminations in accordance with the written instruction of the
termination kit manufacturer.
3.11
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS
Provide power cable joints (splices) suitable for continuous immersion in
water. Make joints only in accessible locations in manholes or handholes
by using materials and methods in accordance with the written instructions
of the joint kit manufacturer.
3.11.1
Joints in Shielded Cables
Cover the joined area with metallic tape, or material like the original
cable shield and connect it to the cable shield on each side of the
splice. Provide a bare copper ground connection brought out in a
watertight manner and grounded to the manhole grounding loop as part of the
splice installation. Ground conductors, connections, and rods must be as
specified elsewhere in this section. Wire must be trained to the sides of
the enclosure to prevent interference with the working area.
3.12
CABLE END CAPS
Cable ends must be sealed at all times with coated heat shrinkable end
caps. Cables ends must be sealed when the cable is delivered to the job
site, while the cable is stored and during installation of the cable. The
caps must remain in place until the cable is spliced or terminated.
Sealing compounds and tape are not acceptable substitutes for heat
shrinkable end caps. Cable which is not sealed in the specified manner at
all times will be rejected.
3.13
FIREPROOFING OF CABLES IN UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
Fireproof (arc proof) wire and cables which will carry current at 2200
volts or more in underground structures.
3.13.1
Fireproofing Tape
Tightly wrap strips of fireproofing tape around each cable spirally in
half-lapped wrapping. Install tape in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.13.2
Tape-Wrap
Tape-wrap metallic-sheathed or metallic armored cables without a
nonmetallic protective covering over the sheath or armor prior to
application of fireproofing. Wrap must be in the form of two tightly
applied half-lapped layers of a pressure-sensitive 10 mil thick plastic
tape, and must extend not less than one inch into the duct. Even out
irregularities of the cable, such as at splices, with insulation putty
before applying tape.
3.14
GROUNDING SYSTEMS
NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except provide grounding systems with a resistance to
solid earth ground not exceeding 25 ohms.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 22
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.14.1
1313775
Grounding Electrodes
Provide cone pointed driven ground rods driven full depth plus 6 inches,
installed to provide an earth ground of the appropriate value for the
particular equipment being grounded.
If the specified ground resistance is not met, an additional ground rod
must be provided in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 (placed not
less than 6 feet from the first rod). Should the resultant (combined)
resistance exceed the specified resistance, measured not less than 48 hours
after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer immediately.
3.14.2
Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally
inaccessible, by exothermic weld or compression connector.
a.
Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld
manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or
which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not
acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.
b.
Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to
provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies must be
as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other
standard method must provide visible indication that a connector has
been adequately compressed on the ground wire.
3.14.3
Grounding Conductors
Provide bare grounding conductors, except where installed in conduit with
associated phase conductors. Ground cable sheaths, cable shields, conduit,
and equipment with No. 6 AWG. Ground other noncurrent-carrying metal parts
and equipment frames of metal-enclosed equipment. Ground metallic frames
and covers of handholes and pull boxes with a braided, copper ground strap
with equivalent ampacity of No. 6 AWG.
3.14.4
Ground Cable Crossing Expansion Joints
Protect ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in
structures and pavements by use of approved devices or methods of
installation which provide the necessary slack in the cable across the
joint to permit movement. Use stranded or other approved flexible copper
cable across such separations.
3.14.5
Manhole Grounding
Loop a 4/0 AWG grounding conductor around the interior perimeter,
approximately 12 inches above finished floor. Secure the conductor to the
manhole walls at intervals not exceeding 36 inches. Connect the conductor
to the manhole grounding electrode with 4/0 AWG conductor. Connect all
incoming 4/0 grounding conductors to the ground loop adjacent to the point
of entry into the manhole. Bond the ground loop to all cable shields,
metal cable racks, and other metal equipment with a minimum 6 AWG conductor.
3.14.6
Fence Grounding
Provide grounding for fences as indicated.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 23
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
3.15
1313775
EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION
AND FILL.
3.15.1
Reconditioning of Surfaces
3.15.1.1
Unpaved Surfaces
Restore to their original elevation and condition unpaved surfaces
disturbed during installation of duct. Preserve sod and topsoil removed
during excavation and reinstall after backfilling is completed. Replace
sod that is damaged by sod of quality equal to that removed. When the
surface is disturbed in a newly seeded area, re-seed the restored surface
with the same quantity and formula of seed as that used in the original
seeding, and provide topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding,
sprigging, or mulching.
3.15.1.2
Paving Repairs
Where trenches, pits, or other excavations are made in existing roadways
and other areas of pavement where surface treatment of any kind exists.
Make repairs as specified in Section 32 12 17 HOT MIX BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT.
3.16
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Provide concrete in accordance with Section 32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND
CURBS AND GUTTERS.
3.16.1
Concrete Slabs for Equipment
Unless otherwise indicated, the slab must be at least 8 inches thick,
reinforced with a 6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9 mesh, placed uniformly 4 inches
from the top of the slab. Slab must be placed on a 6 inch thick,
well-compacted gravel base. Top of concrete slab must be approximately 4
inches above finished grade with gradual slope for drainage. Edges above
grade must have 1/2 inch chamfer. Slab must be of adequate size to project
at least 8 inches beyond the equipment.
Stub up conduits, with bushings, 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete
pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training
areas.
3.17
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.17.1
Performance of Field Acceptance Checks and Tests
Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and include
the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests,
performed in accordance with NETA ATS.
3.17.1.1
Medium Voltage Cables
Perform tests after installation of cable, splices, and terminators and
before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits.
a.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection
(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 24
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with
contract plans and specifications.
(3) Inspect for proper shield grounding, cable support, and cable
termination.
(4) Verify that cable bends are not less than ICEA or manufacturer's
minimum allowable bending radius.
(5) Inspect for proper fireproofing.
(6) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition.
(7) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.
b.
Electrical Tests
(1) Perform a shield continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter
method. Record ohmic value, resistance values in excess of 10
ohms per 1000 feet of cable must be investigated and justified.
(2) Perform acceptance test on new cables before the new cables are
connected to existing cables and placed into service, including
terminations and joints. Perform maintenance test on complete
cable system after the new cables are connected to existing cables
and placed into service, including existing cable, terminations,
and joints. Tests must be very low frequency (VLF) alternating
voltage withstand tests in accordance with IEEE 400.2. VLF test
frequency must be 0.05 Hz minimum for a duration of 60 minutes
using a sinusoidal waveform. Test voltages must be as follows:
CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGE
for ACCEPTANCE TESTING
5 kV
10kV rms(peak)
8 kV
13kV rms(peak)
15 kV
20kV rms(peak)
25 kV
31kV rms(peak)
35 kV
44kV rms(peak)
CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGE
for MAINTENANCE TESTING
5 kV
7kV rms(peak)
8 kV
10kV rms(peak)
15 kV
16kV rms(peak)
25 kV
23kV rms(peak)
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 25
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGE
for MAINTENANCE TESTING
35 kV
33kV rms(peak)
3.17.1.2
Low Voltage Cables, 600-Volt
Perform tests after installation of cable, splices and terminations and
before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits.
a.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection
(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.
(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with
contract plans and specifications.
(3) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections.
(4) Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and
indentation.
(5) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition.
(6) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.
b.
Electrical Tests
(1) Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6 AWG and larger
diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately
1000 volts dc for one minute.
(2) Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection.
3.17.1.3
a.
Grounding System
Visual and mechanical inspection
Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications
b.
Electrical tests
Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential
method in accordance with IEEE 81. On systems consisting of
interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are
complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests
before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry
weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable
megohmmeter tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument must be equipped
with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate
the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.
3.17.2
Follow-Up Verification
Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, show by demonstration in
service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 26
I564 CEP113 AND CEP10 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING IMPROVEMENTS
1313775
properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements
stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer must be given 5
working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 33 71 02
Page 27
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising